User Manual - Surveying Technologies and Services Co.

Leica Viva Series
Technical Reference
Manual
Version 5.5
English
Introduction
Purchase

Symbols
Congratulations on the purchase of a Leica SmartWorx Viva instrument.
To use the product in a permitted manner, please refer to the detailed safety directions in the CS10/CS15 User Manual, the GS10/GS15 User Manual, the GS25 User
Manual, the TS11 User Manual, the TS15 User Manual, the Leica TS12 Robotic User
Manual and the Leica MS50/TS50/TM50 User Manual.
The symbols used in this manual have the following meanings:
Type

Trademarks
Description
Important paragraphs which must be adhered to in practice as they
enable the product to be used in a technically correct and efficient
manner.
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries
• CompactFlash and CF are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation
• Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
• SD Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Validity of this
manual
Available
documentation
• This manual applies to SmartWorx Viva. For the Lite version of SmartWorx Viva,
some functionality described in this manual is not available.
• This manual applies to the Leica Viva Series. Differences between GPS and TPS are
marked and described.
Name
Description/Format
CS10/CS15 User
Manual
All instructions required to operate the product to a basic level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview of the product together with technical data and
safety directions.

GS10/GS15 User
Manual
All instructions required to operate the product to a basic level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview of the product together with technical data and
safety directions.

TS11 User Manual All instructions required to operate the product to a basic level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview of the product together with technical data and
safety directions.

GS25User Manual All instructions required to operate the product to a basic level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview of the product together with technical data and
safety directions.

TS15 User Manual All instructions required to operate the product to a basic level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview of the product together with technical data and
safety directions.

TS12 Robotic
User Manual

Viva Series, Introduction
All instructions required to operate the product to a basic level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview of the product together with technical data and
safety directions.
2
Name
Description/Format
TS12 Lite User
Manual
All instructions required to operate the product to a basic level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview of the product together with technical data and
safety directions.
Name
Description/Format
Viva Series Tech- Overall comprehensive guide to the product and applica- nical Reference
tion functions. Included are detailed descriptions of
Manual
special software/hardware settings and software/hardware functions intended for technical specialists.


Refer to the following resources for all Leica Viva Series documentation/software:
• the SmartWorx Viva USB documentation card
• https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com
Viva Series, Introduction
3
1
Configurable Keys
1.1
Hot Keys

Hot keys are found on the TS and on the CS15 model only. The CS10 model does not
have any hotkeys.
Description
Two levels of hot keys exist:
• The first level is the keys F7, F8, ..., F12 and F13, the user definable Smartkey.
• The second level is the combination of Fn and F7, F8, ..., F12.
Functionality
Hot keys provide a shortcut for quickly and directly carrying out functions or starting
applications assigned to the keys. The assignment of functions and applications to hot
keys is user configurable.
Use
• The first level is accessed by pressing F7, F8, ..., F12 or F13, the user definable
Smartkey, directly.
• The second level is accessed by pressing Fn first followed by F7, F8, ... F12.
• Hot keys can be pressed at any time. It is possible that a function or application
assigned to a hot key cannot be executed in certain situations.
Define hot key
step-by-step
This step-by-step description shows how to assign the Coding & linework settings
screen to the F7 key and to the first line of the My GPS Favourites or My TPS Favourites menu.
Step
Description
1.
Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\Hot keys & favourites.
2.
Hot Keys & Favourites
For hot keys/Fn hot keys select F7: User - Coding & linework settings.
For favourites select 1: User - Coding & linework settings.
3.
OK
4.
OK
5.
Press F7 to access Coding & linework settings.
OR
Press the favourites key
settings.
Press Fn, the favourites key
settings.
User definable
Smartkey
and 1 to access Coding & linework
and 1 to access Coding & linework
The user definable Smartkey is located next to the right hand fine drives. It enables
fast and comfortable recording of measurements. Being equipped with a soft touch
key located in the instruments turning axis allows highest precision measurements. All
functions and application programs that can be assigned to the hot keys can be assign
to the user definable Smartkey including <None>.
Viva Series, Configurable Keys
4
1.2
Favourites Key
Description

• Fn
• The
opens the My GPS Favourites menu.
key alone opens the Leica GPS Favourites menu.
• Fn
• The
opens the My TPS Favourites menu.
key alone opens Leica TPS Favourites.
The following chapter is about the My GPS Favourites and My TPS Favourites menus
only. Refer to Leica TPS Favourites for more information about Leica TPS Favourites.
Functionality of the
favourites menu
The My GPS Favourites and My TPS Favourites menus can be configured to contain
the most used functions or applications. The favourites menu cannot be accessed
while in a configuration screen.
Selecting an option in the menu carries out the function or starts the application
assigned to the option.
My favourites menu
The following screen is an example of what a My GPS Favourites or My TPS Favourites menu can look like. The softkeys and their order is fixed. The functions and applications which are assigned to the individual places in the menu can differ depending
on the configuration.
Define favourites
menu step-by-step
Key
Description
OK
To execute the selected function.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Defining the favourites menu is the same process as for defining the hot keys. Refer
to "1.1 Hot Keys".
Viva Series, Configurable Keys
5
2
TPS Settings
2.1
Leica TPS Favourites
Description
Frequently used settings can be accessed and changed quickly. The change is applied
immediately. The workflow is not interrupted.
This screen displays the possible settings to change to.

Changes made on this screen are stored in the active working style.
Access
Tap the target aiming icon or select
Leica TPS Favourites
The appearance of the screen changes, depending on whether the instrument is
equipped with motorisation, ATR, reflectorless EDM or PowerSearch.
To change to the displayed setting do one of the following:
• Tap on the icon on the touch screen.
• Highlight a field and press
.
• Highlight a field and press
OK
.
.
• Highlight a field and press OK.
• Press the number next to the function.
Key
Description
OK
To apply the selected setting, or to access the selected function.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, TPS Settings
6
Description of options
Icon
Description
Measure any
surface
To measure to any surface (reflectorless). Automatically sets
Target aiming: Manual.
Measure to prism
To measure to prisms.
Continuous meas
on
To set the measure mode to continuous.
Continuous meas
off
To set the measure mode to the previous non-continuous mode.
Change face
To change the face of the telescope.
PowerSearch right Prisms are searched for with PowerSearch in the PS window
when this icon is used.

If this icon is selected and reflectorless measurements is
still set, then this setting is changed to measurements to
prisms.
PowerSearch left
To start PowerSearch right in anti-clockwise direction.
Red laser on
To turn the red laser of the reflectorless EDM on.
Red laser off
To turn the red laser of the reflectorless EDM off.
Auto aiming
To set Target aiming: Automatic.
Manual aiming
To set Target aiming: Manual.
Target lock on
To set Target aiming: Lock.
Target lock off
To set Target aiming to the previous non-lock setting.
Joystick
To turn the instrument using the arrow keys. Refer to Joystick.
Turn to Hz/V
To turn the instrument to a specific entered position. Refer to
Turn Instrument to Hz/V.
Check point
To check a point or the instrument orientation. Refer to Check
Point.
Compass
To turn the instrument using compass readings. Refer to Orientation With Compass.
Bluetooth connec- To define Bluetooth connections.
tion
Camera
To begin the camera function of the CS field controller. Refer to
"2.6 Using the Digital Camera".
Panoramic image
To generate a panoramic image. Refer to "34.3.5 Panoramic
Imaging".

Sketch pad
Panoramic images can only be generated with motorized
instruments with overview camera.
To create a sketch on a virtual piece of paper. Refer to "34.5.2
Field Sketching".
Start Active Assist To connect to the Active Assist service.
End Active Assist
Viva Series, TPS Settings
To disconnect from the Active Assist service.
7
2.2
Check Point
Description
This screen is used to check if a measured point is identical to a point already stored
in the job, or if the instrument’s orientation to a backsight point is still correct.
Access
In Leica TPS Favourites click Check point.
Check Point
Key
Description
Dist
To measure a distance.
Store
To store the point and return to Main Menu.
Positn
To position to the selected point.
For Target aiming: Automatic the instrument does an ATR search.
For Target aiming: Lock the instrument tries to lock on to a prism.
More
To display additional information.
Last
To recall the point ID of the last checked point.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Point ID
Selectable list
Point ID to be checked.
If a stored point was checked, the point ID for
that point is remembered and recalled when Last
is pressed.
Target height
Editable field
The last used prism height is suggested. An individual prism height can be typed in.
Target
Selectable list
Target names as configured in the Targets
screen.
∆ azimuth
Display only
Difference between calculated azimuth and
current orientation.
∆ hz dist
Display only
Difference between calculated and current
distance.
∆ height
Display only
Difference between calculated and current
height.
Current
azimuth
Display only
Current orientation.
Horiz distance Display only
Viva Series, TPS Settings
Current distance between station and backsight
point.
8
Field
Option
Description
Height difference
Display only
Current height difference between station and
backsight point.
Calc'd azimuth Display only
Calculated azimuth between station and backsight point.
Display only
Calculated horizontal distance between station
and backsight point.
Calc'd hz dist
Calc'd ∆height Display only
Viva Series, TPS Settings
Calculated height difference between station and
backsight point.
9
2.3
Joystick
Description
The instrument can be turned using the keyboard arrow keys on the instrument or
field controller, or the arrow keys displayed on the touch screen.
When this screen is accessed, the EGL is turned on automatically. When leaving the
screen, the EGL is turned off.
Access
In Leica TPS Favourites click Joystick.
Move by Joystick
Use the arrow keys to start the telescope movement.
Press an arrow key again to speed up the movement. Press any of the other arrow
keys while the instrument turns to stop the movement.
Press OK to stop the instrument movement.
Key
Description
OK
To return to Main Menu.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Speed
-----, Very
slow, Slow,
Medium and
Fast
Displays the rotating speed of the instrument.
Press the same arrow key to change the speed.
Viva Series, TPS Settings
10
2.4
Turn Instrument to Hz/V
Description
This screen is used when the instrument is remote controlled and the telescope is to
be turned to a certain direction.
Access
In Leica TPS Favourites click Turn to Hz/V.
Turn Instrument to
Hz/V,
Absolute page
Key
OK
Page
Fn Quit
Description
To return to Main Menu. The instrument turns to the prism.
To change to another page on this screen.
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Azimuth
Option
Editable field
Angle right
Editable field
V angle
Editable field
Description
Oriented horizontal direction for the instrument
to turn to.
Displays the horizontal angle difference between
the backsight point and the current telescope
position.
Vertical direction for the instrument to turn to.
Next step
Page changes to the Relative page.
Turn Instrument to
Hz/V,
Relative page
The values are added to the current telescope position to calculate the new direction
for the telescope to turn to.
Description of fields
Field
∆Hz
Option
Editable field
∆V
Editable field
Description
Angular difference for the horizontal angle to
turn to.
Angular difference for the vertical angle to turn
to.
Next step
Press OK. The instrument turns to the prism.
For Target aiming: Automatic an ATR measurement is performed. If no prism was
found, the instrument turns to the position typed in.
For Target aiming: Lock the instrument locks on the prism and the LOCK icon is
displayed. If no prism was found, the instrument turns to the position typed in.
Viva Series, TPS Settings
11
2.5
Orientation With Compass
Description
Using a conventional magnetic compass while remotely controlling the instrument, it
is possible to determine the direction towards which the instrument should turn to
perform a target search to locate the prism.
Access
In Leica TPS Favourites press Comps.

The instrument must be connected to a radio to be remote controlled with the field
controller.
Orientation with
compass step-bystep
Step
Description
1.
Set up the instrument.
2.
Start the Survey application.
3.
Turn the telescope until Hz: 0.0000.
4.
Look through the telescope with Hz: 0.0000 to select an object which is
easily recognisable.
5.
Standing at the instrument, point the compass to the selected object. Turn
the rotating dial until the "N" lines up with the north end of the compass
needle.
The compass dial must not be turned once the "N" is lined up with
the north end of the compass needle.

6.
Go to the prism. From the prism aim the "N" of the compass towards the
instrument. Read the horizontal angle as pointed to by the north end of the
compass needle.
7.
In Leica TPS Favourites click on the Compass icon.
8.
Orientation With Compass
Compass reading: The horizontal angle read from the compass while aiming
to the instrument.
V angle: If the compass works as a clinometer, those values can also be used.

9.
The horizontal and vertical angle reads from the compass are always
displayed in degree regardless of the system settings.
OK to return to the survey screen. The instrument turns to the prism.
For Target aiming: Automatic an ATR measurement is performed. If no prism
was found, the instrument turns to the position typed in.
For Target aiming: Lock the instrument locks on the prism and the LOCK icon
is displayed. If no prism was found, the instrument turns to the position
typed in.
2.6
Using the Digital Camera
Taking a picture
step-by-step
Step Description
1.
Aim the camera to the desired target.
2.
Check the view at the display.
3.
Press OK or click Capture to take the picture.
4.
Capture changes to Save.

Press OK again or click Save to open the Save As dialog.
5.
Click Discard to reject the picture.
Viva Series, TPS Settings
12
3
GNSS Settings
3.1
Leica GPS Favourites
Description
Frequently used settings can be accessed and changed quickly. The change is applied
immediately. The workflow is not interrupted.
This screen displays the possible settings to change to.

Changes made on this screen are stored in the active working style.
Access
Tap the position status icon or select
Leica GPS Favourites
The appearance of the screen changes, depending on the RTK settings defined.
To change to the displayed setting do one of the following:
• Tap on the icon on the touch screen.
• Highlight a field and press
.
• Highlight a field and press
OK
.
.
• Highlight a field and press OK.
• Press the number next to the function.
Key
Description
OK
To apply the selected setting, or to access the selected function.
Once leaving a screen, the system returns to the screen from where
this screen was accessed..
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, GNSS Settings
13
Description of options
Icon
Description
Current GPS posi- To open the status screen Current GPS Position. Refer to "22.5
tion
Current GPS position".
Satellite tracking
To open the status screen Satellite Tracking. Refer to "22.3
Satellite tracking".
RTK data link
status
Available when RTK is configured. Opens the status screen RTK
Data Link Status or RTK Data Link Status (RTK1)/RTK Data Link
Status (RTK2). Refer to "22.4 RTK data link status".
RTK settings
To open the configuration screen RTK Rover Settings or RTK
base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2). Refer to "19.7
RTK Rover" and "19.8 Base RTK 1 / Base RTK 2".
Load RTK profile
To load an existing profile via the RTK Rover Wizard. Refer to
"13.1 RTK rover wizard".
Radio ch. / dial-up To open the configuration screen Radio Configuration. Refer to
"20.3 Radios for GPS Real-Time".
Start RTK stream
To start streaming RTK data.
Stop RTK stream
To stop streaming RTK data.
Quality control
To open the configuration screen GNSS Quality Control
Settings. Refer to "13.4 Quality control".
Raw data logging
To open the status screen Raw Data Logging Status. Refer to
"22.6 Raw data logging".
Bluetooth connec- To define Bluetooth connections.
tion
Camera
To begin the camera function of the CS field controller. Refer to
"2.6 Using the Digital Camera".
Sketch pad
To create a sketch on a virtual piece of paper. Refer to "34.5.2
Field Sketching".
Start Active Assist To connect to the Active Assist service.
End Active Assist
Viva Series, GNSS Settings
To disconnect from the Active Assist service.
14
4
Main Menu
4.1
Main Menu Functions
Main Menu
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
Map
To open Tap Map. Refer to "39 Tap Map".
Fn Mode
To switch between GPS and TPS mode.
Fn Exit
To close Leica SmartWorx Viva software.
Icon
Description
Software maintenance is close to due date or has expired. The reminder
message has previously been confirmed with OK. The icon will disappear
when licence keys are entered manually or uploaded from a file. Refer to
"30.3 Load licence keys".
Description of the
main menu functions
Main menu function
Description
Refer to
chapter
Go to Work!
To select and start an application.
"4.2 Go to
Work!"
Jobs & Data
To manage jobs and data, as well as import
and export. Available in SmartWorx when
operating an RTK rover or a TPS.
"4.3 Jobs &
Data"
Instrument
To access settings regarding GPS and instrument connections as well as status information.
"4.4 Instrument"
User
To make settings regarding the software and "4.5 User"
the display as well as other useful tools. Available in SmartWorx when operating an RTK
rover or a TPS.
Viva Series, Main Menu
15
4.2
Go to Work!
Description
The Go to Work! menu contains all loaded applications. Selecting an option in the
menu starts the application. Configurations and measurements that can be performed
depend on the application.

The menu can be displayed as drop-down menu or as icon menu. To change between
both options go to User\System Settings\SmartWorx options. Change to the General
page and check or uncheck Use drop down menus in the main menu.
Go to Work!
Next step
Key
Description
OK
To start the highlighted application or to open a submenu.
Refer to Applications - General for information on the applications.
Viva Series, Main Menu
16
4.3
Jobs & Data
Description
Jobs & Data is available in SmartWorx when operating an RTK rover or a TPS. It is used
to:
• Create a new job.
• Select a job.
• View job properties.

• View and edit data.
• Import data.
• Export and copy data.
The menu can be displayed as drop-down menu or as icon menu. To change between
both options go to User\System Settings\SmartWorx options. Change to the General
page and check or uncheck Use drop down menus in the main menu.
Jobs & Data
Next step
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
New job
View & edit data
Create control data
Job properties
Choose working job
Choose control job
Import data
Export & copy data
Viva Series, Main Menu
Refer
Refer
Refer
Refer
Refer
Refer
Refer
Refer
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
chapter
chapter
chapter
chapter
chapter
chapter
chapter
chapter
5.2.
6.
9.
5.3.
5.4.
5.4.
10.
11.
17
4.4
Instrument
Description
Instrument is used to:
• Configure parameters related to the instrument.
• Configure parameters related to the interfaces.
• Check status information.

The menu can be displayed as drop-down menu or as icon menu. To change between
both options go to User\System Settings\SmartWorx options. Change to the General
page and check or uncheck Use drop down menus in the main menu.
Instrument
Next step
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
GPS settings
TPS settings
Base settings
Connections..
• GPS connection wizard
• TPS connection wizard
• All other connections
Base connections
Instrument status info
Base status info
TPS camera settings
Viva Series, Main Menu
Refer to chapter 13.
Avialable for TPS. Refer to chapter 13.
Available in SmartWorx when operating an
RTK base. Refer to chapter 22.
Refer to chapter 13.1.
Avialable for TPS. Refer to chapter 13.
Refer to chapter 19.
Available in SmartWorx when operating an
RTK base. Refer to chapter 22.
Available in SmartWorx when operating an
RTK rover or a TPS. Refer to chapter 22.
Available in SmartWorx when operating an
RTK base. Refer to chapter 22.
Refer to "34.2 Instrument - TPS camera
settings".
18
4.5
User
Description
User is available in SmartWorx when operating an RTK rover or a TPS. It is used:
• To configure user favourite settings for the survey and the instrument.
• For functionality which is not directly related to surveying data, such as loading
firmware or licence keys, format data storage devices and viewing ASCII files.

The menu can be displayed as drop-down menu or as icon menu. To change between
both options go to User\System Settings\SmartWorx options. Change to the General
page and check or uncheck Use drop down menus in the main menu.
User
Next step
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
Work settings
Working style wizard
System settings
Tools & other utilities
Viva Series, Main Menu
Refer
Refer
Refer
Refer
to
to
to
to
chapter
chapter
chapter
chapter
25.
28.
29.
30.
19
4.6
Icons
Description
The screen icons display the status information of the instrument.

The icons provide information related to basic instrument functions. The icons that
appear depend upon which instrument is used and the current instrument configuration.
Icon bar - GNSS
Mode
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
SYS13_023
a) GNSS position status
b) Number of visible satellites
c) Number of satellites contributing to
position solution
d) Real-time device and real-time status
e) Current active instrument
Icon bar - TPS Mode
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
f) Camera
g) Internet online status (CS field
controller), Active Assist service or
Leica Exchange service
h) Memory storage (SD card/CompactFlash card/USB stick/internal memory)
or Line/area/auto points
i) Battery level (field controller/instrument)
i
SYS13_026
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Viva Series, Main Menu
Automatic aiming
f) Camera
Prism
g) Internet online status (TPS instrument), Active Assist service or Leica
Measure mode
Exchange
service
Instrument face I&II/Compensator level
h)
Memory
storage
(SD card/USB
Current active instrument
stick/internal memory) or
Line/area/auto points
i) Battery level (field controller/instrument)
20
TPS specific icons
GNSS specific icons
Icon
Description
Automatic aiming
Displays the current automatic aiming or PowerSearch
settings.
Prism
Displays the selected prism.
Measure mode
Displays the selected measurement mode. The red laser
icon will display when the red laser is active.
Compensator level and
Instrument face I or II
Displays the compensator is off or out of range icons, or
the instrument face I or II icon.
Icon
Description
Position status
Displays the status of the current position. As soon as this
icon becomes visible the instrument is in a stage where
practical operation can commence.
Number of visible satellites
Displays the number of theoretically visible satellites
above the configured cut-off angle according to the
current almanac.
Contributing satellites
Displays the number of satellites that are contributing to
the currently computed position solution.
The number of contributing satellites can differ
from the number of visible satellites. This difference can be because satellites cannot be viewed,
or because the observations to these satellites are
considered too noisy to be used.

Real-time device
Displays the real-time device configured to be used.
Real-time status
Displays the status of the real-time device configured to
be used.
Viva Series, Main Menu
21
Automatic aiming
Icon
Description
The instrument is in Auto Aiming mode using ATR.
The instrument is in manual aiming mode
The instrument is in target lock mode, however not
following a prism at current. Lock Status: Unlocked.
The instrument is in target lock mode, following a prism
at current. Lock Status: Locked.
The Visibility setting in Measure & Target Settings is set
to Rain & fog. This setting ensures better performance
under unfavourable visibility conditions.
The Visibility setting in Measure & Target Settings is set
to Sun & reflections. This setting ensures better performance under sunny conditions with reflexions.
The instrument is in prediction or locking on the fly is
activated. The instrument will lock towards a prism
coming into the field of view and follow this prism.
The prediction time has elapsed. The instrument beeps
and the EGL is blinking.The instrument will lock towards a
prism coming into the field of view and follow this prism.
Searching for the prism using Auto aiming.
Searching for the prism using PowerSearch.
Viva Series, Main Menu
22
Prism
Icon
Description
Leica circular prism
Leica 360° prism
Leica mini prism
Leica mini 0
Leica mini 360°
Leica Machine Automation power prism MPR122
Leica reflective tape or HDS target.
Reflectorless
User defined prism
Measure mode
Icon
Description
No active distance measurement
Distance measurement active
Measure mode Single
Measure mode Single (fast)
Measure mode Continuous
Measure mode Averaging
Measure mode Continuous+
Measure mode Long range (>4km)
Measure mode Long range avg
Red laser is turned on
Viva Series, Main Menu
23
Compensator level
and instrument face
I or II
Icon
Description
Compensator is turned off.
Compensator is turned on, but is out of range.
The current face of the instrument is shown, if the
compensator and the Hz-correction are turned on.
Position status
Icon
Description
Navigation position available
Code solution available
Fixed position available
xRTK fixed position available
Precise mode
The ticks indicate that an ambiguity check is being made.
Number of visible
satellites
Icon
Contributing satellites
Icon
Description
The number of visible satellites.
Description
When a position status icon is displayed then
the number of satellites currently used for the position
computation are shown.
If no position is currently available then
• the L1, L2 and L5 values (GPS only) show how many
satellites are being tracked. OR
• the sum and G (GPS), R (GLONASS), E (Galileo) or B
(BeiDou) values show how many satellites are being
tracked.
Viva Series, Main Menu
24


Receive RTK corrections using
Icon
The number of contributing satellites can differ from the number of visible
satellites. This may be either because satellites cannot be viewed or the observations to these satellites are considered to be too noisy to be used in the
position solution.
The number of contributing GLONASS satellites could be zero if five or more
GPS satellites are used for the position computation. The processing algorithm
automatically selects the best possible set of satellite combinations for the
position computation. A position computation with R = 0 is certainly within the
specified reliability.
Description
Radio
Digital cellular phone/modem
SBAS/WAAS/EGNOS/MSAS/GAGAN/SmartLink
CGR10/CGR15
NTRIP
RS232
Indicates a connection error.
Real-time status
Icon
Description
An arrow pointing down indicates a real-time rover
configuration. The arrow flashes when real-time
messages are received.
An arrow pointing up indicates a real-time base configuration. The arrow flashes when real-time messages are
sent.
Sending/receiving data
Raw data logging active
Synchronization active
Viva Series, Main Menu
25
Current active
instrument
Icon
Description
TS instrument
TS with cable
GS rover instrument
GS rover with cable
TS and GS rover connected via cable. The instrument in
the foreground is used first.
TS and GS rover connected via Bluetooth. The instrument
in the foreground is used first.
GS base with active Bluetooth connection
CS with GS05 used
TS and CS used
GS25 used
GS25 with cable connection
GS base and GS25 connected via cable
GS12 rover instrument
GS12 rover connected via cable
GS12 base
Caution. Connection between CS and GS via Bluetooth is
not established.
Camera
Icon
Description
To capture an image with the camera
Image capture in progress
Internet online
status
Icon
Description
Instrument is online in the Internet.
Internet not connected.
Viva Series, Main Menu
26
Leica Exchange
service
Icon
Description
Logged into Leica Exchange.
Data upload in progress.
Data download in progress.
Exchanging new data.
Data transfer problem.
Active Assist
service
Data management
Icon
Description
Active Assist is active. Leica technical support can gain
remote access to the instrument.
Icon
Description
To access data management where lines/areas can be
opened/closed.
At least one line is open.
At least one area is open.
At least one line and one area are open.
Viva Series, Main Menu
27
Memory storage
Icon
Description
Internal memory. Sufficient memory space available.
CompactFlash card is inserted and can be removed. Sufficient memory space available.
Secure Digital Memory card is inserted and can be
removed. Sufficient memory space available.
USB stick is inserted and can be removed. Sufficient
memory space available.
The memory device is inserted and cannot be removed. It
is strongly recommended not to remove the memory
device to avoid loss of data.
Memory device full
Battery
Icon
Description
A CS internal battery is inserted and in use. Sufficient
power available.
A GS internal battery is inserted and in use. Sufficient
power available.
A TS internal battery is inserted and in use. Sufficient
power available.
Power level is getting low.
Power level is getting low.
Battery empty. Instrument turns off immediately.
Viva Series, Main Menu
28
5
Jobs & Data - Jobs
5.1
Overview
Description
Jobs
• structure surveying projects.
• contain all points, lines, areas and codes that are measured/recorded and stored.
• can be downloaded to LGO for post-processing or for data transfer to a further
program.
• can be uploaded from LGO, for example, for (real-time) stakeout operations.
• can be stored on the data storage device or, if fitted, the internal memory.
Type of jobs
• Data jobs. Explained in this chapter.
• DTM files. Refer to "54.6 Staking Out a DTM or Points & DTM".
• Road alignment files.
Default job
A job called Default is available on the instrument after: formatting the memory
device, inserting a previously formatted data storage device or deleting all jobs from
Job properties.
Working job
The working job is the one data is stored to. One job is always considered the working
job. After formatting the memory device, the job Default is used until a user-defined
job is created and selected.
When a job becomes the working job, then the sort and filter settings of this job are
saved in the SystemRAM. If the data storage device is formatted then these last used
sort and filter settings are used for the job Default.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs
29
5.2
Creating a New Job
Access
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\New job.
New Job,
General
Key
Description
Store
To store the settings.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Name
Editable field
A unique name for the new job. The name can be
up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Input
required.
Description
Editable field
Two lines for a detailed description of the job, for
example, work to be performed or the classes
contained in the job. Input optional.
Creator
Editable field
The person’s name who is creating the job. Input
optional.
Device
Selectable list
The device on which the new job will be stored.
Depending on the instrument options, this may
be a display only field.
Use with
System1200
Check box
When this box is checked, the job can be used on
System 1200 instruments. The setting of this
check box is remembered until changed manually.
Next step
Page changes to the Codelist page.
New Job,
Codelist page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Codelist
Selectable list
Choosing a codelist copies the codes to the job.
Next step
Page changes to the CAD files page.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs
30
New Job,
CAD files page
Key
Description
Store
To store the settings. Selected and attached CAD files will be available in the job as background maps.
Unit
To change between the options in the Unit column. Available when
the Unit column is visible after using the More key.

The default value for the units depends on the selection in
Regional Settings, Distance page. If the regional settings
units are inches or miles, then the default cad file units are
feet. If the regional settings are kilometer, then the default
settings for cad files are meters.
Attach
To attach a CAD file from the \DATA folder of any data storage device.
The new job and the CAD file need not be on the same data storage
device. The setting in the Use column will be updated. CAD heights
are supported.
More
To display information about the format, size, source and units.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Description
File
The name of the CAD files available in the \DATA directory of any data
storage device.
Format
The format of the CAD file: dxf, shp or Leica for CAD files that are
already attached to other jobs and converted to Leica format.
Size (MB)
The size of the CAD file in megabytes.
Source
The memory device where the CAD file is stored.
Unit
The units used for the CAD file.
Use
If set to Yes, the file is attached to the job when Store is pressed.
Next step
Page changes to the Coord system page.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs
31
New Job,
Coord system page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Coord system Selectable list
Description
Choosing a coordinate system attaches it to the
job. If it is not known which coordinate system to
use, select Coord system: WGS 1984.
All other fields on this screen are display only fields. They depend on the transformation type of the selected coordinate system.
Next step
Page changes to the Averaging page.
Page changes to the Scale page.
New Job,
Averaging page
In order to check measurements, the same point can be measured more than once. If
activated, an average or an absolute difference is calculated.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Defines the averaging principles for multiple
measured points. The selection determines the
availability of the subsequent fields for setting
the acceptable averaging limits or absolute differences.
Mode
Average
Computes the average for the position and the
height. Points exceeding the defined limits are
marked with ! in Edit Point:, Mean page.
Absolute differences
Computes the absolute differences between two
points selected from a list of measured points
which are all stored with the same point ID.
Off
Averaging is turned off. No other fields are available.
The method used for computing the average.
Available for Mode: Average.
Method
Points to use
Description
Weighted
Calculates a weighted average
No weighting
Calculates an arithmetic average.
Selectable list
The type of points which will be taken into
account for averaging or absolute differences.
Available for Mode: Average and Mode: Absolute
differences.
Limit in posi- Editable field
tion and Limit
in height
The acceptable difference for the position and
height components. Available for Mode: Average.
From Easting Editable fields
to Cartesian Z
The acceptable absolute differences for each
coordinate component. Available for Mode:
Absolute differences.
Next step
Store creates a new job.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs
32
New Job,
Scale page
The geometric distance correction (geometric ppm) is derived from the map projection
distortion (map projection ppm), the height above reference datum correction (height
ppm) and an individual correction (individual ppm).
The calculation of the map projection ppm follows the formula for the Transversal
Mercator Projection. The individual factors are: the scale factor of the line of projection
central meridian, Gauss-Krüger = 1.0, UTM = 0.9996, etc. and the offset from the line
of projection.
The calculation of the height ppm is derived from the height of the instrument station
above the reference datum. Normally this is the height above mean sea level MSL.
Key
Description
Store
To store the settings.
SF/ppm
To change between entering the scale factor or the ppm. Only available for Compute scale using:SF/GeoPPM.
ppm=0
To set Geometric ppm: 0.0.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Compute scale
using
Option
Projection &
ht info
SF/GeoPPM
Scale at CM
Stn & coord
system
Editable field
Offset to CM
Editable field
Map proj ppm
Display only
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs
Description
To enter all values for determining the geometric
ppm.
To enter only the scale factor or the geometric
ppm value.
To automatically calculate the ppm/scale factor
from the coordinate system and station position.
The scale at the central meridian.
Available for Compute scale using: Projection &
ht info.
The offset to the central meridian.
Available for Compute scale using: Projection &
ht info.
The map projection ppm value. If this value
cannot be calculated, then ----- is displayed and is
also ignored in the calculation of the geometric
ppm value.
Available for Compute scale using: Projection &
ht info and Compute scale using: Stn & coord
system.
33
Field
Ground height
Option
Editable field
Height ppm
Display only
User entered ppm Editable field
Geometric ppm
Display only
User entered scale Editable field
factor
Description
The height of the instrument station above the
reference datum.
Available for Compute scale using: Projection &
ht info.
The height ppm value calculated from the height
coordinates of the current station stored in the
internal memory. If this value cannot be calculated, then ----- is displayed and is also ignored in
the calculation of the geometric ppm value.
Available for Compute scale using: Projection &
ht info and Compute scale using: Stn & coord
system.
The individual ppm value.
Available for Compute scale using: Projection &
ht info and Compute scale using: SF/GeoPPM.
For Projection & ht info:
Geometric ppm =
Map proj ppm + User entered ppm + height
ppm value calculated fromGround height.
For Stn & coord system:
Geometric ppm =
Map proj ppm + Height ppm.
The user entered scale factor.
Compute scale using: SF/GeoPPM.
Additional calculation method for the geometric ppm value
The geometric ppm value can also be calculated by a resection calculation. The scale
factor from the resection is used for User entered ppm.
Individual ppm=(s-1)*106.s=1+ppm*10-6. The Geometric ppm value is calculated with
the following:
• Scale at CM: 1,
• Offset to CM: 0,
• Map proj ppm: 0 and
• Ground height: 0.
Automatic calculation of the geometric ppm value
When Compute scale using: Stn & coord system:
• the ppm values for Map Proj ppm, Height ppm and Geometric ppm are automatically calculated. The coordinates of the current instrument station stored in the
internal memory are used, which are based on the currently active coordinate
system.
• each time an application is accessed, the geometric ppm value is automatically
calculated. The coordinates of the current instrument station stored in the
internal memory are used (these coordinates may have been updated), which
are based on the currently active coordinate system (this coordinate system
may have changed). This way, the user is always working with the correct
geometric ppm value.
• when the <None> coordinate system is chosen, then the geometric ppm value
cannot be automatically calculated. A message will appear, allowing the user to
either manually enter the ppm values or accept ppm values of 0.
Next step
Page changes to the Averaging page.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs
34
5.3
Job Properties and Editing a Job
Description
In the Job Properties:, the settings for a job can be viewed and changed.
Access
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Job properties.
Job Properties:,
General page
The fields on this page are identical with the fields in New Job, General. Refer to "5.2
Creating a New Job".
Key
Description
Store
To store the settings.
Data..
To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job.
Points, lines and areas are shown on separate pages. Selected sort
and filter settings apply.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Log..
To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job.
Points, lines and areas are sorted by time in one list.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Next step
Page changes to the Codelist page.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs
35
Job Properties:,
Codelist page
Key
Description
Store
To store the settings.
Import
To add additional codes from a new codelist to the job. The name of
this codelist is copied to the job.
Codes..
To view codes currently stored in the job. Refer to "5.5 Managing Job
Codes".
Data..
To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job.
Points, lines and areas are shown on separate pages. Selected sort
and filter settings apply.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Log..
To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job.
Points, lines and areas are sorted by time in one list.
Fn Export
To copy codes from the job to an existing or new codelist.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Codelist
<None>
No codes are stored in the job.
This default setting can be changed. Choosing a
codelist copies the codes to the job.
Display only
Codes are stored in the job.
If codes had been copied from a codelist in the
internal memory, the name of the codelist is
displayed. If codes have been typed in, then the
name of the working job is displayed.
Next step
Page changes to the CAD files page.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs
36
Job Properties:,
CAD files page
Key
Description
Store
To store the settings.
Add
To select a CAD file to be added to the job properties. The screen that
opens is very similar to New Job, CAD files page. Refer to "5.2
Creating a New Job" for a description of the screen.
Only the files that are currently not attached to the job are displayed
in the CAD Files screen. The files listed are all dxf, shp files and mpl
files from the \Data directory on a data storage device or in the
internal memory. If an mpl file is selected, then this file, including all
related files, is copied to the appropriate job folder.
Rmove
To delete the highlighted Map file from the job.
If deleted accidentally, the file must be attached again.
View
To change the setting in the View column.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Layrs..
To change to the CAD layers screen. On this screen, it is possible to
make layers from the CAD file visible or invisible for MapView.
Fn Log..
To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job.
Points, lines and areas are sorted by time in one list.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.

Description of columns
Column
Maps
View
Description
The name of the CAD files that can be used.
The files displayed are the converted Leica Map files (*.mpl) within
the job. The original file extension is added to the file name with an
underscore, for example example_dxf.
If set to Yes, the map is visible as background maps in MapView.
Next step
IF you want to change to THEN
another page
Page changes to the Coord system page and the Averaging page and for
also to the Scale page. The
functionality on all pages is identical with the creation of
a new job. Refer to "5.2 Creating a New Job"
If the coordinate system of the working job is edited,
and Use auto coordinate system has been selected in
the RTK Rover Wizard, a message will display requesting
confirmation to deactivate auto coordinate system.
the CAD Layers page
press Fn Layrs... Refer to "CAD Layers".
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs
37
CAD Layers
Key
Description
Store
To store the settings.
State
To change between the options in the Visible column of the highlighted layer.
Shapefiles are not displayed on this screen. Shape files are
only displayed in Job Properties:, CAD files page.

All
To make all layers have the same state as the currently highlighted
layer.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Layer
The name of the layer.
For dxf files, all layers are listed, no matter if the layer is filled or
empty.
Visible
The state of the layer:
• Hidden
These layers are not shown on the Map page and their positions
are not used when zooming to extents. Nothing in these layers
can be selected.
• Visible
These layers are shown on the Map page and their positions are
used when zooming to extents. Nothing in these layers can be
selected. Empty dxf layers can be set to visible.
• Selectable
These layers are shown on the Map page and their positions are
used when zooming to extents. Objects on these layers are available to be selected.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs
38
5.4
Choosing a Job
Access
• For a working job, where measured points are stored to, select Main Menu: Jobs
& Data\Choose working job.
• For a control job with control points, select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Choose
control job.
Choose working job
Listed are all data jobs stored on the data storage device or in the internal memory
depending on the current device.
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted job and to return to the screen from where
this screen was accessed.
New..
To create a job. Refer to "5.2 Creating a New Job".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted job. Refer to "5.3 Job Properties and Editing a
Job".
Delete
To delete the highlighted job, including all map files from attached
CAD files.
Data..
To view, edit and delete points, lines, areas, images and scans stored
with the job. Points, lines, areas, images and scans are shown on
separate pages. Selected sort and filter settings apply.
CF card, SD
card or Intrnl
To change between viewing jobs stored on another data storage
device or internal memory.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs
39
5.5
Managing Job Codes
Description
Available for jobs which have a codelist attached. To view, edit, group and sort all
codes currently stored in the job. The functionality of this screen is mainly the same
as for Main Menu: Jobs & Data\New job, Codelist. For simplicity, the functionality
which is different for Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Job properties, Codelist is explained
here. Refer to "7.4 Managing Codes" for information on Main Menu: Jobs & Data\New
job, Codelist.
Access step-by-step
Step
Description
1.
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Job properties.
OR
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Choose working job or Choose control
job. Edit.. to access Job Properties:.
2.
Page until the Codelist page is active.
3.
Codes.. to access Job Codes.
Job Codes
Key
Description
OK
To return to the previous screen.
New..
To create a new code. Refer to "7.4.2 Creating/Editing a Code".
Info
To edit the highlighted code. Accesses Edit Code where new attributes can be added to a code and line styles can be changed.
More
To display information about the code group, the code type, the code
description and the quick codes if available.
Fn Group
To access Code Groups. To view, create, activate and deactivate
code groups. Refer to "7.5 Managing Code Groups".
Fn Sort
To access Sort Codes. To sort codes by code name, code description,
quick code or last used.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Next step
IF
THEN
the job codes do not need to be changed OK closes the screen.
a new job code is to be created
New... Refer to "7.4.2 Creating/Editing a
Code".
an existing job code is to be edited
highlight the job code and Info.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs
40
Edit Code
Key
Description
Store
To store the code including any newly created attributes.
+Attrib
To add a new attribute to a code.
Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in.
To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the
attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and an
attribute value can be typed in.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
The behaviour of this screen varies with the type of code to be edited. The differences
are explained in the table.
Type of code
Description
Point codes
and
Free codes
New attributes can be added with +Attrib.
Line codes
and
Area codes
• New attributes can be added with +Attrib.
• The line style can be changed. This new line style is stored
to the code. It can be decided whether to update the line
style of all previously stored lines/areas with this code in
this job.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs
41
6
Jobs & Data - Data
6.1
Overview
Description
Data management is the administration of data stored in the working job, including
• viewing data and related information.
• editing data.
• creating new data.
• deleting existing data.
• filtering existing data.
6.2
Accessing Data Management
Access
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\View & edit data.

The objects listed on the pages belong to the working job. The objects listed and their
order depend on the active sort and filter settings. An active filter for a page is indicated by * to the right of the name of the page. Refer to "6.6 Point Sorting and Filters"
for information about sort and filter settings.
Data:,
Points page
Key
Description
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
New..
To create a point.
Edit..
To edit the highlighted point.
Delete
To delete the highlighted point.
More
To display information about the codes and code information if
stored with any point, the 3D coordinate quality, the class, Easting,
Northing and Elevation, the time and the date of when the point was
stored, and the flag for Linework.


The order in which the Easting and Northing columns are
shown depends on the Grid format configured to be used in
Regional Settings, Coords page.
The Easting, Northing and Elevation values are shown in the
unit configured in Regional Settings, Distance page.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Log..
To view points, lines, areas and free codes stored with the job sorted
by time. Refer to "6.5 Data Log".
Fn Filter..
To define sort and filter settings. Refer to "6.6 Point Sorting and
Filters".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
42
Next step
Page changes to the Lines and Areas page.
Data:,
Lines and Areas
page
The explanations given for the softkeys are valid for both pages.
The number in brackets next to the name of the page indicate the number of open
lines/areas. Example: Lines (2)/Areas (2) means that two lines/areas are open.
Key
Description
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
New..
To create a line/area. After storing the new line/area, all existing lines
and areas which are open are closed. Refer to "6.3.1 Creating a New
Point".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted line/area.
Close and
Open
To change between the options in the Open column of the highlighted line/area. Only available for the current working job.
More
To display information about the codes if stored with any line/area,
the start time, the end time of when the last point was added to the
line/area, the length of the line, the perimeter and the area of the
area.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Delete
To delete the highlighted line/area.
Fn Filter..
To define sort and filter settings. Refer to "6.6 Point Sorting and
Filters".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Line or Area
The listed lines/areas already stored in the working job.
Open
The status of a line/area.
• Yes
The line/area is open. Measured points are assigned to the
line/area.
• No
The line/area is closed. Measured points are not assigned to the
line/area.
Close and Open change between the options.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
43
Next step
IF the line/area
THEN
which was last used press a hot key configured to reopen last used line/area. This
is to be opened
hot key can be used at any time. Refer to "1.1 Hot Keys" for
information on hot keys.
is to be viewed
Page until the Map page is active.

For information on camera and images refer to "34.4 Image Management".
Data:,
Scans page
Key
Description
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
View
To open Scan Viewer for scans that show Yes in the Display column.
Scan Viewer is a perspective display of the 3D-point clouds.
To cancel the loading of the selected scan(s) pressing ESC.
Display
To change the setting in the Display column for the highlighted scan.
More
To display information about the date, the time, the status, the
number of surface points and the number of boundary points.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Delete
To delete the highlighted scan.
Fn All or Fn
None
To change the setting in the Display column for all scans at once.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
44
6.3
Point Management
6.3.1
Creating a New Point
Access
In Data:, Points page, press New...
New Point,
Coords page
Key
Description
Store
To store the new point entered and all associated information.
Coord
To view other coordinate properties.
North or South Available for local geodetic or WGS 1984 geodetic coordinates when
Local latitude or WGS84 latitude is highlighted. Changes between
North and South latitude.
East or West
Available for local geodetic or WGS 1984 geodetic coordinates when
Local longitude or WGS84 longitude is highlighted. Changes
between East and West longitude.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht or Fn Available for local coordinates. Changes between the ellipsoidal and
Elev
the orthometric height.
Fn IndivID or
Fn Run
For an individual name independent of the ID template or to change
back to the next ID from the configured ID template.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Point ID
Editable field
The name of the new point. The configured point
ID template is used. The ID can be changed in the
following ways:
• To start a new sequence of point IDs, type
over the point ID.
• For an individual name independent of the ID
template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to
the next ID from the configured ID template.
Coordinate
fields
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
Editable field
Negative geodetic coordinates are interpreted as
being of the opposite hemisphere or other side of
the central meridian. For example, entering 25 °N will be stored as 25 °S, entering -33 °E will
be stored as 33 °W.
45
Next step
Page changes to the Code page.
New Point,
Code page
The settings for Code & attributes in Main Menu: User\Work settings\Coding & linework determine the availability of the subsequent fields and softkeys.
Key
Description
Store
To store the new point entered and all associated information.
+Attrib
To create additional attributes for this point code.
Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in.
To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the
attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and an
attribute value can be typed in.
Last
To recall the last used attribute values which were stored with this
point code.
Default
To recall the default attribute values for the selected code.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Point code
Selectable list
When the check box Use a list box to view codes
is checked in Coding & Linework Settings:
The codes from the job codelist are used.
All point codes of the job codelist can be selected.
The description of the code is shown as a display
only field. The attributes are shown as display
only, editable fields or selectable lists depending
on their definition.
Editable field
When the check box Use a list box to view codes
is not checked in Coding & Linework Settings:
Codes for points can be typed in but not selected
from a codelist.
A check is performed to see if a point code of this
name already exists in the job. If so, an information message is displayed. If Suggested attributes: Last used in Coding & Linework Settings,
the according attributes are also shown.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
46
Field
Option
Description
Attribute
Editable field
When the check box Use a list box to view codes
is checked: Up to 20 attribute values are available.
When the check box Use a list box to view codes
is not checked: Up to eight attribute values are
available.
Next step
Store stores the new point entered and all associated information.
The properties stored with the point are:
• Class: Ctrl
• Sub class: Fixed (Pos & Ht)
• Source: User entered
• Instrument source: GPS

It may happen that a point with the same point ID exists in the job. If the codes and/or
attribute values of the new and the existing point do not match, a screen opens where
they can be corrected.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
47
6.3.2
Editing a Point
Access
In Data:, Points page highlight a point to be edited. Press Edit...
Edit Point:,
Coords page
The visible pages on this screen depend on the properties of the point being edited.
It is possible to edit the point ID and for points of Class: Ctrl and Class: Est also the
coordinates. Other point-related data is shown in display only fields.
Changing the point ID of a point, applies this new point ID to all other points
with the same original name, regardless of their class.
Points of Class: Ref cannot be renamed.
Changing coordinates of a point which has been previously used in other applications, for example COGO, or hidden point measurements does not update
the application results.
An edited point retains the creation value for Time.




Key
Description
Store
To store the changes.
Coord
To view other coordinate properties.
Prev
To display the previous point in the list of points displayed in
Data:, Points page. Available unless the beginning of the list is
reached.
Next
To display the next point in the list of points displayed in
Data:, Points page. Available unless the end of the list is reached.
More
To display information about class, sub class, 3D coordinate quality,
time and date of when point was stored, instrument source, source
and the flag for Linework if available.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht or Fn Available for local coordinates. Changes between the ellipsoidal and
Elev
the orthometric height. Changing the height type does not edit the
point.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Next step
Page changes to the next page.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
48
Edit Point:,
Obs page
Available when the edited point is Class: Meas.
For GPS points
The name of the real-time base station from where the GPS/GNSS point was measured, the name of antenna used to measure the point and the baseline values, are
shown in display only/observations fields.
For TPS points
It is possible to edit the reflector height. The name of the station from where the point
was measured is shown in a display only field.
Changing the reflector height recalculates the point height.
The distance variables ∆Hz, ∆V, ∆ slope dist are shown in a display only field, whenever a measurement has been taken in both faces.
More displays the horizontal angle or the azimuth from the point to the instrument.

Next step
Page changes to the next page.
Edit Point:,
RTK info page
Available for GNSS points which were recorded in real-time mode, however not for
average or mean points.
All fields are display only fields and cannot be edited.
The information is obtained from System settings and data coming across with the
real-time information and the Ntrip connection.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
49
Description of fields
Field
Option
Network solu- Single baseline
tion type
Description
Displayed when Use RTK network is not checked
in RTK Rover Settings, RTK network page.
Network solution Displayed when Use RTK network is checked in
RTK Rover Settings, RTK network page.
Network type
FKP, VRS, MAX,
i-MAX
The type of reference network selected in RTK
Rover Settings. Refer to "RTK Rover Settings, RTK
network page".
Nearest
If Network type: Nearest is selected in RTK Rover
Settings, a singlebase solution is calculated and
the number of base stations equals 1.
RTK data
format
Display only
Refer to "RTK Rover Settings, General page".
No. of ref
stations in
solution
Display only
• For single-baseline solutions, this number is
always 1.
• For VRS and i-MAX, this number is always 1
since it is not possible to derive the number of
base stations contributing to the VRS or i-MAX
corrections from the data format.
• For network solutions, this information is
derived from the content of the data format.
Only RTCM v3 and Leica 4G are able to
provide this number.
Mountpoint
Display only
The name of the correction data stream that was
selected from the source table received in the
TCP/IP port. Available for network RTK with Ntrip.
The information is available for all Ntrip connections independent from the Network type used.
The information is derived from the Connection
Settings, either manually defined or selected
from the NTRIP Source Table.
Point measured inside
network
Display only
Available for network RTK with Ntrip and MAX and
data format RTCM v3 or Leica 4G.
User ID
Display only
Available for single baseline RTK, network RTK
with/without Ntrip.
Next step
Page changes to the next page.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
50
Edit Point:,
Code page
Available when the edited point is Class: Meas.
The point code and code information can be edited. All point codes in the job can be
selected.
The description of the code is shown as a display only field.
The attributes are shown as display only, editable fields or selectable lists depending
on their definition.
The attribute values shown depend on the setting in Coding & Linework Settings.
Suggested attributes: Last used shows the last used attribute values which are stored
for this point code in the active codelist. Suggested attributes: Default values shows
the default attribute values for this point code if existing.

It may happen that a point with the same point ID exists in the job. If the codes
and/or attribute values of the new and the existing point do not match, a
screen opens where they can be corrected.
Next step
Page changes to the next page.
Edit Point:,
Annots page
Available when the edited point is Class: Nav or Class: Meas and no offset point.
The comments to be stored with the point can be edited.
Next step
Page changes to the next page.
Edit Point:,
Mean page
Available when the edited point is Class: Avge.
Refer to "6.3.3 Mean Page" for a detailed description.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
51
6.3.3
Mean Page
Description
In order to check measurements, the same point can be measured more than once.
These measured points are assigned the class Meas. The various measured coordinate
triplets for one point can be recorded using the same point ID. If the averaging mode
is activated, an average is calculated when more than one measured coordinate triplet
is available for the same point ID.
The averaged point is given the class Avge. It is checked if the deviations of each single
point are within the limits configured in Job Properties:, Averaging page.
After averaging, the Mean page becomes available in Edit Point: and accessible from
the Survey application. Available functionality on the Mean page depends on the
selected averaging mode.
Averaging
Defining the averaging mode and configuring the limits
The averaging mode and the limits are configured in Job Properties:, Averaging page.
Refer to "5.3 Job Properties and Editing a Job".
Description of averaging modes
Averaging
mode
Description
Average
When more than one measured coordinate triplet is recorded for the
same point, the average for the position and the height is computed.
Depending on the selected averaging method, the average will be
computed weighted or arithmetic (no weighting). The class Avge is
assigned to the averaged point.
The horizontal and height distances from the measured points to the
average are computed and displayed on the Mean page.
A check is performed that the differences in position and height,
between the averaged point and the point being stored, do not
exceed the defined limits.
Absolute
differences
What is described for Average also applies for Absolute differences.
Additionally, the absolute difference between two points selected
from a list of measured points with the same point ID, is checked to
be within the defined limits.
Off
Averaging functionality is turned off. With more than one measured
coordinate triplet recorded for the same point, no average for the
position and the height is computed.
Averaging with position only or height only points
Position only points, height only points and points with full coordinate triplets are
handled in the averaging.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
52
Access step-by-step
The Mean page can be accessed if
Mode: Average or Mode: Absolute differences is configured in Job
Properties:, Averaging page.
AND
more than one measured coordinate triplet is recorded for the same point using
the same point ID.
Access within data management
Step
Description
1.
In Data:, Points page highlight a point to be edited.
2.
Edit.. to access Edit Point:, Mean page.
Access within Survey
From within the Survey application, the Mean page is accessible when the RTK Rover
interface is active.
In Survey, Points page, press Fn Avg or Fn Abs to access Edit Point:, Mean page.
Edit Point:,
Mean page
All measured coordinate triplets recorded using the same point ID are shown.
Key
Description
Store
To store the changes.
Use
To change between the options in the Use column for the highlighted
coordinate triplet. To include or exclude this triplet in or from the
calculation of the average.
Edit..
To view and edit the highlighted measured coordinate triplet. It is
possible to edit the point ID and the antenna height without impact
on all other classes of the point with the same original name. The
coordinates are updated. A change in codes must be an overall
change for the average point.
Example: One of the measured coordinate triplets has a wrong point
ID and should not be included in the average. By editing the point ID,
the point is renamed and no longer contributes to the average.
Delete
To delete the highlighted coordinate triplet. The average is recomputed.
More
To change between time and date of when the point was stored and
the 3D coordinate quality.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Diffs
Available for Mode: Absolute differences and Yes is set in the Use
column for exactly two measurements. To display the absolute coordinate differences when a local coordinate system is active. Differences exceeding the defined limit are indicated by !.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
53
Description of columns
Column
Description
Use
The use of a measured coordinate triplet in the averaging.
• Auto
The coordinate triplet is included in the averaging computation if
within the averaging limit defined in Job Properties::Averaging
page.
• Yes
The coordinate triplet is always included in the averaging computation even if it would fall outside the averaging limit defined in
Job Properties::Averaging page.
• No
The coordinate triplet is never included in the averaging computation.
• ----The coordinate triplet cannot be included in the averaging computation. Automatically set by the system.
Use changes between the options.
Time
The time the measured coordinate triplet was stored.
Date
The date the measured coordinate triplet was stored. The format is
as defined in Regional Settings, Time page.
dPos
The horizontal distance from the measured coordinate triplet to the
average. dPos : ----- indicates unavailable information, for example
for a height only point.
dHt
The height distance from the measured coordinate triplet to the
average. dHt: ----- indicates unavailable information, for example for
a position only point.
!
Available for measured coordinate triplets with Auto or Yes in the
Use column if Mode: Average. Indicates an exceeding of the limits.
Next step
Store stores the changes.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
54
6.4
Line/Area Management
6.4.1
Overview
Description
A line/area consists of points and can be created/edited in Data:, Lines and Areas
page. The individual points are measured within any application. All points can be used
except auxiliary points. Points can be simultaneously assigned to one or more lines
and/or areas.
A line/area can have
• a style for display in MapView.
• a code independent of the point code of the points comprising the line/area.

Points are assigned to a line/area when the line/area is open. Refer to "6.2 Accessing
Data Management" for information on how to open a line/area.
6.4.2
Creating a New Line/Area

The functionality of all screens and fields are similar for the creation of both lines and
areas. The descriptions for lines can be applied for areas.
Access
In Data:, Lines page, press New...
New Line,
General page
Key
Description
Store
To store the new line entered and all associated information.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn IndivID or
Fn Run
For an individual name independent of the ID template or to change
back to the next ID from the configured ID template.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
55
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Line ID
Editable field
The name of the new line. The configured ID
template for lines is used. The ID can be changed
in the following ways:
• To start a new sequence of line IDs, type over
the line ID.
• For an individual name independent of the ID
template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to
the next ID from the configured ID template.
Points to store Selectable list
The type of points which are used to form the line
during a survey.
Style
Selectable list
The line style in which lines/areas are represented
in MapView and LGO. For Line code: <None> on
the Code page a line style can be selected from a
selectable list. Otherwise the line style as defined
for the selected line code is shown.
Colour
Selectable list
A colour in which the line will be displayed.
Next step
Page changes to the Code page.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
56
New Line,
Code page
The settings for Code & attributes in Main Menu: User\Work settings\Coding & linework determine the availability of the subsequent fields and softkeys.
The value for Start time with which the line is stored is the time when Store
was pressed. The same value is assigned to the value for End time until a point
is added to the line.

Key
Description
Store
To store the new line entered and all associated information. Any
existing lines and areas which are open are closed.
+Attrib
To create additional attributes for this line code.
Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in.
To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the
attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and an
attribute value can be typed in.
Last
To recall the last used attribute values which were stored with this
line code.
Default
To recall the default attribute values for the selected code.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
57
Description of fields
Field
Option
The line code to be stored with the point.
Line code
Attribute
Description
Selectable list
When the check box Use a list box to view codes
is checked in Coding & Linework Settings:
All line codes of the job codelist can be selected.
The description of the code is shown as a display
only field.
The line style is shown as defined for the selected
line code. It is the style in which lines/areas are
represented in MapView and LGO. For Line
code: <None>, it can be changed.
The attributes are shown as display only, editable
fields or selectable lists depending on their definition.
Editable field
When the check box Use a list box to view codes
is not checked in Coding & Linework Settings:
Codes for lines can be typed in but not selected
from a codelist.
A check is performed to see if a line code of this
name already exists in the job. If so, the line style
and colour are copied from the existing code and
shown as display only. If Suggested attributes:
Last used in Coding & Linework Settings, the
according attributes are also shown.
Editable field
When the check box Use a list box to view codes
is checked: up to 20 attribute values are available.
When the check box Use a list box to view codes
is not checked: up to eight attribute values are
available.
Next step
Store stores the new line entered and all associated information.
Creating lines/areas
most efficiently
IF the task is to
create
THEN
multiple lines/areas use the hot key/favourites menu function Linework - Create
with subsequent
new line (quick)/Linework - Create new area (quick). Pressing
line/area IDs
the hot key or selecting the function from the
My GPS
Favourites menu creates and immediately stores the new
line/area. For the line/area ID, the line/area ID template as
defined in ID Templates is used. The code and attributes are
taken over from the last created line/area.
lines/areas with
certain codes
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
use quick coding. The job codelist must contain quick codes for
lines/areas. By typing the quick code a new line/area is created
and immediately stored with that line/area code and attributes.
For the line/area ID, the line/area ID template as defined in ID
Templates is used.
58
6.4.3
Editing a Line/Area

The functionality of all screens and fields are similar for the creation of both lines and
areas. The descriptions for lines can be applied for areas.
Access
In Data:, Lines page, press Edit...
Edit Line,
General page
Key
Description
Store
To store the changes.
More
To display End time and End date.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Line ID
Editable field
The name of the line can be edited.
A line cannot be renamed to an already
existing line ID.
Points to store Selectable list

The type of points which are used to form the line
during a survey can be edited.
Style
Editable field
The line style in which lines/areas are represented
in MapView and LGO.
Colour
Editable field
A colour in which the line will be displayed.
Number of
points
Display only
The number of points contained within the line.
Length
Display only
The sum of the distances between the points in
the sequential order in which they are stored for
the line. This length can be a horizontal grid
distance or a geodetic distance on the WGS 1984
ellipsoid.
Start date and Display only
Start time
The time/date when the line was created.
An edited line retains the creation value
for Start time.
End date and
End time
The time/date when the last point was added to
the line. This can be different to the time the
point was created. The values do not change after
deleting the last added point or after editing
unless an additional point is added to the line.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
Display only

59
Next step
Page changes to the Points page.
Edit Line,
Points page
All points belonging to the line are listed. The point that was added last to the line is
at the top of the list.
Key
Description
Store
To store the changes.
Add
To add an existing point from the working job to the line. A new point
is added above the point which was highlighted when the key was
pressed. The value for End time on the General page changes when
a point was added to the line.
Edit..
To edit the highlighted point.
Remov
To remove the highlighted point from the line. The point itself is not
deleted.
More
To display information about the point codes if stored with the line,
the time and the date of when the line was stored, the 3D coordinate
quality, the class and the flag for Linework.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Next step
Page changes to the Code page.
Edit Line,
Code page
The line code can be edited. All line codes can be selected. For Line code:None, the
line style can be changed.
The description of the code is shown as a display only field.
The attributes are shown as display only, editable fields or selectable lists depending
on their definition.
Next step
Store stores the changes.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
60
6.5
Data Log
Description
A list of all objects and free codes in the working job is displayed in order of time.
Access step-by-step
Access within data management
In Data:, Points page, press Fn Log.. to access Data Log.
Access within job management
In Job Properties:, General page, press Fn Log.. to access Data Log.
Data Log
In the column Data record, all points, lines and areas as well as free codes stored
within the working job are displayed. They are always sorted by time with the most
recent record at the top. For lines and areas, the value for Start time is relevant.
Key
Description
OK
To close the screen.
New..
To insert a free code below/before the currently highlighted object or
record. The functionality of inserting a free code is identical to the
functionality of entering a free code during a survey.
Edit..
To edit the highlighted object or free code. The functionality of
editing a free code is identical to the functionality of entering a free
code during a survey. Refer to "26.3 Free Coding".
Delete
To delete the highlighted object or free code.
More
To display information about the type of data recorded, the time and
the date of when it was stored or for lines and areas when they were
created and the codes if stored with any object.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Next step
OK returns to the screen from where Data Log was accessed.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
61
6.6
Point Sorting and Filters
6.6.1
Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas
Description
The sort settings define the order of the objects in the working job. The filter settings
define the objects to be viewed.
Three types of filters are available:
Point filter:
Line filter:
Area filter:


An active point filter shows selected points in Data:, Points page.
An active line filter shows selected lines in Data:, Lines page.
An active area filter shows selected areas in Data:, Areas page.
For information on camera and images refer to "34.4 Image Management".
The sort and filter settings are stored in the job. They are remembered after turning
off the instrument.
When a job becomes active, then the sort and filter settings of this job are saved in
the internal memory. If the data storage device is formatted then these last used sort
and filter settings are used for the job Default.
When a new job is created, the sort and filter settings from what was the working job
are copied to the new job.

Changing the working job influences the sort and filter settings for the objects. The
settings are changed to those of the selected job.

An active filter for an object is indicated in Data: by * located on the right side of the
page name.
Access
In Data: on the Points, Lines or Areas page, press Fn Filter.. to access Sorts & Filters.
Sorts & Filters,
Points page
The available fields on this screen depend on the selected setting for Filter by.
Key
Description
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed. The selected sort and filter settings are applied.
Codes..
Available for Filter by: Point code. To define the code filters. Refer
to "6.6.2 Point, Line and Area Code Filter".
Stake..
To filter points for the Stakeout application. Refer to "6.6.3 Stakeout
Filter".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
62
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Sort by
Ascending point ID, Always available. The method points are
Descending point sorted by.
ID, Forward time or
Backward time
Always available. The method the points are
filtered by.
Filter by
No filter
Shows all points.
Highest class
Shows points of highest class.
Range of point IDs Shows points with point IDs between the
entered start and end ID. The points are left
aligned and sorted by the first digit.
Pt ID wildcard
Shows points with point IDs matching the
wildcard.
Time
Shows points which were recorded within a
defined time window.
Class
Shows points of the selected class.
Instrument
Shows points originating from the selected
instrument or software program type.
Coordinate type
Shows points of the selected type of coordinates.
Point code
Shows points with selected codes attached.
Box around point
Shows points within the defined radius from
a particular point. The radius is the horizontal
distance.
Individual line
Shows points forming a selected line. This can
be useful, for example, during stakeout.
Individual area
Shows points forming a selected area. This
can be useful, for example, during stakeout.
Start ID
Editable field
Available for Filter by: Range of point IDs.
The first point to be displayed.
End ID
Editable field
Available for Filter by: Range of point IDs.
The last point to be displayed.
Wildcard
Editable field
Available for Filter by: Pt ID wildcard. * and ?
are supported. * indicates an undefined
number of unknown characters. ? indicates a
single unknown character.
Start date
Editable field
Available for Filter by: Time. The date of the
first point to be displayed.
Start time
Editable field
Available for Filter by: Time. The time of the
first point to be displayed.
End date
Editable field
Available for Filter by: Time. The date of the
last point to be displayed.
End time
Editable field
Available for Filter by: Time. The time of the
last point to be displayed.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
63
Field
Option
Description
Control (Ctrl),
Show or Hide
Adjusted (Adj),
Reference (Ref),
Average (Avge),
Measured
(Meas), Navigated (Nav),
Estimated (Est),
None
Available for Filter by: Class. Defined classes
are shown or hidden.
View
Available for Filter by: Class.
Highest triplet
The coordinate triplets of the highest class
are shown.
All triplets
All classes for one coordinate triplet are
shown.
Instrument
All, TPS, GPS,
LEICA Geo Office,
Level, Controller,
Third party SW or
Unknown
Available for Filter by: Instrument. Points
originating from this instrument type are
shown.
Type
WGS84 only or
Local only
Available for Filter by: Coordinate type.
Points from the chosen coordinate type are
shown.
Point ID
Selectable list
Available for Filter by: Box around point. The
point to which the radius is applied. Opening
the selectable list opens Data:. Refer to "6.2
Accessing Data Management".
Radius
Editable field
Available for Filter by: Box around point. The
radius of the circle within which the points are
shown.
Line ID
Selectable list
Available for Filter by: Individual line.
Opening the selectable list opens Data:. Refer
to "6.2 Accessing Data Management".
Area ID
Selectable list
Available for Filter by: Individual area.
Opening the selectable list opens Data:. Refer
to "6.2 Accessing Data Management".
Next step
Page changes to the Lines page.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
64
Sorts & Filters,
Lines and Areas
page
Key
Description
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed. The selected sort and filter settings are applied.
Codes..
Available for Filter by: Code / code group. To select the line codes to
be used.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Sort by
Ascending line ID,
Always available. The method the lines
Descending line ID, Forward are sorted by.
start time, Backward start
time, Forward end time, Backward end time
Always available. The method by which
the lines are filtered.
Filter by
No filter
Shows all lines.
Code / code group
Shows lines with selected codes
attached.
Next step
OK closes the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
65
6.6.2

Access step-by-step
Point Code Filter
Point, Line and Area Code Filter
For each object, a code filter exists. The point, line and area code filters are independent from each other. The functionality is identical. For simplicity, the point code
filter is explained.
Step
Description
1.
In Sorts & Filters select Filter by: Point code.
2.
Codes.. to access Point Code Filter.
This screen shows the point codes from the working job and codes currently used as
filter. Point codes are sorted according to the settings in Sort Codes.
Key
Description
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Group
To activate and deactivate code groups. Accesses Code Groups. Any
code group that has been previously deactivated are displayed as
deactivated here. Codes belonging to a deactivated code group are
not displayed in Point Code Filter.
Use
To activate and deactivate the filter for the highlighted code.
None or All
To deactivate or activate all point codes.
Fn Sort
To define the order of the codes. Accesses Sort Codes.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
66
6.6.3
Stakeout Filter
Description
The settings on this screen define a filter for the Stakeout application. The Stakeout
filter can be applied to show points which are already staked or points that are still to
be staked.

The stakeout filter acts in addition to any other filter set in Sorts & Filters. For
example, points still to be staked out with a particular code can be filtered.
Access
In Sorts & Filters, Points page, press Stake.. to access Stakeout Filter.
Stakeout Filter
Key
Description
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Reset
To reset the staked flag for all points of the currently working job.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
View
All points
Shows all points.
Points to stake
Shows points not yet staked out.
Staked points
Shows points which are already staked out.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
67
6.7
Scan Viewer
Description
The Scan Viewer is available on MS50.
The Scan Viewer is a point cloud viewer. One or more scans can be viewed.
The Scan Viewer respectively the Scans tab in the data management is available as
soon as a scan in available in the data job.
Scan Viewer provides a perspective display of the 3D point clouds which allows for a
better overall understanding of the measured data.
The displayed data can be navigated in.
Access
Step
Description
1.
In Data:, Scans page, highlight one scan and press Display to set Yes in the
Display column.
2.
To set Yes in the Display column for all scans. press Fn All.

Press View.
Scan Viewer
Scan View Settings
Key
Description
OK
To return to Data:, Scans page.
Fn Config..
To configure Scan Viewer. Refer to "Scan View Settings".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Background
colour
Selectable list
A colour in which the background will be
displayed.
Point cloud
colour
Intensity
The point cloud is colored according to the intensity value of the received EDM signal.
Single colour
A point cloud gets a single colour. If several scans
are available, each point cloud gets a different
colour. A colour table is defined in the background, from which the colours are picked for
each point cloud.
RGB
The point cloud is coloured according to the RGB
(red, green, blue) values from the panoramic
image. If a panoramic image has been taken when
defining a scan, the RGB values are available.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
68
Toolbar icons
Icon
Description
To scroll the Scan Viewer toolbar.
The fit icon fits all displayable data using the largest possible scale.
To zoom into the map.
Pressing ESC stops the zooming process.

To zoom out of the map.
 Pressing ESC stops the zooming process.
To zoom into the point cloud in real-time by tapping the screen and
moving the stylus up. To zoom out move the stylus down the screen.
To rotate the point cloud in 3D. The rotation point is the closest point
of the scan to the centre of the 3D viewer.
To toggle between pre-defined perspective views zoomed fit: top
view, front view and side view.
To change the pixel size of a single scan point displayed in the viewer.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data
69
7
Codelists
7.1
Overview

It is recommended to create a codelist in LGO. A codelist can be transferred from LGO
to the internal memory of the instrument using the data storage device.
Steps from creating
to using a codelist
Instrument
Codelist Management: Create codelist
LGO
Serial
upload
Tools:
Transfer
Data storage
device
Internal memory: Internal memory codelist
Selecting codelist(s) for a job:
Copy of codes
Job: Job codelist
The creating, editing and managing of codelists is explained in this chapter. In order
to use a codelist on the instrument, it must be transferred from the data storage
device to the internal memory.
Viva Series, Codelists
70
7.2
Access
Codelists
Viva Series, Codelists
Accessing Codelist Management
Step
Description
1.
Go to Job Properties:, Codelist page when creating a new job or editing an
existing working or control job.
2.
Open the selectable list for Codelist.
Listed are all codelists stored in the internal memory.
Key
Description
OK
To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. The
codes from the highlighted codelist are copied to the working job.
New..
To create a codelist. Refer to "7.3 Creating/Editing a Codelist".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted codelist. Refer to "7.3 Creating/Editing a
Codelist".
Delete
To delete the highlighted codelist.
More
To display information about the creator and the date of when the
codelist was created.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
71
7.3
Creating/Editing a Codelist
Access
In Codelists press New.. or Edit...
New Codelist or Edit
Codelist
Key
Description
Store
To store the codelist.
Codes..
To access Codes where codes can be created, edited or deleted and
code groups can be accessed.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Name
Editable field
A unique name for the codelist. The name can be up to
16 characters long and include spaces. Input required.
Description Editable field
A detailed description of the codelist. This description
can be, for example, work to be performed. Input
optional.
Editable field
The person’s name who is creating the codelist. Input
optional.
Creator
Viva Series, Codelists
72
7.4
Managing Codes
7.4.1
Accessing Codes
Description
Managing codes includes
• creating new codes
• viewing codes with their related information
• editing codes
• deleting existing codes.
Access step-by-step
Codes
Step
Description
1.
In Codelists, highlight the codelist of the codes which are to be managed.
2.
Edit.. to access Edit Codelist.
3.
Codes.. to access Codes.
Codes from currently active code groups are shown.
The listed codes belong to
the codelist selected from the internal memory when this screen was accessed
through New job\Codelist
OR
to the job codelist when this screen was accessed through Job properties\Codelist.
The * indicates codes which have attributes attached.
Viva Series, Codelists
Key
Description
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
New..
To create a new code. Refer to "7.4.2 Creating/Editing a Code".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted code. Refer to "7.4.2 Creating/Editing a
Code".
Delete
To delete the highlighted code.
More
To display information about the code description, the quick codes if
available, the code groups and the code type.
Fn Group
To view, create, delete, activate and deactivate code groups. Refer
to "7.5 Managing Code Groups".
Fn Sort
To sort codes by code name, code description, quick code or the last
use.
73
7.4.2
Creating/Editing a Code

The values for code groups, codes and attributes are case sensitive. For example, the
code group Tree is not the same as the code group TREE.


Attribute names that have already been typed in cannot be edited in a job codelist.
A new code can also be created within an application. In this case, the new code is
added to the job codelist.
New Code or Edit
Code
Key
Description
Store
To add the new code and any associated attributes to the codelist
in the internal memory.
+Attrib
To add a new editable field for an attribute of attribute type normal
and of value type text.
Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in.
To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the
attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and the
attribute value to be used as the default attribute value can be typed
in.
Fn Quit
Viva Series, Codelists
To exit the screen.
74
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Code
Editable field
A unique name for the new code. The name can
be up to 16 characters long and include spaces.
Input required.
Description
Editable field
A detailed description of the code. This description can be, for example, the full designation if
Code is an abbreviation. Input optional.
Code group
Selectable list
The code group to which the code is to be
assigned.
Code type
Selectable list
Defines the use of the code. It can be used as
thematical code for points, lines or areas or as a
free code.
Makes a code unique. A code can have the same
value with different types within the same
codelist. For example a code OAK can be of type
Point, Line, Area and/or Free.
Selectable list
Only available for Code type: Point. To allow a
new line or new area to be opened whenever the
point code is newly selected. This functionality is
also available when creating codelists with LGO
Codelist Management.
None
Select this option to disable the functionality. All
other code settings on the instrument are not
affected when this option is set.
Begin line
When a point code is newly selected, a new line is
opened and the point being stored is added to
the line. When the same point code remains
selected, a new line is not opened. The point
being stored is added to the current line.
Begin area
The behaviour for opening a new area is the same
as the behaviour for opening a new line.
Style
Selectable list
Available for Code type: Line and Code type:
Area. The style in which lines/areas are represented in MapView and LGO.
Attribute
Editable field
Up to twenty attributes can be created.
Linework
Viva Series, Codelists

Attributes of attribute type mandatory or
fixed and of value type real or integer
must be created in LGO.
75
7.5
Managing Code Groups
Access
In Codes, press Fn Group.
Code Groups
The listed code groups belong to
the codelist selected from the internal memory when this screen was accessed
through New job\Codelist
OR
to the job codelist when this screen was accessed through Job properties\Codelist.
Codes from currently active code groups are shown.
Key
Description
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
New..
To create a new code group. In New Code Group type in a unique
name for Name. Store stores the new code group typed in and
returns to Code Groups.
Edit..
Available for codelists in the internal memory. To edit the highlighted
code group. In Edit Code Group type in the changes for Name. Store
stores the changes and returns to Code Groups.
Use
To activate and deactivate the highlighted code group. Codes
belonging to a deactivated code group are not displayed in Codes.
None or All
To deactivate or activate all code groups.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Viva Series, Codelists
Column
Description
Code group
The name of the code group.
Activated
Use code group or not. The codes belonging to a deactivated code
group cannot be selected from the selectable list for code selection.
Use changes between the options.
76
8
Coordinate Systems
8.1
Overview
Description
A coordinate system
• consists of up to five elements.
• allows the conversion from WGS 1984 geodetic or cartesian coordinates to, local
cartesian, geodetic or grid coordinates and back.
• can be attached to jobs.
• can be manually defined.
• can be computed in the field.
• can be directly received from a reference network. Refer to "19.7.1 Configuration
of a Rover Real-Time Connection".
• can be downloaded to LGO.
• can be uploaded from LGO.
Using coordinate
systems on TPS
Coordinate systems are used on TPS instruments to combine GPS data with TPS data.


An attached coordinate system is not used to reduce any measured distance on
a TPS instrument.
All GPS surveyed points are always stored as WGS 1984 geodetic coordinates regardless of the coordinate system being used. Using a different coordinate system
converts the coordinates displayed on the screen, but does not convert and restore
the coordinate values in the database DBX.

Points surveyed with a TPS instrument are always stored in local GRID coordinates
regardless of the coordinate system being used.

One coordinate system can be attached to a job at one time. This coordinate system
remains attached to the job unless it is changed.
Default coordinate
systems
The default coordinate system is WGS 1984. It cannot be deleted. It is not possible to
create a coordinate system called WGS 1984.
Additional default coordinate systems may be available for certain countries.
Active coordinate
system
The active coordinate system is the one attached to the working job. One coordinate
system is always considered as the active coordinate system.
Automatic coordinate system (RTCM
transformation
parameters)
When Use auto coordinate system is checked in the RTK Rover Wizard, the coordinate system is directly received from the reference network via RTCM correction data.
Refer to "19.7.1 Configuration of a Rover Real-Time Connection".
Coordinate systems
when transferring
jobs between GPS
and TPS
When transferring a job from GPS to TPS, or vice versa, the coordinate system stays
attached to the job. It then appears like any other coordinate system on the instrument.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems
77
8.2
Access
Coordinate Systems
Accessing Coordinate System Management
Step
Description
1.
Go to Job Properties:, Coord system page when creating a new job or
editing an existing working or control job.
2.
Open the selectable list for Coord system.
Listed are all coordinate systems stored in the database DBX. Any unavailable information is shown as -----.
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted coordinate system and to return to the
previous screen. With a data storage device inserted, the selected
coordinate system will be attached to the working job.
New..
To create a coordinate system manually. Refer to "8.3 Coordinate
Systems - Creating and Editing".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted coordinate system. Refer to "8.3 Coordinate
Systems - Creating and Editing".
Delete
To delete the highlighted coordinate system. Deletion is not possible
if the highlighted coordinate system is active and its source is RTCM.
More
To display information about the type of transformation used, the
type of heights computed, the number of control points used for the
determination and the date of when the coordinate system was
created.
Fn Set-D
Available unless a default coordinate system is highlighted. To turn
the highlighted coordinate system into a user defined default coordinate system stored in the instrument.
Fn Default
To recall the deleted default coordinate systems.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems
78
8.3




Access
Coordinate Systems - Creating and Editing
Coordinate systems can be defined by manual creation or determined by calculation.
In this chapter, the manual creation of coordinate systems is explained. Refer to "42
Determine Coordinate System" for information on the determination by calculation.
Coordinate systems with a Classic 3D transformation can be defined by manual creation.
The type of transformation of the selected coordinate system determines which
elements of a coordinate system can be edited. The name of the coordinate system,
the method of residual distribution and the geoid model in use are always editable.
For coordinate systems with source RTCM, only the geoid model in use can be
changed.
However, if no projection is received with the automatic coordinate system, then the
projection can also be defined.
In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system. A copy of this coordinate
system is taken for further configurations. Press New.. or Edit...
New Coordinate
System or Edit Coordinate System
Key
Description
Store
To store the coordinate system.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems
79
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Name
Editable field
A unique name for the new coordinate system.
The name can be up to 16 characters long and
include spaces.
Available for transformations with control points.
Manually entered transformations do not have
control points. The method by which residuals are
distributed throughout the transformation area.
The transformation results become more realistic
and any strain is dispersed in the transformation.
Residuals
Transformation
1/distance,
1/distance²,
1/distance³/²
Distribute the residuals of the control points
according to the distance between each control
point and the newly transformed point.
Multiquadratic
Distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic
interpolation approach.
Selectable list
The type of transformation.
Pre Transform Selectable list
Available when editing a coordinate system and
for Twostep transformations. The name of a
preliminary 3D transformation, which, together
with the selected projection, is used to obtain
preliminary grid coordinates for a final 2D transformation.
Ellipsoid
Selectable list
Available unless projection Type: Customised.
The local coordinates are based on this ellipsoid.
Projection
Selectable list
The map projection.
Geoid model
Selectable list
The geoid model.
CSCS model
Selectable list
The Country Specific Coordinate System model.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems
80
8.4
Transformations
8.4.1
Accessing Transformation Management

Transformations cannot be accessed for coordinate systems with source RTCM. Refer
to "Automatic coordinate system (RTCM transformation parameters)".
Access step-by-step
Transformations
Step
Description
1.
In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system.
2.
Press New.. or Edit...
3.
Highlight Transformation.
4.
ENTER to access Transformations.
Listed are all Classic 3D transformations stored in the database DBX. Any unavailable
information is shown as -----.
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted transformation and to return to the
previous screen.
New..
To create a new transformation. Refer to "8.4.2 Creating/Editing a
Transformation".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted transformation. Refer to "8.4.2
Creating/Editing a Transformation".
Delete
To delete the highlighted transformation.
More
To display information about the type of heights computed and the
number of control points used for the determination of the transformation.
Fn Set-D
To turn the highlighted transformation into a user-defined default
transformation stored in the instrument.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems
81
8.4.2
Creating/Editing a Transformation

Classic 3D transformations can be created.
Access
In Transformations, highlight a transformation. A copy of this transformation is taken
for further configurations. Press New.. or Edit...
New Transformation
or Edit Transformation,
General page
Key
Store
Clear
Page
Fn Quit
Description
To store the transformation.
To set the editable fields to 0. Available on the Parameters and the
Advanced page.
To change to another page on this screen.
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Name
Option
Editable field
Type
Display only
Description
A unique name for the new transformation. The
name can be up to 16 characters long and include
spaces.
No other transformations than Classic 3D can be
created.
Next step
Page changes to the Parameters page.
New Transformation
or Edit Transformation,
Parameters page
New Transformation
or Edit Transformation,
Advanced page
Enter the known values of the transformation parameters.
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
Select at least a height mode and a transformation model.
Description of fields
Field
Height mode
Model
Option
Selectable list
Selectable list
Description
The type of heights to be computed.
The transformation model to be used. For
Model:Molodensky-Badakus, additional editable
fields are available.
Next step
Store stores the transformation.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems
82
8.5
Ellipsoids
8.5.1
Accessing Ellipsoid Management

Ellipsoids cannot be accessed for coordinate systems with source RTCM. Refer to
"Automatic coordinate system (RTCM transformation parameters)".
Access step-by-step
Step
Description
1.
In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system.
2.
Press New.. or Edit...
3.
Highlight Ellipsoid.
4.
ENTER to access Ellipsoids.
8.5.2
Creating/Editing an Ellipsoid
Access
In Ellipsoids, highlight an ellipsoid. A copy of this ellipsoid is taken for further configurations. Press New.. or Edit...
New Ellipsoid or Edit
Ellipsoid
Key
Description
Store
To store the ellipsoid.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Name
Editable field
A unique name for the new ellipsoid. A name is
mandatory, can be up to 16 characters long and
include spaces.
Axis a
Editable field
The semi-major axis a.
1/f
Editable field
The reciprocal value of flattening f.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems
83
8.6
Projections
8.6.1
Accessing Projection Management

Projections cannot be accessed for coordinate systems with source RTCM. Refer to
"Automatic coordinate system (RTCM transformation parameters)".
Access step-by-step
Projections
Step
Description
1.
In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system.
2.
Press New.. or Edit...
3.
Highlight Projection.
4.
ENTER to access Projections.
Listed are all projections stored in the database DBX. Any unavailable information is
shown as -----.
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted projection and to return to the previous
screen.
New..
To create a new projection. Refer to "8.6.2 Creating/Editing a Projection".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted projection. Refer to "8.6.2 Creating/Editing a
Projection".
Delete
To delete the highlighted projection.
Fn Set-D
Available unless a default projection is highlighted. To turn the highlighted projection into a user-defined default projection stored in the
instrument.
Fn Default
To recall the deleted default projections.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems
84
Description of columns
Column
Option
The projection type. Refer to standard surveying literature for details on projections.
Type
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems
Description
Customised
Customised projection. Certain fixed projections which
cannot be defined by any of the following options.
Transverse
Mercator
Transverse Mercator. Conformal projection onto a
cylinder with its axis lying on the equatorial plane. The
cylinder is tangential to a meridian.
UTM
Universal Transverse Mercator. Transverse Mercator
Projection with fixed zone-defining constants. The
central meridian is selected automatically according to
the selected zone number.
Oblique
Mercator
Oblique Mercator. Oblique Mercator Conformal projection onto a cylinder. The cylinder is tangent to any
circle other than the equator or a meridian.
Mercator
Mercator. Conformal projection onto a cylinder with its
axis lying on a meridian plane. The cylinder is tangent
to the sphere along the equator.
Lambert 1
parallel
Lambert 1 Parallel. Conformal projection onto a cone,
with its axis coinciding with the z-axis of the ellipsoid.
Lambert 2
parallel
Lambert 2 Parallel. Conformal projection onto a cone,
with its axis coinciding with the z-axis of the ellipsoid.
The cone is secant to the sphere.
Cassini
Soldner-Cassini. Projection onto a cylinder. It is not an
equal area or conformal. The scale is true along the
central meridian and along lines perpendicular to
central meridian.
Polar stereo
Polar Stereographic. Conformal azimuthal projection
onto a plane. The point of projection is on the surface
of the ellipsoid diametrically opposite of the origin
which is the centre of the projection.
Double stereo
Double Stereographic. Conformal azimuthal projection
onto a plane. The point of projection is on the surface
of the sphere diametrically opposite of the centre of
the projection.
RSO
Rectified Skewed Orthomorphic. This is a special type
of Oblique Mercator projection.
85
8.6.2
Creating/Editing a Projection
Access
In Projections, highlight a projection. A copy of this projection is taken for further
configurations. Press New.. or Edit...
New Projection or
Edit Projection
Key
Description
Store
To store the projection.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Name
Editable field
A unique name for the new projection. A name is
mandatory, can be up to 16 characters long and
include spaces.
Type
Selectable list
The projection type. The setting for determines
the availability of the subsequent fields for the
parameters of the projection. Refer to "8.6.1
Accessing Projection Management" for a description of the projection types.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems
86
8.7
Geoid Models
8.7.1
Overview
Use in the field
For use on the instrument in the field, geoid field files are created from the geoid
model.
Create geoid
models on the
instrument
Geoid models can be created on the instrument in one of three ways:
1.
2.
3.
The geoid field file is stored on a data storage device and can be used when the
data storage device is inserted in the instrument. It is recommended for large
geoid field files. This method is explained in this chapter.
The geoid field file is stored in the internal memory of the instrument. It is
recommended for large geoid field files. This method is also explained in this
chapter.
The geoid field file is transferred to the internal memory and can be used at any
time. Refer to "30.1 Transfer user objects"for information on how to transfer
geoid field files to the internal memory on the instrument.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems
87
8.7.2
Access step-by-step
Geoid Models
Accessing Geoid Model Management
Step
Description
1.
In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system.
2.
Press New.. or Edit...
3.
Highlight Geoid model.
4.
ENTER to access Geoid Models.
Listed are all geoid models stored in the database DBX. Any unavailable information is
shown as -----. For example, ----- would be shown if the geoid field file associated to
the geoid model is not available on the data storage device / internal memory.
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted geoid model and to return to the previous
screen.
CF card
To create a new geoid model. The \DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the
data storage device is automatically scanned for geoid field files.
Refer to "8.7.3 Creating a New Geoid Model from the Data Storage
Device / Internal Memory".
Edit..
To view the highlighted geoid model. None of the fields can be
edited. The geoid field file from which the geoid model was created
must be stored in the internal memory or in the \DATA\GPS\GEOID
directory on the data storage device.
Delete
To delete the highlighted geoid model. The geoid field file which was
associated with this geoid model is then also deleted.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems
88
8.7.3
Creating a New Geoid Model from the Data Storage Device / Internal
Memory
Requirement
At least one geoid field file with the extension *.gem is in the \DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the data storage device / internal memory.
Create geoid model
step-by-step
Step
Description
1.
Listed in Geoid Models are all geoid models stored in the internal
memory.
OR
Press CF card to scan the \DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the data storage
device.
2.
For each geoid field file on the data storage device or in the internal memory,
one geoid model is automatically created. The names given to the geoid
models are those names which were entered in LGO.
Existing geoid models are automatically overwritten by new models
with the same name.

3.
The creation of a geoid model is finished.
8.8
CSCS Models
Use in the field
For use on the instrument in the field, CSCS field files are created from the CSCS
model.

The creation of CSCS models on the instrument and the functionality of all screens and
fields are similar to those for geoid models. Refer to " Requirement".
The directory on the data storage device / internal memory for CSCS field files with the
extension *.csc is \DATA\GPS\CSCS.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems
89
9
Jobs & Data - Create control data

All changes made effect the control job.
Access
Create new point
Methods for
creating lines, arcs
and polylines
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Create control data.
Data.. displays the Data in the control job.

This screen is similar to the New Point screen. Refer to "New Point, Coords page".
Key
Description
Next
To store the point and to remain in the screen. The point ID increments according to point ID template.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Select one of the following options to create a
line/arc/polyline.
Method
2 points and Line For lines/polylines. Uses two known points to
- 2 points
define the reference line.
Pt, brng, dist,
grade and Line Pt, brng, dist,
grad
For lines/polylines. Defines the reference line
using a known point, a distance, an azimuth and
the gradient of the line. A new point is created at
the end of the line.
Pt, brng, dist, ∆ht For lines/polylines. The same as Pt, brng, dist,
and Line - Pt,
grade/Line - Pt, brng, dist, grad but uses the
brng, dist, ∆ht
difference in height instead of the gradient. A
new point is created at the end of the line.
3 points and Arc - For arcs/polylines. Defines the reference arc using
3 points
three known points.
2 points/radius
and Arc - 2
points/radius
Create new line/arc
For arcs/polylines. Defines the reference arc with
two known points and a known radius.
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display can be used to select the desired
point.
Key
Description
Store
To store the line/arc to the control job.
Next
To store the line/arc and to remain in the screen. The line ID increments according to line ID template.
Survy..
To manually measure a point. Available when a point field is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual line ID different to the
Fn Run
defined ID template and the running line ID according to the ID
template.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Create control data
90
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Line ID
Editable field
The name of the new line. The configured ID
template for lines is used. The ID can be changed
in the following ways:
• To start a new sequence of line IDs, type over
the line ID.
• For an individual name independent of the ID
template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to
the next ID from the configured ID template.
Azimuth
Editable field
The azimuth of the line from the start point.
∆ height
Editable field
The difference in height from the start point to
the end point of the line.
End point
Selectable list
The last point forming the line.
Grade
Editable field
The gradient of the line from the start point to
the end point of the line.
Horiz distance Editable field
Line length
Display only
The horizontal grid distance from the start point
to the end point of the line.
For lines: The horizontal grid distance between
the two points of the line. If the distance cannot
be calculated, ----- is displayed.
For arcs. The horizontal grid distance along the
arc between the points. If the distance cannot be
calculated, ----- is displayed.
Radius
Editable field
The radius of the arc.
Second point
Selectable list
The medium point forming the arc.
Start point
Selectable list
The first point forming the line.
Point ID
Editable field
The end point of the defined line. Available for
creating a line with Method:Pt, brng, dist, ∆ht.
Next step
Page changes to the Code page. Refer to "New Line, Code page".
Create new polyline
- Segment by
segment
Step
Description
1.
In Create New Polyline select Segment by segment.
2.
Select the method to use for the first segment. Refer to "Methods for
creating lines, arcs and polylines" for a description of methods.
3.
Type in the values for the first segment. Refer to "Create new line/arc" for a
description of the input fields.
4.
Next to store the segment.
5.
Repeat step 2. to 4. until all segments are entered.
6.
Finish to store the polyline.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Create control data
91
Create new polyline
- Enter point IDs
In Create New Polyline select Enter point IDs.
Key
Description
Store
To store the line to the control job.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual line ID different to the
Fn Run
defined ID template and the running line ID according to the ID
template.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Line ID
Editable field
The name of the new line. The configured ID
template for lines is used. The ID can be changed
in the following ways:
• To start a new sequence of line IDs, type over
the line ID.
• For an individual name independent of the ID
template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to
the next ID from the configured ID template.
Points in line
Editable field
Enter a list of points from the control job and
characters to define the line.
.
Entering a dot between the points adds point-bypoint to the polyline.
Example: Entering 1.3.5 creates a polyline with
the points 1, 3 and 5 in that order.
-
Entering a minus between the points adds all
points between the two points to the polyline,
according to the point ID ordering.
Example: Entering 1-5 creates a polyline with all
points between 1 and 5.
This can only be used with numeric point
IDs.

Line length
()
Entering () creates an arc between the points
which are outside () through the point which is
inside ().
Example: Entering 1(3)5 creates a 3-point arc
from 1 to 5 through 3 as the arc mid point.
Display only
The calculated 2D line length according to the
selected points. Units according to distance in
regional settings.

Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Create control data
The line length is shown in the unit configured in Regional Settings, Distance page.
92
Create offset line &
pts
Key
Description
OK
To store the line/points to the control job.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Line ID
Selectable list
To select a line. Open the selectable list to access
the Line Selection screen showing all selectable
lines from the control job.
Offset
Editable field
Perpendicular offset of the line. Left is negative.
RIght is positive.
Objects to
create
Line
To create lines only.
Points
To create points only.
Line & points
To create lines and points.
Editable field
The name of the new line. The configured ID
template for lines is used. Type over the line ID to
change it.
Starting point Editable field
ID
The point ID of the line start point. The configured
ID template for points is used.
Line ID
Extend existing
polyline
Step
Description
1.
In Line to extend select the line to extend.
2.
OK.
3.
Continue as if creating a new polyline. Refer to "Create new polyline Segment by segment".
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Create control data
93
10
Jobs & Data - Import data
10.1
Overview
Description
The data to import must be stored on the data storage device or in the internal
memory.
Data can be imported to a job
• on the data storage device.
• on the internal memory.
Import formats
Format
Characteristic
Description
ASCII
Import variables
Point ID, grid coordinates, thematical
codes. No free codes, no attributes.
Format definition
Free format. Use and order of variables
and delimiter can be defined during
import.
Units
As currently configured on the instrument
Height
Orthometric or ellipsoidal
Specialities
Local heights but no coordi- Points are imported without coordinates
nates in file
but with local height and code if available.
Coordinates but no heights Points are imported without height but
in file
with coordinates and code if available.
GSI8
GSI16
No coordinates or heights
in file
No import
No point IDs in file
No import
Import variables
Point ID (WI 11), local coordinates (WI 81,
WI 82, WI 83), thematical codes (WI 71).
No free codes, no attributes. Example for
GSI8:
110014+00001448 81..01+00001363
82..01-00007748 83..01-00000000
71....+000sheep
Format definition
Fixed format. Easting and Northing can be
switched during import.
Units
As defined in the GSI file
Heights
Orthometric or ellipsoidal
Specialities
Local heights but no coordi- Points are imported without coordinates
nates in file
but with local height and code if available.
Coordinates but no heights Points are imported without height but
in file
with coordinates and code if available.
DXF
No coordinates or heights
in file
No import
No point IDs in file
No import
Import variables
Block, point, line, arc, polyline. Local coordinates. No free codes, no attributes.
Format definition
Fixed format (X/Y/Z).
Units
Not predefined.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data
94
Format
Characteristic
Description
Heights
Z value imported as orthometric.
Specialities
Checks
No coordinates or heights
in file
No import
MxGenio
-
-
LandXML
-
-
DTM data
Format definition
DXF file containing DTM data
Points are always imported with the class Ctrl and a coordinate quality of -----. Refer
to "Appendix J Glossary".
While importing points to a job, checks are performed against point ID, class and
coding of points already existing in the job.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data
95
10.2
Importing Data in ASCII/GSI Format
Requirements
At least one ASCII file with any file extension, is stored in the \DATA or \GSI directory
of the data storage device.

Do not remove the data storage device while importing the data.
Access
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Import data\Import ASCII data.
Import ASCII Data
Key
Description
OK
To import the data.
Config..
To define the format of the data to be imported.
View
To view the file from which data will be imported.
Fn Hts..
To define how heights and the Easting are imported.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
From
Selectable list
Defines from which storage device the data are
imported.
Data type to
import
Selectable list
Defines if ASCII or GSI data are imported.
From file
Selectable list
For Data type to import: ASCII data: All files in the
\DATA directory on the data storage device can be
selected.
For Data type to import: GSI data: All files with
extension *.gsi in the \GSI directory on the data
storage device can be selected.
Header lines
Selectable list
This option allows up to ten header lines which
can exist in an ASCII file to be skipped. Select the
number of header lines.
To job
Selectable list
Available when Create new job on import is not
checked. Choosing a job as destination for import
makes this job the working job.
Editable field
Available when Create new job on import is
checked. The name of the new job.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data
96
Field
Option
Description
Create new job Check box
on import
When this box is checked and the file from which
the data should be imported is selected the To
job field displayes a suggested jobname. The
suggested jobname is the name of the file
without the extension.
Create new job Selectable list
as
The new job can wither be a working job or a
control job.
Device
Selectable list
The device on which the new job will be stored.
Next step
Config.. accesses, depending on selection for Data type to import, either Configuration or Configuration (GSI).
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data
97
Configuration
Key
Description
OK
To return to the previous screen.
Default
To recall the default import settings.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Delimiter
Selectable list
The separator between the import variables.
Point ID posi- None (not for
Select the positions of the particular variables. An
tion, Easting Point ID position) example is shown at the bottom of the screen.
position,
and from 1 to 20
Northing position, Height
position and
Code position
Available for Delimiter: Space.
Multiple
spaces
between data
Number of
lines/pt
Yes
For space delimited data having multiple spaces
between the variables.
No
For space delimited data having one space
between the variables.
Selectable list
Available for Delimiter: Line feed. The number of
lines used to describe each point.
Next step
Step
Description
1.
OK leads back to Import ASCII Data.
2.
Fn Hts.. to access Define Ht Type & Easting Import.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data
98
Configuration (GSI)
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Switch
WI81/WI82
Yes or No
All WI 81 data, normally Easting, is imported as
Northing and all WI 82 data, normally Northing, is
imported as Easting. This coordinate switch is
necessary for “left handed” coordinate systems.
Definition of
feet
Selectable list
The type of feet used in the GSI file.
Next step
Define Ht Type &
Easting Import
Step
Description
1.
OK leads back to Import ASCII Data.
2.
Fn Hts.. to access Define Ht Type & Easting Import.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Import as
Selectable list
The height type for the imported data.
Easting
Selectable list
The Easting can be imported as written in the
ASCII file or it can be multiplied by -1. This change
is required by some coordinate systems.
OK leads back to Import ASCII Data.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data
99
10.3
Importing Data in LandXML Format
Requirements
At least one file in LandXML format with the file extension *.xml has to be stored in
the \DATA directory of the data storage device.
The file can contain points, lines, areas, alignments (Road/Rail/Tunnel jobs) and
DTM’s/PLA’s.

Access
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Import data\Import XML data.
Import XML Data
Key
Description
OK
To import the data.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
From
Selectable list
Defines from which storage device the data are
imported.
From file
Selectable list
All files with extension *.xml in the \DATA directory on the data storage device can be selected.
Import points, Check box
lines, areas,
coord
systems &
point codes
When this box is checked, points, lines and areas
are imported and a job can be selected.
Import alignments
Check box
When this box is checked, alignments are
imported and a job can be selected.
Import DTM
Check box
When this box is checked, DTM’s are imported and
a new DTM job is created which can be selected.
Next step
OK start the import.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data
100
10.4
Importing Alignment Data
Requirements
The requirements depend on the file type:
• For MxGenio: At least one file in MxGenio format with the file extension *.txt is
stored in the \DATA directory of the data storage device.
• For LandXML and Terramodel: At least one file in LandXML format with the file
extension *.xml is stored in the \DATA directory of the data storage device.
• For DXF: At least one file in DXF format with the file extension *.dxf is stored in
the \DATA directory of the data storage device.
• For Carlson: At least one file in Carlson format with the file extension *.cl is
stored in the \DATA directory of the data storage device.
Access
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Import data\Import alignment data.
Import Alignment
Data
Key
Description
OK
To import the data.
Config..
To define the format of the data to be imported. Available for Data
type to import: MX Genio, Data type to import: DXF and Data type to
import: Carlson.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Data type to
import
Selectable list
Defines if MX Genio, LandXML, DXF, Terramodel
or Carlson data are imported.
From file
Selectable list
For Data type to import: MX Genio: All files with
the extension *.txt in the \DATA directory on the
data storage device can be selected.
For Data type to import: LandXML: All files with
the extension *.xml in the \DATA directory on the
data storage device can be selected.

For cross section-based LandXML data,
vertex connection definitions are mandatory.
For Data type to import: DXF: All files with extension *.dxf in the \DATA directory on the data
storage device can be selected.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data
101
Field
Option
Description
For Data type to import: Terramodel: A
Terramodel *.xml file in the \DATA directory on
the data storage device can be selected. The file
must contain the centreline.
For Data type to import: Carlson: All Carlson
centreline files with the extension *.cl in the
\DATA directory on the data storage device can be
selected.
Section file
Selectable list
For Data type to import: Terramodel: All ASCII
cross-section files with the extension *.txt in the
\DATA directory on the data storage device can be
selected.
For Data type to import: Carlson: All Carlson
cross-section files with the extension *.sct in the
\DATA directory on the data storage device can be
selected.
Job type
Road and Rail
To road job or Selectable list
To rail job
Configuration
The type of job the data are converted to.
When importing data, a new/empty rail or road
job must be created for the data to be stored in.
This screen is available for Data type to import: MX Genio, Data type to import: DXF
and Data type to import: Carlson.
Key
Description
OK
To return to the previous screen.
Fn About
To display information about the program name, the version number,
the date of the version, the copyright and the article number.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
File linear
units
Selectable list
The units used in the file to import.
Line prefix
Editable field
Available for Data type to import: DXF. The prefix
to be used.

Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data
Line prefix can not be defined for Carlson
data.
102
Next step
Import MX Genio
Data,
for Road jobs
Step
Description
1.
OK leads back to Import Alignment Data.
2.
OK opens, depending on the selections made, a screen for the line, layer or
track selection.
Key
Description
OK
To start the import.
Centre
To set the highlighted line as centreline.
Use
To set Yes or No in the Use column for excluding/including the highlighted line from/to import.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.

Line selection is also possible on the Map page.
IF
THEN
a single line is to be selected
tap on the line.
multiple lines are to be selected
the context menu is to be activated
click the
icon, drag the stylus on the
screen in a diagonal line to make a rectangular area.
hold down the supplied stylus anywhere
on the map for 0.5 second. Refer to "38.6
Context Menu".

To deselect all objects for import,
select Clear selected object.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Line name
Displays the name of all the lines in the layer.
CL
Shows CL for the line selected as centreline.
Use
For Yes: The selected line is used for the import.
For No: The selected line is not used for the import.
Next step
OK start the import.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data
103
Define Track Design,
MxGenio for Rail
jobs
For MxGenio, only single track Rail jobs can be created.
Key
Description
OK
To start the import.
Ch CL
To select/deselect the highlighted line as external chainage centreline. The selection is optional.
T. CL
To select/deselect the highlighted line as track centreline. The selection is mandatory.
Rail L
To select/deselect the highlighted line as left rail. The selection is
optional.
Rail R
To select/deselect the highlighted line as right rail. The selection is
optional.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.

Line selection/deselection is also possible on the Map page.
IF
THEN
a single line is to be selected/deselected tap on the line.
the context menu is to be activated
hold down the supplied stylus anywhere
on the map for 0.5 second. Refer to "38.6
Context Menu".
Description of columns
Column
Description
Line name
Displays the name of all the lines.
Use as
Displays a line selected as external chainage centreline, track
centreline, left rail or right rail.
Next step
OK start the import.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data
104
Select Layers to
Import,
for DXF Road/Rail
data, LandXML
Road/Raildata,
Terramodel Road
data and Carlson
Roaddata
Key
Description
OK
To start the import.
Edit..
• For Road: To define the centerline and to turn lines on and off for
the highlighted layer.
• For Rail: To define the external chainage centreline (optional), to
define the track centerline (mandatory), to define the left rail
(optional) and to define the right rail (optional).


By default, the longest stringline is set as the centreline.
For DXF and LandXML data (Road and Rail), line selection, per
layer, is also possible in Edit Layer, Map page.
• To select a single line, tap on the line.
• For Road: To select multiple lines, click the
icon, drag the
stylus on the screen in a diagonal line to make a rectangular
area.
• To activate the context menu, hold down the supplied stylus
anywhere on the map for 0.5 second. Refer to "38.6 Context
Menu".
Use
To set Yes or No in the Use column for excluding/including the highlighted line from/to import.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Layer name
Displays the name of all layers available for importing.
Use
For Yes: The selected layer is used for the import.
For No: The selected layer is not used for the import.
Next step
OK start the import.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data
105
10.5
Importing Data in DXF Format
Requirements
At least one file in DXF format with the file extension *.dxf has to be stored in the
\DATA directory of the data storage device.

Do not remove the data storage device while importing the data.
Access
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Import data\Import DXF data.
Import DXF Data
Key
Description
OK
To import the data.
Config..
To define the format of the data to be imported.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
From
Selectable list
Defines from which storage device the data are
imported.
From file
Selectable list
All files with extension *.dxf in the \DATA directory on the data storage device can be selected.
To job
Selectable list
Choosing a job as destination for import makes
this job the working job.
Next step
Config.. accesses Configuration.
Configuration
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Block prefix
Editable field
Optional prefix to imported blocks.
Point prefix
Editable field
Optional prefix to imported points.
Line prefix
Editable field
Optional prefix to imported lines.
File units
Selectable list
Choosing the unit for the DXF data to be
imported.
Create points Check box
at the vertices
of lines
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data
Option if points will be created at vertices of the
imported line/arc/polyline elements.
106
Field
Option
Convert white Check box
elements
Height to
exclude
Selectable list
Apply height Check box
to 2D CAD
data on import
Height to
apply
Editable field
Description
Option if white coloured elements will be
converted to black coloured elements.
Height values inside the DXF file are considered
invalid and will not be converted.
When this box is checked, a height can be defined
which is then applied to all imported 2D CAD
points.
Available when Apply height to 2D CAD data on
import is checked. The height to apply to 2D CAD
points.
Next step
OK leads back to Import DXF Data.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data
107
10.6
Importing DTM Data
Requirements
• At least one file in DXF format with the file extension *.dxf has to be stored in the
\DATA directory of the data storage device.
• The DXF file must contain a 3D face layer.

Do not remove the data storage device while importing the data.
Access
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Import data\Import DTM data.
Import DTM data
Key
Description
OK
To import the data.
Config..
To define the linear units of the data to be imported.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
From
Selectable list
Defines from which storage device the data are
imported.
From dxf file
Selectable list
All files with extension *.dxf in the \DATA directory on the data storage device can be selected.
To job
Selectable list
Choosing a job as destination for import makes
this job the DTM job.
Device
Selectable list
Defines to which storage device the data are
imported.
Next step
Config.. accesses Configuration.
Configuration
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
File linear
units
Selectable list
Choosing the unit for the DXF data to be
imported.
Next step
OK leads back to Import DXF Data.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data
108
11
Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
11.1
Overview
Description
Data can be exported
• to a file on the data storage device.
• to a file on the internal memory.
Export format
Format
Characteristic
Description
ASCII
Export variables
Point ID, grid coordinates, thematical
codes, code description, up to four attributes and linework. No free codes.
Format definition
Free format. Use and order of variables
and delimiter can be defined during
export.
Units
As currently configured on the instrument
Height
Orthometric or ellipsoidal
Export variables
Refer to the online help of LGO.
Format definition
Composed individually as format file using
LGO. Refer to the online help of LGO for
information on creating format files.
Units
Defined within the format file.
Coordinate conversion
All coordinate types are supported.
Height
All height types are supported. If the
desired height cannot be computed, the
default value for the missing variable is
output.
Custom
Specialities:
DXF
Points in file outside of
CSCS model
If the variable is missing, the default value
is output.
Points in file outside of
geoid model
If the variable is missing, or a geoid separation is available, the default value is
output.
Coordinate conversion
All points are converted to local grid position using the coordinate system.
Height
Orthometric height and ellipsoidal height
are supported.
Specialities:
LandXML
Points in file outside of
CSCS model
Points outside of CSCS model are not
exported.
Points in file outside of
geoid model
The ellipsoidal height is exported.
Coordinate conversion
All points are converted to local grid position using the coordinate system.
Height
Orthometric height and ellipsoidal height
are supported.
Specialities:
Points in file outside of
CSCS model
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
LocalGrid position of the points outside of
CSCS model is not exported.
109
Format
Characteristic
Description
Points in file outside of
geoid model
The ellipsoidal height is exported.
FBK/RAW5/ Coordinate conversion
RAW
All points are converted to local grid position using the coordinate system.
Height
If a geoid model exists, then orthometric
height is supported, otherwise ellipsoidal
height is exported.
Units
Metre, US Ft or Int Feet, Gons, Dec Deg,
DMS
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
110
11.2
Exporting Data from a Job to an ASCII Format
Description
The settings on this screen define the data that is converted and exported and what
format is used.
Data is exported from the selected job. Currently active view, filter and sort settings
are applied.
Access
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export ASCII data.
Export ASCII Data
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted format file.
Config..
To define the format of the data to be exported.
Filter..
To define the order in which points, lines and areas are exported as
well as which points are exported.
CrdSys.
To update the coordinate system in which the coordinates are
exported.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Export to
Selectable list
Defines where the exported data are saved to.

For Export to: Internal memory the data is
always exported to the \DATA directory.
Folder
Selectable list
The data can be exported to the \DATA or the root
directory or to the folder where the selected job
is located.
Job
Selectable list
To select the job to export.
Coord system Display only
Output file to
write
Editable field
The coordinate system currently attached to the
selected job.
The name of the file to which the data will be
exported.
Next step
Config.. accesses Configuration.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
111
Configuration
Key
Description
OK
To return to the previous screen.
Default
To recall the default import settings.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Delimiter
Selectable list
The separator between the import variables.
1st position to None, Point ID,
Select the variable of the particular positions. An
8th position
Easting,
example is shown on the Export ASCII Data
Northing, Eleva- screen.
tion, Code, Code
information,
Code & code info,
Description,
Attribute 1 to
Attribute 4 and
Linework
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
112
11.3
Exporting Data from a Job to a Custom Format
Description
The settings on this screen define the data that is converted and exported and what
format is used.
Data is exported from the selected job. Currently active view, filter and sort settings
are applied.
Requirements
At least one format file was created using LGO and transferred to the internal memory.
Access
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export custom data.
Export Custom Data
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted format file.
Config..
To configure the default extension to be used.
Filter..
To define the order in which points, lines and areas are exported as
well as which points are exported.
CrdSys.
To update the coordinate system in which the coordinates are
exported.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Export to
Selectable list
Defines where the exported data are saved to.

For Export to: Internal memory the data is
always exported to the \DATA directory.
Folder
Selectable list
Available for Export to: CF card, Export to: SD
card and Export to: USB. The data can be
exported to the \DATA, the \GSI or the root directory or to the folder where the selected job is
located. Data must be stored to the \GSI directory
to be read in a TPS instrument.
Job
Selectable list
To select the job to export.
Coord system Display only
The coordinate system currently attached to the
selected job.
Format file to
use
Selectable list
The format files currently available in the internal
memory.
Output file to
write
Editable field
The name of the file to which the data will be
exported.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
113
11.4
Exporting Data in DXF Format
General
Data can be exported to a DXF file in a data storage device or the internal memory.

Do not remove the data storage device while exporting the data.
Access
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export DXF Data.
Export DXF data
Key
Description
OK
To accept the settings.
Config..
To define what is exported.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Folder
Selectable list
Defines if the data is exported to the \DATA directory or to the folder where the selected job is
located.
Export to
Selectable list
Available for Folder: Data. Defines which data
storage device the data is exported to.
Display only
Available for Folder: Same as job. Displays the
data storage device of the selected Job.
Selectable list
To select the job to export.
Job
Coord system Display only
File name
Editable field
The coordinate system currently attached to the
selected job.
The name of the file to which the data will be
exported.
Next step
Config.. goes to Configuration, Export page.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
114
Configuration,
Export page
Key
Description
OK
To export the data.
Filter..
To define the order in which points, lines and areas are exported as
well as which points are exported. Refer to "6.6.1 Sorting and Filters
for Points, Lines and Areas".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Points
Check box
When this box is checked, points are exported.
Lines
Check box
When this box is checked, lines are exported.
Areas
Check box
When this box is checked, areas are exported.
Export images Check box
When this box is checked, images are exported.
Next step
Page changes to the DXF page.

Configuration,
DXF page
For information on camera and images refer to "34.6 Exporting Images".
Description of fields
Field
Option
Export lines & Selectable list
areas
Description
Defines if lines and areas are exported as Line or
Polyline entities.
Symbol size
Editable field
Defines the size used for creation of the LGO
symbols.
Dimensions
Selectable list
Defines if the data is exported as 2D or 3D.
Export to DXF Selectable list
layer
Export LGO
symbols
Check box
Defines the DXF layer.
When this box is checked, the relevant symbols
for LGO are also exported.
Next step
Page changes to the Labels page.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
115
Configuration,
Labels page
Key
Description
OK
To accept the settings.
Edit..
To define if the label is exported, its colour, the number of decimal
places to use and what layer or block it is exported to.
More
To display information about the layer name, the colour and the decimals.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn About
To display information about the program name, the version number,
the date of the version, the copyright and the article number.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Label
The name of the label.
Export
Shows if the label is exported or not.
Layer name
The name of the layer that is exported which can be:
• Name of a user-defined layer
If the label is exported to a user-defined layer.
• Same layer as point
If the label is exported to the same layer as the point symbol.
• Block with point
If the label is exported to a block with the point symbol.
• ----The label is not exported.
Colour
The colour of the label.
Decimals
The number of decimals used.
Next step
Edit.. access Labels.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
116
Labels
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
First field on
screen
Check box
When this box is checked, the chosen label types
are exported.

All other fields on the screen are active
and can be edited.
Colour
Selectable list
Defines the colour for the label.
Decimals
From 0 to 4
Available for the labels Coordinates and Height.
Defines the number of decimal places for the
label.
Export to
User defined
The label is exported to a user defined layer.
Same layer as
point
The label is exported to the layer which the point
symbols are exported to.
Block with point
The label is exported to a block with the point
symbol and all other labels which are also set to
be exported to Block with point. Only one block
is created for a point and there can be one or
more labels in this block.
Layer name
Selectable list
Available for Layer name: User defined is
checked. The name of the layer.
Export code
descriptions
Check box
Available when Point Code is highlighted in
Configuration, Labels page. Defines if the code
descriptions are exported with the point code.
Export
attribute
names
Check box
Available when Attribute is highlighted in Configuration, Labels page. Defines if the attribute
names are exported with the attribute values.
Next step
OK returns to Configuration.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
117
11.5
Exporting Data in XML Format
General
Data can be exported to a XML file in the.
• \DATA directory or
• same directory as the job is in
on the
• data storage device or
• internal memory.

Do not remove the data storage device while exporting the data.
Access
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export XML Data.
Export XML Data
Key
Description
OK
To export the data.
Config..
To define what is exported.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Export to
Selectable list
Defines where the exported data are saved to.
Folder
Selectable list
The data can be exported to the \DATA directory
or to the folder where the selected job is located.
Job type
Points/lines/area The type of job to be exported. To use this option,
s, Road, Rail or
select LandXML version: 1.2 and check Use
Tunnel
Hexagon XML extension in Configuration, XML
page.
Job
Selectable list
Coord system Display only
File name
Editable field
To select the job to export. The selectable list
depends on the setting for Job type.
The coordinate system currently attached to the
selected job.
The name of the file to which the data will be
exported.
Next step
Config.. accesses Configuration, Export page.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
118
Configuration,
Export page
Key
OK
Fn Quit
Description
To return to the previous screen.
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Points
Lines
Areas
Images
Option
Check box
Check box
Check box
Check box
TPS measure- Check box
ments
GPS measure- Check box
ments
Codes
Check box
Free codes
Check box
Application
results
Check box
Description
When this box is checked, points are exported.
When this box is checked, lines are exported.
When this box is checked, areas are exported.
When this box is checked, all onboard, TPS and
panoramic images are exported.
When this box is checked, TPS observations are
exported.
When this box is checked, GPS observations are
exported.
When this box is checked, point codes, line codes
and area codes are exported.
When this box is checked, the free code, free
code description, free code group and the free
code attributes, are all exported to the LandXML
file associated to each exported point.
Free code export works also when Use Hexagon
XML extension is checked on the XML page.
When this box is checked, all application results
such as stakeout and reference line are exported.
They are only exported when Use Hexagon XML
extension is checked on the XML page.
Next step
Page changes to the XML page.

Configuration,
XML page
For information on camera and images refer to "34.6 Exporting Images".
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Dimensions
Selectable list
Defines the dimension of the exported entities.
LandXML
version
Selectable list
Defines the LandXML version of the file exported
file.
Use Hexagon
XML extension
Check box
Available for LandXML version: 1.2. When this
box is checked, a job type can be selected for the
export in the Export XML Data screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
119
11.6
Exporting Data using Stylesheets
Access
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export using stylesheets.
Export Data Using
Stylesheet
Key
Description
OK
To export the data.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Folder
Selectable list
The data can be exported to the \DATA directory
or to the folder where the selected job is located.
Export to
Selectable list
Defines where the exported data is saved to.
Job type
Points/lines/area The type of job to be exported.
s, Road, Rail or
Tunnel
Job
Selectable list
Coord system Display only
To select the job to export.
The coordinate system currently attached to the
selected job.
Stylesheet to
use
Selectable list
The stylesheets currently available in the
\CONVERT folder on the internal memory of the
CS: My Device\Leica GeoSystems\SmartWorx
Viva\Convert.
Description:
Display only
A detailed description of the stylesheet. This
information is entered by the user in a variable
within the stylesheet.
File name
Editable field
The name of the file to which the data will be
exported. The file extension is defined by the user
in a variable inside the stylesheet. Default is "txt"
if the extension has not been defined.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
120
11.7
Exporting Data in FBK/RW5/RAW Format
General
Data can be exported to an AutoDesk FBK, TDS RAW, TDS RW5, Carlson RW5 or MicroSurvey RW5 file. The newly created file is stored in the \DATA directory of the data
storage device or the internal memory.
The formatted FBK files can be imported directly into Autodesk products.
The created RW5 and RAW files can be processed with various survey office packages.
Although the export operation converts any job to an FBK/RW5/RAW file, the figure
creation is based on existing lines and areas present in the job.
Point codes
Each point collected should have a point code.
IF you are creating
THEN
Autodesk FBK file
Point codes are used to match the Description Keys in
Autodesk LDT and Civil 3D to each position located.
TDS RW5 file
Point codes are used to generate raw linework in TDS
Foresight.
MicroSurvey RW5 file
Point codes are used to match the Description Keys in
MicroSurvey CAD to each position located.
Line/Area ID
IF you are creating
THEN
Autodesk FBK file
The figure ID follows the user selection as defined in
the configuration menu.
TDS RW5 file
The line and area IDs are not used when importing
data into TDS Foresight.
MicroSurvey RW5 file
The line and area IDs are not used when importing
data into MicroSurvey CAD 2005.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
121

Do not remove the data storage device while exporting the data.
Access
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export FBK/RW5/RAW data.
Export
FBK/RW5/RAW data
Key
Description
OK
To export the data.
Config..
To configure some format-specific options.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Export to
Selectable list
Defines where the exported data are saved to.
Folder
Display only
The data can be exported to the \DATA directory
or to the folder where the export job is located.
Job
Selectable list
To select the job to export.
Coord system Display only
The coordinate system currently attached to the
selected job.
Data format
Autodesk FBK,
TDS RW5, TDS
RAW, Carlson
RW5 or MicroSurvey RW5
Ensure that this field is set properly.
File name
Editable field
Default is the name of the selected Job. It can be
changed.
The extension designation (.FBK, .RW5 or
.RAW) is added automatically.

Next step
Config.. to access the configuration screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
122
Configuration for
FBK,
General page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Use numerical Check box
pt ID
Description
Available unless Data format: TDS RW5.
Pt ID offset
Editable field
The point IDs are offset by this value.
Use angle
right
Check box
Define if angle right values are exported.
Figure ID
Selectable list
Available for Data format: Autodesk FBK. For all
other formats, the figure ID is set to point code
only automatically.
Next step
Page changes to the Objects page.
Configuration for
FBK,
Objects page
Key
Description
OK
To return to Export FBK/RW5/RAW data.
All
To check all boxes at once.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn About
To display information about the application name, the version
number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
All fields
Check box
To include points from an application, check a
box.
Next step
OK returns to Export FBK/RW5/RAW data.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
123
11.8
Copy Data Between Jobs
Description
This chapter explains the process of copying data from one job to another.

Access
Important features:
• Points are copied as defined by the point filter settings.
• Points selected for copying can be viewed in a points listing. The point sort settings
define the order of the points in the listing. The point filter settings define the
points to be viewed in the listing.
• Only points are copied - observation data is not copied.
• When points are copied from one job to another:
• the point codes and attached attributes are also copied.
• the Class is retained.
• the Sub class is retained.
• the Source is changed to Copied Point.
• the point coordinate quality is retained.
• the Instrument Flag is retained.
• the Date and Time is retained.
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Copy data between jobs.
Copy Data Between
Jobs
Key
Description
OK
To copy a selection of points.
Filter..
To define the point sort and/or point filter settings of points from the
job. Refer to "6.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas".
Data..
To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job.
Points, lines and areas are shown on separate pages. Selected sort
and filter settings apply. Refer to "6 Jobs & Data - Data".
CrdSys.
To select a different coordinate system.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
From job
Selectable list
Describes where the points are to be copied from.
Coord system Display only
To job
Selectable list
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
The coordinate system which is currently
attached to the job.
Describes where the points are to be copied to.
124
12
Instrument - TPS settings
12.1
Measure mode & target
12.1.1
Measure & Target Settings
Description
The settings on this screen define the active EDM Electronic Distance Measurement
and ATR Automatic Target Recognition settings.

Available options depend on the purchased model, for example with or without ATR.
Access
Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Measure mode & target.
Measure & Target
Settings
Description
• This screen has two pages - the Survey page and the Setup page.
• The Survey page and Setup page contain identical fields.
• The settings made in the Survey page are used by all applications and all measurements taken outside of the Setup application.
• The settings made in the Setup page are only used inside the Setup application.
• Any changes made to the Measure & Target Settings, for example via icons or
hotkeys, while the Setup application is active, only affect the Setup Measure &
Target Settings.
• Any changes made to the Measure & Target Settings, for example via icons or
hotkeys, while the Setup application is not active, only affect the Survey Measure
& Target Settings.
• When entering the Setup application, the Setup Measure & Target Settings are
active.
• When leaving the Setup application, the Survey Measure & Target Settings are
active.
• Both Survey and Setup Measure & Target Settings are part of the working styles.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Test
To access the Measurement Signal Test screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
125
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Measure
Prism
All fields are set to the last used options.
The infrared EDM exists for all instrument types
and allows to measure the distance to a prism or
a tape. For Target aiming: Automatic or Target
aiming: Lock this option is automatically set.
Any surface
To measure without reflector.
Single
Available for Measure: Prism. When a single
measurement with high precision is required.
Single (fast)
Available only for Measure: Prism. When a single
measurement is required but the time to survey
must be minimised. The highest accuracy is of
less importance.
Measure mode
Use this mode for example when performing,
“typical” topographical surveys.
Continuous
When continuous distance measurements are
required.
Use this mode for example when continually
checking the positions of a moving prism pole.
Continuous+ Available for Measure: Prism. This is the measurement mode for the interpolation of angle
measurements in prism LOCK continuous mode.
In difference to normal continuous mode, where
angle measurements are only assigned to certain
distance measurements, Continuous+ will
perform a linear interpolation between the
previous and following angle measurement,
based upon the timestamp of the EDM measurement. Using this interpolation procedure, a
higher accuracy for all dynamic applications, for
example machine guidance, is possible.
Use this mode for example with machine control
applications.
Averaging
Repeats measurements in standard measuring
mode. The average distance of No. of distances
and the standard deviation for the averaged
distance are calculated.
Use this mode for example when performing
cadastral survey where rigid guidelines must be
followed.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
Long range
(>4km)
Available only for Measure: Prism. When long
distances (> 4 km) to prisms are needed.
Use this mode for example for triangulation
measurements.
Long range
avg
Available for Measure: Prism. Whenever long
distances (> 4 km) to prisms are needed but in
addition, average values and standard deviations
for multiple precise distance measurements are
required.
126
Field
Option
Description
Use this mode for example when performing
triangulation measurements within a cadastral
survey where rigid guidelines must be followed.
Precise
Available for Measure: Prism on TS50/TM50. Fine
measuring mode for highest precision measurements with prisms.
Available if Measure mode: Averaging or
Measure mode: Long range avg. Input field for
the maximum number of distances to be averaged from 2 to 999 distances.
No. of distances
Target
Selectable list Target names as configured in the Targets
screen.
Leica constant
Display only
The additive constant as stored for the selected
prism in the SmartWorx Viva software.
Absolute constant Display only
The true additive constant.
Target aiming
Manual
Measurements are done without any automation. ATR search and/or ATR measurement are
not performed.
Automatic
Positioning to static prisms. The ATR sensor is
used for measurements to static prisms. If
needed an ATR measurement or ATR search is
performed after pressing Meas or Dist.
Lock
Unavailable for SmartStation/TS12 Lite. The
instrument locks onto and follows the moving
prism. The ATR sensor is used to follow moving
prisms and to find prisms after loss of lock.
Depending on Measure single or continuous
measurements are performed pressing Meas or
Dist.
Good
If weather conditions are normal, then select this
mode.
Rain & fog
To increase the instrument measuring ability
during suboptimal weather conditions. This mode
is automatically deactivated when the instrument
is turned off.
Rain & fog
always
As for Rain & fog, however this mode stays active
when the instrument is turned off.
Visibility
Sun & reflec- To increase the instrument measuring ability
tions
during incident solar radiation and reflections, for
example safety vests. This mode has a considerabel influence on the range (restriction 100 150 m). This mode is automatically deactivated
when the instrument is turned off.
Sun & rflctns As for Sun & reflections, however this mode
always
stays active when the instrument is turned off.
Allow lock in on
the fly
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
Check box
Available for Target aiming: Lock. For robotic
instruments and the remote operation with
CS10/CS15.
127
Field
Option
Description
When this box is checked, the instrument locks to
a prism as soon as it enters the ATR field of view
when previously locked to a prism and target lock
was lost.

A power search helps to lock to shaking
prisms.
Works on all prisms and tape targets.
Check box
Available for Target aiming: Lock. For robotic
instruments and the remote operation with TS15.
When this box is checked, the performance
improves for distances less than 20 m to the
instrument. The instrument reacts faster to
changes in prism speed and direction.
Use precise target Check box
aiming
Available for the 0.5" instruments of TS50/TM50.
When this check box is checked, ATR measurements with higher accuracy are performed.
High dynamics at
short range
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
128
12.1.2
Targets
Description
Each prism type has an absolute constant.
Leica Geosystems prisms are predefined as defaults and can be selected. Additional
prisms can be defined.
Default targets
Following default prisms are always available on the instrument:
Product Name
Name in list
GRZ4, GRZ122
Leica 360° Prism Prism
+23.1 mm
-11.3 mm
GMP111-0
Leica Mini 0
Prism
0.0 mm
-34.4 mm
GRZ101
Leica Mini 360°
Prism
+30.0 mm
-4.4 mm
GMP101, GMP111
Leica Mini Prism Prism
+17.5 mm
-16.9 mm
GZM29, GZM30,
GZM31, CPR105
Leica Reflectve
Tape
Tape
+34.4 mm
0.0 mm
GPR1, GPR111,
GPR113, GPR121,
GPH1P
Leica Round
Prism
Prism
0.0 mm
-34.4 mm
-
Reflectorless
RL
+34.4 mm
0.0 mm
Prism
+28.1 mm
-6.3 mm
Leica HDS
MPR122
Target
For Machine
Control
purposes only!

Access
Type
Leica
constant
Absolute
constant
Open the selectable list for Target in Measure & Target Settings.
Targets
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted target and to return to the previous screen.
New..
To define a new target. Refer to "12.1.3 Creating/Editing a Target".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted target. It is not possible to edit default
targets. Refer to "12.1.3 Creating/Editing a Target".
Delete
To delete the highlighted target. It is not possible to delete default
targets.
More
To display information about the additive constant, the target type
and the creator of the target.
Fn Default
To recall previously deleted default targets and to reset default
targets to the default settings. User-defined targets are not
affected.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
129
12.1.3
Creating/Editing a Target
Access
In Targets, highlight a target. All constants are copied from this target. Press New.. or
Edit...
New Target
Key
Description
Store
To store the target.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Name
Editable field
A significant name for the new target.
Type
Prism, Tape or
Undefined
The type of target to be defined.
Leica constant Editable field
The additive constant as stored for the selected
prism in the SmartWorx Viva software.

Absolute
constant
Creator
Editable field
The true additive constant. The additive constant
is always in mm.

Editable field
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
An additive constant of 0.0 mm has been
defined for the Leica Geosystems
standard targets GPR1, GPR111, etc. All
entered or selected additive constant
values are differences to this 0.0 mm
based Leica Geosystems TPS prism
system.
The additive constants of non-Leica
Geosystems prisms are often given in the
true zero prism system. Use the following
formula to convert the additive constant
to the Leica Geosystems TPS prism
system. This Leica constant must be
entered into the Leica instrument.
Formula: True zero constant - 34.4 mm =
Leica constant.
It is highly recommended to check the additive constant for non-Leica Geosystems
prisms on a baseline with an appropriate
procedure.
A name of the creator or other comments can be
entered.
130
12.2
Prism search settings
Description
The settings on this screen define
• the size of search windows for prisms to be searched in. The prisms can be
searched with PowerSearch in the PowerSearch window or with ATR in the Fine
search window.
• the behaviour of automatic prism search after the target is lost in lock mode.
Access
Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Prism search settings.
Prism Search
Settings,
Target prediction
page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Default
To recall the default settings.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Time limit for
predicting target
location
From 1 s to
5s
If the target is lost when Target aiming: Lock the
path of the prism is predicted for the selected
number of seconds.
If no target found
after prediction
then
Stop
searching
Perform no search after prediction.
Start fine
search
Perform search after prediction with ATR in a
dynamic Fine search window.
Start PowerSearch
Perform search after prediction with PowerSearch. Activate PowerSearch on the PowerSearch window page.
Turn to last
msd pt
If the target is lost when Target aiming: Lock,
then the instrument turns back to the last stored
point. The field of view is disabled while the
instrument is repositioning.
Next step
Page changes to the PowerSearch window page.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
131
Prism Search
Settings,
PowerSearch
window page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
New..
To define new PowerSearch window.
Centre
To centre the PowerSearch window to the current position of the
telescope.
Show
To position the telescope to corners of PowerSearch window.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Use PowerSearch
window
Check box
If checked, PowerSearch searches in the
defined window.
Hz angle left, Hz angle Display only
right, V angle up and V
angle down
The left, right, upper and lower boundaries of the PowerSearch window.
Minimum range
No limit and from Minimum distance of the search range
25 m to 175 m for the PS window to be defined.
Maximum range
From 25 m to
175 m and No
limit
Maximum distance of the search range
for the PS window to be defined.
Next step
Page changes to the Fine search window page.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
132
Prism Search
Settings,
Fine search window
page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Default
To recall the default settings.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Width of Hz search Editable field
Horizontal extent of window.
Height of V search Editable field
Vertical extent of window.
Use ultra fine
aiming
Check box
Reduces the field of view of the ATR. The setting
is only applied for Target aiming: Automatic in
Measure & Target Settings.
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
133
12.3
Atmospheric corrections
Description
The settings on this screen define the atmospheric ppm and the refraction.
For standard applications, the distance is corrected due to atmospheric influences.
The geometrical correction and the projection distortions are set to 0.00. Heights are
reduced with the standard refraction coefficient.
Refer to the TS11 User Manual, the TS15 User Manual, the Leica TS12 Lite User Manual
and the MS50/TS50/TM50 User Manual for information on calculations.
Access
Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Atmospheric corrections.
Atmospheric Corrections,
Atmospheric ppm
page
The atmospheric distance corrections are derived from the dry air temperature, air
pressure or elevation above mean sea level MSL, and the relative air humidity or wet
bulb temperature.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn P<>E
To change Pressure to Elev above MSL and back.
Fn %<>T'
To change Humidity to Temp wet-bulb and back.
Fn ppm=0
To set Atmospheric ppm: 0.0.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Temperature
Editable field
Sets the temperature.
Pressure or Elev
above MSL
Editable field
Sets the atmospheric pressure or the elevation
above mean sea level dependent on selection.
Humidity or Temp Editable field
wet-bulb
Sets the relative air humidity or the wet bulb
temperature dependent on selection.
Atmospheric ppm Editable field The atmospheric ppm is either set or calculated
or display only from the values in the previous fields.
Next step
Page changes to the Refraction page.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
134
Atmospheric Corrections,
Refraction page
The refraction correction is taken into account during the calculation of the height
difference.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Default
To recall the default settings.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Use refraction
Check box
coefficient correction
Coefficient (k)
Editable field
Description
If checked, refraction correction is applied to
measurements.
Refraction coefficient to be used for calculation.
Next step
Page changes to another page.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
135
12.4
Level bubble & compensator
Description
If raw data is to be displayed and recorded, the compensator and the horizontal
correction can be deactivated.
The graphical level bubble is displayed correctly for the situation when the first
screen is aligned with two foot screws.

Access
Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Level bubble & compensator.
OR
Tap
/
.
Level Bubble &
Compensator
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
For a TS remote controlled by a CS: To return to Remote Control.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Intensity
Scroll bar
To adjust the intensity of the laser plummet.
Tilt compensator
On
Vertical angles are relative to plumb line. The
horizontal angle is corrected for the transversal
tilt errors if Hz correction: On.
Off
Vertical angles are relative to vertical/standing
axis.
Always off
The mode stays always deactivated.
On
The horizontal angles are corrected for the line of
sight, tilting axis and if Tilt compensator: On
transversal tilt errors.
Off
Horizontal angles are not corrected.
Always off
The mode stays always deactivated.
Hz correction
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
136
12.5
Offsets & Quality Control
Description
Quality control
The instrument can be configured to monitor sequentially stored measurements and
to notify the user if the coordinates lie within a defined range of each other.
If configured, the X,Y coordinates of a point being stored can be compared to the
coordinates of the last previously stored point. If the difference is less than the
defined position tolerance then a warning is shown. It can now be decided whether to
store the point or not.
If configured, backsight target points and resection target points which were measured during the setup procedure are then also checked in this manner.
Offsets
The offset values are applied to measured points. The Offset function allows offset
points to be determined, for instance when the reflector cannot be set up directly on
a point. Transverse, longitudinal and/or elevation offsets can be defined from the
reflector position to the offset point. All of the displayed and recorded measurement
data is in relation to the offset point.
P2
d6
d1
d2
d3
P1
d5
P3
P0
TS_003
Access
d4
P0
P1
P2
P3
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
d6
Station
Current position
Offset point
Offset point
Offset cross left
Offset cross right
Offset length towards instrument
Offset length away from instrument
Offset height down
Offset height up
Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Offsets & Quality Control.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
137
Offsets & Quality
Control,
Target QC page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Check for repeated
Check box
measurements to same
target
Target tolerance
Description
If checked, target checking is activated.
Editable field The position tolerance. The units are defined
by User\System settings\Regional settings.
Next step
Page changes to the Target offsets page.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
138

If configured in a survey screen page, the offset values appear also in the survey
screen page in Survey.
Offsets & Quality
Control,
Target offsets page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Offst=0
To set all offsets to 0.000.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Offset mode
Reset after
storing
The offset values are reset to 0.000 after a point
is measured with Store or Meas.
Permanent
The offset values are applied to every measured
point until reset or changed.
Offset left/right
Editable field Sets cross offset of target point, perpendicular to
the line of sight.
Offset in/out
Editable field Sets length offset of target point, in the direction
of the line of sight.
Offset height
Editable field Sets height offset of target point.
Next step
Page changes to another page.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
139
12.6
Lights / Lights & accessories
Description
The settings on this screen allow the lights on the instrument to be configured.
For motorised instruments (TS15, TS12 Lite), the horizontal/vertical boundaries of a
search window can be defined.
Access
For manual TPS instruments:
Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Lights.
For motorised TPS instruments:
Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Lights & accessories.
Lights & Accessories,
Lights page
This screen is available for motorised instruments.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Use laser guide
Check box
When this box is checked, either the GUS74 or
the red laser guide can be activated.
Use the laser guide Check box
Available if the instrument has a GUS74. If
checked, the GUS74 is turned on.
Intensity
From 0 % to
100 %
To adjust the GUS74 intensity using the left and
right arrow keys.
Use the red laser
pointer
Check box
If checked, the red laser of the reflectorless EDM
is turned on.
Use the reticule
light
Check box
If checked, the reticule illumination is turned on.
Intensity
From 0 % to
100 %
To adjust the reticule illumination intensity using
the left and right arrow keys.
Use the instrument Check box
guide lights (EGL)
Intensity
From 0 % to
100 %
If checked, the Emitting Guide Light (EGL) is
turned on.
This field is only available if EGL is fitted.
To adjust the EGL/Laser Guide intensity using the
left and right arrow keys.
Next step
Page changes to the Hz limit page.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
140
Lights & Accessories,
Hz limit page
This screen is available for motorised instruments.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
New..
To define new search window. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Show
To position the telescope to corners of the search window.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Limit Hz moveCheck box
ment of instrument
When this box is checked, horizontal boundaries
for the search window can be defined.
Hz begin and Hz
end
The boundaries of the search window as horizontal angles where the search begins/ends.
Editable field
Next step
Page changes to the V limit page.
Lights & Accessories,
V limit page
This screen is available for motorised instruments.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
New..
To define new search window. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Show
To position the telescope to corners of the search window.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Limit V movement Check box
of instrument
Limit movement
for
When this box is checked, vertical boundaries for
the search window can be defined.
Selectable list Limits can be set for eyepiece and/or lens.
V begin and V end Editable field
Lights & Accessories,
Battery & charging
page
Description
The boundaries of the search window as vertical
angles where the search begins/ends. For
eyepiece and lens.
This screen is available for MS50/TS50/TM50 on the CS when is connected to a
MS50/TS50/TM50.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
141
Description of fields
Field
Option
Determines the power source to be used when
internal and external battery are attached at the
same time.
Main power source
Internal
battery
Select this setting if an internal battery and an
external power source are attached but the
internal battery must be used first.
External
power
Select this setting if:
• an interal battery is attached but an
external battery will be attached later.
Then the external power source will used
as power source.
• an external power source and an internal
battery is attached but the external power
source must be used.
Charge the internal Check box
battery when
external power is
connected
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings
Description
The internal battery is charged from the external
power source, if attached.
142
13
Instrument - GPS settings
13.1
RTK rover wizard
13.1.1
Overview
Description
Using this wizard, the settings for a real-time rover behaviour are defined at one
glance. These settings are stored in an RTK profile.
Access
Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\RTK rover wizard.

If RTK profiles exist, the wizard starts with the screen shown in this section. Otherwise, the wizard starts the process of creating a new RTK profile. In this case refer to
"13.1.2 Creating a New RTK Profile".
RTK rover wizard
Key
Description
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen
within the wizard.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Next step
IF you want to
THEN
create a new set of select Create a new profile, press Next and continue with
settings
"13.1.2 Creating a New RTK Profile".
select a different
set of settings
select Load an existing profile, press Next and continue with
"13.1.3 Loading an Existing RTK Profile".
edit an existing set
of settings
select Edit an existing profile, press Next and continue with
"13.1.4 Editing an Existing RTK Profile".
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
143
13.1.2
Creating a New RTK Profile
RTK rover wizard,
Enter a name for the
new RTK profile.
Type in the name and a description for the new set of settings.
Key
Description
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen
within the wizard.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
13.1.3
Loading an Existing RTK Profile
RTK rover wizard,
Choose an RTK
profile.
Select an existing RTK profile from the selectable list. Listed are profiles that match
the instrument in use.
Key
Description
Finish
To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen
within the wizard.
Delete
Pressing this key deletes the RTK profile currently shown in the
selectable list.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
144
13.1.4
Editing an Existing RTK Profile
RTK rover wizard,
Choose an RTK
profile.
Select the RTK profile to be edited from the selectable list. Listed are profiles that
match the instrument in use.
Key
Description
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen
within the wizard.
Delete
Pressing this key deletes the RTK profile currently shown in the
selectable list.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Create a copy Check box
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
Description
Creates a copy before the editing process starts.
145
13.2
Satellite tracking
Description
The settings on this screen define which satellite system, satellites and satellite
signals are used by the instrument.
Access
Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Satellite tracking.
Satellite Tracking
Settings,
Tracking page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
• Any of the GNSS can only be disabled, if at least one other GNSS in enabled.
• At least one GNSS must be enabled.
• GPS can never be disabled:
• On the base station.
• On the GS14
• On the GS05/GS06
Field
Option
Description
GPS
Check box
Defines if the GPS L1, L2 and L5 signals are
accepted by the instrument when tracking satellites. For L5, a licence is required.
Glonass
Check box
Defines if GLONASS L1 and L2 signals are
accepted by the instrument when tracking satellites.
Galileo
Check box
Defines if Galileo E1, E5a, E5b and Alt-BOC signals
are accepted by the instrument when tracking
satellites.
BeiDou
Check box
Defines if BeiDou B1 and B2 signals are accepted
by the instrument when tracking satellites.
Show message & Check box
audio warning,
when loss of lock
occurs
Activates an acoustic warning signal and a
message given by the instrument when satellites
are lost.
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
146
Satellite Tracking
Settings,
Advanced page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes.
Hlth..
Available for Satellite health: User defined. To configure the satellites used in the survey.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Cut-off angle
Editable field
Sets the elevation in degrees below which satellite signals are not recorded and are not shown to
be tracked. Recommended settings:
• For real-time: 10°.
• For purely post-processing applications: 15°.
DOP limit
None, GDOP,
HDOP, PDOP or
VDOP
If activated, the limit defined in Limiting value is
checked. GPS positions are unavailable when the
limit is exceeded.
Limiting value Editable field
The maximum acceptable DOP value.
Available unless DOP limit: None.
L2C tracking
Automatic
L2 signals which are flagged as unhealthy are not
recorded or used for real-time computations. This
setting is selected automatically when GPS is
checked on the Tracking page.
Always track
L2C signals are always tracked.
Sets the satellite tracking behaviour.
Satellite
health

This setting is remembered when the
instrument is turned off. It is stored as
part of the configuration set.
Automatic
Incoming satellite signals are monitored by the
instrument. Data from signals which are flagged
as unhealthy is not recorded or used for real-time
computations.
User defined
Satellites must manually be included/excluded
from data recording and real-time computations
with Hlth...
Next step
Hlth.. changes to Satellite Health.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
147
Satellite Health
The screen contains a page for each GNSS system the receiver is configured to track.
The explanations given for the softkeys are valid for all pages.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Use
To change between the options in the column User.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Option
Description
Satellite
01 to 50
The Pseudo Random Noise number (GPS, 1 to 32),),
the Slot ID (GLONASS, 1 to 24) or the Space Vehicle
number (Galileo, 1 to 50, and BeiDou, 1 to 37) of
the satellites.
There is a prefix G for GPS satellites, a prefix R for
GLONASS satellites, a prefix E for Galileo satellites
and a prefix C for BeiDou satellites.
System
OK, N/A or
Unhealthy
Information on the satellite health taken from the
almanac. N/A stands for not available.
User
Bad
Excludes satellite from tracking.
OK
Includes satellite in tracking.
Auto
Automatic satellite tracking when satellite is
healthy.
Next steps
Step
Description
1.
Page changes to the Glonass page, to the Galileo page and to the BeiDou
page, where GLONASS satellites, Galileo and BeiDou satellites used in the
survey can be configured.
2.
OK returns to Satellite Tracking.
3.
OK returns to Main Menu.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
148
13.3
Antenna heights
13.3.1
Rover Antenna Heights
Access
Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Antenna heights.
Rover Antenna
Heights
This screen consists of two pages:
• If a GS10/GS15/GS08plus/GS14 is selected, then no pages are available.
• If a GS05/GS06 is selected, then two page tabs are available - Internal and
External. The internal settings are used when an external (connected by cable)
antenna is NOT used. The external settings are used when an external
(connected by cable) antenna is used.
Key
OK
Fn Quit
Description
To return to the Main Menu.
To exit the screen.
Description of fields for the External page
Field
Option
Rover antenna Selectable list
Vertical offset Display only
Antenna
height when
measuring
points
Editable field
Use offset for Check box
moving
antenna
Offset
Editable field
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
Description
Leica Geosystems antennas are predefined as
default and can be selected from the list. Default
antennas contain an elevation-dependent correction model. New antenna correction models can
be set up and transferred to the instrument using
LGO. Open the list to define or edit additional
antennas.
Refer to "14 Antenna Heights".
The vertical antenna offset for the selected
antenna.
Sets the default antenna height for the current
working style. This height is then also the default
antenna height during the use of applications.
The antenna height can still be changed during a
survey. The initial value depends on the selected
antenna.
Unavailable for SmartStation. The height is added
in the Setup and GPS Survey application.
When unchecked, the moving antenna height is
considered the same as the default antenna
height.
When the check box Use offset for moving
antenna is checked: Sets the default antenna
height for auto points and for the moving part of
a track when logging raw observations.
149
13.3.2
Antennas
Description
Listed are antennas in the instrument’s internal memory.
Access
Open the selectable list for Rover antenna in Rover Antenna Heights.
Antennas
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted antenna and to return to the previous
screen.
New..
To define a new antenna. Refer to "13.3.3 Creating/Editing an
Antenna".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted antenna. It is not possible to edit default
antennas. Refer to "13.3.3 Creating/Editing an Antenna".
Delete
To delete the highlighted antenna. It is not possible to delete default
antennas.
Fn Default
To recall previously deleted default antennas and to reset default
antennas to the default settings. User-defined antennas are not
affected.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
150
13.3.3
Creating/Editing an Antenna
Access
In Antennas, highlight an antenna. All offsets are copied from this antenna. Press
New.. or Edit...
New Antenna or Edit
Antenna,
General page
Key
Store
Clear
Page
Fn Quit
Description
To store the antenna.
To set the editable fields to 0. Available on the Parameters and the
Advanced page.
To change to another page on this screen.
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Name
Hz offset
Option
Editable field
Editable field
Vertical offset Editable field
L1 phase
Editable field
offset
L2 phase
Editable field
offset
Check box
Copy additional corrections
Next step
Page changes to the IGS page.
New Antenna or Edit
Antenna,
IGS page
Description
A unique name for the new antenna.
Horizontal offset of measurement reference
point.
Vertical offset of measurement reference point.
Offset of L1 phase centre.
Offset of L2 phase centre.
Allows additional corrections to be copied from
the antenna which was highlighted before this
screen was accessed.
The combination of values typed in here provides a unique standardised ID for the
antenna being used.
Description of fields
Field
IGS name
Option
Editable field
Serial number Editable field
Setup number Editable field
Description
The International GPS/GNSS Service name of the
antenna.
The serial number of the antenna.
The setup number of the antenna. Identifies the
version number of the current calibration.
Next step
Store stores the new antenna.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
151
13.4
Quality control
Description
The settings on this screen define the limits for coordinate quality accepted for point
occupations.
Access
Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Quality control.
Quality Control,
General page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes.
Param..
To configure the time interval after which a point occupation can be
stopped automatically.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Automatically Check box
stop point
measurement
Activates a selectable list for the stop criteria.
Stops the measurements automatically when the
parameter defined for Stop criteria reaches
100 %.
Stop criteria
Defines the method used for Automatically stop
point measurement. The setting determines the
computation and value to be shown in the survey
screen mask and in the status screen. Parameters
for the selected method are defined with
Param...
Accuracy or Posi- Available when working with real-time device.
tions
Records observations between pressing Meas
and Stop. Recommended for normal real-time
applications. Refer to the diagram below.
Instantaneous
Records the time tag when Meas is pressed. A
coordinate is interpolated between the positions
at the neighbouring two epochs to filter out
effects of slight movement. Recommended when
measuring positions of objects while the antenna
is moving very fast.
Example: Measuring the position of lampposts by
driving in a car along the road and pressing Meas
when the car is next to the lamppost. Refer to the
diagram below.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
152
Field
Option
Description
Stop & go indicator
Available when raw data logging is configured.
The occupation time is based on a user defined
baseline length, the number of satellites and the
GDOP.
Time, Observations or Number
of satellites
Available when working without real-time device
and when raw data are recorded for postprocessing.
Automatically Check box
store point
Stores points automatically after stopping the
point occupation. If Automatically stop point
measurement and Automatically store point are
checked, then points are recorded by pressing
one button.
Check quality Check box
before storing
If activated, the limit defined in Tolerance is
checked before storing a point. A warning signal
is given when the limit is exceeded.
Check
Position only,
The type of coordinate quality to be checked
Height only or
before storing a point.
Position & height
Tolerance
Editable field
The maximum acceptable coordinate quality.
Stop criteria: Accuracy or Positions
b
c
a) Time in epochs
a b) Meas pressed
1
2
3
4
5
d
GS_046
c) Stop pressed
d) Post-processed coordinates computed
by averaging resulting positions of
epochs 2 and 3
Stop criteria: Immediately
b
1
2
c
3
4
5
5
f
2
1
e
GS_047
4
3
a) Time in epochs
b) Meas pressed and point coordinates
a
interpolated based on epochs 2 and 3
c) Meas pressed and point coordinates
interpolated based on epochs 4 and 5
d)
Plan
view
d
e) Meas pressed and point coordinates
interpolated based on epochs 2 and 3
f) Meas pressed and point coordinates
interpolated based on epochs 4 and 5
Next step
IF parameters for
Stop criteria
THEN
are not to be config- Page changes to the Advanced page.
ured
are to be configured Param.. changes to Parameters for Auto Stop or Real-Time
Stop Criteria.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
153
Quality Control,
Advanced page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Automatically start measuring point on entering
survey
No
Starts point occupation when pressing
Meas.
Yes
Starts point occupation automatically
when entering the survey screen. All
subsequent points must be occupied by
pressing Meas.
Timed
Starts point occupation automatically at a
certain time.
Next step
OK closes the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
154
Parameters for Auto
Stop
The parameters shown on this screen depend on the setting for Stop criteria.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Time at point
Editable fields Sets the required observation time for each point.
Counting time starts when Meas is pressed. The
instrument stops measuring when the set length
of time is reached.
Number of obs
Editable fields Sets the required number of observations that
are to be recorded at each point. Counting observations starts when Meas is pressed. The instrument stops measuring when the set number of
observations is reached.
At logging rate
Display only
8+ satellites for, 7 Editable field
satellites for, 6
satellites for, 5
satellites for and 4
satellites for
Baseline length
Description
Displays the rate at which static raw observations
are logged as configured.
Sets the required observation time depending on
the number of satellites available. Counting time
starts when Meas is pressed. The instrument
stops measuring when the set length of time for
a certain number of satellites is reached.
Should the number of available satellites change
during observation, the observations already
recorded will be taken into account.
Selectable list Used for the calculation of the occupation time
for Stop criteria: Stop & go.
Extend occupaFrom 1.0 to
tion time by factor 5.0
of
The factor extends the point occupation time
recommended by SmartWorx Viva. It directly influences the occupation time shown in Time at point
on the Survey screen.
Next step
Step
Description
1.
OK closes the screen.
2.
OK returns to the screen from where Parameters for Auto Stop was
accessed.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
155
Observation time
depending on the
number of satellites
available
a
d
c
b
b
b
6
5
4
e
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GS_048
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Meas is pressed. Counting time starts.
Observation is stopped.
40 % for six satellites.
30 % for five satellites.
30 % for four satellites.
Thin line represents 6 satellites for: 3 min.
Bold line represents 5 satellites for: 5 min.
Dashed line represents 4 satellites for: 7 min.
Real-Time Stop
Criteria
The parameters shown on this screen depend on the setting for Stop criteria.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Pos quality
Editable field
better than
and Ht quality
better than
Sets the maximum position and height qualities
for each point occupation. Calculating the qualities starts when Meas is pressed. The instrument
stops measuring when the position and height
qualities are both less than the configured values.
Editable field
Raw data is logged for a minimum number of
positions even when the Pos quality better than
and Ht quality better than is already less than the
specified maximum.
Positions
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
156
Field
Option
Description
Position
update
Display only
Displays the value for GPS position update rate
as configured in Screen & Audio Settings,
Screen page.
No. of positions
Editable field
Sets the number the positions which must be
observed before the instrument stops measuring.
Counting the number of positions starts when
Meas is pressed.
Next step
OK closes the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
157
13.5
Raw data logging
Description
Logged raw observations are used for
• static and kinematic operations. With these operations, raw data is always postprocessed in the office. Raw data must therefore be logged on both base and rover
instruments.
• real-time operations
to check the work in the office by post-processing.
OR
to fill in gaps when a real-time position could not be calculated in the field, for
example, due to problems with the real-time data reception from the reference
station or the RTK network provider
Observations must be logged on all instruments which will be used for postprocessing.
The settings on this screen define the logging of raw observations.
Access
• The licence for raw data logging is required to log GNSS raw data on the GS, CS or
TS instrument.
• The licence for RINEX logging is required to log RINEX data on the GS or CS. RINEX
data cannot be logged on the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite.
The licence key can only be loaded from an SD card using the Webserver or
myWorld@Leica Geosystems.
Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Raw data logging.
Raw data logging
settings
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
158
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Log data for
postprocessing
Check box
Activates raw data logging.
Log data to
Controller or GS
sensor
For GS10/GS14/GS15/GS25, data can either be
logged to the field controller or to the GS.
Controller
For GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12 data can only be
logged to the field controller.
TS instrument or For SmartStation, data can either be logged to
GS sensor
the TS11/TS15 or to the GS14/GS15.
Logging starts Selectable list
Available for GS10/GS14/GS15/GS25 with Log
data to: GS sensor. Data logging can start as
soon as the instrument is turned on or only while
in the Survey application.
For GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12 data can only be
logged with the Survey application.
Log data when Static
Rate
Raw observation logging during static intervals
when occupying a point. The instrument has to be
stationary. For SmartStation, this is the only
option available.
Static & kinematic
Raw observation logging during static and moving
intervals. For post-processed kinematic rover
operations. Unavailable for SmartStation.
Kinematic
Raw observation logging during moving intervals.
For post-processed kinematic antenna operations. Unavailable for SmartStation.
From 0.05s to
300.0s
Rate at which raw observations are logged.
For GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12 logging rates of
0.2s and slower are supported.
Recommendations:
• The maximum logging rate using Bluetooth on
the field controller is 0.2 s.
• For static operations with long baselines and
over long time Rate: 15.0s or Rate: 30.0s.
• For base stations for post-processed and realtime kinematic rovers, Rate at the base should
be the same rate as at the rover.
• For initialisation while static and occupying
distinct points in kinematic chains Rate
between 0.1s and 2.0s.
Data type
Selectable list
Unavailable for SmartStation.
Available for Log data to: GS sensor. Data can be
logged in the Leica proprietary MDB format or in
RINEX.
For GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12, this field is available for Log data when: Static.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings
159
14
Antenna Heights
14.1
Overview
Description
The height of the GNSS antenna above a point consists of three components:
• the vertical or slope height reading,
• the vertical offset,
• the vertical phase centre variations.
For most operations, pre-configured standard settings in the instrument can be used.
They automatically take the vertical phase centre variations into account.
Vertical or slope
height
Only vertical antenna heights measured to the Mechanical Reference Plane are
accepted.
Measurements
required
This table is an overview of required measurements depending on antennas, setup and
accessories. All former Leica antenna types are supported.
IF the antenna is
Leica antenna, for
example GS15
Leica antenna, for
example GS15
Leica antenna, for
example GS15
Leica antenna, for
example GS15
non-Leica antenna
Vertical phase
centre variations
AND the accesso- AND the setup is THEN the measries are
urements required
are
standard Leica
tripod or tripod
vertical height from
short
height hook
standard Leica
pole
none.
Value is 2.00 m
(as indicated on the
pole)
standard Leica
pillar
vertical height to
the MRP.
non-Leica
any
• vertical height to
the MRP.
• possibly vertical
offset.
any
• vertical height to
standard Leica
the MRP.
OR
• possibly vertical
non-Leica
offset.
• phase centre
variations.
• horizontal offset
if a slope height
reading.
For Leica antennas:
Are handled automatically in the standard antenna
records.
For non-Leica antennas:
Can be stored in a newly created antenna record.
OR
Antenna records including azimuth and elevationdependent corrections must be created using LGO or
imported using the ANTEX format.
The antenna calibrations to determine the phase centre variations of all Leica
antennas were executed by Geo++® GmbH.
Viva Series, Antenna Heights
160
14.2
Mechanical Reference Planes, MRP
General
The Mechanical Reference Plane
• is where the antenna heights are measured to.
• is where the phase centre variations refer to.
• varies for different antennas.
GS15
GS_031
a
a) The mechanical reference plane is the
underside of the threaded metal insert.
GS_127
a
a) The mechanical reference plane is the
underside of the thread.
GS_032
a
a) The mechanical reference plane is the
underside of the threaded metal insert.
GS08plus/
GS12/GS14
AS05/AS10
Viva Series, Antenna Heights
161
14.3
Determining Antenna Heights
14.3.1
Pillar Setup

• One of the Leica standard antennas is used, for example GS15. All former Leica
antenna types are supported.
• Leica standard accessories are used.
Pillar setup
a
b
c
d
a)
b)
c)
d)
Mechanical reference plane
Vertical phase centre offset for L1
Vertical phase centre offset for L2
Vertical height reading
Vertical offset = 0
GS_033
Vertical height
reading
The vertical height reading is the height difference between the pillar benchmark and
the mechanical reference plane of the antenna. Normally, it is determined indirectly
by levelling.
Determine the
antenna height
step-by-step
Sometimes, it is difficult to measure to the MRP directly.
Step
Description
1.
Determine the height difference between the pillar benchmark and a surface
on the carrier.
2.
Look up the height difference between this surface on the carrier and where
the MRP of the antenna sits on the carrier.
3.
Add the values determined in step 1. and 2., to get the vertical height
reading.
4.
For Leica standard antennas plus accessories, the vertical offset is 0.00 m.
Viva Series, Antenna Heights
162
40 mm
GS_038
GRT247 carrier, preferred for GS15 Tripod Short setup
Viva Series, Antenna Heights
109 mm
36.5 mm
145.5 mm
Carrier and adapter
dimensions
GS_036
GRT146 carrier - Tripod setup
163
9.3 mm
99.7 mm
36.5 mm
145.5 mm
GS_037
GRT144 carrier with GAD31 screw-to-stub
adapter - Tripod setup
Next step
• At the beginning of a survey, enter the vertical height reading into the instrument.
• The vertical offset of 0.00 m is stored in the antenna setup record for a pillar setup
and will automatically be taken into account.
• Refer to Overview for the vertical phase centre variations.

For carriers other than those carriers shown in the diagram above, the dimensions
must be determined.

Except for Leica standard antennas plus accessories, the vertical offset must be measured. This value must be entered in the antenna setup record.
Viva Series, Antenna Heights
164
14.3.2

Tripod Setup
• One of the Leica standard antennas is used, for example GS15. All former Leica
antenna types are supported.
• Leica standard accessories are used.
Tripod setup
a
c
b
d
e
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
GS_034
Vertical height
reading
Determine the
antenna height
step-by-step
Next step

Mechanical reference plane
Vertical phase centre offset for L1
Vertical phase centre offset for L2
Vertical offset
Vertical height reading
The vertical height reading is the height difference between the ground mark and the
bottom end of the height hook. It is determined using the height hook.
Step
Description
1.
Determine the vertical height reading using the height hook.
2.
For Leica standard antennas plus accessories, the vertical offset is 0.36 m
for a Tripod setup and 0.2545 m for a Tripod Short setup.
• Determine the antenna type.
• At the beginning of a survey, enter the vertical height reading into the instrument.
• The vertical offset is stored in the antenna setup record for all tripod setups and
will automatically be taken into account. It does not need to be entered.
• Refer to Overview for the vertical phase centre variations.
For other than the carriers shown in the diagram above, the dimensions must be
determined, the vertical offset must be adapted and entered into a new antenna
record.

For other height measurement devices than the height hook, the dimensions must be
determined and the vertical offset must be adapted.

For other than Leica standard antennas, the vertical offset must be measured. It must
be entered in the antenna setup record.
Viva Series, Antenna Heights
165
14.3.3

Pole Setup
• One of the Leica standard antennas is used, for example GS15. All former Leica
antenna types are supported.
• Leica standard accessories are used.
Pole setup
a
c
b
d
a)
b)
c)
d)
GS_035
Mechanical reference plane
Vertical phase centre offset for L1
Vertical phase centre offset for L2
Vertical height reading, 2.00 m for the
fully extended Leica telescopic pole.
Vertical offset = 0
Vertical height
reading
The vertical height reading is the height difference between the bottom end and the
top end of the pole. Usually, this height difference is a fixed value.
Next step
• At the beginning of a survey, enter the vertical height reading into the instrument.
A standard rover configuration with a standard antenna setup record for a pole
setup uses the value of 2.00 m already as default.
• The vertical offset of 0.00 m is stored in the antenna setup record for a pole setup
and will automatically be taken into account. It does not need to be entered.
• Refer to Overview for the vertical phase centre variations.


For other than the Leica standard poles, the dimensions must be determined.
For other than Leica standard antennas, the vertical offset must be measured. It must
be entered in the antenna setup record.
Viva Series, Antenna Heights
166
14.4

SmartStation Setup
• For a SmartStation setup, select the SmartStation antenna in use. This configuration depends on both the used GS and the used TS instrument. The configuration
will ensure the correct vertical offset is applied to the antenna heights.
• For a SmartStation setup, the antenna height value in the GPS survey screen must
equal the value for Instrument height. Instrument height is seen in the preceding
Set Station Point.
• Leica standard accessories are used.
SmartStation setup
a
b
c
d
e
GS_078
Viva Series, Antenna Heights
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Mechanical reference plane
Vertical phase centre offset for L1
Vertical phase centre offset for L2
Vertical offset
Instrument height reading
167
15
Connections.. - GPS connection wizard
15.1
Starting the GPS Connection Wizard
Description
This chapter explains how the field controller can be connected with a GNSS antenna
using a wizard.
Access
Select Main Menu: Instrument\Connections..\GPS connection wizard.
GS Connection
Wizard - Step 1
Key
Description
Next
To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Next step
IF connecting a
THEN
GS10/GS15/GS08plus/GS refer to "15.2 Connection to
12/GS25
GS10/GS15/GS08plus/GS12/GS25".
GS05/GS06
follow the instruction on the screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - GPS connection wizard
168
15.2
Connection to GS10/GS15/GS08plus/GS12/GS25
GS Connection
Wizard - Step 2
Key
Description
Next
To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Next step
Next changes to the next screen.
GS Connection
Wizard - Step 3
IF
THEN
connected via cable
follow the instructions on the screen.
connected via Bluetooth
the screen shown depends on whether a Bluetooth GPS
connection has previously been configured or not.
This screen is displayed if a Bluetooth connection has previously been configured.
Key
Description
Next
To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen.
Search
To search for a different GPS instrument.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Next step
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - GPS connection wizard
169
GS Connection
Wizard - Step 3
This screen is displayed if a NO Bluetooth connection has previously been configured.
Move the focus using the arrow keys or the stylus to select a Bluetooth device.
Key
Description
Next
To connect to the selected device and continue to the next screen.
Search
To search for a different total station.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Next step
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - GPS connection wizard
170
16
Connections.. - TPS connection wizard
16.1
Starting the TPS Connection Wizard
Description
This chapter explains how the field controller can be connected with a total station
using a wizard.
Access
Select Main Menu: Instrument\Connections..\TPS connection wizard.
TPS Connection
Wizard - Step 1
Key
Description
Next
To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Manufacturer
Selectable list
The brand of the instrument.
Model
Selectable list
The instrument model.

The Leica models TC1000 and TC1100 are
not supported.
Connect using Cable, Bluetooth How the instrument is connected. The options
or Internal radio available depend on the selection for Model.
The CTR16 can be only used on the CS15. To
connect a CS15 to a TS with RH16 or TCPS29
attached.
Offline configuration is possible if a Bluetooth address is known.
Radio cap
(CTR16)

Next step
Next changes to the next screen.
IF
THEN
connected via cable
refer to Connection Using Cable.
connected via Bluetooth
refer to Connection Using Bluetooth.
connected via internal
radio
refer to Connection Using Internal Radio.
connected via CTR16
refer to "16.3 Connection Using Bluetooth".
Viva Series, Connections.. - TPS connection wizard
171
16.2
Connection Using Cable
Description
The connection settings must be specified.
TPS Connection
Wizard - Step 2
Key
Description
Next
To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen.
Default
To return the fields back to their default values.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Baud rate
From 1200 to
115200
Frequency of data transfer from instrument to
device in bits per second.
Parity
None, Even or
Odd
Error checksum at the end of a block of digital
data.
Data bits
6, 7 or 8
Number of bits in a block of digital data.
Stop bit
1 or 2
Number of bits at the end of a block of digital
data.
Flow control
None or RTS/CTS Activates hardware handshake.
When the instrument/device is ready for data, it
asserts the Ready To Send line indicating it is
ready to receive data. This line is read by the
sender at the Clear To Send input, indicating it is
clear to send the data.
Next step
Next and follow the instructions on the screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - TPS connection wizard
172
16.3
Connection Using Bluetooth
Description
The screen shown depends on whether a last used Bluetooth ID is available for the
chosen instrument model.
TPS Connection
Wizard - Step 2
This screen is displayed if the chosen instrument model has a previously used Bluetooth ID already stored.
For a CTR16 connection, the last total station which was connected via RH16 or
TCPS29 and CTR16 is displayed.
Key
Description
Next
To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen.
Search
To search for a different total station.
For a CTR16 connection also: To check if the radio used for the
connection was changed.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Next step
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - TPS connection wizard
173
Total Station Connection - Step 2
This screen is displayed if the chosen instrument model has NO previous used Bluetooth ID already stored.
Move the focus using the arrow keys or the stylus to select a Bluetooth device.
Key
Description
Next
To connect to the selected device and continue to the next screen.
Search
To search for a different total station.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Next step
Follow the instructions on the screen.
16.4
Connection Using Internal Radio
TPS Connection
Wizard - Step 2
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Link number
Editable field
The assigned channel number.
Set as
Remote or Base

The radio modules inside the field
controller and the TPS instrument must be
set to opposite settings. It is recommended to set the field controller to
Remote and TPS instrument to Base.
Next step
Next and follow the instructions on the screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - TPS connection wizard
174
16.5


Settings required
Connection To Leica Legacy and Third Party Total Stations
Once you begin working with the CS always work on the controller! Do not touch the
total station software, excluding turning the laser pointer, laser plummet or guide
lights on/off for some models.
Refer to "35.7 Connection to Other Total Stations" for supported functions.
Before using any Leica Legacy or third party total station, please ensure that the
following values are set on the TPS:
Instrument
Settings
Leica Legacy total
station
1. Total station ppm/scale:
• Atmospheric ppm = 0
• Geometric ppm = 0 or scale factor = 1
These settings ensure that the correct coordinates are
calculated at the CS. It is still possible to apply the relevant atmospheric and geometric ppm/scale factor values.
These values must then be set on the CS.
2. Communication settings:
• The communication settings on the TPS must match
the default parameters for that particular instrument
type as seen on the CS.
• For TPS1000, TPS2000 and TPS1100 instruments:
• set the communication mode to GSI
• ensure the TPS is in the measurement screen when
trying to connect.
Third party total station 1. Total station ppm/scale:
- Topcon
• Atmospheric ppm = 0
• Geometric ppm = 0 or scale factor = 1
• Prism constant = 0 (non-motorised instruments only)
• The vertical angle on the total station must be set to
zenith for all Topcon instruments.
• The angular unit on both the total station and
controller must match
These settings ensure that the correct coordinates are
calculated at the CS. It is still possible to apply the relevant atmospheric and geometric ppm/scale factor values.
These values must then be set on the CS.
2. Communication settings:
• The communication settings on the TPS must match
the default parameters for that particular instrument
type as seen on the CS.
• On motorised Topcon total stations, for example
GTS800 and above, set the communication values
through Prog\Ext. Link\Setting\RS232.
• For non-motorised instruments ensure that the total
station is in the survey measurement screen when
trying to connect.
3. External Link mode
• To connect to motorised Topcon total stations, for
example GTS800 and above, set the external link
mode through Prog\Ext. Link\Execute.
Viva Series, Connections.. - TPS connection wizard
175
Instrument
Settings
4. Required cable:
• TDS DB9 Data Cable (148 SCGTSSOKTOP –
Topcon/Sokkia)
Third party total station 1. Total station ppm/scale:
- Sokkia
• Atmospheric ppm = 0
• Geometric ppm = 0 or scale factor = 1
• Prism constant = 0
• The vertical angle display setting must be the same on
the CS and the total station
These settings ensure that the correct coordinates are
calculated at the CS. It is still possible to apply the relevant atmospheric and geometric ppm/scale factor values.
These values must then be set on the CS.
2. Units:
• For a Set 030R/220/010 instrument, the angle unit at
the total station must be set to degrees, minutes,
seconds. The angle setting at the CS does not matter.
3. Communication settings:
• The communication settings on the TPS must match
the default parameters for that particular instrument
type as seen on the CS.
• For all Sokkia instruments ensure the TPS is in the
measurement screen when trying to connect.
• On motorised Sokkia total stations, set additional
total station communication values: Comms
mode: RS232C, Checksum: No and Controller: 2
Way + Remote
• For the Sokkia SRX set Tilt correction: No to have an
uninterrupted connection. On the total station go to
Settings\Obs. Condition\Tilt crn: No.
4. Required cable:
• TDS DB9 Data Cable (148 SCGTSSOKTOP –
Topcon/Sokkia)
Third party total station 1. Total station ppm/scale:
- Nikon
• Atmospheric ppm = 0
• Geometric ppm = 0 or scale factor = 1
• Prism constant = 0
• The angular unit on both the total station and
controller must match
These settings ensure that the correct coordinates are
calculated at the CS. It is still possible to apply the relevant atmospheric and geometric ppm/scale factor values.
These values must then be set on the CS.
2. Communication settings:
• The communication settings on the TPS must match
the default parameters for that particular instrument
type as seen on the CS.
• For all Nikon instruments ensure the TPS is in the
measurement screen when trying to connect.
3. Required cable:
• TDS DB9 Data Cable (148 CNTG Nikon)
Viva Series, Connections.. - TPS connection wizard
176
17
Connections.. - CS connection wizard
17.1
Starting the CS Connection Wizard
Description
This chapter explains how to configure a total station for remote controlled from the
CS.
Access
Select Main Menu: Instrument\Connections..\CS connection wizard.
CS Connection
Wizard,
Which software is
running on the field
controller?
Key
Description
Next
To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Next step
Independent of the selection made, Next changes to a screen where the connection
type must be selected.
CS Connection
Wizard,
How do you want to
connect to the field
controller?
Key
Description
Next
To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Viva Series, Connections.. - CS connection wizard
177
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
How the instrument is connected.
Connect using
Radio handle,
Bluetooth or
External radio
When External radio is selected, choose the type
of External radio in use.
Cable
For TS11/TS15: Serial cable connection.
For MS50/TS50/TM50: USB cable connection.
Select Cable for a USB cable connection. Use the
cables GEV234 (Lemo - USB), GEV237 (Lemo Lemo) or GEV261 (combined RS232/USB cable).
Cable RS232
Available on MS50/TS50/TM50 to configure serial
connection.
WLAN
Available when A software other than SmartWorx
Viva is checked in the previous screen. Requires
configurations in WinCE.
Next step
Next changes to the next screen.
IF
THEN
connected via RadioHandle
Next changes to the next screen.
The RadioHandle is detected automatically, if it is plugged
onto the TS. The name of the RadioHandle is then
displayed.
If the RadioHandle is not plugged onto the TS, then select
the RadioHandle which will be used. Press Next.

The RH16 can only be connected to a CS15
equipped with a CTR16.
connected via
TCPS27/TCPS28
Select the TCPS connected and press Next. Refer to "17.2
Connection Using TCPS".
connected via TCPS29
Select the TCPS connected. Further configurations are not
required.
connected via cable
refer to "17.3 Connection Using Cable".
a MS50/TS50/TM50 is
the systems sets all the parameters to be able to connect
connected via cable and to a CS via USB interface from port 1.
SmartWorx Viva is running
on the field controller
a MS50/TS50/TM50 is
• for a serial connection refer to "17.3 Connection Using
connected via cable and a
Cable".
software other than
• for a USB connection, the systems sets all the parameSmartWorx Viva is running
ters to be able to connect to a CS via USB interface
on the field controller
from port 1.
connected via Bluetooth
Next changes to the next screen.
The Bluetooth connection is established automatically.
Press Finish.
connected via WLAN
enabled and configure WLAN within WinCE.
Next changes to the next screen.
Press Finish.
Viva Series, Connections.. - CS connection wizard
178
17.2
Connection Using TCPS
TPS Radio Communication
This screen is valid for TCPS27 and TCPS28.
The channel on which the TCPS broadcasts can be changed. Changing channels
changes the frequency at which the TCPS operates. This may be necessary to enable
multiple pairs of TCPS to work simultaneously in the same area without interferring
with each other.

Key
Description
OK
To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen.
Default
To return the fields back to their default values.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Radio type
Display only
The type of protocol.
Link number
Editable field
The assigned channel number.
Set as
Remote or Base
The TCPS inside the field controller and the
TS11/TS15 must be set to opposite settings. It is
recommended to set the field controller to
Remote and TS11/TS15 to Base.
Next step
OK and follow the instructions on the screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - CS connection wizard
179
17.3
Connection Using Cable
CS Connection
Wizard - Connect the
cable between the
total station & CS.
Ensure same settings
are made on the CS.
Valid for TS11/TS15.
Key
Description
Next
To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen.
Default
To return the fields back to their default values.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Baud rate
From 1200 to
115200
Frequency of data transfer from instrument to
device in bits per second.
Parity
None, Even or
Odd
Error checksum at the end of a block of digital
data.
Data bits
6, 7 or 8
Number of bits in a block of digital data.
Stop bit
1 or 2
Number of bits at the end of a block of digital
data.
Flow control
None or RTS/CTS Activates hardware handshake.
When the instrument/device is ready for data, it
asserts the Ready To Send line indicating it is
ready to receive data. This line is read by the
sender at the Clear To Send input, indicating it is
clear to send the data.
Next step
Next and follow the instructions on the screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - CS connection wizard
180
18
Connections.. - Internet wizard
Description
This chapter explains how the field controller can be connected to the Internet using
a wizard and without using RTK.
Access
Select Main Menu: Instrument\Connections..\Internet wizard.
The screen displayed varies.
IF
AND
THEN
the Internet wizard is
started for the first time
a CS is used
the Internet device can be
connected to the
• CS 3.5G modem port
• Bluetooth mobile phone
a TS11/TS15/TS12
the Internet device can be
Lite/MS50/TS50/TM50 is connected to a Bluetooth
used
phone of type
• GSM/GPRS/UMTS
device
• CDMA device
the Internet connection is not connected
configured
• the Internet connection
can be edited.
• the connection can be
started.
the Internet connection is connected
configured
• the Internet connection
can be edited.
• the connection can be
stopped.
Next step
Make a selection, press Next and follow the instructions on the screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - Internet wizard
181
19
Connections.. - All other connections
19.1
Accessing Configuration Connections
Description
The instrument has various connections which can be configured to be used with
different ports and devices. The configuration varies depending on the individual application.
Access
For RTK rover, TPS, TS11/TS15 and MS50/TS50/TM50:
• Select Main Menu: Instrument\Connections..\All other connections.
For RTK base:
• Select Main Menu: Base connections\Connections..\All other connections.
Connection Settings
The screen gives an overview of all connections with the currently assigned port and
device.
For an RTK rover, this screen consists of the CS connections and the GS connections
or TS connections page.
For a GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12, this screen consists of only one page.
Key
Description
OK
To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed.
Edit..
To configure the parameters related to the highlighted connection.
Refer to the sections on each individual connection in this chapter.
Cntrl..
Available for certain devices connected to certain connections. To
configure additional parameters related to the highlighted device.
For MS50/TS50/TM50: Available when the GeoCom connection is set
to Cable (USB) and WLAN. To show the IP and the port for third party
connections.
Fn Conect and Available for a real-time connection configured to use an Internet
Fn Disco
connection. To connect/disconnect from the GPS reference data.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
182
19.2
CS Internet / GS Internet / TS Internet
19.2.1
SmartWorx
Description
The Internet connection
• allows accessing the Internet using the field controller (CS internal GSM) or the
instrument plus a GPRS device.
• can be used together with the real-time connection to receive real-time data from,
for example, an Ntrip Caster via Internet communication.
Refer to "37 NTRIP via Internet" for information about Ntrip.
The settings on this screen define the port and parameters required for accessing the
Internet.
Access
For RTK rover:
• In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight CS Internet. Edit...
• In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight GS Internet. Edit...
For RTK base:
• In Base Connection Settings, select GS Internet. Edit...
For TPS:
• In Connection Settings, highlight CS Internet. Edit...
For TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite:
• In Connection Settings, highlight TS Internet. Edit...
Internet Connection,
Internet page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Search
To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Available
if CS Bluetooth 1 or CS Bluetooth 2 are selected.
Devce..
To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing
Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". Available if Use Internet connection on CS/Use Internet connection on GS/Use Internet connection
on TS is checked.
Page
To change to another page on this screen. Available if Use Internet
connection on CS/Use Internet connection on GS/Use Internet
connection on TS is checked.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
183
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Use Internet
Check box
connection on
CS, Use
Internet
connection on
GS or Use
Internet
connection on
TS
Activates the Internet connection.
Connect using
The ports available for connection to the Internet.
CS modem
The internal GSM modem of the field controller.
CS RS232 port
The RS232 port on the field controller.
CS Bluetooth 1
The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which
and CS Bluetooth will be used for the connection functionality.
2
CS modem
GS Port 1
For GS10: The physical port P1 on the box.
For GS15: The red LEMO port.
GS Port 2
For GS10: The physical port P2 on the box.
For GS15: The black LEMO port.
GS Port 3
For GS10: The physical port P3 on the box.
For GS15: The port for the slot devices.
TS Bluetooth 1
The Bluetooth ports on the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite
and TS Bluetooth which will be used for the connection function2
ality.
Device
Display only
Connect to
GPRS
internet using
Dial-up
Use user ID & Check box
password for
Internet
connection
User ID
Editable field
The name of the selected device.
Access the Internet using a General Packet Radio
Service connection.
Access the Internet using the facilities of the
public switched telephone network.
If checked, a user ID and a password can be typed
in.
Some providers ask for a user ID to allow
connecting to the Internet via GPRS. Contact your
provider if a user ID must be used.
It is possible to show/hide the User ID.
Password
Editable field
Some providers ask for a password to allow
connecting to the Internet via GPRS. Contact your
provider if a password is required.
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
184
Internet Connection,
Advanced page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Use static IP
address
Check box
In order to get access to the Internet, an IP
address is required. This IP address identifies the
instrument in the Internet. This option should
only be checked if a static IP address is available
for the instrument.
The IP address to get access to the Internet is
provided by the network provider permanently.
Each time the instrument wants to access the
Internet via the device the same IP address identifies the instrument. This behaviour is important
if the instrument is used as a TCP/IP server.
IP address
Editable field
Available if Use static IP address is checked. To
set the IP address.
Use DynDNS
Check box
To configure a dynamic DNS service. This setting
provides access to the RTK data stream of a GS
base server while it is using a dynamic IP address.
The setting allows TCP/IP clients to use an
Internet domain name to address a GS with a
dynamic IP address.
Use case: A GS is set up in base mode with an
Internet connection using GPRS. The GS has a
different IP address every time the Internet
connection is established or after running for a
certain time. The GS checks every 12 min if its IP
address has changed. If so, the GS updates the
DynDNS settings.
Refer to DynDNS for more information about
DynDNS.
Service
provider
Selectable list
Host name
Editable field
Available when Use DynDNS is checked. Select
the DNS service to use.
Register at the selected DynDNS service to
receive a user name and password and to
create a host name.

Available when Use DynDNS is checked. Type in
the host name that you created at the DynDNS
service where you registered.
Leica Viva rovers can resolve host names.
Using DynDNS is an easy way to provide
RTK data from a receiver without having to
know the current IP address.

User name
Editable field
Available when Use DynDNS is checked. Type in
the user name provided by the DynDNS service
where you registered.
Password
Editable field
Available when Use DynDNS is checked. Type in
the password provided by the DynDNS service
where you registered.
Next step
OK returns to the screen from where Internet Connection was accessed.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
185
19.2.2
DynDNS
Usage with dynamic
IP address
Goal
To access a GS with a dynamic IP address using a host name.
Basic concept of dynamic DNS (DynDNS)
a
d
b
e
c
f
g
007047_001
a) GS with mobile Internet
device
b) ISP with DNS server
c) Firewall
d) Port 8245 or 80
e) Internet
f) checkip.dyndns.org
g) dyndns.com
• When using a mobile Internet connection, be aware of two types of restrictions:
1) The first restriction is on the outgoing ports. When the GS is trying to access
checkip.dyndns.org it uses port 8245. For using two-dns.de, an alternative to
DynDNS.com, port 80 is needed additionally. It is important that ports 8245 and
possibly 80 are open for outgoing connections, depending on which service you
use.
2) The second restriction is for incoming connections. If you managed to connect
to DynDNS.com and associate your IP address with your hostname, you could
theoretically connect to it using the hostname. In practise, you can run into the
problem of ports not being open.
• Most likely your ISP has closed the standard ports - port 80 for web interface access
or port 21 for FTP access.
In order to access the Internet with a mobile device/SIM card, you need an Access
Point Name, a user name and a password and a list of open incoming ports.
Imagine this APN like a subnet for your phone that your ISP can configure, for
example what external networks, services, open ports are available. Usually when
you use mobile devices/SIM cards from the same ISP, the APN is the same for all
these devices.
The open ports you can use when providing RTK data from your GS are defined by
this APN profile. This means besides the APN, user name and password, you must
also ask your ISP for a list of open ports. These open ports can then be configured
on the GS for the Base RTK 1 and Base RTK 2 interface. All other ports on the GS
cannot be configured/changed.
Ask for a list of open ports for the APN you want to use before configuring your
DynDNS setup.

Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
186
Configuring mobile
Internet and
DynDNS step-bystep
Troubleshooting
Step
Description
1.
Contact your Internet service provider and ask for the APN profile for your
mobile device/SIM card. You will receive a document listing all open ports for
your APN.
2.
Register at the DynDNS service of your choice.
Create:
• A user name and password for your DynDNS account.
• A host name for the GS.
3.
Select Base Menu\Instrument\Base connections\All other connections.
4.
Highlight GS Internet and press Edit...
5.
On the Internet page, check Use Internet connection on GS.
Select the mobile device to use.
6.
On the Advanced page, check Use DynDNS.
Select the Service provider.
Enter Host name, User name and Password.
7.
To see the details about your mobile Internet connection:
Select Base Menu\Instrument\Base status info\Connection status. Highlight GS Internet. Press Intfce.
The last updated IP address is displayed.
8.
Select Base Menu\Instrument\Base connections\All other connections.
9.
Highlight Base RTK 1 and press Edit...
10.
Configure the transmission of RTK correction data and press OK.
11.
Press Cntrl...
12.
Configure User type: Server to use. Make sure the TCP/IP port is set to a port
listed as open in your APN profile.
Configure, how many clients can connect to this port simultaneously to allow
up to ten rovers to connect to a base RTK port.
13.
You can now receive RTK correction data from your base using the host name
and the configured RTK port.
• Go to Base Menu\Instrument\Base status info\Connection status. Highlight GS
Internet. Press Intfce. Check that DynDNS status is shown as on. Check that the
currently registered IP address is correct.
• Everything is fine, but you do not get data from the port that you configured for
your data stream? Use the DynDNS tool
http://www.dyndns.com/support/tools/openport.html and enter the IP address of
your GS . You can find the IP address as described above. Enter the port you are
trying to connect to. The tool will tell you if this port is open. If not, please change
your data stream configuration to a different port.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
187
19.3
GPS Rover / Base Sensor
Description
To connect the field controller to the sensor (antenna) either on the base or on the
rover side.
Access
For RTK rover:
• In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight GPS Rover. Edit...
• Select Instrument\Connections..\GPS connection wizard.
For RTK base:
• In Base Connection Settings, select Base Sensor. Edit...
• Select Instrument\Base connections\Connect to base sensor.
GPS Rover Connection / Connect to
Base Sensor
Key
OK
Search
Fn Quit
Description
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
When changing the sensor type, SmartWorx Viva must be shutdown
and re-started before the sensor can be used.
To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Available
for GS10/GS15/GS08plus/GS12/GS14/GS25 with Connection
using: Use Bluetooth.
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Sensor
Option
Selectable list
Description
Select the attached model.

Connect using Cable or Bluetooth
Last used
rover
Display only
Last used
base
Display only
Bluetooth ID
Display only
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
GS08plus is only available if SmartWorx
Viva LT is used on a CS10.
How the instrument is connected. The options
available depend on the selection for Sensor. The
availability of the other fields depends on the
selection made here.
For GS10/GS15/GS08plus/GS12/GS14/GS25:
Available for RTK rover.
The name of the selected Bluetooth device.
For GS10/GS15/GS08plus/GS12/GS14/GS25:
Available for RTK base.
The name of the selected Bluetooth device.
For GS10/GS15/GS08plus/GS12/GS14/GS25: The
ID of the selected Bluetooth device.
188
19.4
ASCII Input
19.4.1
Configuration of an ASCII Input Connection
Description
The ASCII Input connection receives ASCII messages from third-party devices such as
depth sounders, barometers, digital cameras, pipe detectors, Geiger counters, etc.
The ASCII messages are stored as annotations together with the next manually measured point and/or auto point.
The settings on this screen define the port and the device to be used and the type of
ASCII messages to be written to individual annotations.
Access
For RTK rover:
• In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight ASCII Input. Edit...
For TPS:
• In Connection Settings, highlight ASCII Input. Edit...
ASCII Input,
ASCII input page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Devce..
Available when Receive ASCII data via a device is checked. To create,
select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing Devices /
GPRS Internet Devices".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Cmnd..
To configure a message to be sent through the configured port to the
device.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Receive ASCII Check box
data via a
device
Description
Activates the ASCII input connection.
The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which
Connect using CS Bluetooth 1
and CS Bluetooth will be used for the connection functionality.
2
CS RS232 port
The RS232 port on the field controller.
Device
Display only
The name of the device selected for ASCII input.
End of
message
CR, LF or CR/LF
The character to be used to identify the end of
the incoming ASCII message.
Next step
Page changes to the Annotation 1/Annotation 2/Annotation 3/Annotation 4 page.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
189
ASCII Input,
Annotation 1/Annotation 2/Annotation
3/Annotation 4 page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Store ASCII
data to this
annotation
Check box
If checked, ASCII messages are recorded with the
selected annotation.
Message desc Editable field
Message ID
Display only
The description for the ASCII message being
received. This description is then displayed in
other screens, for example in the status screen.
The message ID to identify a particular ASCII
message coming from the device. The message is
then saved to the annotation. The following characters can be used as filter:
^ To accept strings starting with the subsequent
characters. For example, ^1 accepts 12 but not
21.
$ To accept strings ending with the preceding
characters. For example, 1$ accepts 21 but not
12.
. To accept any character except newline.
[ ] To accept a set of characters. For example, [09] accepts all numbers.
Any characters to accept strings that include the
characters at any position. For example 1 accepts
1234, 4321 or 2134 but not 2345.
Prefix
'@<Desc>@'
when writing
Check box
Stores the description in Message desc as prefix
to the ASCII message. This prefix helps to more
easily identify the annotations registered with a
point.
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
190
19.4.2
Configuration of a Command to the Device
Access
For RTK rover:
• In ASCII Input, ASCII input page, Fn Cmnd...
Send Command to
Device
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Send
To send the command to the device.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Command
Editable field
A message to be sent to the device through the
configured port when the survey or stakeout
application is accessed. This functionality, for
example, allows the device to be started
remotely. The last used command that was
entered is remembered as part of the active
working style.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
191
19.5
GPS Hidden Pt
Description
Hidden point measurement devices are used for measuring to points which cannot be
directly measured with GPS, for example house corners or trees. The measurements
made with a hidden point measurement device are directly transferred to the instrument for the calculation of the coordinates of the hidden point. They can also be
entered manually.
The settings on this screen define the port, the device and estimated qualities to be
used for the hidden point connection.
Access
For RTK rover:
• In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight GPS Hidden Pt. Edit...
Hidden Point Measurement
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Offset..
To configure the height and external angle offsets.
Search
Available when a Bluetooth port and device is selected. To search for
all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is
found a list of available devices is provided.
Devce..
To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing
Devices / GPRS Internet Devices".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Use a device Check box
to measure
hidden points
Description
To compute a hidden point with height. Activates
the hidden point connection. If not checked, the
measured values must be entered manually.
Connect using CS Bluetooth 1
The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which
and CS Bluetooth will be used for the connection functionality.
2
CS RS232 port
The RS232 port on the field controller.
Device
Display only
The name of the selected hidden point device.
Bluetooth ID
Display only
Available if CS Bluetooth 1 or CS Bluetooth 2 are
selected. The Bluetooth ID of the hidden point
device.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
192
Field
Option
Description
The method which is suggested first when
starting the Survey Hidden Points application.
Default
method
The distance and bearing from the known point
to the hidden point are to be determined. An
auxiliary point helps compute the bearing which
might not be known. The auxiliary point can be
measured in the direction from the known point
to the hidden point.
Bearing &
distance
Using 2 bearings The bearings from the known points to the
hidden point are to be determined. Auxiliary
points help compute the bearings which might
not be known. Auxiliary points can be measured in
the direction from the known points to the
hidden point.
Using 2 distances The distances from the known points to the
hidden points are to be determined. The location
of the hidden point relative to the line between
the two known points is to be defined.
Chainage & offset The chainage from one known point along the line
between the two known points must be determined. The offset of the hidden point to the line
between the two known points must be determined.
Set 2DCQ to
Back brng &
distance
The distance and the bearing from the hidden
point to the known point are to be determined.
An auxiliary point helps compute the bearing
which might not be known. An auxiliary point can
be measured in the direction from the hidden
point to the known point.
Editable field
The estimated value for the position quality
assigned to all hidden points. This value must be
estimated because hidden point measurement
devices do not output position qualities.
Compute
Check box
height for
hidden points
Set 1DCQ to
Select to compute a hidden point with height.
Editable field
Available when Compute height for hidden points
is checked. The estimated value for the height
quality assigned to all hidden points.
Next step
IF height and external
angle/distance offsets
THEN
are not to be configured
OK closes the screen and returns to the screen from
where Hidden Point Measurement was accessed.
are to be configured
Offset...
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
193
Hidden Point Device
Offsets
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and to return to Hidden Point Measurement.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Distance
offset
Editable field
The offset is automatically added to the measured distance.
Available when Compute height for hidden points
is checked in Hidden Point Measurement.
Height offset
None
No height offsets are used. The result is the delta
height between the centre of the device and the
aimed point.
Device height
When measuring hidden points, the height of the
hidden point measurement device can be typed
in. This option should be used when the hidden
point can be directly measured using the hidden
point device.
Device & target ht When measuring hidden points, the height of the
hidden point measurement device as well as the
target height can be typed in. This option should
be used when the hidden point cannot be directly
measured with a hidden point device, but a target
point can be used to calculate the position.
Device height Editable field
Target height
Editable field
The height of the hidden point measurement
device. This height is the distance from the
ground to the centre of the device.
The distance from the hidden point to the aimed
point.
Sets the default method for entering an angle
offset. EAO is an offset angle between the North
of the device being used and WGS 1984 geodetic
North. EAOs are applied when measuring hidden
points using a device capable of measuring
azimuths.
Angle offset
None
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
No EAO value is applied to the azimuth measurement received from the hidden point measurement device.
194
Field
Offset
Option
Description
Permanent
Applies a default value for the offset angle. The
value is changeable.
New for each
point
Offset angle values must be entered for each new
hidden point.
Editable field
Available for Angle offset: Permanent.
The default value for the offset angle.
Next step
Step
Description
1.
OK returns to Hidden Point Measurement.
2.
OK returns to the screen from where Hidden Point Measurement was
accessed.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
195
Diagram
P0
P1
P2
a
b
d1
P1
d2
d3
d4
b
d1
a
d5
Known point
Target point
Hidden point
Height of P0
Height of P2 = a + d1 + d4 - d3
Device height: height of hidden point
measurement device above P0
Slope distance
Device height: height of P1 above P2
Height difference between hidden
point measurement device and P1
Horizontal distance
a)
b)
c)
d)
P0
Negative Distance offset
Positive Distance offset
Pole
DISTO
Hidden point
d2
d3
d4
P2
d5
P0
GS_052
Distance offsets at
hidden point measurement devices
A Leica DISTO is shown as an example
P0
d
b
c
a
GS_053
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
196
19.6
Export Job
Description
The Export Job connection allows data from a job to be exported from the instrument
to another instrument.
The settings on this screen define the port and the device to which the data will be
exported.
Access
For RTK rover:
• In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight Export Job. Edit...
For TPS and TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite:
• In Connection Settings highlight Export Job. Edit...
Export Job Connection
Key
OK
Search
Devce..
Fn Quit
Description
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Available when CS Bluetooth 1 or CS Bluetooth 2 are selected. To
search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth
device is found a list of available devices is provided.
To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing
Devices / GPRS Internet Devices".
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Export job to Check box
external
device
Connect using CS Bluetooth 1 /
CS Bluetooth 2 or
TS Bluetooth 1 /
TS Bluetooth 2
CS RS232 port or
Cable
Radio handle
Device
Display only
Job Number
Selectable list
Name
Editable field
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
Description
Activates the connection.
The Bluetooth ports on the field controller or the
TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite which will be used for the
connection functionality.
The RS232 port on the field controller or the
TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite.
Hotshoe connection for RadioHandle. This port is
located on top of Communication side cover.
The device currently assigned to the selected port
within the active working style. The device which
is selected determines the availability of the next
fields.
Available if the Device is a Leica instrument.
Select a job number to assign to the job.
Available if the Device is a Leica instrument. The
name of the job.
197
19.7
RTK Rover
19.7.1
Configuration of a Rover Real-Time Connection
Description
The real-time connection allows real-time related parameters to be configured. These
parameters include defining the real-time messages and the base to be used.
Access
For RTK rover:
• In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight RTK Rover. Edit...
RTK Rover Settings,
General page
The available fields and keys on this screen depend on the selected settings.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Search
Available when connecting via Bluetooth. To search for all available
Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list
of available devices is provided.
Devce..
To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing
Devices / GPRS Internet Devices".
For Connect using: CS modem, a special screen opens to edit the CS
modem settings. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Receive RTK
data
Check box
If checked, the rover real-time connection is activated.
Connect using CS modem
CS RS232 port
The internal GSM modem of the field controller.
The RS232 port on the field controller. Unavailable for GS08plus/GS12.
CS Bluetooth 1
The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which
and CS Bluetooth will be used for the connection functionality.
2
CS Internet 1, CS The Internet ports on the field controller. If these
Internet 2 and CS ports are not assigned to a specific connection,
Internet 3
then these ports are additional remote ports.
GS Port 1
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
For GS10: The physical port P1 on the box.
For GS14/GS15: The red LEMO port.
For GS25: The physical LEMO port P1 on the box.
198
Field
Option
Description
GS Port 2
For GS10: The physical port P2 on the box.
For GS15: The black LEMO port.
For GS25: The physical LEMO port P2 on the box.
GS Port 3
For GS10: The physical port P3 on the box.
For GS15/GS25: The slot for a device.
GS Port 4
For GS25: The physical LEMO port P4 on the box.
GS Internet 1, GS The Internet ports on the GS10/GS14/GS15/GS25.
Internet 2 and GS If these ports are not assigned to a specific
Internet 3
connection, then these ports are additional
remote ports.
TS Bluetooth 1
The Bluetooth ports on the TPS which will be used
and TS Bluetooth for the connection functionality.
2
TS Internet 1, TS The Internet ports on the TPS. If these ports are
Internet 2 and TS not assigned to a specific connection, then these
Internet 3
ports are additional remote ports.
RTK device
CS CGR radio
The CGR10/CGR15 that can be attached to the CS.
Display only
The device currently assigned to the selected port
within the active working style. The device which
is selected determines the availability of the next
fields.

RTK data
format
If a mountpoint was selected from a
downloaded source table during the use
of the RTK connection wizard, then the
RTK format which is used with the NTRIP
mountpoint is displayed.
Leica
The proprietary Leica real-time GPS data format
supporting GPS L1/L2 and GLONASS L1/ L2. This
format is recommended when working exclusively
with Leica instruments.
Leica 4G
The proprietary Leica real-time GNSS data format
supporting GPS L1/ L2/ L5, GLONASS L1/ L2,
Galileo E1/E5a/E5b/Alt-BOC and BeiDou B1/B2.
This format is recommended when working exclusively with Leica instruments.
CMR/CMR+
CMR and CMR+ are compacted formats used to
broadcast data for third-party instruments.
RTCM 18,19 v2
Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Uncorrected carrier phase and pseudorange. Message 3
is also generated. Use for real-time operations
where the ambiguities will be resolved at the
rover. Accuracy at the rover: 1 - 5 cm rms after a
successful ambiguity resolution.
RTCM v3
Use RTCM when rover units from a different
manufacturer are to be used.
Use to decode the standard RTCM v3 and the
RTCM v3 (MSM) messages from the base.
Message according to RTCM version 3. A new
standard format for transmission of Global Navigation Satellite System correction information.
Higher efficiency than RTCM v2.x. Supports realtime services with significantly reduced bandwidth.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
199
Field
Option
Description
Message types for real-time GNSS operation:
• 1001: L1-only GPS real-time observables
• 1002: Extended L1-only GPS real-time observables
• 1003: L1 & L2 GPS real-time observables
• 1004: Extended L1 & L2 GPS real-time observables
• 1005: Stationary real-time base station
Antenna Reference Point
• 1006: Stationary real-time base station ARP
with antenna height
• 1007: Antenna descriptor
• 1008: Antenna descriptor and serial number
• 1009: L1-only GLONASS real-time observables
• 1010: Extended L1-only GLONASS real-time
observables
• 1011: L1 & L2 GLONASS real-time observables
• 1012: Extended L1 & L2 GLONASS real-time
observables
Network RTK Messages according to MasterAuxiliary Concept:
• 1014: Network Auxiliary Station Data
message.
This message contains details of the base
stations in the network. For example, the
master station and its coordinates, and the
coordinate differences between the master
and its auxiliaries.
• 1015: Ionospheric Correction Differences
message
• 1016: Geometric Correction Differences
message
• 1021: Helmert / Abridged Molodensky transformation
• 1022: Molodensky-Badekas transformation
• 1023: Transformation Residual Message, ellipsoidal grid representation; CSCS/position &
geoid/height residuals are supported
• 1024: Transformation Residual Message, plane
grid representation; CSCS/position &
geoid/height residuals are supported
• 1025: Projection types except LCC2SP, OM
• 1026: Projection type Lambert Conic
Conformal (LCC2SP)
• 1027: Projection type Oblique Mercator (OM)
• 1029: Unicode Text String message
• 1032: Physical Reference Station Position
message
• 1033: Receiver and Antenna Descriptor
message
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
200
Field
Option
Description
• 1037: GLONASS Ionospheric Correction Differences message (phase).
• 1038: GLONASS Geometric Correction Differences message (phase).
• 1039: GLONASS Combined Geometric and
Ionospheric Correction Differences message
(phase).
• 1068: GLONASS Ionospheric Correction Differences message (code).
• 1069: GLONASS Geometric Correction Differences message (code).
• 1070: GLONASS Combined Geometric and
Ionospheric Correction Differences message
(code).
Pseudorange and phase range values for L1 and
L2. Depending on the type of instrument, the
data for L1-only or for L1 and L2 are sent out.
Message types for universal real-time GNSS
operation, decoding from RTCM v3 (MSM):
The receiver can decode RTCM v3 (MSM).
• 1071: Compact GPS pseudo ranges (MSM1)
• 1072: Compact GPS phase ranges (MSM2)
• 1073: Compact GPS pseudo ranges and phase
ranges (MSM3)
• 1074: Full GPS pseudo ranges and phase
ranges plus Carrier-to-Noise Ratio (MSM4)
• 1075: Full GPS pseudo ranges, phase range,
phase range rate and CNR (MSM5)
• 1076: Full GPS pseudo ranges and phase
ranges plus CNR, high resolution (MSM6)
• 1077: Full GPS pseudo ranges, phase ranges,
phase range rates and CNR, high resolution
(MSM7)
• 1081: Compact GLONASS pseudo ranges
(MSM1)
• 1082: Compact GLONASS phase ranges
(MSM2)
• 1083: Compact GLONASS pseudo ranges and
phase ranges (MSM3)
• 1084: Full GLONASS pseudo ranges and phase
ranges plus CNR (MSM4)
• 1085: Full GLONASS pseudo ranges, phase
ranges, phase range rates and CNR (MSM5)
• 1086: Full GLONASS pseudo ranges and phase
ranges plus CNR, high resolution (MSM6)
• 1087: Full GLONASS pseudo ranges, phase
ranges, phase range rates and CNR, high resolution (MSM7)
• 1091: Compact Galileo pseudo ranges (MSM1)
• 1092: Compact Galileo phase ranges (MSM2)
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
201
Field
Option
Description
• 1093: Compact Galileo pseudo ranges and
phase ranges (MSM3)
• 1094: Full Galileo pseudo ranges and phase
ranges plus CNR (MSM4)
• 1095: Full Galileo pseudo ranges, phase
ranges, phase range rates and CNR (MSM5)
• 1096: Full Galileo pseudo ranges and phase
ranges plus CNR, high resolution (MSM6)
• 1097: Full Galileo pseudo ranges, phase
ranges, phase range rates and CNR, high resolution (MSM7)
• 1121: Compact BeiDou pseudo ranges (MSM1)
• 1122: Compact BeiDou phase ranges (MSM2)
• 1123: Compact BeiDou pseudo ranges and
phase ranges (MSM3)
• 1124: Full BeiDou pseudo ranges and phase
ranges plus CNR (MSM4)
• 1125: Full BeiDou pseudo ranges, phase
ranges, phase range rates and CNR (MSM5)
• 1126: Full BeiDou pseudo ranges and phase
ranges plus CNR, high resolution (MSM6)
• 1127: Full BeiDou pseudo ranges, phase
ranges, phase range rates and CNR, high resolution (MSM7)
Accuracy at the rover:
• For L1-only: 0.25 - 1 m rms.
• For L1 and L2: 1 - 5 cm rms after a successful
ambiguity resolution.
RTCM 1,2 v2
Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Differential and delta differential GPS corrections.
Message 3 is also generated. Use for DGPS applications. Accuracy at the rover: 0.25 - 1 m rms.
RTCM 9,2 v2
Message according to RTCM version 2.x. GPS
partial correction set and delta differential GPS
corrections. Message 3 is also generated. Use for
DGPS applications with a slow data channel in the
presence of interference. Accuracy at the rover:
0.25 - 1 m rms.
RTCM 20,21 v2
Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Real-time
carrier phase corrections and high accuracy pseudorange corrections. Message 3 is also generated. Use for real-time operations. Accuracy at
the rover: 1 - 5 cm rms after a successful ambiguity resolution.
RTCM 1,2,18,19
v2
Available for RTK base. Message according to
RTCM version 2.x. Combination of RTCM 1,2 v2
and RTCM 18,19 v2.
RTCM 1,2,20,21
v2
Available for RTK base. Message according to
RTCM version 2.x. Combination of RTCM 1,2 v2
and RTCM 20,21 v2.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
202
Field
Option
Description
The availability of the following options, depends on the selection
made for SBAS tracking on the Advanced page.
Automatic SBAS SBAS satellites will be tracked and the SBAS
service used will be automatically selected.
WAAS
Wide Area Augmentation System satellites will be
tracked.
WAAS (test)
To track Wide Area Augmentation System satellites while the system is still in test mode.
EGNOS
European Geostationary Navigation Overlay
System satellites will be tracked.
EGNOS (test)
To track European Geostationary Navigation
Overlay System satellites while the system is still
in test mode.
MSAS
MTSAT Satellite-based Augmentation System
where MTSAT stands for Multi-functional Transport SATellite
GAGAN
GPS Aided Geo Augmentation Navigation satellites will be tracked.
RTCM version 1.x, 2.1, 2.2 or
2.3
Bits per byte
6 or 8
Available when the selected RTK data format is
an RTCM version 2 format. The same version must
be used at the reference and the rover.
Defines the number of bits/byte in the RTCM
message being received.
Use auto coor- Check box
dinate system
Available for RTK data format: RTCM v3. To set
an RTCM coordinate system received by a reference network as active coordinate system.
Receive RTK Check box
network information
Available for RTK data format: RTCM v3. Activates an info message (RTCM message 1029).
Behaviour
Selectable list
Available for RTK data format: RTCM v3.
Log only
The info message will only be logged to a text file.
Show only
The info message will only be shown by the
instrument.
Show & log
The info message will be shown by the instrument
and logged to a text file.
Next step
Page changes to the RTK base page.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
203
RTK Rover Settings,
RTK base page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Sensor at base Selectable list
The instrument type used at the base. If the realtime data format contains information of the
instrument type, certain corrections based on this
information are applied in order to provide correct
results. The real-time data formats Leica, Leica
4G, CMR/CMR+ and RTCM v3 contain this information. These corrections are important when
third party instruments are used as reference.
Selectable list
The antenna used at the base. If the real-time data
format contains information of the antenna,
certain corrections based on this information are
applied in order to provide correct results. The
real-time data formats Leica, Leica 4G,
CMR/CMR+ and RTCM v3 contain this information.
Antenna at
base

If the reference data is corrected by absolute antenna calibration values and a Leica
standard antenna is being used on the
rover, select ADVNULLANTENNA as base
antenna.
RTK base is
sending
unique ID
Check box
If checked, an ID can be typed in.
RTK base ID
Editable field
The special ID of the base station from which realtime data is to be received. The allowed minimum
and maximum values vary.
From 0 to 31
For RTK data format: Leica and RTK data format:
CMR/CMR+.
From 0 to 1023 For RTCM version: 2.x.
From 0 to 4095 For RTK data format: Leica 4G and RTK data
format: RTCM v3.
Next step
Page changes to the RTK network page.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
204
RTK Rover Settings,
RTK network page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Fn GGA..
To activate the sending of a GGA message for RTK network applications. Refer to "19.7.3 Configuration of GGA Message Sending for
Reference Network Applications".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Use RTK
network
Check box
If checked, an RTK network can be used.
Defines the type of reference network to be used.
Refer to SmartNet documentation for more
detailed descriptions.
Network type
Nearest
The rover sends its position via NMEA GGA
message to SmartNet. From this position,
SmartNet determines the reference in a reference
network that is closest to the rover. The corrections from that reference are sent to the rover.
Supported for all real-time data formats.
If this option is selected, an NMEA GGA message
must be activated using Fn GGA...
i-MAX
individualised Master-AuXiliary corrections. The
rover sends its position via NMEA GGA message to
SmartNet where the Master-Auxiliary corrections
are calculated. The corrections are also individualised by SmartNet, which means it determines the
best suitable corrections for that rover.
If this option is selected, an NMEA GGA message
can be activated using Fn GGA...
MAX
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
Master-AuXiliary corrections
The rover typically does not send its position to
SmartNet. SmartNet calculates and sends MasterAuxiliary corrections to the rover.
The rover individualises the corrections for its position, which means it determines the best suitable
corrections. The corrections are sent in RTCM v3
with message types 1015/1016.
205
Field
Option
Description
If this option is selected, an NMEA GGA message
can be activated using Fn GGA...
VRS
Virtual Reference Station. If this option is selected,
an NMEA GGA message must be activated using Fn
GGA... Refer to "19.7.3 Configuration of GGA
Message Sending for Reference Network Applications".
FKP
Area correction parameters. Derived from German:
FlächenKorrektur Parameter
Send user ID
Check box
Activates the sending of a Leica proprietary NMEA
message defining the user.
User ID 1 and
User ID 2
Editable field
The specific user IDs to be sent as part of the Leica
proprietary NMEA message. By default the serial
number of the instrument is displayed.
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
206
RTK Rover Settings,
Advanced page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Use prediction Check box
Description
To activate and deactivate the prediction of realtime observations between the data rate of the
base. Available unless RTK data format: RTCM 1,2
v2 or RTK data format: RTCM 9,2 v2.
Use height
filter
Check box
To activate and deactivate the height filter for
height smoothing.
Compute
xRTK positions
Check box
To activate or deactivate a slightly less accurate
RTK position type, typically 5 - 10 cm, automatically providing more availability for phase fixed
positions with a reliability of 99%. Recommended
when working in heavy canopy environments.

Use SmartLink Check box
For NMEA messages, positions measured
with the xRTK mode are flagged as fixed.
Availability:
• For GS10/GS15 or GS25
• For all RTK formats
• Independently from the xRTK configuration
and SBAS settings
To activate and deactivate using Terrastar corrections to bridge RTK corrections outages for long
periods of time, for example 10 minutes. Terrastar
is a GNSS augmentation service working with
geostationary broadcast satellites.
Use SmartLink to work for longer without the
consistent usage of the RTK infrastructure.

Glonass mode Automatic
GPS L5, Galileo E5a/E5b/Alt-BOC and
BeiDou B2 satellite signals are unavailable
in SmartLink mode.
configurations in Satellite Tracking
 The
Settings are not changed.
The SmartLink functionality is licenced.

The instrument decides automatically if GLONASS
observations are fixed or not. Available for
GLONASS instruments.
For GS05/GS06, the option Automatic is always
used.
Glonass fix
The GLONASS observations are fixed in an RTK
solution.
Glonass float
The GLONASS observations are not fixed in an RTK
solution.
SBAS tracking
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
Allows a Space-Based Augmentation System to be
configured to provide additional corrections in
conjunction with GPS signals. Also commonly
referred to as Satellite-Based Augmentation
System, SBAS provides corrected time and
distance measurements calculated by a network of
ground relay stations and geostatic satellites. An
SBAS can correct for problems such as atmospheric
delays, poor satellite geometry and incorrect satellite positioning.
207
Field
Option
Description
Automatic SBAS SBAS satellites will be tracked and the SBAS service
used will be automatically selected.
WAAS
Wide Area Augmentation System satellites will be
tracked.
WAAS (test)
To track Wide Area Augmentation System satellites while the system is still in test mode.
EGNOS
European Geostationary Navigation Overlay
System satellites will be tracked.
EGNOS (test)
To track European Geostationary Navigation
Overlay System satellites while the system is still in
test mode.
MSAS
MTSAT Satellite-based Augmentation System
where MTSAT stands for Multi-functional Transport SATellite
GAGAN
GPS Aided Geo Augmentation Navigation satellites
will be tracked.
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
208
Prediction
The following provides additional information on the prediction of real-time positions
between the data rate of the base.
Access
In RTK Rover Settings, Advanced page.
Description
Prediction is the interpolation of real-time corrections between those corrections
regularly transmitted by a reference at a defined data rate.
Advantages in using prediction
• Computation of real-time positions on the rover is independent from the transmission rate of the data from the base station.
• Positions computed with prediction have a reduced latency of around 20 ms.
Recommended settings for using prediction
The slower the data rate the more important it is to activate prediction.
Height smoothing
The following provides additional information on the height filter for height
smoothing.
Access
In RTK Rover Settings, Advanced page.
Description
Height smoothing is a filter applied to all heights measured in the WGS84 or a local
coordinate system or output via NMEA. The filter defaults are best suited for high
dynamic variations in height up to 1 m/s as carried out by graders.
Height Smoothing with high dynamic GPS operations
All GPS computed positions are almost twice as accurate in plan than in height. For the
position determination, satellites can appear in all four quadrants. For the height
determination, satellites can appear in two quadrants. Having fewer quadrants,
weakens the height position compared to the plan position.
N
E
N
H
GS12_041
Position determination with satellites
appearing in all four quadrants.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
Height determination with satellites
appearing in two quadrants.
209
In high dynamic GPS operations, this fact results in height variations of a few centimetres as shown in the blue curve in the following diagram. Some GPS monitoring applications require a stabilised height. By applying the filter, the height variations are
smoothed and most of the noise in the height component is eliminated.
a [m]
201.2
b
201.19
c
201.18
201.17
201.16
201.15
201.14
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
[sec]
GS_050
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
a) Height
b) Height variations
c) Smoothed
height
210
19.7.2
Configuration with Digital Cellular Phone and Radio
Description
An ideal real-time setup is to combine a radio and a digital cellular phone to get the
best of both technologies. The radio can be used where the radio signals can be
received, the advantage being that the radio data transmission is free. If the radio
channel is broken, when the rover goes out of range or due to an obstruction, change
to the digital cellular phone to complete the survey. This switch allows maximum
productivity and minimal costs with real-time GPS.
Field procedure
step-by-step
Step
Description
1.
Set up a base.
2.
On the base, attach a digital cellular phone to one port and a radio to
another port.
3.
Configure both connections on the base.
4.
Start the base. Real-time data is transmitted on two ports simultaneously using different devices.
5.
Set up a rover.
6.
On the rover, attach a digital cellular phone to one port and a radio to
another port.
7.
Use two working styles to configure both connections on the rover.
8.
Start the rover using either the digital cellular phone connection or the radio
connection.
9.
On the rover, change the working style in use in order to change between
using digital cellular phone and radio. There is no need to return to the base.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
211
19.7.3
Configuration of GGA Message Sending for Reference Network Applications
Description
Most reference networks require an approximate position of the rover. For reference
network applications, a rover dials into the reference network and submits its approximate position in form of an NMEA GGA message.
By default, the instrument sends GGA messages with updated current positions automatically when a reference network is selected.
Surveying regulations in some countries require that one certain position can be
selected. This position is then sent to the reference network as GGA message through
the real-time connection every five seconds.
Refer to "F.3 GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data" for information on GGA
message format.
Access step-by-step
In RTK Rover Settings, RTK network page, press Fn GGA...
Send GGA NMEA
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Coord
Available for GGA position: From job and GGA position:
LAST/HERE Posn. To view other coordinate types. Local coordinates
are available when a local coordinate system is active.
Last
Available for GGA position: LAST/HERE Posn. To use the same
coordinates in the GGA message as when the instrument was last
used in a reference network application. This functionality is possible
when position coordinates from a previous reference network application are still stored in the internal memory.
Here
Available for GGA position: LAST/HERE Posn. To use the coordinates of the current navigation position in the GGA message.
Fn Ell Ht and
Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
GGA position Automatic
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
Description
The current rover position is sent to the reference
network. The position is updated and sent every
five seconds.
212
Field
Option
Description
From job
A point from the working job can be selected in
Point ID. The position of this point is sent to the
reference network every five seconds.
LAST/HERE Posn The position last used in a reference network
application or the current navigation position can
be selected using Last or Here. The selected position is sent every five seconds.
Point ID
None
No GGA message is sent to the reference
network.
Selectable list
Available for GGA position: From job.
The coordinates of this point are sent out in the
GGA message.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
213
19.8
Base RTK 1 / Base RTK 2
19.8.1
Configuration of a Reference Real-Time Connection

Unavailable for GS05/GS06.
Description
The real-time connection allows real-time related parameters to be configured. These
parameters include defining the real-time messages, data rates and time slicing. Up to
two real-time connections can be configured on the instrument.
Access
For RTK base:
• In Base Connection Settings highlight Base RTK 1. Edit...
Two real-time devices can be attached to two different ports, for example a
radio and a digital cellular phone. On the reference, the two devices can
operate simultaneously. Highlight Base RTK 2 and press Edit.. to configure a
second real-time connection.

RTK base settings
(RTK1)/RTK base
settings (RTK2),
General page
The available fields and pages on this screen depend on the selected settings.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Devce..
Available for Connect using: GS Port 1/GS Port 2/GS Port 3/GS
radio/GS modem. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to
"21.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Transmit RTK Check box
base info
Activates the base real-time connection.
Connect using GS Port 1
For GS10: The physical port P1 on the box.
For GS14/GS15: The red LEMO port.
For GS08plus/GS12: Fixed to this setting.
Streaming of RTK data throught the CS is not
allowed.
For GS25: The physical LEMO port P1 on the box.
GS Port 2
For GS10: The physical port P2 on the box.
For GS15: The black LEMO port.
For GS25: The physical LEMO port P2 on the box.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
214
Field
Option
Description
GS Port 3
For GS10: The physical port P3 on the box.
For GS15/GS25: The slot for a device.
GS Port 4
For GS25: The physical LEMO port P4 on the box.
GS Internet 1, GS The internet ports on the GS10/GS14/GS15/GS25.
Internet 2 and GS If these ports are not assigned to a specific
Internet 3
connection, then these ports are additional
remote ports.
GS radio
Available for GS14.
GS modem
Available for GS14.
Device
Display only
The device currently assigned to the selected port
within the active working style.
RTK data
format
Leica, Leica 4G, Refer to "19.7.1 Configuration of a Rover RealCMR/CMR+,
Time Connection" for information about these
RTCM v3, RTCM real-time data formats.
18,19 v2, RTCM
For GS08plus/GS12, the setting is fixed to
1,2 v2, RTCM 9,2
RTCM v3.
v2, RTCM 20,21
v2, RTCM
1,2,18,19 v2

RTCM v3 (MSM)
Refer to "19.7.1 Configuration of a Rover RealTime Connection" for information about this realtime data format.
RTCM v3 (MSM) generates GNSS receiver observables in a universal manner to meet the coming
reality when more GNSS and their signals will
become available.
Encodes the raw observations of all tracked GNSS
signals and delivers them as RTK corrections.
RTCM v3 (MSM) and RTCM v3 are treated separately.
RTCM version 1.x, 2.1, 2.2 or
2.3
Available when the selected RTK data format is
an RTCM version 2 format. The same version must
be used at the reference and the rover.
Use external
antenna on
GS15
Check box
Available for Connect using: GS Port 3. Allows
external radio / GSM antenna on the GS15 to be
used for slot devices.
Next step
Page changes to the Data rates page.
RTK base settings
(RTK1)/RTK base
settings (RTK2),
Data rates page

This page is unavailable for GS08plus/GS12.
Description
For all real-time data formats, parts of the message can be output at different rates.
The settings on this screen define the output rates for the various parts of the
selected real-time data format. The available fields on this screen depend on the
selected setting for RTK data format in RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings
(RTK2).
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
215
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
RTK data
format
Display only
The selected data format.
Data
From 0.1s to
60.0s
Rates for the transmission of raw observations.
The default settings are suitable for standard
applications. They can be changed for special
applications. A check is performed for permissible
combinations.
The message type of RTCM v3 and Leica 4G.
Message type
Compact
Suitable for standard applications.
For RTK data format: RTCM v3 (MSM), encoding
according to MSM3. Refer to "RTK Rover Settings,
General page".
Extended
For RTK data format: RTCM v3 (MSM), encoding
according to MSM5. Refer to "RTK Rover Settings,
General page".
Coords
From 10s to
120s
Rate for the transmission of reference coordinates.
Info
From 10s to 120s Rate for the transmission of base station information such as point ID.
Off
Available for RTCM v3 (MSM). No receiver and
antenna descriptors information message is sent
out. Default for Message type: Compact.
End of
message
Nothing or CR
To add a Carriage Return at the end of the realtime message.
Messages to
be streamed
(local coords
will be
computed
using coordinate system
on the GS
sensor)
Selectable list
Available for RTCM version: 2.3. The messages
sent within the coordinate message.
RTK base ID
Editable field
An identification for a base station. It is converted
into a compact format and sent out with real-time
data in all real-time data formats. It is different
from the point ID of the base station.
An ID of the base station is required if working
with several base stations in time slicing mode on
the same frequency. In this case, the ID of the
base station from which data is to be accepted
must be typed in at the rover.
The allowed minimum and maximum values vary.
From 0 to 31
For Leica and CMR/CMR+.
From 0 to 1023
For any RTCM version 2 format.
From 0 to 4095
For Leica 4G, RTCM v3 and RTCM v3 (MSM).
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
216
Next step
Page changes to the Time slicing page.
RTK base settings
(RTK1)/RTK base
settings (RTK2),
Time slicing page

This page is unavailable for GS08plus/GS12.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Use time
slicing
Check box
The possibility to send delayed real-time
messages. This functionality is required when
real-time messages from different base stations
are sent on the same radio channel. Time slicing
works for all device types.
Total base
2, 3 or 4
stations being
used
Time slot for
this base
2, 3 or 4
The contents of
the selectable list
depend on the
settings for Total
base stations
being used.
The number of base stations in use from where
real-time messages are sent.
The time slot represents the actual time delay.
The number of possible time slots is the number
of base stations in use. The time delay equals 1 s
divided by the total number of base stations. If
two base stations are used, the time delay is
0.50 s. Therefore, the time slots are at 0.00 s and
at 0.50 s. With three base stations, the time delay
is 0.33 s. The time slots are at 0.00 s, 0.33 s and
0.66 s.
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
217
19.9


Description
NMEA 1 / NMEA 2
Unavailable for GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12.
For GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12, streaming of GGA messages is supported for RTK
network operations.
National Marine Electronics Association has developed a message standard related to
the marine electronics industry. NMEA messages have been accepted as the standard
for sharing specific data information between companies since the late 1970s. Refer
to "Appendix F NMEA Message Formats" for a comprehensive description of each
NMEA message.
The settings on this screen define the port, the device and the type of NMEA message
to be used for the NMEA Out connection.
Up to two NMEA Out connections can be configured. Each NMEA Out connection can
output different messages at different rates with different talker IDs. The output of
NMEA messages on both ports is simultaneous.
The screens for the configuration of both NMEA connections are identical except for
the title - NMEA Output 1 and NMEA Output 2. For simplicity, the title NMEA Output
1 is used in the following.
Access
For RTK rover:
• In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight NMEA 1 or NMEA 2.
Edit...
NMEA Output 1
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Mesgs
To configure what NMEA messages are output, the rates and the
output timing method. Refer to paragraph "NMEA Messages".
Devce..
To create, select, edit or delete a device.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Stream NMEA Check box
messages
from the GS
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
Description
Activates the output of NMEA.
218
Field
Option
Description
Stream NMEA Check box
messages
from the GS
Activates the output of NMEA.
Connect using GS Port 1
For GS10: The physical port P1 on the box.
For GS15: The red LEMO port.
GS Port 2
For GS10: The physical port P2 on the box.
For GS15: The black LEMO port.
GS Port 3
For GS10: The physical port P3 on the box.
For GS15: The slot for a device.
GS BT
The Bluetooth port on the GS10/GS15.
Display only
Usually, RS232 is used to transfer NMEA
messages.
Device
NMEA Version 4.0 (extended)
4.1 (compact)
Use a defined Check box
talker ID
Backwards compatible to NMEA in SmartWorx Viva
version 5.0 plus BeiDou support.
More compact message output than in SmartWorx Viva version 5.0 plus BeiDou support
When this box is checked, a user-defined talker ID
can be typed in. Otherwise, the standard NMEA
Talker ID is used:
GN
= Global Navigation Satellite System
= GPS with GLONASS/Galileo/BeiDou in any
combination
GP
= GPS only
GL
= GLONASS
GA
= Galileo
BD
= BeiDou
Talker ID
Editable field
Available when Use a defined talker ID is checked.
Appears at the beginning of each NMEA message.
Messages to
be streamed
(local coords
will be
computed
using coordinate system
on the GS
sensor)
Display only
The NMEA messages currently selected for
output.
Overview of NMEA messages sent depending on SmartWorx Viva versions and
settings
Message
SmartWorx Viva
v5.00
SmartWorx Viva v5.50
GPS
GPS
GNSS
GNSS
NMEA v4.0
GPS
GNSS
NMEA v4.1
GGA
$GPGGA
$GNGGA
$GPGGA
$GLGGA
$GPGGA
$GNGGA
$GPGGA
$GNGGA
GGK
$GPGGK
$GNGGK
$GPGGK
$GNGGK
$GPGGK
$GNGGK
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
219
Message
SmartWorx Viva
v5.00
SmartWorx Viva v5.50
GPS
GPS
GNSS
GNSS
NMEA v4.0
GPS
GNSS
NMEA v4.1
GGK_PT
$PTNL,GGK $PTNL,GGK $PTNL,GGK $PTNL,GGK $PTNL,GGK $PTNL,GGK
GGQ
$GPGGQ
$GNGGQ
$GPGGQ
$GLGGQ
$GPGGQ
$GNGGQ
$GPGGQ
$GLGGQ
$GAGGQ
$BDGGQ
$GPGGQ
$GNGGQ
GLL
$GPGLL
$GNGLL
$GPGLL
$GNGLL
$GPGLL
$GNGLL
GNS
$GPGNS
$GNGNS
$GPGNS
$GNGNS
$GPGNS
$GNGNS
GSA
$GPGSA
$GNGSA
$GNGSA
$GPGSA
$GPGSA
$GNGSA
GSV
$GPGSV
$GPGSV
$GLGSV
$GPGSV
$GPGSV
$GLGSV
$GAGSV
$BDGSV
$GPGSV
$GPGSV
$GLGSV
$GAGSV
$BDGSV
LLK
$GPLLK
$GNLLK
$GPLLK
$GLLLK
$GPLLK
$GNLLK
$GPLLK
$GLLLK
$GALLK
$BDLLK
$GPLLK
$GNLLK
LLQ
$GPLLQ
$GNLLQ
$GPLLQ
$GLLLQ
$GPLLQ
$GNLLQ
$GPLLQ
$GLLLQ
$GALLQ
$BDLLQ
$GPLLQ
$GNLLQ
RMC
$GNRMC
$GNRMC
$GNRMC
$GNRMC
$GNRMC
$GNRMC
VTG
$GPVTG
$GNVTG
$GPVTG
$GNVTG
$GPVTG
$GNVTG
ZDA
$GPZDA
$GPZDA
$GPZDA
$GPZDA
$GPZDA
$GPZDA
Next step
IF NMEA messages THEN
are not configured
OK closes the screen.
are to be configured Mesgs.
NMEA Messages
This screen shows the messages that can be output, which messages are currently
output, the output rates and the output timing method.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
220
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Edit..
To configure how the currently highlighted message is output. Refer
to paragraph "NMEA Message to Send".
All and None
To activate and deactivate the output for all messages.
Use
To activate and deactivate the output for the highlighted message.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Next step
IF an NMEA
message
THEN
is not to be config- OK closes the screen.
ured
is to be configured
highlight the message and Edit...
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
221
NMEA Message to
Send
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Stream the
NMEA
message
Check box
When this box is checked, the selected NMEA
message is output.
Output
Immediately
The NMEA message is created as soon as the
information is available. It is sent out in the time
interval as defined in Rate.
On point stored
The NMEA message is sent on point storage.
If the time interval defined in Rate is
shorter than the epochs of the screen
update, then the internal computation of
positions is changed to allow the specified
rate of NMEA positions. The screen update
remains unchanged.
Available for Output: On point stored.
Defines the type of points for which the NMEA
message is sent.
Point Type
Rate

All points
The NMEA message is sent when any type of
point is stored.
Occupied pts
only
The NMEA message is sent when a manually
measured point is stored.
Auto pts only
The NMEA message is sent when auto points are
stored.
From 0.05s to
3600.0s
Available unless Output: On point stored.
Defines the time intervals at which the NMEA
messages are created.
For GS05/GS06 logging rates > 5 Hz are
supported.
Monitor CQ
values
Check box
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
When this box is checked the CQ control can be
defined.
222
Field
Option
Description
CQ Control
Position only,
Available when Monitor CQ values is checked.
Height only or
Activates a control over the coordinate quality. If
Position & height the coordinate quality of the position and/or
height component exceeds the limit as defined in
Maximum CQ, then NMEA messages are not
output.
Maximum CQ
Editable field
Available when Monitor CQ values is checked.
The limit for the coordinate quality up to which
NMEA messages are output.
Next step
Step
Description
1.
OK returns to NMEA Messages.
2.
OK returns to the screen from where NMEA Messages was accessed.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
223
19.10
Remote (OWI)

Unavailable for GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12.
Description
The remote connection allows:
• the instrument to be controlled using a device other than the field controller, for
example a computer. Outside World Interface or Leica Binary 2 commands can be
used to control the instrument through the remote port. Documentation for OWI
and LB2 is available on request from the Leica Geosystems representative.
• a message log to be requested from a remote client via an OWI message. A
message log contains a history of warning messages and message lines.
• the downloading of data directly from the instrument’s memory device to LGO
through a serial port on the computer. The CS does not need to be removed from
the instrument.
The settings on this screen define the port and the device to be used for the remote
control.


A port configured as a remote port can be used to output event input, meteo or tilt
notification messages.
The OWI commands listed here are protected by a licence key. Refer to "30.3 Load
licence keys" for information on how to type in the licence key. The corresponding LB2
commands are also protected. If these OWI commands have been activated by a
licence key, it is indicated in About Leica Viva.
•
•
•
•
•
AHT
ANT
CNF
DCF
DCT
•
•
•
•
•
DPM
GGA
GGK
GGK(PT)
GGQ
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
•
•
•
•
•
GLL
GNS
LLK
LLQ
NET
•
•
•
•
•
POB
POE
POQ
POS
RMC
• RTK
• TPV
• USR
224
Access
For RTK rover:
• In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight Remote (OWI). Edit...
Remote (OWI)
Connections
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Cntrl..
To configure additional parameters.
Devce..
Available unless an internet connection is used. To create, select, edit
or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet
Devices".
Use
Available unless a connection is NMEA 1, NMEA 2 or Remote (OWI).
To use the highlighted connection by Remote (OWI).
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Port
The physical port on the instrument which will be used for the
connection functionality.
Connection
The connection configured for the ports. Any port which is not
configured is automatically assigned the remote connection.
Device
The hardware connected to the chosen port.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
225
19.11
PPS Output

The PPS output is an optional interface requiring a special port.
Description
PPS stands for Pulse Per Second. It is a pulse that is output at a specified interval time.
This can be used to activate another device. Additionally, a notification message can
be output through the GS25 ports P1, P2, P3, P4 or BT when a PPS output occurs.
For example, in aerial photography, an aerial camera can be configured to take a photo
each time it receives a pulse from the instrument.
The settings on this screen define the output port and parameters for the PPS option.
This screen is available if the instrument is fitted with a PPS output port.

Access
This option is only available on GS25.
For RTK rover:
• In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight PPS Output. Edit...
PPS Output,
PPS Output page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Stream Puls
Per Second
from the GS
Check box
When this box is checked, the output of PPS is
activated and relevant settings can be configured.
Rate
From 0.05s to
20.0s
The rate at which pulses are output.
Polarity
Negative edge
Measure the time from the negative edge or the
and Positive edge positive edge of the pulse.
Restrict
Check box
output by time
accuracy
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
To restrict the PPS output by the accuracy of time.
If the time accuracy is degraded below a defined
value, for example, due to a lack of satellites, no
PPS output is generated.
When this box is checked, the observation of the
time accuracy limit within which pulses are generated is activated.
226
Field
Option
Accuracy limit Editable field
Description
The time accuracy limit in nanoseconds. Available
when Restrict output by time accuracy is
checked.
Next step
Page changes to the Notification page.
PPS Output,
Notification page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Send notifica- Check box
tion on each
PPS output
Description
When this box is checked, the output of a notification message with each PPS output is activated.
Refer to "Appendix I PPS Output Notify Message
Format" for information on the message format.
Connect using GS Port 1, GS
The ports on the GS25 used for the connection.
Port 2 or GS Port
3
GS BT
The Bluetooth ports on the GS25 used for the
connection.
Device
Display only
The hardware connected to the chosen port.
Notification
Selectable list
The message can be in ASCII or in binary format.
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
227
19.12
Event Input 1/Event Input 2

The event input is an optional interface requiring a special port.
Description
The event input interface allows pulses which are sent from devices connected to the
instrument to be recorded. These records can later be superimposed on the processed
kinematic data and the positions where the events took place can be interpolated in
LGO. Events logged during real-time operations can also be exported to an ASCII file
using an appropriate format file. Additionally, a notification message can be output
through the GS25 ports P1, P2, P3, P4 or BT providing information about when the
event occurred. A port configured as a remote port can be used to output the notification message.
For example, in aerial photography, an aerial camera can be connected through the
event input port. When the shutter opens, the position at which the event occurred is
recorded.
The settings on this screen define the input port and parameters for the event input
option. This screen is available if the instrument is fitted with a event input port.

This option is only available on GS25.
Event input 1/Event
input 2,
Event input page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Receive event Check box
input pulses
Description
When this box is checked, the detection and
logging of events being sent to the event ports is
activated and relevant settings can be configured.
Information to Time,pos,vel,CQ, Time, position, velocity and coordinate quality can
log
Time,pos,vel,
be recorded in various combinations.
Time,pos or Time
Polarity
Negative edge or The polarity according to the device in use.
Positive edge
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
228
Field
Option
Description
Accuracy limit Editable field
If two or more events take place during the time
defined in s, the first event is recorded. Enter 0 to
accept all events. The shortest recording time is
0.05 s.
Editable field
Records up to four lines of data with the event
record. Use the description to differentiate
between the two event records if two event input
ports are used at the same time.
Description
Next step
Page changes to the Bias values page.
Event input 1/Event
input 2,
Bias values page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
External bias
Editable field
Sets a calibration value in ns according to the
external event device and cable being used.
Enter user
defined
internal bias
Check box
When this box is checked, personal calibration
values for the particular instrument can be configured.
When this box is not checked, default calibration
values for the particular instrument are used.
Internal bias
Editable field
Available when Enter user defined internal bias is
checked. Sets the particular calibration value in ns
for the instrument.
Next step
Page changes to the Notification page.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
229
Event input 1/Event
input 2,
Notification page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Send notifica- Check box
tion on each
Event Input
Description
When this box is checked, the output of a notification message with each event input is activated. Refer to "Appendix H Event Input Notify
Message Format" for information on the message
format.
Connect using GS Port 1, GS
The ports on the GS25 which are used for the
Port 2 or GS Port connection.
3
GS BT
The Bluetooth ports on the GS25 used for the
connection.
Device
Display only
The hardware connected to the chosen port.
Notification
Selectable list
The message can be in ASCII or in binary format.
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
230
19.13
Total Station
Description
The settings on this screen define the communication of the field controller with Leica
total stations and third-party instruments.
Access
For TPS:
• In Connection Settings highlight Total Station. Edit...
Total Station Connection
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Search
To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Available
if Connect using: Bluetooth is selected.
Cntrl..
Available for certain devices connected to certain connections. To
configure additional parameters, for example changing the radio
channel.
Default
To return the fields back to their default values.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Manufacturer
Selectable list
The brand of the instrument.
Model
Selectable list
The instrument model.
Connect using Cable, Bluetooth, Internal
radio, External
radio
How the instrument is connected. The options
available depend on the selection for Model. The
availability of the other fields depends on the
selection made here.
Radio cap
(CTR16)
To configure a connection between a CS15 with
CTR16 and a TS with RH16.
Baud rate
From 1200 to
115200
Frequency of data transfer from instrument to
device in bits per second.
Parity
None, Even or
Odd
Error checksum at the end of a block of digital
data.
Data bits
6, 7 or 8
Number of bits in a block of digital data.
Stop bit
1 or 2
Number of bits at the end of a block of digital
data.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
231
Field
Option
Flow control
None or RTS/CTS Activates hardware handshake.
When the instrument/device is ready for data, it
asserts the Ready To Send line indicating it is
ready to receive data. This line is read by the
sender at the Clear To Send input, indicating it is
clear to send the data.
Bluetooth ID
and Name
Display only
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
Description
The last connected total station using CTR16.
If no information of a last total station is available, then ---- is displayed.
232
19.14
GSI Output
Description
Each time a measured point is stored to the working job, GSI data is streamed through
the configured port of the field controller.
Access
In Connection Settings highlight GSI Output. Edit...
GSI Output Connection
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Search
Available when CS Bluetooth 1 or CS Bluetooth 2 are selected. To
search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth
device is found a list of available devices is provided.
Devce..
To create, select, edit or delete a device.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Output GSI data to Check box
device
Activates the connection.
Connect using
The RS232 port on the field controller.
CS RS232
port
CS Bluetooth The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which
1 and CS
will be used.
Bluetooth 2
TS Bluetooth The Bluetooth ports on the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite
1 and TS
which can be used.
Bluetooth 2
Cable
The RS232 port on the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite.
Radio handle Hotshoe connection for RadioHandle. This port is
located on top of Communication side cover.
Device
Display only
The device currently assigned to the selected
port.
GSI Format
GSI8 polar &
crtsn
GSI Polar and Cartesian (8 data characters)
(Point ID, Hz, V, SlopeDist, PPM, E, N, Elev.)
GSI16 polar
GSI Polar (16 data characters)
(Point ID, Hz, V, SlopeDist, PPM, reflector height)
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
233
Field
Option
Description
GSI16 cartesian
GSI Cartesian (16 data characters)
(E, N, Elev, Reflector Height)
Pt,N,E,Ht,Dat Coordinate data
e
(Northing BEFORE Easting)
Pt,E,N,Ht,Dat Coordinate data
e
(Easting BEFORE Northing)
Pseudo
NMEA GGA
Based on NMEA (National Marine Electronics
Association), which is a standard for interfacing
marine electronic devices.
GSI8 polar
GSI Polar (8 data characters)
(Point ID, Hz, V, SlopeDist, PPM)
GSI16 polar 2 GSI Polar (16 data characters)
(Point ID, Hz, V, SlopeDist, PPM)
Use RS232 GSI
protocol
Check box
A protocol defines if the system expects a handshake or no handshake.
If checked, a handshake is required.
A data block is sent out from the instrument and
a receipt confirmation is expected. This handshake requires that GeoCom Mode is activated.
Output format - GSI
Format
GSI data is transmitted in blocks. Every block consists of several data words, refer to
the examples in the following table. Every data word begins with a two character Word
Index, the WI code, specifying the data type within this block. Each GSI8 word has in
total 16 characters, consisting of 7 information characters followed by 8 data characters and finally the blank character ASCII code 32. The GSI16 block is like the GSI8
block, but begins with * and the data word contains 16 characters for large values
such as UTM coordinates, alphanumeric codes, attributes or point IDs.
Example 1 shows a GSI8 block sequence with the words for point ID (11), Easting coordinate (81) and Northing coordinate (82). Example 2 shows a GSI16 block sequence
with the words for point ID (11), horizontal (21) and vertical angle (22).
Type
GSI8 Polar&Cart
GSI16 Polar
GSI16 Cartesian
WI 11
Point ID
Point ID
Point ID
WI 21
Hz
Hz
-
WI 22
V
V
-
WI 31
SlopeDist
SlopeDist
-
WI 51
PPM Total/mm
PPM Total/mm
-
WI 81
East
-
East
WI 82
North
-
North
WI 83
Elev.
-
Elev.
WI 87
Refl. Ht
-
Refl. Ht
Example 1: GSI8
Each word has 16 characters of which 8 characters are used for the data block.
Word 1
110001+0000A110
110002+0000A111
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
Word 2
81..00+00005387
81..00+00007586
Word 3
82..00-00000992
82..00-00003031
234
110003+0000A112
110004+0000A113
110005+0000A114
81..00+00007536
81..00+00003839
81..00+00001241
82..00-00003080
82..00-00003080
82..00-00001344
Example 2: GSI16
Each word has 24 characters of which 16 characters are used for the data block.
Word 1
Word 2
*110001+000000000PNC005 21.002+00000000133846
5
50
*110002+000000000PNC005 21.002+00000000128025
6
30
*110003+000000000PNC005 21.002+00000000112223
7
60
*110004+000000000PNC005 21.002+00000000105735
8
50
*110005+000000000PNC005 21.002+00000000099836
9
10
Word 3
22.002+00000000053715
00
22.002+00000000052550
00
22.002+00000000054338
00
22.002+00000000058176
00
22.002+00000000051714
00
GSI Word information
Pos.
Name
Description of values
1-2
Word Index (WI)
3
No signifi- .: No information.
cance
WI 11,
WI 22,
WI 51,
WI 82,
4
Automatic
index
information
.: No information.
0: Tilt compensator: Off
3: Tilt compensator: On
WI 21, WI 22
5
Input
mode
.: No information.
0: Measured values transferred from instrument
1: Manual input from keyboard
2: Measured value, Hz correction: On.
3: Measured value, Hz correction: Off.
4: Result calculated from functions
WI 21,
WI 31,
WI 81,
WI 83,
6
Units
WI 21, WI 22,
.: No information.
0: Distance: Metre (m), last digit 1 / 1000 m WI 31, WI 81,
WI 82, WI 83, WI 87
1: Distance: US ft (ft) last digit 1 / 1000 ft
2: Angle: 400 gon
3: Angle: 360° dec
4: Angle: 360°'"
5: Angle: 6400 mil
6: Distance: Metre (m), last digit 1 / 10000 m
7: Distance: US ft (ft) last digit 1 / 10000 ft
7
Sign
+: Positive value
-: Negative value
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
Applicable for
WI 21,
WI 31,
WI 81,
WI 83,
WI 21,
WI 31,
WI 81,
WI 83, WI 87
WI 22,
WI 51,
WI 82,
WI 87
WI 22,
WI 51,
WI 82,
WI 87
235
Pos.
Name
8-15 Data
8-23
16
24
Output format Pt,N,E,Ht,Date
Separating
character
Description of values
Applicable for
Data includes a sequence of 8 (16) numerical
or alphanumerical characters.
Certain data blocks are allowed to
carry more than one value for example
ppm/mm. This data is automatically
transferred with the according sign
before each single value.
WI 11,
WI 22,
WI 51,
WI 82,
WI 21,
WI 31,
WI 81,
WI 83, WI 87
WI 11,
WI 22,
WI 51,
WI 82,
WI 21,
WI 31,
WI 81,
WI 83, WI 87

: Blank
Format
Point ID, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Date, Time <CR/LF>
Description of fields
The format settings are defined in Regional Settings.
Field
Description
Point ID
Text describing the point identification
Northing
The Northing coordinate.
Easting
The Easting coordinate.
Elevation
The height coordinate.
Date
The measurement/origination date.
Time
The measurement/origination time.
<CR/LF>
Carriage Return Line Feed
Example
2004,4997.635,6010.784,393.173,09/10/2001,16:34:12.2
2005,4997.647,6010.765,393.167,09/10/2001,16:34:12.4
2006,4997.657,6010.755,393.165,09/10/2001,16:34:12.7
Output format Pt,E,N,Ht,Date
Format
This output format is identical to the Pt,N,E,Ht,Date format except the order of the
Easting and Northing variables are reversed.
Output format Pseudo NMEA GGA
Description
This output format is based on NMEA (National Marine Electronics Association), which
is a standard for interfacing marine electronic devices.
Format
$GPGGA,Time,Northing,N,Easting,E,1,05,1.0,Elevation,M,0.0,M,0.0,0001*99 <CR/LF>
Description of Fields
Field
Description
$GPGGA
Sentence identification (header including talker identification). A
Talker ID appears at the beginning of the header of each NMEA
message.
Time
UTC time of position (hhmmss.ss)
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
236
Field
Description
Northing
The Northing coordinate (always output with 2 decimal places)
N
Fixed text (N)
Easting
The Easting coordinate (always output with 2 decimal places)
E
Fixed text (E)
GPS Quality Indicator
Fixed number (1=no real-time position, navigation fix)
Number of satellites
Number of satellites in use (00 to 12)
HDOP
Fixed number (1.0)
Elevation
The height coordinate (always output with 2 decimal places)
Elevation units
Elevation units (F or M). The format settings are defined in
Regional Settings.
Height Geoid
Fixed number (0.0)
Height units
Fixed text (M)
Time since last
DGPS update
Fixed number (0.0)
DGPS
Base station ID
Fixed number (0.0001)
Checksum
Fixed number (*99)
<CR/LF>
Carriage Return Line Feed
Example
$GPGGA,171933.97,7290747.02,N,3645372.06,E,1,05,1.0,1093609.54,F,0.0,M,0.0,
0001*99
$GPGGA,171934.20,7290747.02,N,3645372.06,E,1,05,1.0,1093609.54,F,0.0,M,0.0,
0001*99
$GPGGA,171934.45,7290747.03,N,3645372.06,E,1,05,1.0,1093609.54,F,0.0,M,0.0,
0001*99

Fields are always separated by a comma. A comma is never placed before the
Checksum field. When information for a field is not available, the position in the data
string is empty.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
237
19.15
Field Controller Connection
Description
The Remote connection allows the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite/MS50/TS50/TM50 instrument
to be steered remotely from a field controller where SmartWorx Viva is running.
The settings on this screen define the port and the device used for the remote
connection.
Field Controller
Connection
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Devce..
Available unless Connect using: Cable is selected on TS50. To create,
select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing Devices /
GPRS Internet Devices".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Allow field
controller to
connect to this
instrument
Check box
When this box is checked, the remote connection
is activated.
Connect using
Cable
For TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite: The RS232 port.
For MS50/TS50/TM50: The cable USB port.
Radio handle Hotshoe connection for RadioHandle. This port is
located on top of Communication side cover.
Bluetooth
The Bluetooth port on the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite
which is used.
Cable RS232 The RS232 port on the MS50/TS50/TM50.
Device
Display only
The device currently assigned to the selected
port.
Next step
When the connection is established, most keys are locked. Available are:
• Meas, Dist and Store.
• Dist and Store have the same functionality as on the CS or as on the
TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite/MS50/TS50/TM50 when it is independently controlled.
• Level goes to Level Bubble & Compensator. Check the level bubble, laser
plummet internsity, tilt compensator and horizontal correction.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
238
19.16
GeoCom Connection
Description
The GeoCOM Mode permits communication of the TS11/TS15/MS50/TS50/TM50 with
a 3rd party device.
TS12 Lite can not communicate with a 3rd party device.

GeoCom Connection
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Devce..
Available unless Connect using: Cable is selected on TS50. To create,
select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing Devices /
GPRS Internet Devices".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Allow GeoCom
communication
with this instrument
Check box
When this box is checked, the GeoCOM mode is
activated.
Connect using
Cable
For TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite: The RS232 port.
For MS50/TS50/TM50: The cable USB port.
Radio handle Hotshoe connection for RadioHandle. This port is
located on top of Communication side cover.
TS Bluetooth The Bluetooth ports on the TS11/TS15 which can
1 and TS
be used.
Bluetooth 2
Cable RS232 The RS232 port on the MS50/TS50/TM50.
Device
WLAN
The WLAN port on the MS50/TS50/TM50.
Display only
The device currently assigned to the selected
port.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections
239
20
Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
20.1
Digital Cellular Phones
20.1.1
Overview
Description
For digital cellular phones, information such as
• the base stations that can be contacted
• the phone numbers of the base stations and
• the type of protocol to be used
can be defined.
Changing the base station to be dialled is of interest in two cases.
Case 1:
Case 2:
Technologies
CDMA
GSM
Two real-time base stations, each equipped with a digital cellular
phone, are set up at two locations belonging to different network
providers.
When leaving the area of one base, the station can be changed and the
other base can be called.
Set up as in case 1.
Two separate fixes from each base for each point can be obtained,
providing redundancy for future least squares adjustment operations.
Code Division Multiple Access is a high speed data transmission for
effective and flexible use of available resources such as bandwidth.
Users of a cellular phone network occupy the same frequency band. The
signal is especially coded for each user.
Global System for Mobile Communications is a more efficient version of
CDMA technology that uses smaller time slots but faster data transfer
rates. It is the world’s most commonly used digital network.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
240
20.1.2
Configuring a GSM Connection
Access
For RTK rover and TPS:
• In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone
of GSM technology attached. Cntrl...
For RTK base:
• In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular
phone of GSM technology attached. Cntrl...
GSM Dial-Up Connection,
Dial-up details page
Key
OK
Near
Page
Fn Cmnd..
Fn Clear
Fn Quit
Description
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
To find the nearest base station with a digital cellular phone of GSM
technology. Available when base stations to dial are already created
in Dial-up Connection List. Coordinates of these stations must be
known.
To change to another page on this screen. Available if the Internet
connection is activated.
To send AT commands to the digital cellular phone.
Available on the Sim codes page. To set the additional editable fields
to 0.
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
GSM device
Option
Display only
Dial-up
connection
Selectable list
Number
Display only
Protocol
Display only
Description
Available for RTK rover and TPS. The type of digital
cellular phone highlighted when this screen was
accessed.
Available for RTK rover and TPS. The digital cellular
phone base station to be dialled. Opening the
selectable list accesses Dial-up Connection List
where new base stations can be created and
existing base stations can be selected or edited.
Refer to "20.7 Configuring the Stations to Dial".
Available for RTK rover and TPS. The number of
the digital cellular phone at the selected Dial-up
connection as configured in Dial-up Connection
List.
Available for RTK rover and TPS. The configured
protocol of the digital cellular phone at the
selected Dial-up connection as configured in
Dial-up Connection List.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
241
Field
APN
Option
Editable field
Description
Available for RTK base with Internet capable
devices.
The Access Point Name of a server from the
network provider, which allows access to data
services. Contact your provider to get the correct
APN.
Next step
Page changes to the Sim codes page.
GSM Dial-Up Connection,
Sim codes page
Description of fields
Field
PIN code
Option
Editable field
PUK code
Editable field
Description
To enter the Personal Identification Number of
the SIM card.
If the PIN is locked for any reason, for example
the wrong PIN was entered, input the Personal
UnblocKing code for access to the PIN.
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
GSM Dial-Up Connection,
Advanced page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
The network baud rate.
Network data
rate
Selectable list
For digital cellular phones of GSM technology that
do not support autobauding choose the baud rate
from the selectable list.
Autobauding
Select this option for an automatic search of the
network baud rate.
Use transparent mode
Check box
Define if the digital cellular phone uses Radio
channel Protocol. Check for digital cellular phones
that do use transparent mode. Uncheck for digital
cellular phones that use RLP. Check with the
network provider if the digital cellular phone uses
transparent mode or not.
Manually
select cellphone
network
Check box
Available for digital cellular phone devices unless
they are in data mode. When this box is checked,
the currently selected network provider is
displayed and the Search key is available.
Press Search for a list of all available networks
and to select a specific network.
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
242
20.1.3
Configuring a CDMA Connection
Access
For RTK rover and TPS:
• In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone
of CDMA technology attached. Cntrl...
For RTK base:
• In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular
phone of CDMA technology attached. Cntrl...
CDMA Connection
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Near
To find the nearest base station with a digital cellular phone of CDMA
technology. Available when base stations to dial are already created
in Dial-up Connection List. Coordinates of these stations must be
known.
Fn Info
To provide information about the CDMA device being used, such as
the manufacturer, the model and the electronic serial number.
Fn Reg
To register the settings of the CDMA digital cellular phone over the
air. For US and Canada only. Available when the registration process
must be done manually.
Fn Cmnd..
To send AT commands to the digital cellular phone.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
CDMA Type
Display only
The type of digital cellular phone highlighted
when this screen was accessed.
Dial-up
connection
Selectable list
The digital cellular phone base station to be
dialled. Opening the selectable list accesses Dialup Connection List where new base stations can
be created and existing base stations can be
selected or edited. Refer to "20.7 Configuring the
Stations to Dial".
Number
Display only
The number of the digital cellular phone at the
selected Dial-up connection as configured in
Dial-up Connection List.
Protocol
Display only
The configured protocol of the digital cellular
phone at the selected Dial-up connection as
configured in Dial-up Connection List.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
243
Next step
Fn Info changes to CDMA Information.
CDMA Information
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Manufact
Display only
The manufacturer of the CDMA device being used.
Model
Display only
The model of the CDMA device being used.
ESN No.
Display only
Electronic Serial Number
For registration purposes, send the electronic
serial number to the network provider in order to
receive the service programming code and the
mobile directory number. These numbers must be
typed in CDMA Registration.
Next step
CDMA Registration
Step
Description
1.
Press Print to print all information to a file CDMA Info.log in the \DATA directory on the data storage device.
2.
Press OK to return to CDMA Connection.
3.
For US and Canada only: Press Reg to access CDMA Registration.
The settings allow the CDMA digital cellular phone to be registered over the air.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
MSL/SPC
Display only
The Service Program Code provided by the
network provider.
MDN
Display only
The Mobile Directory Number provided by the
network provider
MSID/MIN
Display only
Mobile Station Identity Number and Mobile IdentificationNumber. Another 10-digit number to
identify the mobile phone. Sometimes identical
with the MDN.
Next step
OK to return to CDMA Connection.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
244
20.2
Modems
Description
For modems, information such as
• the base stations that can be contacted and
• the phone numbers of the base stations
can be controlled.
Changing the base station to be dialled is of interest in two cases.
Case 1:
Case 2:
Access
Two real-time base stations, each equipped with a digital cellular
phone, are set up at two locations belonging to different network
providers.
When leaving the area of one base, the station can be changed and the
other base can be called.
Set up as in case 1.
Two separate fixes from each base for each point can be obtained,
providing redundancy for future least squares adjustment operations.
For RTK rover and TPS:
• In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a modem attached.
Cntrl...
For RTK base:
• In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a modem
attached. Cntrl...
Modem Dial-up
Connection
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Near
To find the nearest base station with a modem. Available when base
stations to dial are already created in Dial-up Connection List. Coordinates of these stations must be known.
Fn Cmnd..
To send AT commands to the modem.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Modem
Display only
The type of modem highlighted when this screen
was accessed.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
245
Field
Option
Description
Dial-up
connection
Selectable list
The modem base station to be dialled. Opening
the selectable list accesses Dial-up Connection
List where new base stations can be created and
existing base stations can be selected or edited.
Refer to "20.7 Configuring the Stations to Dial".
Number
Display only
The number of the modem at the selected Dial-up
connection as configured in Dial-up Connection
List.
Protocol
Display only
The configured protocol of the modem at the
selected Dial-up connection as configured in
Dial-up Connection List.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
246
20.3
Radios for GPS Real-Time
Description
For radios the channels on which the radio broadcasts can be changed. Changing
channels changes the frequency at which the radio operates. Not all radios support
channel changing.
Changing radio channels is of interest in three cases.
Case 1:
Case 2:
Case 3:
Requirements for
channel changing
Two real-time base stations are set up at two locations, each broadcasting on a different channel.
If the signal from one base station is jammed, the channel can be
changed and the other base can be used.
Set up as in case 1.
Two separate fixes for each point can be obtained, providing redundancy for future least squares adjustment operations.
One real-time base and one real-time rover are being used.
If the signal is blocked due to radio interference, the channel at the
base and the rover can be changed in order to work on a different
frequency.
Pacific Crest radios:
Satelline radios:
• channel changing must be activated by a Pacific Crest
dealer.
• A special licence might be required.
The radio must be in programming mode. This mode can be set
by a Satelline dealer.

Channel changing may contravene radio broadcasting regulations in certain countries.
Before operating with radios, check the regulations in force in the working area.

The number of channels available and the frequency spacing between channels
depends on the radio used.

If channel changing is to be used, when configuring the base real-time connection, set
RTK base ID in RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2), Data rates page
to a different ID for each base site. By doing so, the rover can recognise if the
incoming real-time data after channel changing is being received from a different base
station or if the original base station is using a new frequency. In the first case, the
ambiguities are recomputed.
Access
For RTK rover and TPS:
• In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a radio attached.
Cntrl...
For RTK base:
• In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a radio attached.
Cntrl...
Radio Configuration
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Scan
To provide information such as the station ID, latency and the data
format of incoming signals from base stations broadcasting on the
same radio channel. This information can be used to select appropriate base stations to dial.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
247
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Radio type
Display only
The type of radio highlighted when this screen
was accessed.
Channel
Editable field
The radio channel. The channel used must be
within minimum and maximum allowed input
values. The minimum and maximum allowed input
values for a radio depend on the number of channels supported by the radio and the spacing
between the channels.
Actual
frequency
Display only
Available for Radio type: Satelline 3AS. Displays
the actual frequency of the radio.
Use different
protocol
Check box
Available when a Satelline radio is selected as
Radio type.
When this box is checked, the Satelline radio can
transmit data to and receive data from a Pacific
Crest radio. The radio is configured accordingly
online. The radio need not be connected to a PC
and no configuration software is needed.
When this box is not checked and OK is pressed
the device switches to the standard Satel
3AS/3ASd mode.
Modulation
type
Pac Crest 4FSK,
Pac Crest GMSK,
Pac Crest FST,
TrimTalk(P)
GMSK and
TrimTalk(T)
GMSK
Defines the settings for Pacific Crest compatibility
as shown in the next table. The available modulation types depend on the used radio hardware
and firmware.
Settings depending on protocol
Protocol
Baud rate
12.5 kHz
Baud rate
25 kHz
Modulation
Use Forward
Error Correction
Satelline 3AS
9600
19200
4FSK
ON
PCC-4FSK
9600
19200
4FSK
ON
PCC-GMSK
4800
96001/NA2
GMSK
ON
TrimTalk450s
(P)
4800
96001/NA2
GMSK
ON
TrimTalk450s
(T)
4800
96001/NA2
GMSK
ON
PCC-FST
9600
19200
4FSK
ON
1
For countries without narrow banding regulations
2
For countries with narrow banding regulations, for example the USA
Next step
Scan to access Scan for Base Station.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
248
Scan for Base Station
This screen provides information about the base stations, with specific types of
devices attached, for example a radio, from which real-time corrections are being
received. This information can also be useful for finding out if anyone else in the area
is using a particular radio channel.
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted base station and to continue with the
subsequent screen.
Chnl-1 and
Chnl+1
Available for scanning base stations with radios attached. To switch
the radio to one channel lower/higher than the current channel. The
base stations displayed change to those broadcasting on the new
channel.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Station ID
Station ID of available base stations from which a signal is being
received.
For radios, the base station radios transmitting on the same channel
will be listed.
Latency(s)
Time delay, in seconds and configured on the base, from when the
base collects the data to when the data is transmitted.
RTK data
format
Format of the data from the base station. Refer to "19.8.1 Configuration of a Reference Real-Time Connection" for more information
about data formats.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
249
20.4
Radios for Remote Control
Description
For radios the channels on which the radio broadcasts can be changed. Changing
channels changes the frequency at which the radio operates. This change in frequency
can be necessary to enable multiple pairs of radios to work simultaneously in the same
area without interfering with each other.
Access
For TPS:
• In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an internal radio, a
TCPS or a GFU attached. Cntrl...
TPS Radio Communication
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Default
To change to the default radio settings.
Fn Save
To save the radio settings.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Radio type
Display only
The type of radio device selected for the connection.
Link number
Editable field
The assigned channel number.
The channel number for the field
controller and the radio must be the same.
The communication settings for the field
controller and the radio must also be
same.
Set as
Remote or Base


Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
The radio modules inside the field
controller and the radio must be set to
opposite settings. It is recommended to
set the field controller to Remote and the
radio to Base.
250
20.5
RS232
Description
RS232 is a standard serial communication method that is able to transfer data without
the need for predefined time slots.
Access
For RTK rover and TPS:
• In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an RS232 device
attached. Cntrl...
For RTK base:
• In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an RS232 device
attached. Cntrl...
RS232 Connection
Displayed is the type of device highlighted when this screen was accessed.
20.6
Internet
Description
Internet
The Internet connection allows connection to the Internet to receive real-time data. A
GPRS / Internet device must be attached to the instrument.
Requirements
For Internet
• Check Use Internet connection on GS in Internet Connection.
• An Internet port must be selected in RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings
(RTK2) or RTK Rover Settings.
Access
For RTK rover:
• In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an Internet device
attached. Cntrl...
For RTK base:
• In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an Internet
device attached. Cntrl...
Internet Port Connection
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
251
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Internet port
Display only
The name of the Internet port attached to the
connection that was highlighted when this page
was accessed.
How the instrument will operate in the Internet.
User type
Client
Available on the base. Must be selected when
connecting to a server, for example Ntrip caster
or TCP/IP server.
Server
Available on the base. Must be selected to allow
connections from TCP/IP clients, for example
GNSS rovers.
IP address
Display only
Available for User type: Server. Current IP address
of the GS instrument.
TCP/IP port
Editable field
The port number to which the TCP/IP clients
connect for receiving the RTK data stream.
Allow simulta- 1 to 10
neous
connections
Server to use
Selectable list
NTRIP mount- Editable field
point
Available on the base for User type: Server.
Select the number of clients which are allowed to
connect to the port.
Available on the rover, also on the base for User
type: Client. The server to be accessed in the
Internet. Opening the selectable list accesses
Server to Connect where new servers can be
created and existing servers can be selected or
edited.
Mountpoints are the Ntrip servers sending out
real-time data.
Next step
Select Source to access NTRIP Source Table.
Highlight a mountpoint about which more information is required. This information
helps to configure the instrument to use the selected mountpoint as a base. Press Info
to access Mountpoint.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
252
Mountpoint,
General page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Identifier
Display only
The name of the selected Mountpoint.
Format
Display only
The real-time data format sent out by the Mountpoint.
Format details Display only
Details about Format, for example the RTCM
message types including update rates in seconds
displayed in brackets.
Authentic
The type of password protection required for the
authorisation to the Ntrip server.
None
If no password is required.
Basic
If the password does not require encryption.
Digest
If the password must be encrypted.
NMEA
Display only
Indicates if the Mountpoint must receive GGA
NMEA data from the rover in order to compute
VRS information.
Charges
Display only
Indicates if charges are currently made for the
connection.
Carrier
Display only
The type of carrier message sent out.
System
Display only
The type of satellite system supported by the
Mountpoint.
Next step
Page changes to the Location page.
Mountpoint,
Location page
Detailed information about the location of the Mountpoint is displayed.
Next step
Page changes to the Miscell page.
Mountpoint,
Miscell page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Generator
Display only
The hard- or software generating the data
stream.
Compress
Display only
The name of the compression / encryption algorithm.
Bitrate
Display only
The data speed in bits per second.
Info
Display only
Miscellaneous information if available.
Next step
OK to return to the previous screen.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
253
20.7
Configuring the Stations to Dial
20.7.1
Accessing Dial-up Connection List
Description
Dial-up Connection List allows new stations to be created, provides a list of base
stations that can be dialled and allows existing stations to be edited.
For digital cellular phones of any technology and for modems, the phone numbers of
the device at the base station must be known. For a base station to be dialled, a name,
the phone number and, if available, the coordinates can be configured.
The configuration is possible for rover and base digital cellular phones and modems.
Access step-by-step
Step
Description
1.
In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular
phone of any technology or modem attached.
2.
Cntrl...
3.
Open the selectable list for Dial-up connection.
Dial-up Connection
List
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted station and to return to the screen from
where this screen was accessed.
New..
To create a new station. Refer to "20.7.2 Creating / Editing a Station
to Dial".
Edit..
To edit a station. Refer to "20.7.2 Creating / Editing a Station to Dial".
Delete
To delete the highlighted station.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Name
Name of all available base stations.
Number
Phone number of the station to dial.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
254
20.7.2
Creating / Editing a Station to Dial
Access
In Dial-up Connection List press New.. or Edit...
New Dial-up Connection
Key
Description
Store
To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Name
Editable field
A unique name for the new base station to be
dialled. The name can be up to 16 characters long
and include spaces. Input optional.
Number
Editable field
The number of the base station to dial. If the
survey is to be undertaken across country borders
it is necessary to input the phone number using
standard international dialling codes. For
example, +41123456789. Otherwise it can be
input as a standard digital cellular phone number.
Available for digital cellular phones of GSM technology. The configured protocol of the digital
cellular phone of GSM technology.
Protocol
Use coordinates
Analog
For conventional phone networks.
ISDN v.110 or
ISDN v.120
For GSM networks.
Selectable list
Select Yes to type in the approximate coordinates
of the base station.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
255
20.8
Configuring the Server to Connect
20.8.1
Accessing Server to Connect
Description
Server to Connect allows new servers to be created, provides a list of servers that can
be accessed in the Internet and allows existing servers to be edited.
Access step-by-step
Step
Description
1.
In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an Internet
connection attached.
2.
Cntrl...
3.
Open the selectable list for Server name.
Server to Connect
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted server and to return to the screen from
where this screen was accessed.
New..
To create a new server. Refer to "20.8.2 Creating / Editing a Server".
Edit..
To edit a server. Refer to "20.8.2 Creating / Editing a Server".
Delete
To delete the highlighted server.
More
To change between the IP Address and the TCP/IP Port of the server.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Name
Name of all available servers.
IP address
IP addresses of all available servers.
TCP/IP port
TCP/IP Port numbers of all available servers.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
256
20.8.2
Creating / Editing a Server
Access
In Server to Connect press New.. or Edit...
New Server,
General page
Key
Description
Store
To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Name
Editable field
A unique name for the new server to be accessed.
The name can be up to 16 characters long and
include spaces.
Address
Editable field
Type in the host name or the IP address of the
server to be accessed in the Internet.
Port
Editable field
The port of the Internet server through which the
data is provided. Each server has several ports for
various services.
Next step
Page changes to the NTRIP page.
New Server,
NTRIP page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Use NTRIP
Check box
Check to activate Ntrip.
User ID
Editable field
A user ID is required to receive data from to the
Ntrip Caster. Contact the Ntrip administrator for
information.
Password
Editable field
A password is required to receive data from the
Ntrip Caster. Contact the Ntrip administrator for
information.
Next step
Store to store the settings.
Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
257
21
Configuration of Devices
21.1
Devices
21.1.1
Overview
Description
Before using any device, it is necessary to configure the interface with which it will be
used. Refer to "19.1 Accessing Configuration Connections" for information on how to
configure the interfaces.
Some devices can be used with different interfaces for different applications. For
example:
•
A radio can be used to receive real-time base data but a second radio could
also be used to output simultaneous NMEA messages.
•
A radio can be used for remote control with a TPS but also to send GeoCOM
commands from a computer to a TPS.
21.1.2
Digital Cellular Phones
Description
Digital cellular phones comprise of the technologies CDMA and GSM.
Typical uses
•
•
•
•
To
To
To
To
transmit real-time data.
receive real-time data.
download raw observations from a remote location.
steer an instrument.
Example use
Step
Description
1.
Base and rover must both be equipped with a digital cellular phone.
2.
Ensure that the digital cellular phone at the base is on.
3.
The rover digital cellular phone contacts the selected base of which the
phone number was pre-defined. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device".
4.
One rover can dial in to the base digital cellular phone at a time.
5.
As soon as the base digital cellular phone is contacted, real-time data is sent
to the rover digital cellular phone that has called.

Requirements for
using digital cellular
phones
Several digital cellular phone numbers can be pre-defined on the rover. Dialling a different number dials that particular base station.
Always required:
Sometimes required:
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices
• AT command language must be supported by the digital
cellular phone.
• Working area must be covered by a digital cellular phone
network.
• The network operator must support data transmission.
• SIM card. This SIM card is the same as is normally used in
mobile phones. The SIM card must be enabled to transmit
data. Contact the service provider to enable the SIM card.
• Personal Identification Number
• Registration
258
Supported digital
cellular phones
Some digital cellular phones are predefined.
Other digital cellular phones can be used. Their settings must be defined by creating
a new digital cellular phone configuration. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device".
These digital cellular phones must be connected with a cable or Bluetooth. Refer to
"Appendix E Cables" for information on cables. Please contact the local selling unit or
dealer for further information.
Advantages
• Unlimited range of the data channel between base and rover.
• Free of jamming from other users.
• Cheaper in price in the initial costs of buying.
Disadvantages
Fees are charged for the time that the digital cellular phone network is being used.

Base and rover can both be equipped with a digital cellular phone and a radio. On the
base, they operate simultaneously. On the rover, use the radio when within radio
range of the base and the digital cellular phone when radio reception is not possible.
21.1.3
Modems
Typical uses
• To transmit NMEA messages.
• To download raw observations from a remote location.
• To transmit real-time data.
Example of use
Step
Description
1.
The base is equipped with a modem.
2.
The rover is equipped with a digital cellular phone.
3.
Ensure that the modem is switched on.
4.
The rover digital cellular phone contacts the selected base of which the
phone number was pre-defined. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device".
5.
One rover can dial in to the base modem at a time.
6.
As soon as the base modem is contacted, it sends its data to the rover digital
cellular phone that has called.

Several modem numbers can be pre-defined on the rover. Dialling a different
number changes the base station.
Requirements for
using modem
AT command language must be supported by the modem.
Supported modems
Some modems are predefined. Modems must be connected with a cable.
Other modems can be used. Their settings must be defined by creating a new modem
configuration. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device".
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices
259
21.1.4
Radios for Real-Time
Typical uses
• To transmit real-time data.
• To receive real-time data.
• To steer an instrument.
Example of use
Step
Description
1.
Base and rover must both be equipped with radios using the same frequency
range and the same data format.
2.
The base radio continuously sends out real-time data until the instrument is
turned off, the configuration is changed or the radio is detached.
3.
The rover radio continuously receives real-time data until the instrument is
turned off, the configuration is changed or the radio is detached.
4.
Several rovers can receive data from the same base at the same time.

Supported radios

Several base radios can transmit real-time data simultaneously using
different radio channels. Changing to a different radio channel on the rover
changes the base from which real-time data is received.
Some radios are predefined.
Other radios can be used. Their settings must be defined by creating a new radio
configuration. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device". These radios must be
connected with a cable.
Base and rover can both be equipped with a digital cellular phone and a radio. On the
base, they operate simultaneously. On the rover, use the radio when within radio
range of the base and the digital cellular phone when radio reception is not possible.
21.1.5
Radios for Remote Control
Typical uses
• To remote control the TPS.
• To transmit data between a TPS and computer.
Supported radios
• The default radios used with TPS for remote control are the internal radio CTR16,
the RadioHandle and the external radios TCPS. The TPS has to be set to the correct
communication mode to send and receive data and commands via the radio.
• A Communication side cover must be fitted to the TPS when operating with the
RadioHandle.
User defined radios
Other radios than the default radios can be used. Their settings must be defined by
creating a new radio configuration. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device". These
radios must be connected with a cable. Refer to "Appendix E Cables" for information
on cables.
21.1.6
RS232
Standard RS232
Standard RS232 is supported by default. The settings are:
Baud rate:
Parity:
Data bits:
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices
115200
None
8
Stop bits:
Flow control:
1
None
260
21.1.7
USB
USB
USB is supported on the MS50/TS50/TM50. The USB interface on port 1 can be used
to:
• connected to the CS via the USB interface.
• configure GeoCom Connection (cable). USB and serial interface are possible.
• configure GSI Output Connection (cable). USB and serial interface are possible.
• configure Export Job Connection (cable). USB and serial interface are possible.
If cable is selected (serial – RS232), then the USB interface is also available. If USB is
selected, the serial interface is also available but with the default respectively previously set parameters.

The IP address of the RNDIS interface of the MS50/TS50/TM50 cannot be
changed within SmartWorx Viva. Use Windows CE to change the IP address, for
example when connecting two instruments via USB to the same PC.
21.1.8
Hidden Point Measurement Devices
Typical uses
To measure
• distances (reflectorless distance measurements using laser technology)
• angles
• azimuths
to points which are not directly accessible with GPS, for example house corners or
trees. If the device is connected to the instrument, the measurements taken with
hidden point measurement devices are directly transferred. If the device is not
connected, measurement can be typed in manually to calculate the coordinates of a
hidden point.
Example of use
Step
Description
1.
An instrument must be a rover with or without real-time configuration.
2.
A hidden point measurement device is connected to the instrument via cable
or Bluetooth.
3.
Hidden point measurements are configured and activated.
4.
Distances, angles and azimuths are measured to the hidden point with the
hidden point measurement device.
5.
The measurements are directly transferred to the instrument and displayed
in the appropriate fields.

Supported hidden
point measurement
devices
Hidden point measurement devices can be connected in addition to any of
the other devices. They can be active at the same time. Changing of ports is
not required.
Some devices are predefined.
Hidden point measurement devices of the same type but with different settings must
be defined by creating a new hidden point measurement device. Refer to "21.3
Creating/Editing a Device".
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices
261
21.1.9
GPRS / Internet Devices
Description
GPRS is a telecommunication standard for transmitting data packages using the
Internet Protocol.
When using GPRS technology, charges are made based on the amount of transferred
data and not, as per normal digital cellular phones, for the connection time.
Typical uses
To access the Internet with an instrument in order to receive real-time data from the
Internet.
Example use
Step

1
Description
The following is an example use for receiving data from the Internet.
Rover must be equipped with a GPRS / Internet device.
2
The GPRS / Internet device accesses the Internet where the rover connects
for example to Ntrip.
3
The rover receives real-time corrections via the Internet.
Requirements for
using GPRS /
Internet devices
• AT command language must be supported by the digital cellular phone.
• Access Point Name of a server from the network provider. The APN can be thought
of as the home page of a provider supporting GPRS data transfer.
• SIM card. This SIM card is the same as is normally used in mobile phones. The SIM
card must be enabled to transmit data. Contact the service provider to enable the
SIM card.
• Personal Identification Number
• Registration
Supported GPRS /
Internet devices
Some GPRS/Internet devices are predefined. Other GPRS capable devices can be used
as long as they use AT commands. Their settings must be defined by creating a new
device configuration. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device". Please contact the
local selling unit or dealer for further information.
Advantages
• Unlimited range of the data channel between base and rover.
• Free of jamming from other users.
• Fees are charged for the amount of data being transferred.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices
262
21.2
Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices
Description
Allows devices to be created, edited, selected and deleted.
Access step-by-step
Devices
Step
Description
1.
For RTK rover and TPS:
• Select Main Menu:Instrument\Connections..\All other connections.
For RTK base:
• Select Main Menu:Base connections\Connections..\All other connections.
2.
Highlight the appropriate interface based on the type of device to be configured. For example, highlight RTK Rover when a radio is to be configured.
3.
Edit...
4.
Activate the interface by checking the check box.
5.
Devce.. to access Devices.
This screen may consist of several pages and provides different devices for selection
depending on which interface the screen was accessed from. The functionality
described here is always the same.
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted device and return to the screen from where
this screen was accessed.
New..
To create a new device. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted device. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a
Device".
Delete
To delete the highlighted device.
More
To display information about the type of device and the creator of
the device.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn All or Fn
Filter..
Available for Internet and Bluetooth devices. To list all devices or to
hide devices which are not Internet or Bluetooth capable.
Fn Default
To recall previously deleted default devices and to reset default
devices to the default settings.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices
263
Description of columns
Column
Description
Name
Names of available devices.
Type
Type of device defined when creating the device.
Creator
The creator of the device. The creator can be either Default if the
device is a default, or User if the device has been created.

Viva Series, Configuration of Devices
If a Default device is edited by using Edit.. then its creator is
still displayed as Default.
264
21.3
Creating/Editing a Device
Description
Allows a new device to be configured or an existing device to be edited.
Access
In Devices, highlight a device of the same type as the device to be created, from the
list. Press New.. or Edit...
New Device or Edit
Device
Key
Description
Store
To store the new device and to return to the screen from where this
screen was accessed.
AT Msg
Available for digital cellular phones and modems. To configure
communication commands.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Name
Editable field
Name of new device.
Type
Display only
Same device type as was highlighted when New..
or Edit.. was used.
Use UMTS
network if
available
Check box
In case of using GSM only modems together with
modems, which are UMTS capable, this option
must be disabled.
Baud rate
From 1200 to
230400
Frequency of data transfer from instrument to
device in bits per second. Unavailable for CS
modem.
Parity
None, Even or
Odd
Error checksum at the end of a block of digital
data. Unavailable for CS modem.
Data bits
6, 7 or 8
Number of bits in a block of digital data. Unavailable for CS modem.
Stop bit
1 or 2
Number of bits at the end of a block of digital
data. Unavailable for CS modem.
Flow control
None or Flow
control
Activates hardware handshake.
When the instrument/device is ready for data, it
asserts the Ready To Send line indicating it is
ready to receive data. This line is read by the
sender at the Clear To Send input, indicating it is
clear to send the data. Unavailable for CS
modem.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices
265
Next step
IF the device is a
THEN
radio or device
other than digital
cellular phone or
modem
Store to close the screen and to return to the screen from
where this screen was accessed.
digital cellular phone AT Msg.
or modem
AT Msg
The AT commands configure the devices. Please refer to the manual of device for
information about which AT commands must be entered or contact the supplier.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Initialisation 1 Editable field
Description
Initialisation sequence to initialise digital cellular
phone/modem.
When the device is used, between Initialisation 1
and Initialisation 2, a check for the PIN is
performed.
Editable field
Allows the Initialisation 1, Initialisation 2 or the
Connect string to continue onto a new line.
Initialisation 2 Editable field
Initialisation sequence to initialise digital cellular
phone/modem.
Dial
Editable field
Dialling string used to dial the phone number of
the real-time base.
Hang-up
Editable field
Hangup sequence used to end the network
connection.
Escape
Editable field
Escape sequence used to switch to the command
mode before using the hangup sequence.
Connect
Editable field
Dialling string used to dial into the Internet.
(continued)
Next step
Store returns to New Device or Edit Device.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices
266
22
Instrument - Instrument status info
22.1
Status Functions

The Status functions for the GPS RTK base menu, the GPS rover menu and for TPS are
similar. The functions are described in the same chapters, differences are outlined.
Description
The STATUS functions help using the instrument by showing the state of many instrument functions. All fields are display only fields. Unavailable information is indicated
by -----.
Access
• For RTK base:
Select Main Menu: Instrument\Base status info.
• For RTK rover and TPS:
Select Main Menu: Instrument\Instrument status info.
Status Menu
Description of the
Status functions
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
STATUS function
Description
Refer to
chapter
Battery & memory
Information related to usage and status of
battery and memory.
"22.2 Battery &
memory"
Satellite tracking
• Information related to the satellites
ordered by the elevation angle.
"22.3 Satellite
tracking"
• A skyplot shows satellite information in a
graphical way.
• Another page shows the date of the used
almanacs, and, as shown on the skyplot,
the number of satellites tracked and the
number of satellites available above the
cut-off elevation mask.
"22.4 RTK data
RTK data link status Information related to real-time data, for
example the data link and the device used to link status"
transfer real-time data.
Current GPS position
Information related to the current antenna
position and the speed of the antenna.
Raw data logging
Information related to logging of raw obser- "22.6 Raw data
vations.
logging"
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
"22.5 Current
GPS position"
267
STATUS function
Description
Refer to
chapter
Connection status
• Information related to the configuration "22.7 Connection
and use of interfaces, ports and devices. status"
• Information related to the incoming data
from active devices.
TPS current
station info
Information related to the current station
set on the instrument.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
"22.9 TPS current
station info"
268
22.2
Battery & memory
Access
Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu,
access is also possible by tapping the battery icon.
Battery & Memory
This description is valid for all pages of the screen. For the GPS base page, the information that is displayed depends on the real-time message.
Leica/Leica 4G: Transfers precise values for all fields.
RTCM:
Transfer of any of the information not part of the message.
CMR/CMR+:
Transfers general status information such as O.K. and Low.
For GS05/GS06/GS08plus, the GPS rover page is unavailable.
Key
Description
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Description
Battery,
Battery 1 or
Battery 2
The percentage of remaining power capacity for the battery is
displayed numerically. If no information for a field is available, for
example no battery is inserted, then 0% is displayed.


External
power
On the MS50/TS50/TM50, if the battery gets charged
(charging) is stated behind the percentage of the battery
power level.
When the battery is getting low on the TS, a warning message
is displayed on the CS.
Shows if an external power supply is connected.
Internal
The total/free memory for data storage on the data storage device.
memory, CF
If no information for a field is available, for example no data storage
card, SD card device is inserted, then ----- is displayed.
or USB stick
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
269
22.3
Satellite tracking
Description
This screen shows information related to the satellites ordered by the elevation angle.
Access
Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu,
access is also possible by tapping the number of visible satellites icon.
Satellite Tracking:
RTK rover,
GPS/Glonass/Galileo
/BeiDou/Augment.
page
Key
Description
OK
To return to the Main Menu.
Base / Rover
To change between the SNR values of rover and base.
Hlth..
To view the numbers of satellites categorised in good, bad and
unavailable.
Page
To change to another page on this screen. The Galileo page is
unavailable with GS08plus.
More
To display information about the SNR values for satellites.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Sat
The Pseudo Random Noise number (GPS), the Slot number
(GLONASS), the Space Vehicle number (Galileo, BeiDou) or the name
(Terrastar) of the satellites.
Elev
The elevation angle in degrees. The arrows indicate if the satellite is
rising or falling.
Azmth
The azimuth of the satellite.
S/N 1, S/N 2
and S/N L5
The SNR on L1, L2 and L5 for GPS, on L1 and L2 for GLONASS, on E1,
E5a, E5b and Alt-Boc for Galileo and on B1 and B2 for BeiDou. If the
signal is currently not being used in the position calculations, the
number is shown in brackets.
For GS05/GS06, S/N 2 is unavailable.
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
270
Satellite Tracking:
RTK rover,
Skyplot page
Satellites below the Cut-off angle configured in Satellite Tracking are marked grey.
The part of the skyplot between the 0° elevation and the cut-off angle is marked grey.
Key
Description
OK
To return to the Main Menu.
GPS ? / GPS ? To hide or show the GPS satellites (shown by the prefix G).
GLO ? / GLO ? To hide or show the GLONASS satellites (shown by the prefix R).
Available when Glonass is activated in Satellite Tracking.
GAL ? / GAL ? To hide or show the Galileo satellites (shown by the prefix E).
Available when Galileo is activated in Satellite Tracking.
BDS ? / BDS ? To hide or show the BeiDou satellites (shown by the prefix C).
Available when BeiDou is activated in Satellite Tracking.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of symbols
Symbol
Description
Satellites above the Cut-off angle configured in Satellite Tracking.
Satellites below the Cut-off angle configured in Satellite Tracking.
Next step
Page changes to the Almanac page.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
271
Satellite Tracking:
RTK rover,
Almanac page
The almanac page shows
• the date of the used almanacs, for each GNSS constellation configured
• as shown on the skyplot, the number of satellites tracked and the number of
satellites available above the cut-off elevation mask.
Key
Description
OK
To return to the Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Next step
OK exits Satellite Tracking.
Satellite Tracking,
RTK rover page
The information about the satellites at the base shown on this page is identical with
the information shown for the rover.
Next step
OK exits Satellite Tracking.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
272
22.4
RTK data link status
Description
This screen shows information related to real-time data, for example the data link and
the device used to transfer real-time data.
Access
Standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu.
RTK Data Link
Status,
General page
Key
Description
OK
To exit the screen.
Data..
To view the data being received. Depending on the RTK data format,
the shown data differ.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Description
RTK data format The received real-time data format message type.
GPS used L1/L2 The number of satellites on L1, L2 and L5 (when GPS L5 is activated in Satellite Tracking) being used in the current position solution.
GLO used L1/L2 Available if Glonass is activated in Satellite Tracking. The number
of satellites on L1 and L2 being used in the current position solution.
GAL used
E1/E5a
Available if Galileo is activated in Satellite Tracking. The number of
satellites on E1 and E5a being used in the current position solution.
GAL used
E5b/ABOC
Available if Galileo is activated in Satellite Tracking. The number of
satellites on E5b and Alt-BOC being used in the current position
solution.
BDS used B1/B2 Available if BeiDou is activated in Satellite Tracking. The number of
satellites on B1 and B2 being used in the current position solution.
Last data sent
Available for an RTK base. Seconds since the last message from the
base was sent.
Last received
Available for an RTK rover. Seconds since the last message from the
base was received.
In last minute
Available for an RTK rover. The percentage of real-time data
received from the base compared with the data received from the
antenna within the last minute. This percentage indicates how well
the data link is working.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
273
Field
Description
RTK network
Available for an RTK rover. The type of base network in use.
Stream NMEA
Available for an RTK rover in a base network. NMEA positions must
messages from be send to a network. The type of NMEA message sent to the base
the GS
network. If more than one message is sent at a time, then all types
are shown separated by comma.
Next step
Page changes to the Device page.
RTK Data Link
Status,
Device page
The content of this page differs for each type of device in use.
Key
Description
OK
To exit the screen.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Description of fields
For all devices available
Field
Description
Name
The name of the device.
For RS232
Field
Description
Type
The type of device.
Port
The port to which the device is connected.
Bluetooth
Available if device is connected via Bluetooth. Indicates the state of
the connection.
For digital cellular phones and modems
Field
Description
Type
The type of device.
Port
The port to which the device is connected.
Firmware
The software version of the attached digital cellular phone.
Operator
The name of the network operator in which the digital cellular phone
is operating.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
274
Field
Description
Network type
The type of reference network selected in RTK Rover Settings. Refer
to "RTK Rover Settings, RTK network page".
Status
The current mode of the digital cellular phone. The options are
Unknown, Detection and Registered.
Bluetooth
Available if device is connected via Bluetooth. Indicates the state of
the connection. Unavailable for CS modem.
Signal
Indication of received signal strength of the digital cellular phone
network.
For radios
The available fields depend on the radio type.
Field
Description
Port
The port to which the device is connected.
Type
The type of device.
Channel
The radio channel.
Actual frequency
The current set frequency of the radio.
Central freq
The defined central frequency of the radio.
Firmware
The software version of the attached radio.
Signal
Indication of strength of received radio signal.
For Internet on the rover
Field
Description
TCP/IP port
TCP/IP port number in use.
Connected to
IP address of the connected client.
Duration
The time length since when the instrument is connected to the
Internet.
KBytes received
The amount of data received from the Internet in kilobyte.
KBytes sent
The amount of data sent to the Internet in kilobyte.
For Internet on the base
Field
Description
TCP/IP port
TCP/IP port number in use.
Clients connected The number of connected clients and the number of allowed
client connections as configured in Internet Port Connection.
Next step
Page changes to the RTK base page.
RTK Data Link
Status,
RTK base page
As shown below, the name of the page changes depending on the type of base being
used.
Name of page
Description
RTK base page
Base is a real base station.
Base (Nearest)
page
Base is the closest to the rover determined by for example
SmartNet.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
275
Name of page
Description
Base (i-MAX) page Base information is individualised Master-Auxiliary corrections
determined and sent by for example SmartNet.
Base (MAX) page
Base information is Master-Auxiliary corrections determined and
sent by for example SmartNet.
Base (VRS) page
Base is a virtual base station.
Base (FKP) page
Base information is area correction parameters.
Description of fields
Field
Description
RTK base ID
An identification for a base station. The ID can be converted into a
compact format to be sent out with real-time data in all real-time
data formats. It is different from the point ID of the base station.
Antenna
height
• For RTK data format: Leica, RTK data format: Leica 4G, RTK data
format: RTCM v3 or RTK data format: RTCM 9,2 v2/RTCM 1,2 v2
with RTCM version: 2.3:
The antenna height at the base from the marker to the MRP.
• For RTK data format: CMR/CMR+ and RTK data format: RTCM
18,19 v2 or RTK data format: RTCM 18,19 v2 with RTCM version:
2.2:
The antenna height at the base from the marker to the phase
centre.
• For all other RTK data format:
----- is displayed because the data format does not include information about the antenna height.
Coords of
The coordinates for the base station which are transferred depend
on the active real-time data format.
• For real-time messages which include antenna height and antenna
type: Marker.
• For real-time messages which do not include antenna information: Phase Centre of L1.
Number of aux The number of active auxiliary base stations from which data is
ref
received.
Antenna at
base
The antenna used at the base.
Sensor type at The instrument type used at the base.
base
Next step
RTK Data Link
Status,
Connectivity page
IF
THEN
other coordinate types are to be viewed
Coord. Local coordinates are available
when a local coordinate system is active.
another page is to be accessed
Page.
this screen is to be quit
OK exits the screen.
This screen shows the status real-time connectivity as dynamic troubleshooting
screen. It shows the success of each of the steps in the connectivity to receive realtime corrections. If one step fails, the check box is unchecked.
As each step is successfully completed, the check box will be checked.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
276
Real-Time Input Data
The following provides additional information on the satellite data received via realtime message. Information of those satellites is displayed, which are used on both
base and rover.
Access
Data.. on RTK Data Link Status, General page.
Key
Description
OK
To return to RTK Data Link Status.
Description of fields
The data being received from the satellites and the layout of the screen depend on
the active real-time data format.
Field
Description
Sat PRN
The PRN number (GPS), the Slot number (GLONASS)
or the Space Vehicle number (Galileo, BeiDou) of the
satellites shown with the prefix G (GPS), R
(GLONASS), E (Galileo) or C (BeiDou).
Sat Time
The GPS time of the satellite.
Phase L1, Phase L2, Phase L5 The number of phase cycles from the antenna to the
GPS satellite on L1, L2 and L5.
Phase L1, Phase L2
The number of phase cycles from the antenna to the
GLONASS satellite on L1 and L2.
Phase E1, Phase E5a, Phase
E5b, Phase AltBOC
The number of phase cycles from the antenna to the
Galileo satellite on E1, E5a, E5b and Alt-BOC.
Phase B1, Phase B2
The number of phase cycles from the antenna to the
BeiDou satellite on B1 and B2.
Msg 18 L1, Msg 18 L2
The uncorrected carrier phases for L1 and L2.
Msg 20 L1, Msg 20 L2
The carrier phase corrections for L1 and L2.
Code L1, Code L2, Code L5
The pseudorange from the antenna to the GPS satellite for L1, L2 and L5.
Code L1, Code L2
The pseudorange from the antenna to the GLONASS
satellite on L1 and L2.
Code E1, Code E5a, Code E5b, The pseudorange from the antenna to the Galileo
Code AltBOC
satellite on E1, E5a, E5b and Alt-BOC.
Code B1, Code B2
The pseudorange from the antenna to the BeiDou
satellite on B1 and B2.
Msg 19 L1, Msg 19 L2
The uncorrected pseudoranges for L1 and L2.
Msg 21 L1, Msg 21 L2
The pseudorange corrections for L1 and L2.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
277
Field
Description
PRC
Pseudorange corrections.
RRC
Rate of change of the corrections.
IODE
Issue Of Data Ephemeris. The identification number
of the ephemeris for a satellite.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
278
22.5
Current GPS position
Description
This screen shows information related to the current antenna position and the speed
of the antenna. For real-time rover configurations, the baseline vector is also shown.
MapView shows the current position in a graphical format.
Access
Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu,
access is also possible by:
• Tapping the position Status icon.
Current GPS Position,
Position page
Key
Description
OK
To return to the Main Menu.
Coord
To see other coordinate types. Local coordinates are available when
a local coordinate system is active.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To determine how often positions are computed and the screen
display is updated.
Fn Elev
To see height as elevation. Available when local grid coordinates are
displayed.
Fn Ell Ht
To see height as ellipsoidal height. Available when local grid coordinates are displayed.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Description
Position latency
The latency of the computed position. Latency is mostly due to
time required for data transfer and computation of position.
Depends on the use of the prediction mode.
Position quality
and
Height quality
Available for phase fixed and code only solutions. The 2D coordinate and height quality of the computed position.
HDOP and VDOP
Available for navigated solutions.
Next step
IF
THEN
the instrument is a real-time rover
Page changes to the Baseline page.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
279
IF
THEN
the instrument is not configured for real- Page changes to the Speed page.
time
the instrument is a real-time base
Current GPS Position,
Baseline page
Current GPS Position,
Speed page
OK exits Current GPS Position.
Information on the baseline vector is displayed.
Next step
Page changes to the Speed page.
Description of fields
Field
Description
Horizontal
speed
The speed over ground in the horizontal direction.
On bearing
Available for local coordinate systems.
The bearing for the horizontal direction related to the North direction of the active coordinate system.
Vertical speed
The vertical component of the current velocity.
Next step
OK exits Current GPS Position.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
280
22.6
Raw data logging
Description
This screen shows information related to logging of raw observations.
Access
Standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu.
Raw Data Logging
Status,
General page
Key
Description
OK
To return to the Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Description
Data format
Shows if raw data is saved and if so in which format.
Logging to
Shows where the data is saved.
Current
interval
The type of current interval.
Obs logged in The number of observations logged in current interval.
current
interval
Total no. of
static obs
The number of static epochs recorded in the current job.
Total no. of
moving obs
The number of moving epochs recorded in the current job.
Next step
Page changes to the Point occupation page.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
281
Raw Data Logging
Status,
Point occupation
page
Description of fields
Field
Current Status
GDOP
Logging rate
No. of moving
obs
Logging data
from more
than 5 sats
since
Measurement
completed
Time to go
Description
Shows if the instrument is moving or not.
Current GDOP.
Rate at which raw observations are being recorded.
The number of logged moving raw observations. Reset as soon a new
moving interval starts.
The time for how long five or more satellites are tracked on L1 and
L2 without interruption. If less than five satellites were tracked, the
counter is reset. The counter is not reset after Meas, Stop or Store.
The percentage of collected data required for successful processing.
It is a conservative estimate based on a 10 - 15 km baseline. The
criteria used to display this value depend on the settings for Automatically stop point measurement, Stop criteria and Enter the
values to be used to automatically stop the point occupation: in
Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Quality control.
The estimated time in hours, minutes and seconds until the configured criteria for Stop criteria or Enter the values to be used to automatically stop the point occupation: is reached. The criteria used to
display this value depend on the settings for Automatically stop
point measurement, Stop criteria and Enter the values to be used to
automatically stop the point occupation: in Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Quality control.
Next step
Page changes to the RTK base page.
Raw Data Logging
Status,
RTK base page
As shown below, the name of the page changes depending on the type of base used.
Name of page
Description
RTK base page
Base is a real base station.
Base (Nearest)
page
Base is the closest to the rover determined by for example
SmartNet.
Base (i-MAX) page Base information is individualised Master-Auxiliary corrections
determined and sent by for example SmartNet.
Base (MAX) page
Base information is Master-Auxiliary corrections determined and
sent by for example SmartNet.
Base (VRS) page
Base is a virtual base station.
Base (FKP) page
Base information is area correction parameters.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Logging static A time in sec
obs
-----
Description
The logging rate at the base. This information is
shown if the real-time message format supports
this information and raw observations are being
logged at the base.
Raw observations are not being logged, or status
information is not supported by RTK format.
Next step
OK exits Raw Data Logging Status.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
282
22.7
Connection status
22.7.1
Connection Status
Description
This screen gives an overview of all interfaces with the port and the devices currently
assigned.
Access
Standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu.
Connection Status
This screen consists of two pages, one for the field controller interfaces and one for
the GS interfaces. For a GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12, the GS connections page is not
shown.
Key
Description
OK
To return to the Main Menu.
Intfce
Available for configured interfaces being highlighted. To view information related to real-time data or the internet connection.
Devce..
To view the status of the attached device.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
22.7.2
Internet
Description
This screen shows
• if the instrument is online on the Internet.
• for how long the instrument is online.
• the technology of data transfer.
• the amount of data received or sent since the instrument is online.
Access
This screen is accessible for a configured and activated Internet interface.
• On the Connection Status, CS connections page, highlight CS Internet.Intfce.
• On the Connection Status, GS connections page, highlight GS Internet. Intfce.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
283
22.7.3
ASCII Input
Description
This screen shows the
• incoming ASCII data which is stored as an annotation.
• description of the incoming ASCII data for each annotation field.
Not used is shown for annotation fields which are not configured to receive incoming
ASCII data.
Access
This screen is accessible for a configured and activated ASCII Input interface.
On the Connection Status, CS connections page, highlight ASCII Input.Intfce.
ASCII Input - Data
Key
Description
OK
To exit the screen.
Data.. and
Descr
To change between the given description for the incoming ASCII data
or the last received ASCII data.
22.7.4
RTK Data Link Status
Description
For information about this screen, refer to "22.4 RTK data link status".
Access
This screen is accessible for a configured RTK rover interface.
On the Connection Status, GS connections page, highlight RTK Rover.Intfce.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
284
22.7.5
Remote (OWI)
Description
This screen shows all available ports and the interfaces and devices configured to
these ports.
Access
This screen is accessible for a configured and activated remote interface.
On the Connection Status, GS connections page, highlight Remote (OWI) Connections.
Remote (OWI)
Key
Description
OK
To exit the screen.
Devce..
Available for some devices. To view status information about the
devices.
Description of fields
Column
Description
Port
The physical port on the instrument which is being used for the interface functionality.
Connection
The interface configured for the ports.
Device
The hardware connected to the chosen port.
Next step
OK exits the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
285
22.7.6
Event Input 1/Event Input 2
Description
This screen shows the incoming data from the event input interface.
Access
This screen is accessible for a configured and activated event input interface.
On the Connection Status, GS connections page, highlight Event Input 1 or Event
Input 2.
Event input 1/Event
input 2
Description of fields
Field
Description
Time
The local time of when the last event was available.
Event Count
The incrementing number of detected events. Counting starts as
soon as the event input is configured and activated. To reset the
counter to 0, press Reset.
Event Pulse
Count
The incrementing number of detected pulses in the event input.
Events which do not fulfil the requirements configured are counted
as an event pulse but not as an event. This is, for example, the case
when the time between two events is shorter than defined in Time.
Counting starts as soon as the event input is configured and activated. To reset the counter to 0, press Reset.
Next step
OK exits the screen.
Diagram
c
c
a
c
a
a
b
0
GS12_129
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
a
b
a) Event
b) Event pulse
c) Accuracy limit
286
22.8
Internet connection status
Description
The status of the device used for the Internet connection is displayed as well as the
status of the Internet connection itself.
Access
Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info menu, access is also
possible by tapping the Internet icon.
Internet Connection
Status
On rover and base
Field
Option
Description
Online
Display only
Shows if the instrument is connected to the
Internet.
Duration
Display only
The time length since when the instrument is
connected to the Internet.
KBytes
received
Display only
The amount of data received from the Internet in
kilobyte.
KBytes sent
Display only
The amount of data sent to the Internet in kilobyte.
On the base additionally
Field
Option
Available on base.
DynDNS
status
Last update
Description
Error
DynDNS is active but the IP address could not be
updated at the DynDNS service.
Active
DynDNS is active and has updated the IP address.
Off
DynDNS is inactive.
Display only
Available on base. The time and the date of when
the IP address was last updated at the DynDNS
service by the GS.
Current regis- Display only
tered IP
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
Available on base. The last IP address that has
been updated for the GS.
287
22.9
TPS current station info
Access
Standard access from the Instrument status info menu.
TPS Current Station
Info
Key
Description
OK
To exit the screen.
Coord
To display other coordinate types.
ppm/SF
To switch between displaying the station scale factor and the station
ppm.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Description
Station ID
Station ID of the current station setup.
Instrument height
Instrument height of the current station setup.
Easting
Easting value of the instrument position.
Northing
Northing value of the instrument position.
Local ellipsoid ht
or Elevation
For a selected coordinate system, ellipsoidal height and elevation can be displayed.
Temperature
Temperature set on the instrument.
Pressure
Pressure set on the instrument.
Atmospheric ppm Atmospheric ppm set on the instrument.
Station ppm
Ppm of the current station set up.
Station scale
Scale factor of the current station set up.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info
288
23
Instrument - Base settings
23.1
Satellite tracking
Description
The settings on this screen define which satellite system, satellites and satellite
signals are used by the instrument.


Access
Unavailable for GS05/GS06.
This screen contains the same settings as the RTK Rover Satellite Tracking Settings
screen. Changes made to the settings here in RTK Base mode, will be reflected in the
RTK Rover mode and vice versa.
For RTK base:
Select Main Menu: Instrument\Base settings\Satellite tracking.
Satellite Tracking
Settings,
Tracking page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
• Any of the GNSS can only be disabled, if at least one other GNSS in enabled.
• At least one GNSS must be enabled.
• GPS can never be disabled:
• On the base station.
• On the GS14
• On the GS05/GS06
Field
Option
Description
GPS
Check box
Defines if the GPS L1, L2 and L5 signals are
accepted by the instrument when tracking satellites. For L5, a licence is required.
Glonass
Check box
Defines if GLONASS L1 and L2 signals are
accepted by the instrument when tracking satellites.
Galileo
Check box
Defines if Galileo E1, E5a, E5b and Alt-BOC signals
are accepted by the instrument when tracking
satellites.
BeiDou
Check box
Defines if BeiDou B1 and B2 signals are accepted
by the instrument when tracking satellites.
Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings
289
Field
Option
Show message & Check box
audio warning,
when loss of lock
occurs
Description
Activates an acoustic warning signal and a
message given by the instrument when satellites
are lost.
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings
290
Satellite Tracking
Settings,
Advanced page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes.
Hlth..
Available for Satellite health: User defined. To configure the satellites used in the survey.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Cut-off angle
Editable field
Sets the elevation in degrees below which satellite signals are not recorded and are not shown to
be tracked. Recommended settings:
• For real-time: 10°.
• For purely post-processing applications: 15°.
DOP limit
None, GDOP,
HDOP, PDOP or
VDOP
If activated, the limit defined in Limiting value is
checked. GPS positions are unavailable when the
limit is exceeded.
Limiting value Editable field
The maximum acceptable DOP value.
Available unless DOP limit: None.
L2C tracking
Automatic
L2 signals which are flagged as unhealthy are not
recorded or used for real-time computations. This
setting is selected automatically when GPS is
checked on the Tracking page.
Always track
L2C signals are always tracked.
Sets the satellite tracking behaviour.
Satellite
health

This setting is remembered when the
instrument is turned off. It is stored as
part of the configuration set.
Automatic
Incoming satellite signals are monitored by the
instrument. Data from signals which are flagged
as unhealthy is not recorded or used for real-time
computations.
User defined
Satellites must manually be included/excluded
from data recording and real-time computations
with Hlth...
Next step
Hlth.. changes to Satellite Health.
Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings
291
Satellite Health
The screen contains a page for each GNSS system the receiver is configured to track.
The explanations given for the softkeys are valid for all pages.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Use
To change between the options in the column User.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Option
Description
Satellite
01 to 50
The Pseudo Random Noise number (GPS, 1 to 32),),
the Slot ID (GLONASS, 1 to 24) or the Space Vehicle
number (Galileo, 1 to 50, and BeiDou, 1 to 37) of
the satellites.
There is a prefix G for GPS satellites, a prefix R for
GLONASS satellites, a prefix E for Galileo satellites
and a prefix C for BeiDou satellites.
System
OK, N/A or
Unhealthy
Information on the satellite health taken from the
almanac. N/A stands for not available.
User
Bad
Excludes satellite from tracking.
OK
Includes satellite in tracking.
Auto
Automatic satellite tracking when satellite is
healthy.
Next steps
Step
Description
1.
Page changes to the Glonass page, to the Galileo page and to the BeiDou
page, where GLONASS satellites, Galileo and BeiDou satellites used in the
survey can be configured.
2.
OK returns to Satellite Tracking.
3.
OK returns to Main Menu.
Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings
292
23.2
Base raw data logging

Unavailable for GS05/GS06.
Description
Logged raw observations are used for
• static and kinematic operations. With these operations, raw data is always postprocessed in the office. Raw data must therefore be logged on both base and rover
instruments.
• real-time operations
to check the work in the office by post-processing.
OR
to fill in gaps when a real-time position could not be calculated in the field, for
example, due to problems with the real-time data reception from the reference
station or the RTK network provider
Observations must be logged on all instruments which will be used for postprocessing.
The settings on this screen define the logging of raw observations.
Access
For RTK base:
Select Main Menu: Instrument\Base settings\Base raw data logging.
Raw Data Logging
Settings
Key
OK
Fn Quit
Description
To accept changes.
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Log base data Check box
for post
processing
Rate
From 0.05s to
300.0s
Data type
Selectable list
Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings
Description
Activates raw data logging.
Rate at which raw observations are logged.
Recommendations:
• For static operations with long baselines and
over long time Rate: 15.0s or Rate: 30.0s.
• For base stations for post-processed and realtime kinematic rovers, Rate at the base should
be the same rate as at the rover.
Data can be logged in the Leica proprietary MDB
format or in RINEX.
293
24
Instrument - TPS camera settings

For information on camera and images refer to "34 Camera & Imaging".
25
User - Work settings
25.1
ID templates
25.1.1
Accessing ID Template Configuration
Description
ID templates are predefined templates for point, line or area numbers. ID templates
save having to type in the ID for each object. They are useful when many points are
collected quickly, for example in post-processed and real-time kinematic operations.
The ID templates that are selected to be used suggest IDs for Point ID, Line ID and
Area ID when points, lines and areas are to be surveyed.
Access
Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\ID templates.
ID Templates
Key
OK
Description
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed. The currently active working style is automatically
updated, to include the selected ID template.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
GPS
points
GPS auto
points
Option
Selectable list
Description
Sets the ID templates for manually occupied GPS
points.
Selectable list
TPS
points
TPS auto
points
Selectable list
Sets the ID templates for GPS auto points. These
points are automatically recorded at a specific
rate.
Sets the ID templates for manually occupied TPS
points.
Auxiliary
points
Selectable list
Lines
Areas
Selectable list
Selectable list
Selectable list
Sets the ID templates for TPS auto points. These
points are automatically recorded at a specific
rate.
Sets the ID templates for auxiliary points. These
points are used when trying to find a stakeout
point.
Sets the ID templates for lines.
Sets the ID templates for areas.
Next step
ENTER to open a selectable list and to access ID Template Library.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS camera settings
294
ID Template Library
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted template.
New..
To create a new ID template.
Edit..
To edit the highlighted ID template.
Delete
To delete the highlighted ID template. It does not matter if the ID
template is being used in a working style. The ID template will be
rebuilt when that working style becomes active.
Fn Default
To recall deleted default ID templates.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Template
The name of the ID template and the format of the ID object.
Increment
The amount by which the point ID is incremented.
Default ID templates
Some ID templates are implemented by default.
Default ID
template
Description
<Manually enter>
The last point ID during a survey will be displayed. This ID is
automatically incremented if it contains numerical characters.
If this ID is overwritten, the auto increment starts from the new
ID. The automatic incrementation can be turned off when
editing this ID template.
Area0001
Suggested as ID for areas in default working styles. This ID is
automatically incremented.
Aux0001
Suggested as ID for auxiliary points in default working styles.
These points are used when trying to find a stakeout point.
This ID is automatically incremented.
GPS0001
Suggested as ID for GPS measured points in default working
styles. This ID is automatically incremented.
GPS_Auto_0001
Suggested as ID for GPS auto points in default working styles.
These points are automatically recorded at a specific rate. This
ID is automatically incremented.
Line0001
Suggested as ID for lines in default working styles. This ID is
automatically incremented.
Viva Series, User - Work settings
295
Default ID
template
Description
TPS0001
Suggested as ID for TPS measured points in default working
styles. This ID is automatically incremented.
TPS_Auto_0001
Suggested as ID for TPS auto points in default working styles.
These points are automatically recorded at a specific rate. This
ID is automatically incremented.
Date & time
The current local time and date is the ID.
Viva Series, User - Work settings
296
25.1.2
Creating/Editing an ID Template
Access
In ID Template Library, highlight an ID template. A copy of this ID template is taken
for further configurations. New...
New ID Template/Edit
ID Template
Key
Description
OK
To store the new ID template into the ID template library.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Examples for incrementation
Field
Option
Description
ID
Editable field
The name of the ID template and the format of
the ID object. Any characters including spaces are
allowed. Leading spaces are not accepted.
Increment
Selectable list
IDs are incremented numerically or alphanumerically.
Increment by
Editable field
The amount by which the point ID is incremented.
Cursor position
Selectable list
The character position at which the cursor is
placed when ENTER is pressed in Point ID, Line ID
or Area ID when surveying points. Last Character
means that the cursor is placed immediately to
the right of the last character.
For Increment: Numeric only
The rightmost numeric part is incremented within the point ID.
ID
Increment
by
Next point ID
Notes
Point994
5
Point999
Point1004
...
-
994point
5
999point
1004point
...
-
123point123
-10
123point113
Numbers on the right are
incremented. Negative
increments allowed.
Viva Series, User - Work settings
297
ID
Increment
by
Next point ID
Notes
Point11
-6
Point5
Point-1
Point-7
Point-13
...
-
Abcdefghijklmn94 5
Abcdefghijklmno99
Incrementation fails if next
Point ID increment fail increment will result in more
than 16 characters.
Abcdefghijklmno9 -5
Abcdefghijklmnop4
Negative incrementing fails
Point ID increment fail if next increment requires
negative sign and will result
in more than 16 characters.
For Increment: Alphanumeric
The rightmost character within the point ID is incremented regardless of whether that
character is numeric or alphanumeric.
ID
Increment
by
Next point ID
Notes
Point994
5
Point999
Point99E
Point99J
...
-
994point
5
994poiny
Lower case alpha characters
Point ID increment fail increment until z is reached.
Then a new point ID must
be entered.
Abcdef
-5
Abcdea
AbcdeV
…
AbcdeB
Point ID increment fail
Lower case alpha characters
decrement from lower to
upper case until A is
reached. Then a new point
ID must be entered.
ABCDEB
5
ABCDEG
ABCDEL
...
Abcdez
Point ID increment fail
Upper case alpha characters
increment from upper to
lower case until z is
reached. Then a new point
ID must be entered.
Viva Series, User - Work settings
298
25.2
Coding & linework
Description
The settings on this screen define the method of coding. Refer to "26 Coding" for a
complete description of coding.
Access
Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\Coding & linework.
Coding & linework
settings,
Code & attributes
page
Key
OK
Page
Fn Quit
Description
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
To change to another page on this screen.
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Use a list box Check box
to view codes
Suggested
attributes
Default values
Last used
Prompt for
mandatory
attributes
Always prompt
Only if no value
Code change
only
Description
If checked, codes stored within the job codelist
can be selected from a selectable list to code
points, lines and areas.
Otherwise, each code must be entered manually.
Determines the attribute values displayed under
certain circumstances. This setting is applicable to
both the storing and displaying of attribute
values.
When available, the default attribute values, as
stored in the job, are displayed and stored.
When available, the last used attribute values as
stored in the job are displayed and stored.
A screen to enter mandatory attributes will
always appear when codes being stored have one
or more attributes of attribute type mandatory.
Attributes of attribute type mandatory or fixed
can only be created in LGO.
A screen to enter mandatory attributes will only
appear when codes being stored have one or
more attributes of attribute type mandatory,
without an attribute value. Attributes of attribute
type mandatory must always be created in LGO.
A screen to type in mandatory attributes will only
appear when a new code with a mandatory
attribute was selected.
Next step
Page changes to the Linework page.
Viva Series, User - Work settings
299
Coding & linework
settings,
Linework page
The flags for Linework are defined on this screen. A flag
• is stored as a property of a point.
• can be exported with a format file.
• is different to a code.
The flags defined on this screen are linked to the options available for Linework in a
survey screen page of an application. The selection for Linework in a survey screen
page determines the flag stored with a point. The availability of Linework in a survey
screen page is configured in My Survey Screen Settings. Refer to "27 Linework" for
information on Linework.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Automatically Check box
create lines &
areas when
coding
If checked, lines and areas can be automatically
created and opened using codes.
Use a
stringing
attribute
Check box
Available if Automatically create lines & areas
when coding is checked.
If checked, surveyed points that have the same
code and attribute value for the Stringing
attribute are strung together on one line.
Attribute
Selectable list
Available if Use a stringing attribute is checked.
The attribute value used to determine which
surveyed points are strung together on one line.
Begin line
Editable field
Opens a new line when the next point is stored.
Any lines which are currently open are closed. The
point can be stored with a point code.
3pt curve
Editable field
Stores the linework flag for a curve through the
next three measured points and continues a
line/area.
Re-open last
line
Editable field
Opens the last used line again.
End line
Editable field
Closes all open lines.
Cont line/area Editable field
Indicates a line/area is open.
Start spline
Editable field
Stores the linework flag for beginning a spline and
continues any open line/area.
End spline
Editable field
Stores the linework flag to stop a spline.
Cont spline
Editable field
Indicates a line/area is open with spline line type.
Begin area
Editable field
Opens a new area when the next point is stored.
Any areas which are currently open are closed.
The point can be stored with a point code.
Re-open last
area
Editable field
Opens the last used area again.
Close area
Editable field
Closes all open areas.
Next step
Page changes to the Quickcoding page.
Viva Series, User - Work settings
300
Coding & linework
settings,
Quickcoding page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Quickcoding
Never
Prevents the use of quick coding completely.
On
Allows the use of quick coding and activates it.
Off
Allows the use of quick coding, but keeps it deactivated.
Digits to use
1, 2 or 3
Sets the mostly used number of digits for the
quick code. Quick codes with fewer digits can still
be used. While typing a quick code during a
survey, using ENTER after typing one or two digits
of the quick code indicates the end of the input.
Store free
code
After pt is stored Determines if a free code measured with a quick
or Before pt is
code is stored before or after the point.
stored
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, User - Work settings
301
25.3
My Survey Screen
Description
Display settings define the parameters shown on a page on the survey screen.
Four survey screen pages are definable.
Page
Page
Page
Page
1:
2:
3:
4:
Always shown on the survey screen.
Can be shown or hidden on the survey screen.
Can be shown or hidden on the survey screen.
Never shown on the survey screen. Reserved for applications.
The settings on this screen define the layout of the four survey screen pages.
Access
Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\My Survey Screen.
My Survey Screen
Settings,
TPS and GPS page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Config..
To configure the selected survey screen page.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Define
Page 1, 2, 3 or 4 Selected survey screen page.
Use in survey Check box
Description
Indicates if the survey screen page is shown or
hidden as a page in Survey.
Next step
Highlight the survey screen page and Config.. to access Configure Page.
Viva Series, User - Work settings
302
Configure Page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and to return to previous screen.
Clear
To set all fields to Line space full.
Default
To recall the default settings.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Name
Editable field
The name of the page is shown as page name in
Survey.
Show in the
Survey application
Check box
Shows or hides the page as a page in Survey.
1st line
Display only
Fixed to Point ID.
2nd line to
16th line
For each line, one of the following options can be
selected.
Angle right
Displays the horizontal angle difference between
the backsight point and the current telescope
position.
% completed
Display only field for the percentage of the time
for which the point has been occupied based on
the setting for Stop criteria in screen Quality
Control. Appears in the page during the point
occupation if Quality Control is checked.
Annotation 1 to
Annotation 4
Editable field for comments to be stored with the
point.
Antenna
height
Input field for antenna height for static observations.
Attrib (free) 01 to Display only field for attributes for free codes.
Attrib (free) 20
Attrib 01 to Attrib Editable field for attributes for codes.
20
Viva Series, User - Work settings
Target
aiming
Unavailable for SmartStation. Select automation
type.
Avg max
#distances
Input field for maximum number of distance
measurements in the averaging EDM mode.
Azimuth
Display only field for the azimuth.
303
Field
Option
Description
Backsight pt
ID
Display only field for the point ID of the backsight
point.
Code
Editable field for codes.
Code (free)
Editable field for free codes.
Code desc (free)
Display only field for the description of free
codes.
Code information Editable field for additional information relating
to the code, such as instructions to the CAD
package to start a line and string number and
curve information.
Viva Series, User - Work settings
Description
Display only field for the description of codes.
Easting
Display only field for Easting coordinate of measured point.
GDOP
Display only field for the current GDOP of the
computed position.
HDOP
Display only field for the current HDOP of the
computed position.
Elevation
Display only field for the height coordinate of the
measured point.
Height
difference
Display only field for the height difference
between station and reflector.
Horiz
distance
Display only field for horizontal distance.
Humidity
Editable field for relative humidity to be stored
with point.
Hz angle
Display only field for the horizontal angle.
Instrument
height
Display only field for the instrument height.
Line space full
Insert full line space.
Line space half
Insert half line space.
Linework
Selectable list with option for flagging a line/area.
Local ellipsoid
ht
Display only field for the elevation of the current
GNSS position.
Measure
mode
Select EDM measurement mode.
Measure
Select EDM type.
Moving antenna
ht
Input field for antenna height for moving observations.
Msd PP obs
Display only field for the number of static observations recorded over the period of point occupation. Appears in the page when recording of static
observations is configured.
Northing
Display only field for Northing coordinate of
measured point.
Number of
dists
Display only field for number of averaged
distances measured with EDM mode averaging.
304
Field
Viva Series, User - Work settings
Option
Description
Offset
left/right
Input field for horizontal distance offset for
measured point, perpendicular to the line of
sight.
Offset height
Input field for height offset for measured point.
Offset in/out
Input field for horizontal distance offset, in the
direction of line of sight.
Offset mode
Select offset mode.
PDOP
Display only field for the current PDOP of the
computed position.
PPM atmos
Display only field for atmospheric ppm.
PPM
geometric
Display only field for geometric ppm value.
PPM total
Display only field for the total ppm value.
Point ID
Editable field for the point ID.
Pressure
Editable field for atmospheric pressure.
Prism
constant
Display only field for additive constant of
currently selected reflector.
Quality 1D
Display only field for the current height coordinate quality of computed position.
Quality 2D
Display only field for the current 2D coordinate
quality of computed position.
Quality 3D
Display only field for the current 3D coordinate
quality of computed position.
RTK
positions
Display only field for the number of positions
recorded over the period of point occupation.
Appears in the page of real-time rover configurations.
SD (last
recorded)
Display only field for the last recorded distance.
Slope
distance
Display only field for measured slope distance.
Station ID
Display only field for current station ID.
Station
easting
Display only field for current station Easting coordinates.
Station
height
Display only field for current station height coordinates.
Station
northing
Display only field for current station Northing
coordinates.
Std
deviation
Display only field of standard deviation in millimetres of averaged distances.
Target
Select a prism.
Target
height
Input field for prism height.
Temp dry
Editable field for dry temperature to be stored
with point.
305
Field
Viva Series, User - Work settings
Option
Description
Temp wet
Editable field for wet temperature to be stored
with point.
Time at point
Display only field for the time from when the
point is occupied until point occupation is
stopped. Appears in the page during the point
occupation.
Type
Display only field for the type of code, for
example point code, line code or area code.
V angle
Display only field for vertical angle.
V angle
display
Select vertical angle display.
VDOP
Display only field for the current VDOP of the
computed position.
WGS84 ellipsoid
ht
Display only field for the current GNSS position.
WGS84
latitude
Display only field for the current GNSS position.
WGS84
longitude
Display only field for the current GNSS position.
306
25.4
Hot keys & favourites
Description
The settings on this screen assign functions, screens or applications to each of the
first and second level of hot keys, including the user definable Smartkey F13, and the
favourites key.
Access
Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\Hot keys & favourites.
OR
Hold a hot key down for two seconds. This action is also possible after pressing Fn.
Hot Keys & Favourites,
GPS Hot Keys/TPS
Hot Keys page
To configure the first level of hot keys.
This page is only available for CS15 models. CS10 models do not have hot keys.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
F7 to F12
Selectable list
All functions, screens or applications which can be
assigned to the particular key.
F13
Selectable list
Available for MS50/TS50/TM50. All functions,
screens or application programs which can be
assigned to the user definable Smartkey.
Next step
Page changes to the GPS Fn+hot keys/TPS Fn+hot keys page.
Hot Keys & Favourites,
GPS Fn+hot
keys/TPS Fn+hot
keys page
To configure the second level of hot keys.
This page is only available for CS15 models. CS10 models do not have hot keys.
The functionality on this page is identical to the one on the GPS Hot Keys/TPS Hot
Keys page.
Next step
Page changes to the GPS Fn+favourites/TPS Fn+favourites page.
Viva Series, User - Work settings
307
Hot Keys & Favourites,
GPS Fn+favourites/TPS Fn+favourites page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
1 to 9
Selectable list
All functions, screens or applications which can be
assigned to the individual lines in the userdefined menu.
Next step
Page changes to the first page on this screen.
25.5
Prompt before storing
Access
Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\Prompt before storing.
Prompt Before
Storing,
GPS and TPS page
Check a box if you want to be asked for input/selection when storing a point with
Store.
Enter the Following
This screen is displayed when prompting is configured in Prompt Before Storing and
when storing a point with Store.
Only the fields relating to the ticked check boxes in Prompt Before Storing are
shown.

Viva Series, User - Work settings
308
26
Coding
26.1
Overview
Description
A code is a description which can be stored by itself or with a point, line, or area.
SmartWorx Viva coding is flexible with what types of codes can be stored and also how
they are entered. Thematical and/or free codes can be stored to the system by;
• selecting codes from a codelist,
• entering a quick code combination,
• directly typing in the code, or
• selecting the code from a SmartCodes screen.
Quick coding and SmartCodes are both quick ways for a code to be selected, a point
to be measured, and both code and point to be stored.

Coding methods
For coding, points, lines and areas have the same behaviour. In this chapter, the word
object is used as a generic term for points, lines and areas.
Coding
method
Characteristic
Thematical Use
Selection of the
codes
Description
To store a description together with an object
inside an application or in Main Menu: Jobs &
Data\ View & edit data.
• For thematical coding with codelist:
On a configured survey screen page, codes
are selected from the job codelist in a
selectable list. It is also possible to add
thematical codes from the codelist to a
SmartCodes screen for quick selection, or to
select thematical codes using the quick coding
method. The job codelist must contain
thematical codes.
• For thematical coding without codelist:
On a configured survey screen page, codes
are manually typed in.
Free
Recording of the
codes
Together with the objects.
Use
To store a description independent of an object
at any time. A free code can be used to store a
description related to an object, or additional
descriptions such as the job name or temperature.
Selection of the
codes
• For free coding using a codelist:
Pressing the configured hot key opens a
selectable list with the free codes of the job
codelist. It is also possible to select free codes
using the quick coding method. The job
codelist must contain free codes.
• For free coding with direct input:
Pressing the configured hot key opens a
screen for alphanumeric input.
Viva Series, Coding
309
Coding
method
Quick
Characteristic
Description
Recording of the
codes
Stored as time-related information. A time stamp
is stored with each free code. Free codes
selected using quick coding can be configured to
be stored before or after the object.
Use
Quick coding is the storing of an object plus a
thematical or free code using a minimum number
of keystrokes.
Selection of the
codes
Shortcuts must be assigned to codes in the job
codelist. Quickcoding: On must be set in Coding
& linework settings, Quickcoding page. Typing
the shortcut searches for the assigned code.
Point measurement begins.
Recording of the
codes
• For thematical codes:
Together with the objects. With Automatically stop point measurement and Automatically store point both checked in Quality
control, the points and codes are immediately
stored.


Configure coding
Viva Series, Coding
• For free codes:
Stored as time-related information before or
after the points. A time stamp is stored with
each free code.
Quick codes must be created in LGO.
Characters that can be assigned to quick codes
are:
• 0 to 9
• A to Z
• a to z
Refer to "25.2 Coding & linework" for information on configuring coding.
310
26.2
Thematical Coding
26.2.1
Thematical Coding with Codelist
Requirements
• The job codelist contains thematical codes for points, lines and/or areas.
• Use a list box to view codes is checked in Coding & Linework Settings.
• A survey screen page with an editable field for codes must be configured.
Access
Open the selectable list for Code in a survey screen page of an application.
OR
Open the selectable list for a Code/Point code in New Point, Code page. The
procedure is similar for lines and areas.
OR
Open the selectable list for Point code in Edit Point:, Code page. The procedure is
similar for lines and areas.
OR
Open the selectable list for Code (auto) in Survey, Auto page, if configured.
Select Code
Select Code is shown as an example.
Depending on the setting for Automatically create lines & areas when coding in
Coding & Linework Settings, Linework page, either;
• all point, line and area codes are available for selection, or
• only those point codes from the job codelist, which belong to an active code
group, are available for selection.
Codes marked with * have attributes attached.
Key
OK
New..
Attrib
Last
More
Fn Group
Fn Sort
Fn Quit
Viva Series, Coding
Description
To accept changes and to return to the screen from where this
screen was accessed.
To create a new code.
Available unless creating/editing a point/line/area. To type in
attribute values for the selected code and/or add new attributes for
the selected code.
Available if a code has been previously used in the working job. To
select from a list of last used codes. The codes are sorted by time
with the most recently used code at the top of the list.
To display information about the code description, the code group,
the code type and the quick code if codes with quick codes exist in
the job.
To view, create, delete, activate and deactivate code groups. Refer
to "7.5 Managing Code Groups".
To sort codes by code name, code description, quick code, in the
order they were added to the codelist, or the last used.
To exit the screen.
311
Next step
Highlight the desired code.
• If a point code is selected then any open line/area is closed. The measured point
is stored with the selected code independently of any line/area.
• If a line code is selected then any open line is closed and a new line with the
selected code is created. The line ID is defined by the configured line ID
template. The measured point is assigned to that line. The line stays open until
it is closed manually or another line code is selected.
• If an area code is selected then the behaviour is as for lines.
Attrib to access Enter Attributes.
Enter Attributes
If configured for the selected code, editable fields for attribute values are available.
Any preconfigured attribute rules, for example, integer numbers only, a set range, or
a selectable list, control what values can be entered. Type in the attribute values.
Attribute values for attributes of type
• normal can be edited.
• fixed cannot be edited.
Key
Description
OK
To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed.
+Attrib
To add a new attribute of type normal and of value type text. Up to
twenty attributes can be added. Attributes of type mandatory or
fixed and of value type real or integer must be created in LGO.
Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in.
To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the
attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and the
attribute value to be used as the default attribute value can be typed
in.
Last
To recall the last used attribute values for the selected code.
Default
To recall the default attribute values for the selected code.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Next step
Press OK. The code and any associated attribute values are stored when the point is
stored. If a point with the same point ID exists in the job, the codes, attribute names
and attribute values of the new and existing points must be identical. Should they not
be identical, a screen opens where the code or attribute mismatch can be corrected.
Viva Series, Coding
312
26.2.2
Thematical Coding without Codelist
Requirements
• Use a list box to view codes is NOT checked in Coding & Linework Settings.
• A survey screen page with an editable field for codes must be configured.
• A survey screen page with a selectable list for code types must be configured.
Access
A thematical code is typed in the field
Code in a survey screen page of an application.
OR
Code/Point code in New Point, Code page. The procedure is similar for lines and
areas.
OR
Point code in Edit Point:, Code page. The procedure is similar for lines and areas.
OR
in the field Code (auto) in Survey, Auto page, if configured.
Survey,
Code page
Type in a code and attribute values. Up to eight attributes can be added. This setting
is configured in the survey screen page.
• If a point code is selected then any open line/area is closed. The measured point
is stored with the selected code independently of any line/area.
• If a line code is selected then any open line is closed and a new line with the
selected code is created. The line ID is defined by the configured line ID
template. The measured point is assigned to that line. The line stays open until
it is closed manually or another line code is selected.
• If an area code is selected then the behaviour is as for lines.
Next step
Press Meas.
Viva Series, Coding
313
26.3
Free Coding
26.3.1
Free Coding Using a Codelist
Requirements
• The job codelist contains free codes.
• A hot key is configured to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes or the
favourites menu is configured to display the option Select free code from list.
Access
Press a hot key configured to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes.
Refer to "1.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys.
OR
For GPS mode, press
and select Select free code from list to access the screen
Select Free Code.
For TPS mode, press Fn
and select Select free code from list to access the
screen Select Free Code.
Refer to "1.2 Favourites Key" for information on the
key.
Select Free Code
Viva Series, Coding
All free codes from the job codelist which belong to an active code group, are available
for selection. Free codes marked with * have attributes attached.
Key
Description
Store
To store the free code and any associated attribute values and to
return to the screen from where this screen was accessed.
New..
To create a new code.
Attrib
To type in attribute values and/or add new attributes for the selected
free code. Refer to "26.2.1 Thematical Coding with Codelist".
Last
Available if a free code has been previously used in the working job.
To select from a list of last used free codes. The free codes are sorted
by time with the most recently used code at the top of the list.
More
To display information about the code description, the code group
and the quick code if codes with quick codes exist in the job.
Fn Group
To view, create, delete, activate and deactivate code groups. Refer
to "7.5 Managing Code Groups".
Fn Sort
To sort codes by code name, code description, quick code or the last
used.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
314
26.3.2
Free Coding with Direct Input
Requirements
A hot key is configured to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes or the
favourites menu is configured to display the option Enter free code.
Access
Press a hot key configured to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes.
Refer to "1.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys.
OR
For GPS mode, press
and select Enter free code to access the screen Enter
Free Code & Attributes.
For TPS mode, press Fn
and select Enter free code to access the screen Enter
Free Code & Attributes.
Refer to "1.2 Favourites Key" for information on the
key.
Enter Free Code &
Attributes
Type in a code and attribute values. As soon as a free code is typed in, a codelist is
created within the job. Up to eight attributes can be added. Refer to "26.3.1 Free
Coding Using a Codelist" for a description of keys.
Next step
Press Store.
Viva Series, Coding
315
26.4
Quick Coding
Requirements
• The job codelist contains quick codes for points, lines and/or areas.
• According to the user requirements, set Store free code: Before pt is stored or
Store free code: After pt is stored in Coding & Linework Settings, Quickcoding.
Activate quick
coding
The current setting for Quickcoding in the Quickcoding page determines how quick
coding is activated. Quick coding can be activated at any time.
• For Quickcoding: On, Quick coding is active and can be used.
• For Quickcoding: Off, use a hot key, the
favourites menu or tap the quick
coding icon.
• For Quickcoding: Never, change the setting manually.
Performing Quick
coding
A screen must be active where points can be measured.
Type in the one, two or three digits of the quick code. The current setting for Digits
to use in Coding & Linework Settings, Quickcoding page determines by how many
keystrokes quick coding is executed.
Press ENTER to execute quick coding after less than the configured keystrokes. This
action is possible after one keystroke for Digits to use: 2 and one or two keystrokes
for Digits to use: 3.
Press ESC to clear digits from the entry.
Only mandatory attribute values can be entered. For non-mandatory attributes, either
the default or the last used attribute values are stored, depending on the setting for
Suggested attributes in Coding & Linework Settings, Code & attributes page.
For point codes:
• The point code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job codelist and
point measurement begins.
• The point code and any associated attribute values are stored with the point.
• If a point with the same point ID exists in the job, the codes, attribute names
and attribute values of the new and existing points must be identical. Should
they not be identical, a screen opens where the code or attribute mismatch can
be corrected.
For free codes:
• The free code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job codelist and
point measurement begins.
• The free code, associated attribute values and time related information are
stored. The setting for Store free code in Coding & Linework Settings, Quickcoding page determines if the free code is stored before or after the point.
For line/area codes:
• The line/area code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job codelist.
• A new line/area is created and immediately stored with that line/area code and
attributes. For the line/area ID, the line/area ID template as defined in ID
Templates is used.
26.5
SmartCodes
26.5.1
Overview
Description
SmartCodes is a quick way for a code to be selected and a point to be measured. All
existing coding, linework, and point measurement functionality is retained.
Viva Series, Coding
316
26.5.2
Configuring SmartCodes
Access
In Survey press Fn Config.. to access Configuration.
Configuration SmartCodes page
The settings on this page activate the using of SmartCodes and define the method. All
settings in this screen are stored within the currently active working style.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Use SmartCodes
Check box
If checked, using of SmartCodes is activated.
All other fields on the screen are active
and can be edited.
Measure point Check box
when box is
tapped
If checked, when one of the code boxes is tapped
in Survey, SmartCodes page, then the code is
selected and the point is measured.
Automatically
move focus to
next box
Method by which subsequent code box is selected
after a point is stored.
Not used
Nine code boxes are shown in the Survey, SmartCodes page, but no automatic movement of the
focus takes place.
Zig-Zag
Each new code rotation through the block is
started at the same end where the previous code
rotation finished.
Same direction
Each new code rotation through the block is
started at the same end where the previous code
rotation started.

Viva Series, Coding

Refer to "60 Survey Cross Section" for an explanation of Zig-Zag and Same direction.
317
Field
Option
Available for Automatically move focus to next
box: Zig-Zag and Automatically move focus to
next box: Same direction. The way of using the
code boxes. This setting controls the order in
which the code boxes will be rotated through
automatically.
Direction to
move
Number of
code boxes
Description
Forward
The code boxes are used in the same way as
defined in Survey, SmartCodes page.
Backward
The code boxes are used in the reverse way as
defined in Survey, SmartCodes page.
From 1 to 9
Available for Automatically move focus to next
box: Zig-Zag and Automatically move focus to
next box: Same direction. Number of code boxes
shown in Survey, SmartCodes page.
Information shown in line 8 of Survey, SmartCodes page.
Show at
bottom of
screen
Not used
No survey screen page element is shown.
Point ID
The identifier for manually measured points. The
configured point ID template is used.
3D CQ
The current 3D coordinate quality of the
computed position.
2D CQ
The current 2D coordinate quality of the
computed position.
1D CQ
The current height coordinate quality of the
computed position.
Linework
The linework flag to be stored with the point. The
options available depend on whether a line/area
is currently open.
Antenna
The height of the antenna that is being used.
Changing the antenna height here does not
update the default antenna height as defined in
the active working style.
height
height
The height of the reflector that is being used.
Changing the reflector height here does not
update the default reflector height as defined in
the active configuration set.
Hz
The current horizontal angle of the measured
point.
V
The current vertical angle of the measured point.
Horiz
distance
The current horizontal distance of the measured
point.
Slope
The current slope distance of the measured point.
Target
distance
Height
difference
Viva Series, Coding
The current height difference between the
station and the measured point.
318
Field
Viva Series, Coding
Option
Description
Automatically Check box
create lines &
areas when
coding
If checked, lines and areas can be automatically
created and opened using codes.
Use a
stringing
attribute
Check box
Available if Automatically create lines & areas
when coding is checked.
If checked, surveyed points that have the same
code and attribute value for the Stringing
attribute are strung together on one line.
Stringing
attribute
Selectable list
Available if Use a stringing attribute is checked.
The attribute value used to determine which
surveyed points are strung together on one line.
Show code
description
instead of
code
Check box
If checked, the code descripton is shown in the
code boxes instead of the code.
319
26.5.3
Code Block
Requirements
• Use SmartCodes ticked in Configuration, SmartCodes page.
Survey,
SmartCodes page
Key
Description
Meas
To start recording positions.
Codes..
To select a code to be assigned to the highlighted code block. Available when a code box is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Code block
Selectable list
The code block to be used.
Code box
-
A measured point is stored with the code
assigned to the highlighted code box.



Linework
Selectable list
When Stringing attribute is configured in
Stringing attribute, SmartCodes page, an
attribute value can be typed in below the
code name of the highlighted code box.
The attribute value can also be modified
using the softkeys + and -.
For Measure point when box is tapped
being checked in Stringing attribute,
SmartCodes page, tapping the code box
with the supplied stylus automatically
starts measuring the point. Selecting the
code box by using the arrow keys will not
start measuring the point.
Lines/areas are automatically opened and
closed using SmartCodes, as configured.
Available for Show at bottom of screen: Linework. Select the linework flag to be stored with
the point. Then move the focus on the line/area
code box.
Next step
Highlight a code block and press Codes.. to access Select Code.
Viva Series, Coding
320
Select Code
Copying a code
block to a new job
step-by-step
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
New..
To create a new code.
Attrib
To type in attribute values for the selected code and/or add new
attributes for the selected code.
Last
Available if a code has been previously used in the working job. To
select from a list of last used codes. The codes are sorted by time
with the most recently used code at the top of the list.
More
To display information about the code description, the code group,
the code type and the quick code if codes with quick codes exist in
the job.
Fn Group
To view, create, delete, activate and deactivate code groups. Refer
to "7.5 Managing Code Groups".
Fn Sort
To sort codes by code name, code description, quick code, in the
order they were added to the codelist, or the last used.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Step

1.
Description
Code blocks are stored in the job.
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\ Job properties.
OR

2.

Codelist: If codes had been copied from the internal memory codelist, the
name of the codelist is displayed. If codes have been typed in, then the name
of the job is displayed.
Fn Export to copy codes and code blocks from the job to an existing or new
codelist.
Copying code blocks to an existing codelist overwrites the code blocks of the
existing codelist.
3.
OK and Store to save the current job and return to Main Menu.
4.
Create a new job and assign the related codelist to the job.

Viva Series, Coding
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Choose working job or Choose control
job. Edit.. to access Job Properties:.
SmartCodes from the codelist are now available within the new job.
321
26.6
Code and Attribute Mismatch
26.6.1
Code Mismatch
Description
When storing a point with a code, it can happen that a point with the same point ID
already exists in the job. If the codes of the new and the existing point do not match,
a screen opens where the code can be corrected. One point cannot have different
codes.
Point Code Mismatch
This screen opens automatically if the codes of the new and the existing point do not
match. Highlight the code to be stored with the new point.
Key
Description
Store
To store the highlighted code and any associated attributes with the
point being stored and to continue with the application or data
management.
More
To display information about the code description, the code group
and any attributes associated with the highlighted code.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Viva Series, Coding
Field
Option
Description
New Code
Display only
The code for the point.
Stored Code
Display only
The code as stored for the existing point in the
job.
322
26.6.2
Attribute Mismatch
Description
If a point with the same point ID exists in the job, the codes, attribute names and
attribute values of the new and existing points must be identical. Should the attributes
not be identical, a screen opens where the attribute mismatch can be corrected. One
point cannot have different attribute information.

Attributes Already
Stored/Attributes
Being Stored
The name of the screen changes with pressing Current or Stored:
Pressing Current:
Pressing Stored:
Attributes Being Stored
Attributes Already Stored
This screen opens automatically if the attribute names and/or values of the new and
the existing point do not match.
Key
Description
Store
To store the selected attributes with the new/created point and to
continue with the application or data management.
Current or
Stored
To change between viewing the attribute names and values of the
new/created point and those values stored for the existing point in
the job.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Point code
Display only
• For Attributes Already Stored: The code of the
existing point in the job.
• For Attributes Being Stored: The code of the
new point.
Attributes
Display only
• For Attributes Already Stored: The attributes
as stored for the existing point in the job.
• For Attributes Being Stored: The attributes of
the new point.
Viva Series, Coding
323
26.7
Code Information
Description
Code information is additional information with up to 40 alphanumeric characters.
Code information relates to the code, such as instructions to the CAD package to start
a line and string number and curve information.
Code information can be used independently of a code being selected. Code information is stored when the measured point is stored.
Activating an editable field for code
information
The editable field for code information can be selected to be used in any survey screen
mask for GPS and TPS.
To configure a survey screen mask select Main Menu: User\Work settings\My Survey
Screen. Press Config.. and select Code information for one of the fields.
Using the code
information editable field within
applications
If the use of the Code information field is configured to be used in a survey screen
mask, then the editable field is shown on that survey screen mask in any application.
At any time, text can be typed into the field. This text is remembered and remains
displayed after the point is stored.
To recall entered text use the keys Prev and Next when the Code information is highlighted.
Viewing and editing
code information
To view/edit code information, go to:
• Data:, Points page. Use More until the code information is visible.
• Edit Point:, Code page.
Exporting code
information
To export code information select:
• Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export ASCII data. Press Config..
to activate the export of code information.
• Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export custom data. Configure a
format file to export code information for entered points/lines/areas,
points/lines/areas measured by GPS/TPS, GPS baselines or TPS measurements.
Viva Series, Coding
324
27
Linework
27.1
Overview
Description
Working with lines can be automated. Two ways of working are available. They are
listed in this table. The two ways of working can be mixed.
Linework
by
Description
Linework
listbox
The Auto page in Survey and any survey screen page, can be configured
to show a field Linework with a selectable list. Any application can be
configured to display a survey screen page and therefore have access
to this Linework field.
The selection from the selectable list determines
• the action taken for a line/area, for example opening or closing a line.
• the linework flag stored with a point.
The linework flags
• are configured in Coding & Linework Settings, Linework page.
• can be exported with a format file.
Coding
Point, line or area codes can be selected in many applications.
Selecting a point, line or area code closes any open line/area and opens
a new line/area.
Refer to "26 Coding" for more information.

The linework flag can be used without thematical coding by using the linework field in
the Survey screen page configuration.
The code can be linked to linework if it is configured as a point code to start a
line/area, or it is a line or area code.
Quick coding can be used as described in "26.4 Quick Coding".
27.2
Performing Linework using the Linework Field

The Survey application is used here to explain Linework.
Requirements
• A survey screen page with a selectable list for Linework must be configured.
• The linework flags must be defined in Coding & Linework Settings, Linework page.
•
Access
Linework using the
linework field stepby-step
Viva Series, Linework
The rover menu must be used.
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey.
Step
Description
1.
Go to the point to be measured.
2.
Select the linework flag to be stored with the point.
3.
Measure the point.

Depending on the option selected for Linework, a line/area is opened, closed
or reopened.
4.
Repeat steps 1. to 5. until all points for the linework are measured.
5.
Fn Quit to exit the Survey application.
6.
Use a format file to export the points including the linework flags.
325
27.3
Performing Linework with Thematical Coding
Description
Linework and coding can be combined.
This combination can be useful, because coding, assigning linework flags and
opening/closing lines/areas can all be done with one point observation.
Combining Linework and coding can only be configured if thematical point codes or if
thematical point, line and area codes are available for selection. Thematical coding can
be done with or without codelists.

Configuration
options
Linework and coding can also be combined using SmartCodes. Refer to "26.5 SmartCodes".
The configuration for the types of codes available and the configuration for coding
with/without a codelist both have an influence on the following:
• The required configuration of a survey screen page.
• The behaviour of the fields configured for the survey screen page.
• The behaviour of the software.
The possible configurations and their influence on the coding related fields are shown
in this table:
Configuration selected in the
Coding & Linework Settings screen
Use a list box to view codes
Behaviour of the coding related fields
depending on the configuration selected.
Code
Code type
Linework
Selectable list Display only
Selectable list
Automatically create lines &
areas when coding
Use a list box to view codes
Selectable list Display only
Automatically create lines &
areas when coding
Use a list box to view codes
Editable field
Selectable list Selectable list
Automatically create lines &
areas when coding
Use a list box to view codes
Editable field
Display only
Selectable list
Selectable list
Automatically create lines &
areas when coding
Requirements
• A
•
•
•
survey screen page must be configured with
a field for Code.
a selectable list for Linework.
a selectable list for Code type when using point, line and area codes without a
codelist (Use a list box to view codes is unchecked).
This field is not required if only point codes are used, or when working with a
codelist (Use a list box to view codes is checked).
• Configure in Coding & Linework Settings, Code & attributes page
• Automatically create lines & areas when coding checked or not checked.
• Use a list box to view codes checked or not checked.
• In Coding & Linework Settings, Linework page, define the linework flags.
•
Viva Series, Linework
The rover menu must be used.
326

The Survey application is used here to explain the combination of Linework and
Coding.
Access
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey.
Survey,
Survey page
This example is what a survey screen page configured for Linework and coding looks
like.
The most important keys are explained.
Linework and
Coding step-by-step
Key
Description
Meas
To start recording positions. The key changes to Stop.
Stop
To end recording of positions when enough data is collected. The key
changes to Store.
Store
To store the point information. The key changes to Meas.
Meas
To measure and store distances and angles.
Stop
Available if Measure mode: Continuous and Dist was pressed. Stops
the distance measurements. The key changes back to Meas.
Dist
To measure and display distances. Available unless Measure
mode: Continuous and/or Log auto points checked, after the
tracking or logging is started.
Store
To record data. If Measure mode: Continuous and/or Log auto
points checked, records measured point and continues tracking.
Step
Field
Use a list box to view codes Use a list box to view codes
checked
not checked
1.
Code

2.
Viva Series, Linework
Description for thematical coding
Select a code from the
Type in a code.
selectable list. Depending on
the configuration only point
codes, or also line and area
codes are available for selection.
<None> to store a point
without code or to perform
Linework without coding.
Code type
----- to store a point without
code or to perform Linework
without coding.
Point is displayed. This field is a display only field. It cannot
be changed.
327
Step
Field
Description for thematical coding
Use a list box to view codes Use a list box to view codes
checked
not checked
3.
Linework

4.

Viva Series, Linework
Select an option for the linework flag to be stored with the
point. Refer to "27.2 Performing Linework using the Linework Field" for a description of the options.
Select ----- to store a point without linework flag or to
perform coding without Linework.
-
Press Meas, Stop and Store.
Press Meas.
-
• The point is stored with the selected code.
-
• The point is stored with the selected linework flag.
-
• The choice of linework flags available for Linework is
updated.
328
28
User - Working style wizard
28.1
Overview
Description
The software has many configurable parameters and functions which can be set by
the user to suit their preferred method of working. These preferred settings can be
saved as a Working Style.
Using the Working Style Wizard, all the settings can be defined at once. Alternatively,
all screens of this wizard can also be accessed individually from User\Work settings
and User\System settings.
Default working
style
A default working style exists on the instrument. It uses standard settings for most
applications. The default working style can be edited or deleted. It is always possible
to restore the default working style by formatting the internal memory.
User defined
working styles
New working styles can be created. The working style wizard assists in editing working
styles.
Edit outside the
working style
wizard
Parameters and functions can be edited without going through the working style
wizard.
28.2
Accessing the Working Style Wizard
Access
Select Main Menu: User\Working style wizard.
Working Style Wizard
Key
Description
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen
within the wizard.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Next step
IF you want to
THEN
select a different
set of settings
select New working style, press Next and continue with "28.3
Choosing a Different Working Style".
create a new set of select Choose a different working style, press Next and
settings
continue with "28.4 Creating a New Working Style".
edit an existing set
of settings
Viva Series, User - Working style wizard
select Edit a working style, press Next and continue with "28.5
Editing a Working Style".
329
28.3
Choosing a Different Working Style
Working Style
Wizard,
Choose the working
style to use.
Select an existing working style from the selectable list.
Key
Description
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen
within the wizard.
Delete
To delete the highlighted working style.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
28.4
Creating a New Working Style
Working Style
Wizard,
Enter the working
style details.
Type in the name and a description for the new working style.
Key
Description
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen
within the wizard.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Viva Series, User - Working style wizard
330
28.5
Editing a Working Style
Working Style
Wizard,
Choose the working
style to edit.
Select the working style to be edited from the selectable list.
Key
Description
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen
within the wizard.
Delete
To delete the working style currently shown in the selectable list
immediately.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Create a copy Check box
Viva Series, User - Working style wizard
Description
Creates a copy of the working style before the
editing process starts.
331
29
User - System settings
29.1
Regional settings
Description
The settings on this screen define
• the units for all types of measurement data displayed.
• information related to some types of measurement data.
• the order in which coordinates are displayed.
• the instrument identification number.
• the languages available on the instrument.
Access
Select Main Menu: User\System settings\Regional settings.
Regional Settings,
Distance page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
The units shown for all distance and coordinate
related fields.
Distance
Metre (m)
Metres [m]
International ft (fi) International feet [fi], storage in US feet
Distance
decimal
Intl ft/inch (fi)
International feet [fi], inches and 1/8 inches (0'
00 0/8 fi), storage in US feet
US ft (ft)
US feet [ft]
US ft/inch (ft)
US feet, inches and 1/8 inches (0' 00 0/8 fi) [ft]
US mile (mi)
US miles [mi]
Kilometre (km)
Kilometres [km]
From 0 to 4
The number of decimal places shown for all
distance and coordinate related fields. This
setting is for data display and does not apply to
data export or storage. The available options
depend on the selected Distance.
Selects display format for all chainage information fields.
Chainage
format
Viva Series, User - System settings
+123456.789
Default chainage display form.
+123+456.789
Separator between hundreds and thousands.
332
Field
Option
Description
+1234+56.789
Separators between tens and hundreds.
+123.4+56.789
Separator between tens and hundreds with additional decimal point.
PegN°+10.000
In this format, a peg distance is used to calculate
a peg number and determine what additional
value is shown next to it.
For example, at chainage of 100 m and a peg
distance of 20 m, the peg number equals
5 (100/20 = 5).
Chainage
Chainage
Chainage
Chainage
100 m = 5 + 0.000
110 m = 5 + 10.000
-100 m = -5 - 0.000
-90 m = -4 - 10.000
Area
m², Intl acres (Ai), The units shown for all area-related fields.
US acres (A),
Hectares (ha), fi²
or ft²
Volume
m³, fi³, ft³ or yd³
The units shown for all volume-related fields.
Next step
Page changes to the Slope page.
Regional Settings,
Slope page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
All fields
Description
The input and output format for grades.
h:v
Horizontal by vertical distance.
v:h
Vertical by horizontal distance.
%(v/h x 100)
Percentage of vertical by horizontal distance.
Elevation angle
Elevation angle.
Next step
Page changes to the Angle page.
Viva Series, User - System settings
333
Regional Settings,
Angle page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Angle
400 gon, 360°'",
360° dec or 6400
mil
The units shown for all angular and coordinate
related fields.
The number of decimal places shown for all
angular and coordinate related fields. This setting
is for data display and does not apply to data
export or storage.
Angle decimal
Hz angle
display
From 1 to 4
Available for Angle: 6400 mil.
From 2 to 4
Available for Angle: 400 gon and Angle: 360° dec.
5
Available for MS50/TS50/TM50 and Angle: 400
gon or Angle: 360° dec. Unavailable for remote
configuration.
0.1", 1", 5", 10"
or 60"
Available for Angle: 360°'".
North azimuth,
South
azimuth,North
anti-clockwise
Sets the reference direction as well as the direction from where and how azimuths are
computed.
The azimuth fields in other screens are called
Azimuth.
Bearing
The azimuth fields in screens are called Bearing.
NE, SW, SE and NW indicate the quadrant of the
bearing.
NW
SW
N
NE
SE
GS_049
Angle right
Displays the horizontal angle difference between
the backsight point and the current telescope
position.
The azimuth fields in screens are called Angle
right.
P1
P2
GS_128
Viva Series, User - System settings
P0
334
Field
Option
Description
P0 Instrument station
P1 Backsight point
P2 Point in direction of current telescope position
 Azimuth
 Angle right
GPS direction True or Magnetic Sets the North direction.
ref
Declination
Editable field
Available for GPS direction ref: Magnetic.
The value for the magnetic declination. It is
considered when computing or using any azimuth
values.
V angle
display
Zenith angle
V = 0 in zenith.
Elevation angle
V = 0 horizontal elevation angle. Vertical angles
are positive above the horizon and negative
below it.
Elevation angle % V = 0 horizontal. Vertical angles are expressed in
% and are positive above the horizon and negative below it.
Hold V angle Check box
after a Dist
measurement
If checked, the vertical angle is fixed after a
distance measurement with Dist, whereas the
horizontal angle is continuously updated with the
telescope movement.
If not checked, the vertical angle is continuously
updated with the telescope movement.
The active prism height is applied in the
calculation of remote point elevations.
The prism height must be set to zero to
display and record the elevation of the
targeted remote point.

Next step
Page changes to the Time page.
Regional Settings,
Time page
The time zone is read from WinCE.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Time format
24 hour or 12
hour (am/pm)
How the time is shown in all time-related fields.
Current time
Display only
Shows an example of the selected time format.
Date format
Day.month.year,
Month/day/year
or
Year/month/day
How the date is shown in all date-related fields.
Current date
Display only
Shows an example of the selected date format.
Next step
Page changes to the Coords page.
Viva Series, User - System settings
335
Regional Settings,
Coords page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Grid format
Easting, northing The order in which grid coordinates are shown in
or Northing,
all screens. The order in survey screen pages
easting
depends on the user settings.
Geodetic
format
Latitude, longitude or Longitude, latitude
Switch
Check box
Easting for
CAD files and
Switch
Northing for
CAD files
Description
The order in which geodetic coordinates are
shown in all screens. The order in survey screen
pages depends on the user settings.
When these boxes are checked, then the signs of
the Easting and Northing coordinates of CAD files
are changed so that the CAD file in MapView is
mirrored. The setting applies to all applications,
including Roads.


The signs of the Easting/Northing coordinate only change for the display purposes.
The signs are not changed in the database.
When importing/exporting dxf data, the
signs of the data are switched according
to the setting.
Next step
Page changes to the Language page.
Regional Settings,
Language page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Delete
To delete the highlighted language.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, User - System settings
336
Description of columns
Column
Description
Language
The languages available on the instrument. Three languages can be
stored on the instrument at one time - English and two others.
English cannot be deleted.
The selected language is used for the system software. If a language
is not available for the system software, the English language is used
instead.
Applications are available in the languages that were loaded on the
instrument when the application was installed.
Next step
Page changes to the Others page.
Regional Settings,
Others page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Temperature
Celsius (°C) or
Fahrenheit (°F)
The units shown for all temperature-related
fields.
Pressure
mbar, mmHg,
Inch Hg (inHg),
hPa or psi
The units shown for all pressure-related fields.
PSI = pounds per square inch.
Velocity unit
Km/h (kmh), Mph The units shown for all velocity-related fields.
(mph) or Knots
(kn)
Next step
Page changes to the Device ID page.
Regional Settings,
Device ID page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Device ID
Editable field
This number is used for the generation of the file
names. Using format files, the instrument ID can
be exported together with data from the instrument. By doing so, it can be identified which
instrument was used for certain measurements.
Sets a four-digit number as instrument identification number. By default the last four numbers of
the serial number are used.
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, User - System settings
337
29.2
SmartWorx options
Description
The settings on this screen define the behaviour of the instrument for a general start
up.
Access
Select Main Menu: User\System settings\SmartWorx options.
Welcome to SmartWorx Viva!
If a check box is checked, the corresponding screen is shown during start up.
If all check boxes are unchecked, then, after turning on the instrument, the Main Menu
is accessed immediately.
Welcome to SmartWorx Viva!, StartUp
PIN code page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
If Use PIN: Yes, then, after turning on the instrument, a PIN code must be entered.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Use PIN
Yes
PIN protection is activated and a PIN code must be
entered at startup.
No
PIN protection is not activated and no PIN code is
required at startup.
Editable field
Available if Use PIN: Yes
The new PIN code that will be required at startup.
PIN codes must be numerical only and 4 to 6 digits
in length.
New PIN
Next step
Page changes to the General page.
Welcome to SmartWorx Viva!, General
page
If the check box for Use drop down menus in the main menu is checked, then menus
will appear as drop down menus.
If the check box for Use drop down menus in the main menu is unchecked, then
menus will appear as graphical menus.
Next step
OK to the save the changes and return to the Main Menu.
Viva Series, User - System settings
338
29.3
Screen & audio
Description
The settings on this screen allow the screen appearance to be configured, turn the
notification beeps on and off and define the behaviour of the keys. The settings are
stored on the field controller itself. If the field controller is exchanged, the settings
stored on the new field controller apply.
Access
Select Main Menu: User\System settings\Screen & audio.
Screen & Audio
Settings,
Screen page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Calib
To calibrate the touch screen.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Minimise
instrument
icon tool bar
Check box
If checked, the icon tool bar on the top of the
screen is minimised to one small icon on the top
left. Tap this icon to make the full icon tool bar
visible again.
Use the touch Check box
screen
GPS position
update rate
0.2s, 0.5s, or
1.0s
If checked, the touch screen is turned on.
The screen update rate for the GPS positions.
Next step
Page changes to the Audio page.
Viva Series, User - System settings
339
Screen & Audio
Settings,
Audio page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Message
sounds
Sounds only
A sound alert will be given when an information
message appears.
Sounds & voice
A sound and voice alert will be given when an
information message appears.
Use Hz sector Check box
beeps with
total stations
Hz sector
angle
Editable field
If checked, the horizontal sector beep is turned
on. The instrument beeps when within
5 gon/4°30’ of the defined sector, has a long and
consistent beep within 0.5 gon/27’ and no beep
within 0.005 gon/16’’.
Editable field for the sector angle for which a
beep will sound.
Next step
Page changes to the Text input page.
Screen & Audio
Settings,
Text input page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Data input
method
Function keys,
Mobile phone
style or Pop-up
keyboard
Alphanumeric input can either be through function or numeric keys.
For the CS10 model, alphanumeric input can also
be through an on-screen pop-up keyboard to be
used with the stylus.
Default characters
Selectable list
Sets the set of extra characters available through
Alpha or F1-F6 whenever an entry is made.
The choices available depend on the character
sets loaded on the instrument and the language
configured to be used.
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, User - System settings
340
29.4
Admin settings
Description
By the settings on this screen, access to certain areas of the system can be locked for
other users, for example restricting them from creating a new working style.
To unlock the system, a correct password has to be entered. The number of attempts
of password entries is not limited.
Access
Select Main Menu: User\System settings\Admin settings.
IF the system is
THEN
locked
the password must be typed in.
not locked
restriction settings can be set and a password can be
defined. Refer to "Admin Settings Wizard, What do you
want to do?".
Admin Settings
Wizard,
What do you want to
do?
Key
Description
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen
within the wizard.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Next step
Admin Settings
Wizard,
Enter new admin
password.
IF you want to
THEN
lock settings
select Edit user restrictions, press Next and continue with
"Admin Settings Wizard, Enter new admin password.".
edit lock settings
select Edit user restrictions, press Next and follow the instructions on the screen. Then continue with "Admin Settings
Wizard, Select the settings to be available.".
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Password
Editable field
Type in the password.
Next step
Page saves the password and changes the state of the system to Restricted.
Viva Series, User - System settings
341
Admin Settings
Wizard,
Select the settings to
be available.
Admin Settings
Wizard,
Do you want to apply
user restrictions?
Key
Description
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen
within the wizard.
Edit..
To open the screen corresponding to the highlighted field. Shows the
screen that will be hidden or displayed.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Key
Description
Next
When Yes, apply user restrictions now is checked and this key is
pressed, a password can be typed in.
When No, just finish the wizard is checked, this key returns to the
Main Menu.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Viva Series, User - System settings
342
30
User - Tools & other utilities
30.1
Transfer user objects
Description
This chapter describes the basic procedure for
• transferring objects between the data storage device and the internal memory.
• sending a job from the CS10/CS15 to the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite and vice versa.
Since the TS menu cannot be used when it is connected to the CS, the
commands for sending the jobs from and to the TS must be operated from the
CS only.
Refer to "Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device" for information about
file types and locations of files on the data storage device.
Access
Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Transfer user objects.
Transfer User
Objects
Key
Description
OK
To transfer an object and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
For transfer between TS and CS, the job is transferred through Bluetooth, radio or cable.
For transfer between TS and CS with jobs larger than 1 MB:
• The transfer time is estimated and displayed. Press Yes to start
the transfer or No to cancel.
• A progress bar indicates the progress of the transfer.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Object to
transfer
Selectable list
Listed are the objects that can be transferred.
The available fields on the screen depend on the
option selected.
Data storage device to transfer object from.
From
CF card
Transfer from CS CompactFlash card.
SD card
Transfer from CS Secure Digital Memory card.
USB
Transfer from CS USB.
Internal memory
Transfer from the field controller.
TS Internal
memory
Transfer from TS internal memory.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
343
Field
Option
Description
TS SD card
Transfer from TS Secure Digital Memory card.
To
Selectable list
Data storage device to transfer object to. Data
storage device not selected in From.
Job
Selectable list
To select the job to be transferred between
memory devices or to/from TS.
Admin
settings
Selectable list
To transfer the Admin settings defined.
Antenna
Selectable list
To select the antenna records to be transferred.
Codelist
Selectable list
To select the codelist to be transferred.
Working style Selectable list
Coordinate
system
Selectable list
CSCS field file Selectable list
File
Display only
To select the configuration set to be transferred.
To select the coordinate system to be transferred.
To select the Country Specific Coordinate System
to be transferred.
The dial-up list, the RTK Rover Wizard list, the
server list to be transferred as a binary file.
To select the custom templates stored on the
data storage device in
CONFIG\SKETCH_TEMPLATES.
Format file
Selectable list
Geoid field file Selectable list
To select the format files to be transferred.
To select the Geoid Field File to be transferred.
Choose
working job
Selectable list
To select the job to be transferred.
Rail job
Selectable list
To select the Rail job to be transferred. Available
when the Roads application is loaded.
Road job
Selectable list
To select the Road job to be transferred. Available
when the Roads application is loaded.
Tunnel job
Selectable list
To select the Tunnel job to be transferred. Available when the Roads application is loaded.
XSL
Stylesheet
Selectable list
To select the stylesheets to be transferred.
Import image
Selectable list
To select the geo-referenced map background
image to be transferred.
When selecting a world file image, the
*.jpg and *.jgw files must have the same
file names.
The converted image file has the same
name as the original .jpg file.


Transfer for
use with
System1200
Check box
Transfer all
Check box
objects of the
selected type
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
Available for jobs with To: CF card. When this box
is checked, the job files are copied to the DBX
folder, not to a subfolder.
Available for some transfer object options. To
transfer all objects.
344
Field
Option
Description
Transfer all
Check box
objects into a
single
VivaSystem.zi
p file
Available for Object to transfer: All objects. To
zip all objects automatically during transfer.
Custom templates for the sketch pad are
included.
*.jpg and *.jgw files from the \Data and
from the \Data\Map_Images folder are
excluded. *.archive files from the
\Data\Map_Images folder are transferred.
Transfer
Check box
scans,
Transfer
images,
Transfer
surfaces,
Transfer CAD
files and
Transfer XML
files
Available on CS when connected to TS. Available
for Object to transfer: Job.
Select the objects to transfer between CS and TS.
Reduce the selection to shorten the transfer
time.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities


345
30.2
Uploading System Files
Access
Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Load firmware & Apps.
Load firmware &
Apps
Key
Description
OK
To upload an application, firmware or language and return to the
screen from where this screen was accessed.
Delete
To delete an application or language.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Object to
transfer
Apps
Application uploads are possible from the data
storage device to the field controller. These files
are stored in the \SYSTEM directory of the data
storage device and use the extension *.a*.
Firmware
Firmware uploads are possible from the data
storage device to the field controller. These files
are stored in the \SYSTEM directory of the active
memory device and use the extension *.fw.

The firmware file for SmartWorx Viva
includes the firmware of the CS modem.
However, the firmware of the CS modem
can also be loaded separately by using the
stand-alone loader tool loader.exe. Refer
to the CS10/CS15 User Manual and follow
the CS firmware update instructions.
Language
Language uploads are possible from the data
storage device to the field controller. These files
are stored in the \SYSTEM directory of the data
storage device and use an extension that is individual to each language.
From
Selectable list
Upload from CompactFlash card or Secure Digital
Memory card.
App
Selectable list
List of application files stored on the card.
Firmware
Selectable list
List of firmware files stored on the card.
Language
Selectable list
List of language files stored on the card.
Version
Display only
Version of the application/firmware/language file
chosen.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
346

In order to load the firmware to a GS05/GS06, the GS05/GS06 must be connected to
the CS.

It is not possible to have more than three language files stored on the instrument.
English is always available as the default language and cannot be deleted.

There is only one version of each application. The application will be installed in English
and in any other language that is already loaded onto the instrument. If a new
language is loaded after an application has been installed, the application will need to
be reinstalled to become available in the new language.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
347
30.3
Load licence keys
Description
A licence key can be used to activate applications and protected options and can be
used to define the expiry date of the software maintenance. Refer to "32 User - About
Leica Viva" to find out how to check the expiry date of the software maintenance.
A licence key file can be uploaded to the field controller. To upload a licence key file
the file must be located on the \SYSTEM directory of the data storage device. Licence
key files use the naming convention L_123456.key, where 123456 is the instrument
serial number.

In order to upload the GS05/GS06 Glonass licence, the GS05/GS06 must be connected
to the field controller.
To delete the GS05/GS06 Glonass licence from the GS05/GS06, upload the GS05/GS06
GPS licence.
Access
Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Load licence keys.
OR
Select an application not yet activated.
Load Licence Keys
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu or continue with the
application.
Fn Delete
To delete all licence keys on the field controller.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
The method used to input the licence key to activate the application or the protected options or
the software maintenance.
Load key
Key
Description
Upload key from
file
The licence key file is uploaded from the data
storage device. The licence key file must be
stored in the \SYSTEM directory on the data
storage device.
Enter manually
Allows the licence key to be typed in manually.
Editable field
Available for Load key: Enter manually. The
licence key required to activate an application.
Entry is not case sensitive.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
348
30.4
Ftp data transfer
Description
This functionality is to transfer jobs, codelists and other Viva Series related files on the
data storage device with a standard and simple FTP server.
FTP protocol is used to transfer between Viva Series, which runs SmartWorx Viva and
has an Internet device connected, and the FTP server. The zip/unzip functionality is
included. Licence keys can also be typed in manually in Main Menu:User\Tools & other
utilities\Load licence keys or the first time the functionality is started.
Supported files
The following list shows the supported file extensions that will automatically move to
the corresponding directory after downloading.
Supported file
File extension Directory
Almanac file
Almanac.sys
DATA/GPS
Antenna file from GPS
List.ant
GPS
Application files
*.a*
SYSTEM
ASCII files for import/export to/from job
*.txt
DATA
Coordinate system file from GPS
Trfset.dat
DBX
CSCS field files
*.csc
DATA/GPS/CSCS
DXF files for import/export to/from job
*.dxf
DATA
Firmware files
*.fw
SYSTEM
Format files
*.frt
CONVERT
Geoid field files
*.gem
DATA/GPS/GEOID
GSI files
*.gsi
GSI
GSM/Modem station list from GPS
*.fil
GPS
Language files
*.s*
SYSTEM
Licence file
*.key
SYSTEM
Report sheets created from applications
*.log
DATA
TPS working style files
*.xfg
CONFIG
System files
System.ram
SYSTEM
Custom ASCII file (SmartWorx Viva Export)
*.cst
DATA
Comma separated variables, text file format
(ASCII)
*.csv
DATA

Configure and connect the Internet interface before using this function.
Access
Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Ftp data transfer.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
349
Ftp Connection
Details
Key
Description
Conect
To connect to the FTP server entered.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Host
Editable field
In order to get access to the Internet, a host
name is required. This host name identifies the
instrument in the Internet.
TCP/IP port
Editable field
Port to be used. Any number between 0 and
65535 is valid.
User ID
Editable field
The User ID allows connection to the ftp site. If no
value is typed in, then the instrument logs into
the FTP server anonymously.
Password
Editable field
The password to get access to the ftp site.
Next step
Conect. Once the connection to the FTP server is established, the Ftp Data Transfer,
Field page is displayed.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
350
Ftp Data Transfer,
Field page
The files and folders on the selected memory device of the instrument are displayed
including their size. To get into the folders, highlight the folder and ENTER.
Key
Description
Send
To copy the file or folder to its corresponding directory on the ftp
server. Files or folders bigger than 100 KB are zipped before sending.
Unzip
To unzip a file in the download directory. Available if a zip file is highlighted.
Import
To move a file from the \Download folder to the appropriate directory
folder based on its file extension type.
Available in the \Download folder when a file is highlighted. Unavailable for unrecognised files in the \Download folder. These files must
stay in the \Download folder.
CF card, SD
card, USB or
Intrnl
To change between the data storage devices and the internal
memory.
Fn Quit
To return to Main Menu and disconnect automatically from the FTP
server.
Next step
Page changes to the Office page.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
351
Ftp Data Transfer,
Office page
The files located on the FTP server are displayed.
Whenever switching to this page, if the connection to the server was disconnected,
then a refresh action is done or it reconnects to the server.
The most important keys are explained.
Key
Description
Transf
To download the highlighted file or folder list on the FTP server to the
local download folder.
If recognised by the system, downloaded files are moved automatically to the corresponding directories. If not, they are stored in the
download folder. Zipped files are unzipped before storing in the
download folder.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Refrsh
To refresh the FTP directory.
Fn Quit
To return to Main Menu and disconnect automatically from the FTP
server.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
352
30.5
Format memory devices
Description
Allows the data storage device and the internal memory to be formatted. All data will
be erased.

Access
If the internal memory is formatted, all system data such as almanac, user-defined
configuration sets, user-defined antennas, codelists, geoid field files and CSCS field
files will be lost.
Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Format memory devices.
Format Memory
Device
Key
Description
OK
To format a memory device and return to the screen from where this
screen was accessed.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Memory
device
Selectable list
The type of memory to be formatted.
CF card
Formatting the CF card will delete all data currently
stored on the CF card.
Internal memory
Formatting the Internal Memory will delete the
following objects currently stored on the internal
memory - Jobs, Admin Settings, Codelists, Coordinate Systems, Format Files, Geoid & CSCS field
files, RTK Profiles, Sketch Templates & User
Entered Antenna.
SD card
Formatting the SD card will delete all data currently
stored on the SD card.
USB stick
Formatting the USB stick will delete all data currently
stored on the USB stick.
Apps
Formatting the Apps will delete all currently loaded
apps.
System
Formatting the System RAM will delete the following
objects - Working Styles, Stations to Dial lists &
Server lists.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
353
30.6
View contents of ASCII files
Description
Allows ASCII files selected for From file in Import ASCII Data to be viewed in WordPad.
Access
Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\View contents of ASCII files. WordPad
opens.
30.7
Leica Exchange
30.7.1
Overview
Availability
Leica Exchange is available on your TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite/MS50/TS50/TM50 instrument
or CS10/CS15 field controller.
Description
Leica Exchange is an online service that allows the data exchange between two users
of the service. For example:
• The user in the field sends the daily measured data to the user in the office.
• The user in the field sends a codelist to a second user in the field.
Requirements
• Valid Leica Exchange subscription
• SmartWorx 4.0 or higher
• Leica Exchange licence key loaded on a field controller/instrument
AND / OR
• Leica Exchange entitlement ID loaded on a computer with Leica Exchange Office
Creating User name
and Password stepby-step
Step Description
1.
Order a Leica Exchange subscription. You will receive a subscription form.
2.
Take the subscription ID in the subscription form and log in to your myWorld
account (https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com).
3.
Navigate to myTrustedServices.
4.
On the My Trusted Services tab, select Add Service and type in the subscription ID.
5.
The Leica Exchange Service is shown in the My Trusted Services tab. Once
the Leica Exchange Service is registered, users can be assigned to the service
on the My Users tab.
6.
Click the Add button to define a new user and to assign services to the user.
For each user:
• Enter contact information
• Define a unique user name
• Assign a password
The user name and password are needed each time you access the Leica
Exchange Service. The Leica Exchange Service can be accessed from SmartWorx in the field or using Leica Exchange Office PC software.

Access
After registering the subscription ID in your myWorld account, the subscription
usage statistic is fully accessible. The total quota is shown and the consumed
and remaining GB are displayed in total GB and GB/month.
Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Leica Exchange.
If a user is currently logged in then the Leica Exchange Main Menu screen is
accessed.If no user is currently logged in then the Leica Exchange Login screen is
accessed.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
354
Leica Exchange
Login
User name and password must be typed in each time the Leica Exchange service is
accessed.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
User name
Editable field
The user ID created in MyWorld allows connection
to the exchange server.
Password
Editable field
The password created in MyWorld to get access to
the exchange server.
Next step
The first time you log into Leica Exchange you need to accept the license agreement.
If a connection to the Leica Exchange server is active and if the user name and password are recognised, then OK accesses Leica Exchange Main Menu.
Leica Exchange Main
Menu
Key
Description
OK
To access the selected functionality.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of options
Icon
Description
Send data..
To select objects to be uploaded to the server from the CS or TS
and to start the upload. Access Leica Exchange Data Transfer.
Get data..
To select objects to be downloaded from the server to the CS or
TS and to start the download. Access Select Data to Download.
Data sent to a user are stored in the users “inbox” for two
weeks.
Transfer status..
To check the transfer status for the last 20 transfers since login.
Config..
To access the Configuration screen for Leica Exchange.
Connection
status..
To see details about the connection. The Internet Connection
Status opens. A checked box for Connected to Leica Exchange
indicates an established connection to the Leica Exchange
Server.
Exit & stay logged To remain logged in but return to the Main Menu. Any transfer
in
in progress continues in the background. You can see from
anywhere inside SmartWorx when new files are received.
Exit & log out
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
To unlog and to return to the Main Menu. Any transfer in
progress is stopped.
355
30.7.2
Configuring Leica Exchange
Access
Select Config.. in Leica Exchange Main Menu.
OR
Press Fn Config.. in Select Data to Send, Select People to Send Data or Leica
Exchange Data Transfer.
Configuration,
General page
This screen consists of two pages. The explanations for the softkeys given here are
valid for all pages.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Captured
images
Check box
When this box is checked, the jobs are sent with
the Images folder.
CAD files
Check box
attached to job
When this box is checked, the jobs are sent with
the Map files folder.
Store downSelectable list
loaded jobs &
data to
The device on which the jobs and data are stored.

Jobs and data are stored in the internal
memory when the chosen memory device
is not available.
Next step
Page changes to the Sorts & filters page.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
356
Configuration,
Sorts & filters page
Description of fields
Field
Option
The method points are sorted by.
Sort objects
by
Display
following
objects for
sending:
Description
Time
Sorts objects on the instrument by the time they
were created.
Sorts objects in the inbox by the time when they
were uploaded to the server.
Size
Sorts the objects by size in Kb.
File name
Sorts the objects alphabetically by the object
name.
Type
Sorts the objects in alphabetical order of the
object types. After applying the alphabetical
order, the time is considered for the order of the
files.
Check boxes
When a box is checked, the filter is active for that
object type.
The filter is valid for objects sent from the instrument. Objects on the server are always visible.
Next step
OK closes the screen.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
357
30.7.3
Sending Data
Access
Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Leica Exchange\Send data...
Select Data to Send
Key
Description
Next
To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. The
Internet and server connection is checked.
Select
To set Yes or No in the Selected column for the highlighted object.
More
To change between type, size, modification date and source of the
listed objects.
Fn Config..
To configure Leica Exchange.
Fn All or Fn
None
To select or deselect all object for sending data.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Name
The user-defined name of the objects.
Type
Supported are job, CAD files (dxf and shape files), data files, coordinate systems and codelists.
Size
The size of the selected object.
Modified date The date when the object was last modified.
Source
The memory device where the object is stored.
Selected
For Yes: The selected object is used for sending data.
For No: The selected object is not used for sending data.
Next step
Make a selection and press Next.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
358
Select People to
Send Data
Key
Description
Next
To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen.
Select
To set Yes or No in the Selected column for the highlighted name.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Config..
To configure Leica Exchange.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Name
The name of the person data can be send to. The list is downloaded
from MyWorld. Refer to "Creating User name and Password step-bystep" for information on how to define user names.
Selected
For Yes: Data is sent to the person. Multiple selection is possible.
For No: Data is not sent to the person.
Next step
Make a selection and press Next. The transfer starts.
While the transfer is in progress,
• the status can be checked by pressing Status. Refer to "30.7.5 Data Transfer
Status".
• other tasks can be done. Press Finish to exit the wizard.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
359
30.7.4
Getting Data
Access
Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Leica Exchange\Get data...
Select Data to Send
The information shown is derived from the list of information retrieved from the
server.
Key
Next
Select
More
Fn Config..
Fn All or Fn
None
Fn Quit
Description
To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. The
Internet and server connection is checked.
To set Yes or No in the Selected column for the highlighted object.
To change between type, size, modification date and source of the
listed objects.
To configure Leica Exchange.
To select or deselect all object for sending data.
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Name
Type
Description
The user-defined name of the objects.
Supported are job, CAD files (dxf and shape files), data files, coordinate systems and codelists.
Jobs downloaded from the server are stored in a subfolder of the DBX
folder of the data storage device selected in Store downloaded jobs
& data to in Configuration, General page.
All files with unknown format, for example CAD or data files, are
stored in the \DATA folder of the selected data storage device.
Coordinate systems and codelists are stored to the internal memory
of the CS or TS. From the internal memory, the codelist/coordinate
system can be directly selected when creating/editing a job.
Size
The size of the selected object.
Modified date The date when the object was last modified.
Selected
For Yes: The selected object is used for sending data.
For No: The selected object is not used for sending data.
Next step
Make a selection and press Next. The transfer starts.
While the transfer is in progress,
• the status can be checked by pressing Status. Refer to "30.7.5 Data Transfer
Status".
• other tasks can be done. Press Finish to exit the wizard.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
360
30.7.5
Data Transfer Status
Access
Select Transfer status.. in Leica Exchange Main Menu.
OR
Press Status in the wizard window while data is being send/received.
Data Transfer Status
The last 20 transfers since login are displayed.
Key
Description
OK
To return to Leica Exchange Main Menu.
Pause
To pause all transers.
Resume
To restart all transfers.
Accept
Available when a row with status Conflict is highlighted. To choose
between replacing or discarding the downloaded file.
Remov
Available for finished or cancelled transfers. To remove the transfer
from the list.
Cancel
To cancel the highlighted transfer.
More
To change between user, size, date and expected time by when the
transfer will be finished.
Fn Config..
To configure Leica Exchange.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Type
The type of file transferred.
Name
The name of the file transferred.
Who
The user the file is transferred to or from.
Status
... down/up - The downloading/uploading transfer is running is in
progress.
Sent - The upload has been successfully finished.
Downloaded - The download has been successfully finished.
Pending - A transfer is in progress and the current transfer has not
been started.
Paused - The transfer has been paused.
Canceled - The transfer has been cancelled.
Conflict - The transfer is finished, but there is another file with the
same name in the designated folder. Press Accept.
Interrup. - The transfer has been interrupted due to internet connection loss or other events that result in interrupting the transfer.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
361
30.7.6
In the office
In the Office
Step
Description
1.
After activating the Entitlement ID, login to Leica Exchange Office with your
user name and password.
2.
Click on one of the icons to define the view in the right half of the window:
Inbox, Status, History, Contacts. On the left side of the window, the data
on the computer are displayed. Navigate to the folder you want to place
received data or to where the data to be sent are stored.
3.
To get files from the inbox, click Inbox, select the files and drag them into
the left half of the window.
To send data, click Contacts and drag & drop the files from the left to the
right. To send files to multiple users, select the users, drag & drop the files
from the left to the right.
4.
To see the status of current transfers, click Status.
To see all transfers done from both field and office and also the time when
the objects were sent and received, click History.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities
362
31
User - Check & Adjust
31.1
Overview
Description
Leica Geosystems instruments are manufactured, assembled and adjusted to the best
possible quality. Quick temperature changes, shock or stress can cause deviations and
decrease the instrument accuracy. It is therefore recommended to check and adjust
the instrument from time to time. This check and adjust can be done in the field by
running through specific measurement procedures. The procedures are guided and
must be followed carefully and precisely as described in the following chapters. Some
other instrument errors and mechanical parts can be adjusted mechanically.
Electronic adjustment
The following instrument errors can be checked and adjusted electronically:
l, t
i
c
a
ATR
Telescope camera
Compensator longitudinal and transversal index errors
Vertical index error, related to the standing axis
Horizontal collimation error, also called line of sight error
Tilting axis error
ATR zero point error for Hz and V - option
Telescope camera zero point error, relation between principal
point of telescope camera and crosshair in telescope in Hz and V
- option
If the compensator and the horizontal corrections are activated in the instrument
configuration, every angle measured in the daily work is corrected automatically .
Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Level bubble & compensator to check
whether the tilt correction and the horizontal correction are turned on.
The results are displayed as errors but used with the opposite sign as corrections
when applied to measurements.
Mechanical adjustment
The following instrument parts can be adjusted mechanically:
• Circular level on instrument and tribrach
• Optical plummet - option on tribrach
• Allen screws on tripod
Precise measurements
To get precise measurements in the daily work, it is important:
• To check and adjust the instrument from time to time.
• To take high precision measurements during the check and adjust procedures.
• To measure targets in two faces. Some of the instrument errors are eliminated by
averaging the angles from both faces.


During the manufacturing process, the instrument errors are carefully determined and
set to zero. As mentioned above, these errors can change and it is highly recommended to redetermine them in the following situations:
• Before the first use
• Before every high precision survey
• After rough or long transportation
• After long working periods
• After long storage periods
• If the temperature difference between current environment and the temperature
at the last calibration is more than 20°C
Before determining the instrument errors, the instrument has to be
levelled using the electronic level.
The tribrach, the tripod and the underground should be stable and secure
from vibrations or other disturbances.
Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust
363



The instrument should be protected from direct sunlight to avoid thermal
warming.
It is also recommended to avoid strong heat shimmer and air turbulence.
The best conditions are early in the morning or with overcast sky.
Before starting to work, the instrument has to become acclimatised to the ambient
temperature. Approximately two minutes per °C of temperature difference from
storage to working environment, but at least 15 min, should be taken into account.
Even after adjustment of the ATR, the crosshairs may not be positioned exactly on the
centre of the prism after an ATR measurement has been completed. This outcome is
a normal effect. To speed up the ATR measurement, the telescope is normally not
positioned exactly on the centre of the prism. These small deviations/ATR offsets, are
calculated individually for each measurement and corrected electronically. This means
that the horizontal and vertical angles are corrected twice: first by the determined ATR
errors for Hz and V, and then by the individual small deviations of the current aiming.
Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust
364
31.2
Details on Instrument Errors
Definition
Instrument errors occur, if the standing axis, the tilting axis and the line of sight are
not precisely perpendicular to each other.
Horizontal collimation error (c)
a
c
d
b
a
a) Tilting axis
b) Line perpendicular to tilting axis
c) Horizontal collimation error (c), also
called line of sight error
d) Line of sight
TS_073
The Horizontal collimation error (c) is also called line of sight error. It is caused by the
deviation between the optical line of sight, which means the direction in which the
crosshairs points and the line perpendicular to the tilting axis. This error affects all
horizontal readings and increases with steep sightings.
Tilting axis error (a)
b
a
d
c
TS_074
a) Axis perpendicular to the vertical axis
b) Mechanical vertical axis of the instrument, also called standing axis
c) Tilting axis error
d) Tilting axis
The deviation between the mechanical tilting axis and the line perpendicular to the
vertical axis causes the tilting axis error (a).
This error affects horizontal angles. The effect is zero in the horizon and increases
with steep sights. To determine this error, it is necessary to point to a target located
significantly below or above the horizontal plane. To avoid influences from the horizontal collimation error (c), this has to be determined prior to the tilting axis error.
Vertical index error
(i)
a
b
d
c
TS_068
a) Mechanical vertical axis of the instrument, also called standing axis
b) Axis perpendicular to the vertical axis
c) V = 90° reading in a specific face
d) Vertical index error
A vertical index error (i) exists, if the 0° mark of the vertical circle reading does not
coincide with the mechanical vertical axis of the instrument, also called standing axis.
The V index error (i) is a constant error that affects all vertical angle readings.
Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust
365
Compensator index
errors (l, t)
a b
b
c
a
d
TS_067
a) Mechanical vertical axis of the instrument, also called standing axis
b) Plumb line
c) Longitudinal component (l) of the
compensator index error
d) Transversal component (t) of the
compensator index error
The compensator index errors (l, t) occur, if the vertical axis of the instrument and the
plumb line are parallel but the zero points of the compensator and the circular level
do not coincide. The calibration procedure electronically adjusts the zero point of the
compensator.
A longitudinal component in direction of the telescope and a transversal component
perpendicular to the telescope define the plane of the dual axis compensator of the
TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite/MS50/TS50/TM50.
The longitudinal compensator index error (l) has a similar effect as the vertical index
error and affects all vertical angle readings.
The transversal compensator index error (t) is similar to the tilting axis error. The
effect of this error to the horizontal angle readings is 0 at the horizon and increases
with steep sightings.
Automatic aiming
collimation errors
d
a
c
b
TS_075
a)
b)
c)
d)
Centre of prism
Crosshairs
V component of ATR collimation error
Hz component of ATR collimation error
The ATR collimation error is the angular divergence between the line of sight, which
means the direction in which the crosshairs point, and the ATR CCD camera axis, which
detects the centre of the prism. The horizontal and vertical components of the ATR
calibration errors correct the horizontal and vertical angles to measure exactly to the
centre of the prism.
Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust
366
Telescope camera
collimation error
c
a
d
b
a) Physical crosshairs in the telescope
b) Digital crosshairs in the telescope camera view
c) Hz component of telescope camera collimation
error
d) V component of telescope camera collimation error
005117_001
The telescope camera collimation error is the angular divergence between the physical
crosshairs in the telescope and digital crosshairs in the telescope camera view. The
determined horizontal and vertical offset values are applied as constant offset to the
recent calibration values.
A full telescope camera calibration takes other camera parameters into account, for
example focus position, rotation, scale and lens distortion. The full calibration is
performed after production and in service.

Summary of errors
to be adjusted electronically
Even after adjustment of the ATR, the crosshairs might not be positioned exactly on
the centre of the prism after an ATR search. This is a normal effect. To speed up the
ATR search, the telescope is not positioned exactly on the centre of the prism. The
small rest deviations, the ATR offsets, are measured individually for each measurement and corrected electronically. This means that the horizontal and vertical angles
are corrected twice: first by the determined ATR errors for horizontal and vertical and
then by the individual small deviations of the current pointing, the ATR offsets.
Instrument error
Effects
Hz
Effects V Elimination
Automatiwith two face cally
measurement corrected
with proper
adjustment
c - Line of sight error

-


a - Tilting axis error

-


l - Compensator index error -



t - Compensator index error 
-


i - Vertical index error
-



ATR Collimation error


-

Co-axial camera collimation 
error



Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust
367
31.3
Accessing the Check & Adjust Wizard
Access
Select Main Menu: User\Check & Adjust.
Check & Adjust
Wizard,
What do you want to
do?
Key
Description
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen
within the wizard.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Next step
IF you want to
THEN
determine the instrument errors
select one of the three available check and adjust procedures
and refer to the relevant subchapters.
view the current values select View the current values. Refer to "31.7 Viewing the
Current Values".
configure Check &
Adjust
select Configure Check & Adjust. Refer to "31.8 Configuring
Check & Adjust".
adjust the circular level Refer to "31.9 Adjusting the Circular Level of the Instrument
and Tribrach".
inspect the laser
plummet
Refer to "31.11 Inspecting the Laser Plummet of the Instrument".
adjust the tripod
Refer to "31.12 Servicing the Tripod".
Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust
368
31.4
Combined Adjustment (l, t, i, c, ATR and tele camera)
Access
In Check & Adjust Wizard, What do you want to do? select Check & adjust the
compensator, index error, line of sight error & automatic target aiming or Check &
adjust the compensator, index error, line of sight error, automatic target aiming &
telescope camera for MS50/TS50/TM50 and press Next.
Description
The combined adjustment procedure determines the following instrument errors in
one process:
l, t
i
c
ATR Hz
ATR V
Telescope camera Hz
Telescope camera V

Check & Adjust
Wizard,
Step 1
Compensator longitudinal and transversal index errors
Vertical index error, related to the standing axis
Horizontal collimation error, also called line of sight error
ATR zero point error for horizontal angle - option
ATR zero point error for vertical angle - option
Telescope camera zero point error for horizontal angle option
Telescope camera zero point error for vertical angle - option
Before determining the instrument errors, the instrument has to be:
• levelled up using the electronic level
• protected from direct sunlight
• acclimatised to the ambient temperature, approximately 2 minutes per °C difference compared to the storage place.
Key
Description
Next
To measure the target.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Calibrate the
automatic
target aiming
Check box
When this box is checked, the determination of
the ATR horizontal and vertical adjustment values
is included.

Use a clean Leica standard prism as target.
Do not use a 360° prism.
When this box is not checked, the determination
of the ATR horizontal and vertical adjustment
value is excluded.
Calibrate the
telescope
camera
Check box
When this box is checked, the determination of
the telescope camera horizontal and vertical zero
point adjustment values is included.



Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust
In Camera Settings, TS overview page,
Use TS overview camera must be
checked.
A prism is not required to run the procedure.
Use a clean Leica standard prism as target.
Do not use a 360° prism.
369
Aim the telescope accurately at a target at a
distance of about 100 m. The target must be
positioned within ± 9°/± 10 gon of the horizontal plane
The procedure can be started in face I
or II.
The fine pointing must be performed
manually in both faces.
Meas to measure and to continue to the next
screen.
0m
0
~1


± 9°
TS_069
For MS50/TS50/TM50:
If Calibrate the telescope camera has been
checked, aim at the same target accurately
with the telescope camera using the view
finder and the digital crosshair on the display.
Meas to measure and to continue to the next
screen.
180°
Motorised instruments change automatically to
the other face.
180°
TS_071
Non-motorised instruments guide to the other face using the Telescope Positioning
screen.
Meas to measure the same target in the other face and to calculate the instrument
errors.
If one or more errors are bigger than the predefined limits, the procedure must
be repeated. All measurements of the current run are rejected and are not
averaged with the results from previous runs.

Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust
370
Check & Adjust
Wizard,
Step 2
Key
Description
Next
To measure the target.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Description of fields
Check & Adjust
Wizard, It is recommended to repeat the
last calibration
routine at least three
times.
Field
Option
Description
No. of measurements
Display only
Shows the number of runs. One run consists of a
measurement in face I and II.
All other fields Display only
The standard deviations of the determined
adjustment errors are displayed. The standard
deviations can be calculated from the second run
onwards.
Measure at least two more runs.
Next step
IF
THEN
more runs must be added select Add another calibration loop and press Next.
no more runs must be
added
Check & Adjust
Wizard,
Results
select Finish the calibration & store the results and press
Next to accept the measurements and to access the
results screen.
Key
Description
Finish
To accept and store the new determined instrument errors, where
Yes is set in the Use column. If the report sheet recording has been
enabled, then the results are written or appended to an existing
report sheet.
Redo
To reject all results and to repeat the complete check and adjust
procedure.
Use
To set Yes or No in the Use column for the highlighted set.
More
To view additional information about the current used old instrument
errors.
Description of columns and fields
Column
Option
Description
New
Display only
The new determined and averaged instrument
errors.
Use
Yes
Stores the new adjustment error.
No
Keeps the currently used error active on the
instrument and rejects the new one.
Display only
The old adjustment errors, which are currently
valid on the instrument.
Old
Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust
371
31.5
Tilting Axis Adjustment (a)
Access
In Check & Adjust Wizard, What do you want to do? select Check & adjust the tilting
axis and press Next.
Description
This adjustment procedure determines the following instrument error:
a

Check & Adjust
Wizard,
Step 1
Tilting axis error
Before determining the tilting axis error, the instrument has to be:
• levelled up using the electronic level
• protected from direct sunlight
• acclimatised to the ambient temperature, approximately 2 minutes per °C difference compared to the storage place.
• The horizontal collimation error must be determined before.
Key
Description
Next
To measure the target.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Aim the telescope accurately at a target at a
distance of about 100 m. For distances less
than 100 m, make sure to point to the target
precisely. The target must be positioned within
at least 27°/30 gon above or beneath the horizontal plane.
The procedure can be started in face I
or II.
The fine pointing must be performed
manually in both faces.


+ 27°
V=
90
°
- 27°
TS_070
Meas to measure and to continue to the next
screen.
Motorised instruments change automatically to
the other face.
180°
180°
TS_071
Non-motorised instruments guide to the other face using the Telescope Positioning
screen.
Meas to measure the same target in the other face and to calculate the instrument
errors.
Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust
372

Check & Adjust
Wizard,
Step 2
If one or more errors are bigger than the predefined limits, the procedure must
be repeated. All measurements of the current run are rejected and are not
averaged with the results from previous runs.
Key
Description
Next
To measure the target.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Description of fields
Check & Adjust
Wizard, It is recommended to repeat the
last calibration
routine at least three
times.
Field
Option
Description
No. of measurements
Display only
The number of runs. One run consists of a measurement in face I and II.
σ a T-axis
Display only
The standard deviation of the determined tilting
axis error. The standard deviation can be calculated from the second run onwards.
Measure at least two more runs.
Next step
IF
THEN
more runs must be added select Add another calibration loop and press Next.
no more runs must be
added
Check & Adjust
Wizard,
Results
select Finish the calibration & store the results and press
Next to accept the measurements and to access the
results screen.
Key
Description
Finish
To accept and record the new determined tilting axis error. If the
report recording has been enabled, then the results are written to or
appended to an existing report sheet.
Redo
To reject the result and to repeat the complete check and adjust
procedure.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Description of columns and fields
Column
Option
Description
New
Display only
The new determined and averaged tilting axis
error.
Old
Display only
The old instrument error, which is currently valid
on the instrument.
Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust
373
31.6
Compensator Adjustment (l, t)
Access
In Check & Adjust Wizard, What do you want to do? select Check & adjust the
compensator and press Next.
Description
The compensator adjustment procedure determines the following instrument errors:
l
t

Check & Adjust
Wizard,
1st tilt measurement
in any face.
Compensator longitudinal index error
Compensator transversal index error
Before determining the compensator index errors, the instrument has to be:
• levelled up using the electronic level
• protected from direct sunlight
• acclimatised to the ambient temperature, approximately 2 minutes per °C difference compared to the storage place.
Key
Description
Next
To measure the target.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Meas to measure the first face. No target has
to be aimed at.
Motorised instruments change to the other
face and release a measurement automatically.
180°
TS_072
Non-motorised instruments guide to the other face using the Telescope Positioning
screen.
Meas to release the measurement in the other face.
If one or more errors are bigger than the predefined limits, the procedure must
be repeated. All measurements of the current run are rejected and are not
averaged with the results from previous runs.

Check & Adjust
Wizard,
Step 2
Key
Description
Next
To measure the target.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
No. of measurements
Display only
The number of runs. One run consists of a measurement in face I and II.
σ l Comp and
σ t Comp
Display only
The standard deviations of the determined
adjustment errors. The standard deviations can
be calculated from the second run onwards.
Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust
374
Check & Adjust
Wizard, It is recommended to repeat the
last calibration
routine at least three
times.
Measure at least two more runs.
Next step
IF
THEN
more runs must be added select Add another calibration loop and press Next.
no more runs must be
added
Check & Adjust
Wizard,
Results
select Finish the calibration & store the results and press
Next to accept the measurements and to access the
results screen.
Key
Description
Finish
To accept and record the new determined instrument errors. If the
report sheet recording has been enabled, then the results are written
and appended to an existing report sheet.
Redo
To reject all results and to repeat the complete check and adjust
procedure.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Description of columns and fields
Column
Option
Description
New
Display only
The new determined and averaged instrument
errors.
Old
Display only
The old instrument errors, which are currently
valid on the instrument.
Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust
375
31.7
Viewing the Current Values
Access
In Check & Adjust Wizard, What do you want to do? select View the current values
and press Next.
Atmospheric Corrections
Key
Description
OK
To return to Check & Adjust Wizard, What do you want to do?.
More
To display information about the date of the determination, the
standard deviation of the errors and the temperature during the
determination.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.

The temperature of the environment around the instrument can differ from the
temperature shown on the screen as it is the internal temperature of the instrument.
31.8
Configuring Check & Adjust
Access
In Check & Adjust Wizard, What do you want to do? select Configure Check & Adjust
and press Next.
Check & Adjust
Wizard
Key
Description
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen
within the wizard.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Description of options
Option
Description
2 weeks, 1 month,
3 months, 6
months or 12
months
If one or more adjustment values were determined longer ago
than the time specified with this parameter, then a reminder
message is displayed each time the instrument is turned on. This
helps to redetermine the instrument errors on a regular basis.
Never
A reminder message to readjust the instrument is never
displayed. This setting is not recommended.
Next step
Next to change to the Report sheet screen.
Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust
376
31.9
Adjusting the Circular Level of the Instrument and Tribrach
Adjusting the
circular level stepby-step
1
4
4
2
TS_077
Step
Description
1.
Place and secure the instrument into the tribrach and onto a tripod.
2.
Using the tribrach footscrews, level the instrument with the electronic level.
3.
Select Instrument\TPS settings\Level bubble & compensator to access the
Level Bubble & Compensator screen.
4.
Check the position of the circular level on the instrument and tribrach.
5.
a) If both circular levels are centred, no adjustments are necessary
b) If one or both circular levels are not centred, adjust as follows:
Instrument: If it extends beyond the circle, use the supplied allen key to
centre it with the adjustment screws. Turn the instrument by 200 gon
(180°). Repeat the adjustment procedure if the circular level does not
stay centred.

31.10
Adjusting the
circular level stepby-step
Tribrach: If it extends beyond the circle, use the supplied allen key to
centre it with the adjustment screws.
After the adjustments, all adjusting screws must have the same tightening
tension and no adjusting screw should be loose.
Adjusting the Circular Level of the Prism Pole
Step
Description
1.
Suspend a plumb line.
2.
Use a pole bipod, to align the prism pole parallel to the
plumb line.
3.
4.

4b
1
2
Check the position of the circular level on the prism
pole.
a) If the circular level is centred, no adjustment is
necessary.
4a
TS_080
b) If the circular level is not centred, use an allen key
to centre it with the adjustment screws.
After the adjustments, all adjusting screws must have the same tightening
tension and no adjusting screw should be loose.
Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust
377
31.11

Inspecting the Laser Plummet of the Instrument
The laser plummet is located in the vertical axis of the instrument. Under normal conditions of use, the laser plummet does not need adjusting. If an adjustment is necessary
due to external influences, return the instrument to any Leica Geosystems authorised
service workshop.
Inspecting the laser
plummet step-bystep
1
5
360°
Ø 2.5 mm / 1.5 m
4
6
 3 mm / 1.5 m
TS_078
The following table explains the most common settings.
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.
31.12
Description
Place and secure the instrument into the tribrach and onto a tripod.
Using the tribrach footscrews, level the instrument with the electronic level.
Select Instrument\TPS settings\Level bubble & compensator to access the
Level Bubble & Compensator screen.
The laser plummet is switched on when the Level Bubble & Compensator
screen is entered. Adjust the laser plummet intensity. Inspection of the laser
plummet should be carried out on a bright, smooth and horizontal surface,
like a sheet of paper.
Mark the centre of the red dot on the ground.
Turn the instrument through 360° slowly, carefully observing the movement
of the red laser dot.
The maximum diameter of the circular movement described by the centre of
the laser point must not exceed 3 mm at a distance of 1.5 m.
If the centre of the laser dot describes a perceptible circular movement, or
moves more than 3 mm away from the point which was first marked, an
adjustment may be required. Inform your nearest Leica Geosystems authorised service workshop. Depending on brightness and surface, the diameter
of the laser dot can vary. At 1.5 m, it is about 2.5 mm.
Servicing the Tripod
Servicing the tripod
step-by-step
1
2
3
TS_076
The following table explains the most common settings.
Step

1.
2.
3.
Description
The connections between metal and timber components must always be
firm and tight.
Tighten the leg cap screws moderately, with the supplied allen key.
Tighten the articulated joints on the tripod head enough to keep the tripod
legs open when lifting the tripod off the ground.
Tighten the allen screws of the tripod legs.
Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust
378
32
User - About Leica Viva
Access
Select Main Menu: User\About Leica Viva.
About Leica Viva,
CS controller page
The information relates to the field controller. This screen shows, depending on the
controller type:
• The serial number,
• The equipment number,
• The firmware version of the boot software,
• The firmware version for the Electric Front Interface,
• If a total station radio installed,
• If Wireless LAN is installed,
• If the internal GSM/CS modem is installed.
Next step
Page changes to the Total station page.
About Leica Viva,
Total station
page
The information relates to the TPS instrument. This screen shows:
• The type of instrument,
• Additional instrument hardware options such as EDM or PowerSearch.
Next step
Page changes to the GS sensor page.
About Leica Viva,
GS sensor page
The information relates to the GPS instrument. This screen shows:
• The currently active system language,
• The serial number of the measurement engine,
• The availability of additional instrument hardware options,
• If the protected OWI commands and the ability to track GPS L5, GLONASS, Galileo
and BeiDou have been activated by a licence key.
• The expiry date of the SmartLink option.
Next step
Page changes to the SmartWorx Viva page.
About Leica Viva,
SmartWorx Viva
page
The information relates to the SmartWorx Viva instrument. This screen shows the
applications installed on the instrument, and the following information.
Description of fields
Field
Description
WinCE version
Firmware version for WinCE.
SmartWorx Viva
Firmware version for the onboard software.
API version
Firmware version for the application interface.
CCP end
Expiry date of the software maintenance.
When the the TPS or CS is switched on, a reminder message
appears within one month of the due date of the software maintenance or when the software maintenance has expired.
The message appears only once!
is displayed on the Main Menu until the licence key
has been updated.
Refer to "30.3 Load licence keys" for updating licence keys.

Viva Series, User - About Leica Viva
379
Field
Description
My Security end
If mySecurity is activated in myWorld: The date when the instrument must be connected to mySecurity in order to renew the
security functionality.
If mySecurity is not activated in myWorld: Not activated is
displayed.
Load licence keys The information listed here indicates for which applications the
licence keys are loaded.
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, User - About Leica Viva
380
33
mySecurity
Description
mySecurity is a cloud-based theft protection. A locking mechanism ensures that the
instrument is disabled and can no longer be used. A Leica Geosystems service centre
will inform local authorities if such an instrument turns up.
mySecurity is activated in myWorld.
Adding/removing
instruments
to/from mySecurity
Step
Description
1.
Go to myWorld@Leica Geosystems (https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com).

Activating the theft
protection
You must add your instruments to myProducts first, before the instruments can be added to mySecurity.
2.
Select myTrustedServices/mySecurity.
Available information for listed instruments:
• Activation date of the mySecurity service
• Renewal date of the mySecurity service
• Stolen status, in case of the instrument has been flagged as stolen
3.
Click Add to add an instrument to mySecurity.
Select the instrument from the selectable list.
Click OK.
4.
Select an instrument.
Click Remove to delete the instrument from mySecurity.
For an active theft protection, the instrument must be connected to myWorld within
a defined time interval.
If the instrument is not connected within the defined interval, then the instrument is
blocked and cannot be used. In this case, the instrument must be connected to
myWorld again and the theft protection must be re-activated.
Step
Description
1.
Click the checkbox to select an instrument.
2.
Click Details.
3.
For New mySecurity Renewal set the start date of the theft protection.
Click In 3 months, In 6 months or In 12 months to define the connection
interval.
4.
Click Set.
5.
Download and install the mySecurity Online Update program.
6.
The program scans for the instrument connection port automatically.
In case automatic scanning fails, click Scan for a search of the port.
Select the connection settings.
Click Defaults for the pre-defined connection settings.
7.
Click Connect.
After the activation, the end date of the theft protection is displayed in the
mySecurity Online Update program and on the instrument.
8.
Press Close.
9.
Click the Refresh button to update the screen information.
10.
Check the status, the activation date and the renewal date of the theft
protection.
Viva Series, mySecurity
381
Status information
on the instrument
Step
Description
1.
Select Main Menu: User\About Leica Viva.
2.
Go to the SmartWorx Viva page.
3.
My Security end:
Displays the date when the instrument must be connected to mySecurity.
The date is transferred from myWorld to the instrument.



Report stolen
instrument
Locate stolen
instrument
Several days before the My Security end, a reminder message is displayed
each time the instrument is turned on.
When the My Security end has been exceeded, a message informs about
the instrument lock. Go to myWorld to renew the theft protection.
When the instrument is locked,
• all GeoCom commands for functionality are locked.
• all GeoCom commands for service are locked except the commands
for firmware upgrade.
• a firmware downgrade via GeoCom is impossible. Versions lower than
5.50 and without mySecurity option cannot be loaded.
Step
Description
1.
Go to myWorld@Leica Geosystems (https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com).
2.
Select myTrustedServices/mySecurity.
3.
Click the checkbox to select an instrument.
4.
Click Details.
5.
In the General section, click Report as Stolen.
6.
A warning comes up to confirm device as stolen.
Click OK.
7.
The Status of the instrument changes to Stolen!.
A Leica Geosystems service centre will inform local authorities if such an
instrument turns up.
If a reported, stolen instrument attempts to connect to myWorld, then the IP address
of the computer will be logged. The IP address is used to locate the instrument.
In myWorld/myTrustedServices/mySecurity, the Status of the instrument changes
to Located.
Clicking Show Location shows:
• The date and time when the instrument was located
• The IP address of the computer
• A link to show the location on a map
Viva Series, mySecurity
382
34
Camera & Imaging
34.1
Overview
Description
Instruments can be equipped with up to two cameras:
Type
Available on
Overview camera
TS11 I, TS15 I, MS50, TM50 I, TS50 I, CS
Telescope camera
TM50 I, TS50 I, MS50
The camera & imaging functionality is an interactive feature embedded in SmartWorx
Viva but used by some applications as well as data management. A licence key is
required to store overview and telescope camera images.
• Camera applications:
• Taking images of survey relevant objects for documentation purposes
• Visual aiming using the view finder and the digital crosshair
• The images can be linked to points, lines and areas stored in the working job.
• Images can be captured in a defined sequence and combined to a panoramic image.
• Screenshots can be taken from the display as additional information.
• Images, screenshots and digital sketches can be edited and sketched on. This functionality is also available on instruments which do not have a camera or a imaging
licence.
• Overview and telescope camera images can be transferred from the TPS to the CS.
• Images can be exported in DXF and LandXML format.
• The cameras can be switched.
Depending on where the camera & imaging functionality is accessed from, different
functionality is available.
Overview or telescope camera on
TS
Camera on back
of CS
Sketch Pad
Screenshot
Edit, link, stich and store image
DBX
Camera & imaging
workflow on the TS
Step

1.
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
Description
The camera functionality on the TS must be licensed.
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\New job. Create a working job. Return to the
Main Menu.
383
Step
Description
2.
Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS camera settings. On the TS overview/TS
telescope page, check Use overview camera/Use TS overview & telescope
cameras. Return to the Main Menu.
3.
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Setup. Define the station setup. Return to
the Main Menu.
4.
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey. Measure a point.
5.
Page until the Camera page is active. Cpture to take an image on demand.
6.
The image is only displayed, not stored yet.
7.
To draw on the image, press the sketching icon on the toolbar.
8.
To store the image, press Store.
9.
Decide how to link the image:
• With the last measured point
• With any point, line or area
• No link at all
• Cancel
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
384
34.2
Instrument - TPS camera settings
Access
Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS camera settings.
Camera Settings,
TS overview/TS telescope (for TS50)
page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Use TS overview camera
Check box
Available for TS11 I/TS15 I. The overview camera
can be physically switched on and off.
When this box is checked, the camera is switched
on.
Use TS overview & telescope
cameras
Check box
Available for MS50/TS50 I/TM50 I. The overview
AND the telescope camera can be physically
switched on and off.
When this box is checked, the cameras are
switched on.
Resolution
Selectable list
The resolution has a direct influence on the file
size. When images are transferred between TS
and CS, select Medium or Small. Small is recommended to save transfer time.
White balance Selectable list
This setting defines the colour impression. If
Automatic does not provide satisfying results,
select Indoor or Outdoor depending on the
surveying environment.
Image quality
The grade of compression of the image.
Highest quality
Low jpg compression, better image quality, larger
file size
Standard quality
Higher jpg compression, standard image quality,
smaller file size
Next step
Page to change to the Image documentation page.
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
385
Camera Settings,
Image documentation page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Capture image Check box
with every
measurement
For
MS50/TS50
I/TM50:
Capture overview image
with every
measurement, Capture
telescope
image with
every measurement
When this box is checked, an image is taken automatically with every measurement. The order of
images taken is: 1. telescope camera, 2. overview
camera.
Link image
Check box
with measurement
Available when Capture image with every measurement is checked.
When this box is not checked, pictures can be
taken on demand. Use this option to save power.
The active view finder defines the camera source
when pressing Cpture.
In applications, use Cpture on the Camera page
to take pictures.
Outside of applications, use the
then Cpture.

icon and
Images taken with the camera are always
stored related to the active working job.
The images are stored in a subfolder of
the active working job. The images can be
viewed in the Data Management.
When this box is checked, the image taken with a
measurement is automatically linked to the last
measurement taken.

Several images can be linked with one
point. One image can be linked to several
measured points.
When this box is not checked, the image taken
with a measurement is not automatically linked to
a measurement. The image can be linked manually in data management.
Store crossCheck box
hair on image
Available for TS11 I/TS15 I/MS50/TS50 I/TM50.
When this box is checked, the crosshairs are
stored on the picture.
Store points,
lines & areas
on image
Check box
When this box is checked, point, line and area
information is stored on images taken with
Cpture. The information stored on the image
depends on the distance slider and the settings
defined in Camera View Settings and Sorts &
Filters.
Keep original
image
Check box
When this box is checked, the image without
points, lines and areas is saved additionally.
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
386
34.3
Taking an Image
34.3.1
Overview
Description
• The camera can be used to take images of survey relevant objects.
• The images can be linked to points, lines and areas stored in the job.
• Screenshots can be taken from the display as additional information in support
cases.
Standard functionality is provided by softkeys, keys and a toolbar.
The softkeys are available regardless of where the camera functionality was accessed
from and always perform the same functions.
If Display TS camera focussing toolbar is checked in Camera View Settings, icons are
available in a toolbar. One toolbar is located on the right side of the screen. A second
toolbar on the left side of the screen is available when the telescope camera is active.
Some of the functions performed by the icons can also be replicated using a softkey
or key in the same mode as when the icon appears.
Requirements
• A TS11 I/TS15 I/MS50/TM50 I/TS50 I must be used.
• The camera configuration must be active. Refer to "34.2 Instrument - TPS camera
settings".
• The documentation configuration must be set. Refer to "34.2 Instrument - TPS
camera settings".
34.3.2
Outside of Applications
Access
Press a function key configured with the option User - Use camera.
OR
Click
.
Capture Image with
Camera
Key
Description
Cpture
To take an image with the current pixel resolution. The image is then
displayed but not stored on the memory device yet.
Fn Config..
To configure what is displayed on the Camera page. Refer to
"Camera View Settings, General page".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
387
Overview of keys,
softkeys and icons
The softkeys described in this table are standard on all camera & imaging screens. For
descriptions of mode-specific softkeys, see appropriate chapters.
Icon
Key or Softkey
Description
-
To scroll the camera & imaging toolbar.
1
The fit icon displays, after zooming in/out, the
complete image in VGA resolution.
2
To zoom into the image.
3
To zoom out of the image.
5
To zoom to the maximum in the current viewing
direction.
-
To define a range by a minimum and a maximum
distance. Three-dimensional points within the
defined range are displayed.


Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
This functionality is only available on the
Camera page within the Survey application.
Top slider
The maximum distance
from the instrument, for
example set to 400.
Bottom slider
The minimum distance from
the instrument, for example
set to 10.
Result
Points between 10 m and
400 m from the instrument
are displayed on the image.
To move the slider, tap on the slider, hold
and drag it or use the up and down arrow
keys.
Fn Config..
To access Camera View Settings. Refer to "
Camera View Settings, General page".
-
To increase the brightness from the current
value.
-
To decrease the brightness from the current
value.
-
To return to automatic brightness of the image.
-
To configure the camera. Refer to "34.2 Instrument - TPS camera settings".
388
Icon
Key or Softkey
Description
-
To switch between overview and telescope
camera. After turning the instrument on the
overview camera is in use. The style of the crosshairs changes with the camera in use.
Or use the hot key/favourites menu function TPS - Toggle overview/telescope
camera.

-
To switch continuous autofocus on and off.
-
Continuous autofocus is active.
Focus
To activate a single autofocus. Single autofocus
deactives continuous autofocus. Same functionality as pressing the autofocus button on the
side cover of the instrument.


-
Fn
+
OK
Or use the hot key/favourites menu function TPS - Single auto focus.
While continuous autofocus is active, any
manually measured distance updates the
focus position.
Available on CS. To focus manually:
• Up and down arrow: To focus in big steps.
• Right and left arrow: To focus in small
steps.
-
Pressing 2x autofocus button on
side cover - short
-
Pressing autofocus To start continuous autofocus.
button on side
cover - long
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
To perform an automatic contrast based refocus.
389
34.3.3
Within Applications
Access
In the Survey, Reference Plane and Setup application, go to the Camera page.
In Survey
A Camera page is displayed.
The style of the crosshairs changes with the camera in use.
Refer to "Overview of keys, softkeys and icons" for information on the toolbar.
Key
Meas
Description
To measure and store distances and angles.
If configured, an image is taken automatically.
If configured, the image is linked to the point measurement automatically.
Stop
Available if Measure mode: Continuous and Dist was pressed. Stops
the distance measurements. The key changes back to Meas.
Dist
To measure and display distances.
Store
To record data.
If Measure mode: Continuous and/or Log auto points is checked,
measured points are recorded and tracking continues. If configured,
an image is taken automatically.
Depending on the configuration, crosshairs are stored on top
of the image.
For the overview camera: If a valid distance measurement is
available, then the parallax is corrected and the crosshairs are
overlaid on the image on their true position.
Cpture
To take an image with the current pixel resolution. The image is then
displayed but not stored on the memory device yet.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure what is displayed on the Camera page. Refer to
"Camera View Settings, General page".
Fn 2Store
Available for Measure mode: Single and Measure mode: Single
(fast). Target aiming: Manual must be selected. To take an angle only
measurement in Face I and Face II and automatically store an average
of the two measurements.
Fn 2 Face
Available for Measure mode: Single and Measure mode: Single
(fast). To take an angle and distance measurement in Face I and Face
II. The point stored is an average of the two measurements. When
using instruments fitted with auto aiming, the point is automatically
measured in both faces. The resulting point is stored and the instrument is returned to the first face.
Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the
Fn Run
defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.


Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
390
In Setup
In the setup application, points can be linked with images. Depending on the configuration the images are linked either automatically or manually.
A Camera page is displayed. Depending on the screen, the available keys differ.
The style of the crosshairs changes with the camera in use.
Refer to "Overview of keys, softkeys and icons" for information on the toolbar.
For Set Station Orientation and Measure Target
Key
Description
Set
For Setup method: Set orientation: To set the station and orientation and exit the Setup application.
If configured, an image is taken automatically, also for two face
measurements.
If configured, the image is linked to the point measurement automatically.
Meas
For Setup method: Multiple backsights: To measure and store the
distances and angles made to the control points.
If configured, an image is taken automatically, also for two face
measurements.
If configured, the image is linked to the point measurement automatically.
For measurements in two faces, two images are linked with one
point.
Dist
To measure and display distances.
Store
For Setup method: Set orientation: To store the measurement with
or without a distance.
For Setup method: Multiple backsights: To record display values
temporarily. The target measurements will not be stored to the
current job until the station is set.
If configured, an image is taken automatically, also for two face
measurements.
If configured, the image is linked to the point measurement automatically.
For measurements in two faces, two images are linked with one
point.
Cpture
To take an image with the current pixel resolution. The image is then
displayed but not stored on the memory device yet.
For Setup method: Multiple backsights, Setup method: Transfer
height and Setup method: Resection:
In case of multiple backsight setups, link the image with the next or
the previous target.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure what is displayed on the Camera page. Refer to
"Camera View Settings, General page".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
391
For the Results screen
Camera View
Settings,
General page
Key
Description
Cpture
To take an image with the current pixel resolution. The image can
then be linked to the calculated setup point.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure what is displayed on the Camera page. Refer to
"Camera View Settings, General page".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Display TS
Check box
camera
zooming
toolbar /
Display TS
camera focussing toolbar
Display cross- Check box
hairs
Description
Determines if the toolbar of icons is displayed.
Refer to "Overview of keys, softkeys and icons".
If no distance is measured, then the coarse style
crosshair is indicated which is approximately the
field of view.
If a valid distance is measured and the parallax
can be resolved, then the fine style crosshair is
indicated as two intersecting lines on the true
position. When the instrument turns about three
gon in horizontal or vertical direction after measuring a distance, then the crosshair style changes
back to the field of view variant.
In tracking mode, the crosshairs are always on the
correct position and displayed as two intersecting
lines.
When locked onto a prism, the crosshair style
adapts with distance measurements.
Crosshair
colour
Selectable list
Available if Display crosshairs is checked.
Defines the colour of the crosshairs.
Next step
Page to change to the Points display page.
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
392
Camera View
Settings,
Points display page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Display points Check box
Description
When this box is checked, points from the
working job with 3D local grid coordinates are
displayed on the view finder. Use the display of
points to check completeness and reliability of
the survey.
Points are displayed with a visual 3D effect:
Points further away from the instrument are
displayed smaller than points closer to the instrument.
Point ID, Point Check box
code, Height
of point or
Quality of
point
When this box is checked, the relevant information of a measured point is displayed next to the
point symbol.
Point symbol
colour
Selectable list
Available if Display points is checked. Defines the
colour of the points.
Number of
points
Selectable list
Available if Display points is checked. The
maximum number of overlaid points. The last
points stored in the DBX are displayed, regardless
of the point class. If 20 is selected and a new
point is measured, then the first point of the
previous 20 is no longer displayed.
Only display Check box
points measured from
current station
In addition to the selected number of points, the
points displayed can be restricted further by
showing only points measured from the current
station.
Next step
Page changes to the Lines / areas display page.
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
393
Camera View
Settings,
Lines / areas display
page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Display lines & Check box
area
Description
When this box is checked, lines/areas from the
working job with 3D local grid coordinates are
displayed on the view finder. Use the display of
points to check completeness and reliability of
the survey.
Points are displayed with a visual 3D effect:
Points in further away from the instrument are
displayed smaller than points closer to the instrument.

Points are only displayed on the image.
They are not saved with the image.
Display line & Check box
area IDs
When this box is checked, then the line/area IDs
are displayed with the lines/areas.
Use fixed
colour for
lines & areas
Check box
When this box is checked, a colour for displaying
lines/areas can be selected.
When this box is not checked, the lines/areas are
displayed in the line/area code colour.
Colour
Selectable list
This colour is used for the lines/areas and for the
text related to the line and area IDs.
Number of
Selectable list
lines / areas to
show
Available if Display lines & area is checked. The
maximum number of overlaid lines/areas. The last
lines/areas stored in the DBX are displayed. If 20
is selected and a new line/area is measured, then
the first line/area of the previous 20 is no longer
displayed.

The selected number is the sum of lines
and areas. For example, if 20 is selected,
this can be 5 lines and 15 areas.
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
For MS50: Page changes to the ScanArea display page.
Camera View
Settings,
ScanArea display
page
Available for MS50.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Current scan
definition
colour
Selectable list
This colour is used in Scan Viewer for the scan
area currently defined.
Show existing Check box
scan definitions
Colour
Selectable list
When this box is checked, then scan areas previously defined are displayed in Scan Viewer.
This colour is used for the previously defined scan
areas.
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
394
34.3.4
Screenshot
Description
Press a hot key configured to User - Screenshot capture or Fn and ’.’. The screenshot
is displayed and can be edited by sketching.
The screenshot can be linked with points manually. Sketching on the screenshot is
possible.
The screenshot is stored as jpg with a predefined compression rate. The resolution is
640 x 480. Screenshots can be georeferenced by linking to a point. Screenshots
cannot be orientated and calibrated.
34.3.5
Panoramic Imaging
Description
A panoramic image is a combination of single images. Panorama images show the area
of what can be seen from the instrument station. Panorama images are used for documentation purposes and support the evaluation of the surveying data directly in the
field or in the office. Panorama images can be imported into LGO.
Panoramic images can be generated independent of any application.
A panorama is organised with a panorama instance within the DBX. The single images
are stored in the DBX\JOB\IMAGES folder of the data storage device. The single images
are named Img_Pano_x_y_date_time.jpg where as
Field
x
y
Date
Time

Description
Number of the row, starts with upper left corner
Number of columns, starts with upper left corner data
Same as with normal images
Same as with normal images
Panoramic images can only be generated with motorized instruments with overview
camera (TS15 I/MS50/TM50 I/TS50 I).
Access
In Leica TPS Favourites click Panoramic image.
OR
Press a function key configured with the option User - Capture panoramic image.
OR
At the end of Setup, a panoramic image can be taken.
Select Panoramic
Image Type
Description of fields
Field
Image type
Option
Rectangular area
Multi-row 360°
image
Single row 360°
image
Polygonal area
Description
Area defined by upper left and lower right corner
360° with one or more rows above each other
360° in one row
Area defined by three or more corners in clockwise direction.
Next step
OK and follow the instructions on the screen to define the area.
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
395
Once the panoramic image area is defined then the Panoramic Image Capture screen
opens.
Panoramic Image
Capture
Key
Start
Stop
Pause
Resume
Fn Quit
Description of
Description
To start taking the panorama images.
To end taking the panorama images.
To pause taking the panorama images.
To continue taking panorama images after Pause has been pressed.
To exit the screen.
fields
Field
Images taken
Images
remaining
% completed
Option
Display only
Display only
Description
The number of captured images.
The number of images remaining to be taken.
Display only
Image file
name
Brightness
control
Display only
In percent, the number of images taken against
the total number of images which must be taken.
The name of the file where the image is stored to.
Image
stitching
To control the brightness of each tile of the panorama image.
From first image The brightness is measured for first image of the
panorama. The value is applied to all further tiles.
Recommended for panorama images taken under
normal conditions
From each image The brightness is measured for each image of the
panorama. Recommended for panorama images
with diverse brightness.
Stitch
A stitched panoramic image is created and stored.
Possibilities:
• Colouring of any related scan
• Panoramic image is exported to any export
• Documentation onboard
Do not stitch
Stitching combines multiple images with overlapping fields of view to one segmented panorama
or high-resolution image.
The image is not stitched. No name of the panoramic image is added to the DBX.
Next step
The panorama and the images are stored in the images folder of the working job,
either with or without link to the reference triplet of the current station.

An image belonging to a panorama image can be linked manually with another object
without affecting the panorama image.
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
396
34.4
Image Management

Image Management is available on instruments which have a camera or a camera
license.
Access
Step
Description
1.
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\View & edit data.
2.
Page until the Images page is active.
Data:,
Images page
Key
Description
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Link..
To display a points list and to link the image to a point.
View..
To display an image. Refer to "Image Notes".
Delete
To delete the highlighted image and all its links.
More
To display information about the image size and the time and the
date of when the image was stored.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Filter..
To define sort and filter settings. Refer to " Sorts & Filters, Images
page".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Next step
IF
THEN
an image is to be viewed or edited
Open. Refer to "Image Notes".
sort and filter settings are to be defined Fn Filter... Refer to "Sorts & Filters, Images
page".
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
397
Image Notes
Use the arrow keys on the keypad to move the image on the screen.
Key
Description
Store
To store the image with the added link or a sketch created.
If no sketch was created, then the image is not stored a second time
to avoid a loss of quality.
Prev
To display the previous image in the list of images displayed in
Data:, Images page. Available unless the beginning of the list is
reached.
Next
To display the next image in the list of images displayed in
Data:, Images page. Available unless the end of the list is reached.
Fn Config..
To activate or deactivate a toolbar with icons for sketching.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Next step
Store returns to Data:, Images page.
Sorts & Filters,
Images page
Key
Description
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed. The selected sort and filter settings are applied.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Sort by
Ascending filename,
Descending filename,
Forward time and Backward
time
Always available. The method the images
are sorted by.
Always available. The method by which
the images are filtered.
Filter by
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
No filter
Shows all images.
Image source
Shows photos taken with the camera or
screenshots. Make the selection in the
Image source field.
Camera type
Shows images taken with the TS11/TS15
or CS camera. Make the selection in the
Camera type field.
398
Field
Option
Description
Linked / unlinked
Shows linked or unlinked images. Make
the selection in the Image field.
Available for Filter by: Image source.
Image
source
Camera
Shows images taken with the camera on
the TS11/TS15 or CS.
Screenshot
Shows pictures taken from the instrument screen.
Field sketch
Shows field sketches created.
Available for Filter by: Camera type.
Camera
type
Image
Overview camera
Shows images taken with the overview
camera on the instrument.
CS camera
Shows images taken with the camera on
the CS.
Telescope camera
Shows images taken with the telescope
camera on the instrument.
Selectable list
Available for Filter by: Linked / unlinked.
Either linked or unlinked images are
displayed.
Next step
OK returns to Data:, Images page.
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
399
34.5
Sketching
34.5.1
Sketching on Images
Description
A sketch can be overlaid on an image taken with a camera.
A sketch can be made on every jpg file stored in the DBX\JOB\IMAGES folder of the
working job.
The sketch is stored together with the image in jpg format. The compression rate is
specified in the Camera Settings screen. The image with the sketch is stored by
pressing Store.
Access step-by-step
In data management (the image is already stored and possibly linked)
Step
Description
1.
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\View & edit data.
2.
Page until the Images page is active.
3.
Press View.
4.
In Sketch Pad, click the
icon in the toolbar.
For images
Step
Description
1.
Click
.
OR
Start the Survey or Setup application and go to the Camera page.
2.
Press Cpture. The image is taken as with a digital camera.
For screenshots(the image is already stored and possibly linked)
Press a hot key configured to User - Screenshot capture. The screenshot is displayed
and can be edited by sketching.
Overview of keys,
softkeys and icons
for sketching
Icon
Key or Softkey
Description
-
To scroll the camera & imaging toolbar.
1
The fit icon displays, after zooming in/out, the
complete image in VGA resolution.
2
To zoom into the image.
Pressing ESC stops the zooming process.
3
-
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging

To zoom out of the image.
 Pressing ESC stops the zooming process.
The windowing icon zooms to a specified area
window. An area window can be drawn by dragging the stylus on the screen in a diagonal line to
make a rectangular area or by tapping twice on
the screen to define diagonally opposite corners
of a rectangular area. This action causes the
screen to zoom to the selected area.
400
Icon
Key or Softkey
-
-
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
Description
To activate sketching. The
icon is displayed.
The image cannot be moved.
To quit sketching. The
image can be moved.
icon is displayed. The
-
To change the line style. Tap the icon to open a
window displaying line styles for selection. The
selected line style is remembered.
-
To change the line colour. Tap the icon to open a
window displaying line colours for selection. The
selected line colour is remembered.
-
To change the line width. Tap the icon to open a
window displaying line widths for selection. The
selected line width is remembered.
-
To undo all changes since the last saving.
401
34.5.2
Field Sketching
Description
The field sketch functionality is used to create a sketch on a virtual paper. Sketching
is possible on predefined or on customer templates. Custom templates can, for
example, include a company logo or check boxes for tasks that must be done.
The sketch is stored as image in jpg format. The jpg file is stored in the
DBX\JOB\IMAGES folder of the data storage device.
The predefined templates are optimised for A4 printout. Customer templates can be
optimised for any format.
A screenshot cannot be made from the field sketch.
Access
In Leica TPS Favourites or Leica GPS Favourites click Sketch pad.
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen Choose Sketch Template. Refer to
"25.4 Hot keys & favourites" for information on hot keys.
Choose Sketch
Template
Key
OK
Fn Delete
Fn Quit
Description
To create a copy of the selected sketch template and to start
sketching.
To delete the selected custom template.
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Sketch
template
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
Option
Description
The predefined sketch templates.
Plain paper,
Lined papernarrow, Lined
paper-wide, Grid
paper (small grid)
or Grid paper
(large grid)
Custom templates The custom templates must be jpg files with a
maximum of five megapixel. The templates are
stored in the CONFIG\SKETCH_TEMPLATES folder
of the data storage device. To make a custom
template selectable in the list, transfer the
template to the internal memory in Main Menu:
User\Tools & other utilities\Transfer user
objects. Refer to "30.1 Transfer user objects".
402
Next step
Select a template. OK to access Sketch pad.
Sketch Pad
Refer to "Overview of keys, softkeys and icons" for information on the toolbar.
Key
Description
Store
To store and link the field sketch.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
403
34.6
Exporting Images
Exporting images in
DXF format
Step
Description
1.
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export DXF Data.
2.
Config.. goes to Configuration, Export page.
3.
Checking Export images activates the export of images linked with any point,
line or area.


Exporting images in
XML format
If multiple images are linked with one point, one line or one area, then all
images linked are exported.
Images are exported according to the filter settings. Press Filter.. to check
the settings.
Step
Description
1.
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export XML Data.
2.
Config.. accesses Configuration, Export page.
3.
Checking Images activates the export of images linked with any point, line or
area.

Viva Series, Camera & Imaging
Images are exported according to the filter settings. Press Filter.. to check
the settings.
404
35
TPS Functions
35.1
EDM
Description
Electronic Distance Measurement EDM is the function used for distance measurements.
There are different modes the instrument can work in. Refer to Measure & Target
Settings.
35.2
Prism Search Methods
35.2.1
Automatic aiming
Description
Automatic aiming is the function which recognises and measures the position of a
prism using a CCD array. A laser beam is transmitted and the reflected beam is received
by the built-in CCD array. The position of the reflected spot with respect to the centre
of the CCD is computed. These automatic aiming offsets are used to correct the horizontal and vertical angles. The automatic aiming offsets are also used to control the
motors which turn the instrument to centre the crosshairs to the prism. In order to
minimise the time for measuring, the crosshairs are not moved to the exact centre of
the prism. The automatic aiming offset can be up to 500 cc depending on selected
Measure mode. The automatic aiming function measures the offsets between the
crosshairs and prism centre and corrects the horizontal and vertical angles accordingly.
Therefore the horizontal and vertical angles are measured to the prism-centre, even
if the crosshairs are not aimed precisely at the centre of the prism.
Motorised instruments can be equipped with automatic aiming. For Target aiming:
Automatic the instrument can find a static prism and measure a distance once Meas
or Dist is pressed. The instrument does not follow a moving prism.
Field of view
The telescope field of view is the region seen when looking through the telescope. The
automatic aiming field of view is the region seen by the automatic aiming. Both are
identical on TPS instruments.
Automatic aiming
measurement
If the prism is in the field of view with Target aiming:
Automatic the crosshairs are automatically positioned to
the prism when, for example Meas or Dist is pressed. No
automatic aiming search is started.
The displayed values are always related to the
centre of the prism after Meas or Dist is pressed.
For Meas, these values are displayed only shortly
after the key press.
The crosshairs of the telescope may not fully coincide with the centre of the prism when viewed
through the telescope. The remaining automatic
aiming offsets for the horizontal and vertical angles
are measured by the automatic aiming function and
applied to the measured and displayed angles.

TS_004
Viva Series, TPS Functions
405
Automatic aiming
search
TS_005
If the prism is not in the field of view when
Meas or Dist is pressed, an automatic
aiming search is started. For the automatic
aiming search the automatic aiming
window is scanned line by line starting at
the current telescope position. If the
• prism was not found: Retry can be
pressed to search for the prism in an
increased area.
• prism was found: The automatic aiming
measurement is performed to position
the telescope to the centre of the
prism.
Automatic aiming
window
The automatic aiming window is a relative window based on the current telescope
position. The horizontal and vertical extent can be defined.
Fine search window
If no target is found after the prediction time and If no target found after prediction
then: Start fine search is set, then the prism is searched for with automatic aiming
using a dynamic automatic aiming window. This window covers a horizontal region
from the position of loss of lock to the current telescope position, and the same
extent on the other side. The vertical dimension of the dynamic window is one third
of the horizontal expansion.
Targeting modes
Refer to Measure & Target Settings.
Viva Series, TPS Functions
406
35.2.2
PowerSearch
Description
The PowerSearch module allows an automatic prism detection within a short time
period. The PowerSearch function can be started in the Leica TPS Favourites screen
and configured in TPS settings\Prism search settings, PowerSearch window.
Functionality
a b
c
The PowerSearch function consists of a
transmitter (a) and a receiver (b). Both are
installed in the telescope.
When PowerSearch is activated, the
instrument starts to rotate around its
standing axis. The transmitter emits a
vertical laser swath. If the laser swath
detects a prism, the rotation of the instrument is stopped. Afterwards an automatic
aiming measurement in the vertical direction is performed.
TS_006

a) EGL
b) Transmitter
c) Receiver
If a PS window is defined and active, PowerSearch is executed within the defined
limits.
360° search
If the search window is not defined and PowerSearch is started, the prism is searched
for with PowerSearch in the 360° window. The default search with PowerSearch
consists of a short swing in anti-clockwise direction followed by a complete 360° turn
in clockwise direction. If a prism is detected the movement is stopped and an automatic aiming search is performed.
PowerSearch
window
The PowerSearch window can be defined individually. It is specified by absolute angle
values and does not change its position. The PowerSearch window can be set in the
Prism Search Settings, PowerSearch window page by aiming at two opposite points
of the PowerSearch window. When Use PowerSearch window is checked and a
PowerSearch is started, a prism is searched for within the defined window.
Dynamic PowerSearch window
When Use PowerSearch window is not checked and the instrument has lost lock, after
the prediction time, the prism is searched for in a dynamic PowerSearch window. This
window covers a region at the position after prediction of horizontal 100 gon by
vertical 40 gon.
Direction of search
The PowerSearch routine can be activated clockwise or anticlockwise by using hotkeys.
This action will have no influence on the prism search settings.
Viva Series, TPS Functions
407
35.3
Follow Moving Prisms - Lock
Description
Lock enables instruments equipped with automatic aiming to follow a moving prism.
The automatic aiming sensor is active when Lock is active. When Target lock on is
selected in Leica TPS Favourites, an automatic aiming search is executed. The instrument locks onto the prism and follows its movements. Automatic aiming offsets are
continuously applied to the angle measurements. When the instrument loses lock to
the prism, a PowerSearch or fine search (auto aiming search) can be executed
depending on the prism search settings.
Lock is unavailable for SmartStation.

If the speed of the prism is too fast, the target may be lost. Make sure that the speed
does not exceed the figure given in the technical data.
Enable lock
Selecting Target lock on in Leica TPS Favourites, will immediately activate an automatic aiming search to find the prism. Alternatively, as long as Target aiming is set to
Lock in Measure & Target Settings, then pressing Meas, Dist, PowerSearch right, OK
in Check Point, Joystick, Turn to Hz/V and Orientation With Compass will start a
PowerSearch or automatic aiming search to find the prism. When the prism is found,
the instrument locks onto the prism. The instrument follows the moving prism and the
automatic aiming function remains active.
Loss of lock
When the instrument is locked onto a prism, lock may be lost if the movement of the
prism is too fast for the instrument to follow or the prism is hidden behind an object.
After lock is lost, the prediction, as set in Prism Search Settings is used to find the
prism again.
The automatic aiming function is still active.

Whenever the prism is moved in the field of view during the prediction and any other
search periods, the instrument locks automatically to the prism.
Prediction
a
TS_007
b
c
a) Moving prism locked onto by the instrument
b) Loss of lock
c) Prediction
As long as the prism is being tracked by the instrument a mathematical filter continuously
calculates the average speed and direction of the prism. If the line of sight between instrument and prism is disturbed, the instrument keeps on moving using these calculated
values. This behaviour is called prediction. The prediction time can be configured. During
prediction, the LOCK icon is displayed and if the prism comes into the instruments field of
view again the automatic aiming will lock to the prism.
Prism search after
prediction
After prediction, the prism is searched for depending on the settings in Prism Search
Settings.
• If no target found after prediction then: Stop searching. If the prism moved in the
field of view, the prism is not searched for until Meas, Dist, Target lock on is
pressed.
• If no target found after prediction then: Start fine search: prism is searched for in
the dynamic automatic aiming window with automatic aiming.
• If no target found after prediction then: Start PowerSearch and Use PowerSearch
window is checked: prism is searched for in the PS window with PowerSearch.
• If no target found after prediction then: Start PowerSearch and Use PowerSearch
window is NOT checked: prism is searched for in the dynamic PowerSearch window.
Relock
Independent of the setting for If no target found after prediction then the instrument
can relock to the prism. Refer to paragraph "Enable lock".
Viva Series, TPS Functions
408
35.4
RCS
Description
The instrument can be controlled by the field controller via radio. The automatic aiming
function does not necessarily have to be active when working in RCS mode. The field
controller is used to remote control the instrument. No data can be stored on the field
controller. The screen and content displayed on the field controller are a copy of the
remote controlled instrument.
The communication between the total station and the field controller is established
via radio modems. One radio modem has to be connected to the total station serial
port.
35.5
EGL
Description
The Emitting Guide Light, EGL, consists of two differently coloured flashing lights in
the telescope housing of the TPS. The EGL is used for guidance into the line of sight.
If the left light is seen, the prism must be moved right and vice versa. If both flashing
lights can be seen, the prism is in the line of sight of the instrument.
Functionality
100 m (300 ft)
The EGL can be used
• to help guide the prism into the telescope line of sight when the instrument is controlled remotely and Target
aiming: Lock.
• to stake out points.
6m
(20 ft)
The instrument emits two differently
coloured flashing cones of light. At a
target distance of 100 m, the cones have
a width of 6 m. Between the two cones of
light, a sector with a width of 30 mm is
created where both guide lights are visible
simultaneously. In this position, the prism
is in the line of sight of the instrument.
6m
(20 ft)
TS_008
Using the EGL stepby-step
Step
Description
1.
Check Use the instrument guide lights (EGL) in the Instrument Lights
screen.
OR
Set Target aiming: Lock and press Comps or Turn to Hz/V or J Stick on
the Leica TPS Favourites screen.
2.
Align instrument line of sight and prism, where both flashing EGL lights can
be seen simultaneously.
3.
OK to lock onto the prism.
4.
If the instrument has locked onto the prism the EGL is turned off automatically.

Viva Series, TPS Functions
If the EGL was turned on in Instrument Lights, it has to be turned off by
unchecking the check box.
409
35.6
Illumination
Description
There are several different illumination types built into the instrument that all fulfil
different functions. Some are to support measurements, for example the visible red
laser pointer. Others, such as the screen illumination, are for more convenient work
with the instrument. These different types of illumination are described in this
chapter.
Laser plummet
The laser plummet allows setting up the instrument over a marked point. The laser
beam is emitted from the bottom of the instrument, pointing to the ground. When the
instrument is levelled and the laser beam points exactly at the ground point, the
instrument is set up correctly.
The laser plummet can be turned on and off. It is turned on automatically when
opening the Instrument\TPS settings\Level bubble & compensator screen and turned
off when leaving the screen.
Visible red laser
pointer
The visible red laser pointer is used to measure to any surface. The visible red laser
pointer is arranged coaxially with the line of sight of the telescope and emitted
through the objective. If the instrument is correctly adjusted, the visible red laser beam
coincides with the line of sight.

GUS74 Laser Guide
The direction of the beam should be inspected before precise distance measurements
are executed. An excessive deviation of the laser beam from the line of sight can cause
inaccurate results.
The GUS74 Laser Guide is an option for TPS instruments. It is built into a special telescope compartment and emits a visible red laser beam to visualise the line of sight
over long ranges. The GUS74 Laser Guide is used for special applications such as
tunnelling. Refer to GUS74 Laser Guide Manual for detailed information.
Viva Series, TPS Functions
410
35.7
Connection to Other Total Stations
35.7.1
Leica Legacy Total Stations
Supported functions
Function
TPS300
TPS400
TPS700
TPS700A
TPS800
TPS1000
TPS1100
Robotic control
-
-
-
-
Auto aiming
-

-

Level bubble
-
-
-
-
Auto aiming in setup
-
1
-
1
Compensator on/off




Laser plummet on/off



-
Laser pointer on/off



-
EGL on/off




Connection status




TPS battery status
-
-
-
-
Move between reflectorless & prism measurements




Measure mode continuous 







Auto logged points

1


Supported
Not supported
The auto aiming function when doing a setup only works if a distance is measured. The Meas or Dist key must be used. When using the Store key only, the
auto aiming function in setup is unavailable.
SmartPole and SmartStation are not supported with Leica Legacy instruments.
Prism constants and correction values set at the CS are applied to the raw measurement data taken from the total station.
Viva Series, TPS Functions
411
35.7.2
Topcon
Supported functions
Function
GTS
GPT
GPT-L
GTS800
GTS820
GTS900
GPT8000
GPT8200
GPT9000
Robotic control
-
-
-
Auto aiming
-
-
-
Level bubble
-
-
-
Compensator on/off
-
-
-
Laser plummet on/off
-
-
-
Laser pointer on/off
-
-
-
EGL on/off



Connection status



TPS battery status
-
-
-
Move between reflectorless &
prism measurements



Measure mode continuous
-
-
-
Auto logged points
-
-
-

-

Supported
Not supported
Prism constants and correction values set at the CS are applied to the raw measurement data taken from the total station.
Viva Series, TPS Functions
412
Set 230RM Series
Set 300/500/600
SRX Series
Set X Series
Set SCT6
Function
Robotic control
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Auto aiming
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Level bubble
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Compensator on/off
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Laser plummet on/off
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Laser pointer on/off
-
-
-
-
-
-

EGL on/off
-
-
-

-

-
Connection status







TPS battery status
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Move between reflectorless 1
& prism measurements
-
-
-



Measure mode continuous




Auto logged points




Others
2
-
-
-

1
2

10/10K Series
20/20K Series
30R/30RK/130R
110 Series
110R
120 Series
110M Series
Supported functions
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Sokkia
Set 030R/220/010
35.7.3
-
-
-
Supported
Not supported
Not available
Set Prism or Any surface measure modes at the instrument.
Set the correct prism constant at the controller.
Setup not available. Set horizontal angle at instrument.
Prism constants and correction values set at the CS are applied to the raw measurement data taken from the total station.
Viva Series, TPS Functions
413
DTM330 Series
NPL330 Series
DTM500 Series
Nivo C
Nivo M
Function
DTM300 Series
Supported functions
Nikon A Series
Nikon
800 Series
35.7.4
Robotic control
-
-
-
-
-
-
Auto aiming
-
-
-
-
-
-
Level bubble
-
-
-
-
-
-
Compensator on/off
-
-
-
-
-

Laser plummet on/off
-
-
-
-
-
-
Laser pointer on/off
-
-
-
-
-
-
EGL on/off
-
-
-
-

-
Connection status






TPS battery status
-
-
-
-
-
-
Move between reflectorless & prism measurements
-
-

-

Measure mode continuous

-



-



-
-
-
-
Auto logged points
Others

1

-
1
Supported
Not supported
Not available
Setup not available. Set horizontal angle at instrument.
Prism constants and correction values set at the CS are applied to the raw measurement data taken from the total station.
Viva Series, TPS Functions
414
36
Calculator
36.1
Accessing the Calculator
Description
The calculator can be used to perform the following arithmetic operations such as
• addition, subtraction, multiplication and division
• statistics
• trigonometry, hyperbolic trigonometry and calculations with Pi
• polar, rectangular and angle conversions
• powers, logs, roots and exponential functions.
Operating modes
The calculator has two operating modes - RPN mode and Standard mode.
The arithmetic operations available are identical, the difference lies in the way information is entered, stored and displayed on the screen.
Type
Description
RPN
Reverse Polish Notation
This operating mode was developed as a way of writing mathematical
expressions without using parenthesis and brackets. Many scientific
calculators, for example Hewlett Packard calculators, are implemented
with this operating mode. Values are entered and kept in a working
stack.
Standard
Access
Viva Series, Calculator
This operating mode is based on the principles of conventional pocket
calculators. There is no stacking of values.
Press Calc in any screen when editing an editable field for numeric characters, such
as Azimuth in Traverse Input.
415
36.2
Configuring the Calculator
Access
In RPN Calculator or Standard Calculator press Fn Config.. to access Calculator
Configuration.
Calculator Configuration
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Operating
mode
RPN
The principle of, for example, Hewlett Packard
calculators.
Standard
The principle of conventional pocket calculators.
The unit used for trigonometric functions in the
calculator. The selection here is independent
from the angle setting in Regional Settings,
Angle.
Angular unit
Display Dec
DEG
Degrees
RAD
Radians
GRAD
Gon
From 0 to 10 deci- The number of decimal places shown.
mals
Next step
OK confirms the selections made and returns to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Viva Series, Calculator
416
36.3
Using the Calculator
36.3.1
RPN Mode
Requirements
Operating mode: RPN in Calculator Configuration.
RPN Calculator
Key
Description
F1 - F6
The function keys are allocated seven times. Refer to Description of
Softkeys.
OK
Using the up and down keys the various allocations can be accessed.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
First field on
the screen
Display only
The unit used for trigonometric functions in the
calculator as configured in Calculator Configuration.
DEG
Degrees
RAD
Radians
GRAD
Gon
ΣY
Display only
The result of the sum or difference of values in Y
using Σ+ and Σ-.
ΣX
Display only
The result of the sum or difference of values in X
using Σ+ and Σ-.
T
Display only
Third stack. After an operation, the value from Z
is written here.
Z
Display only
Second stack. After an operation, the value from
Y is written here.
Y
Display only
First stack. After an operation, the value from X is
written here.
X
Editable field
The value for the next operation.
Next step
Fn Quit returns to Main Menu.
Viva Series, Calculator
417
36.3.2
Standard Mode
Requirements
Operating mode: Standard in Calculator Configuration.
Standard Calculator
Key
Description
F1 - F6
The function keys are allocated seven times. Refer to Description of
Softkeys.
OK
Using the up and down keys the various allocations can be accessed.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
First field on
the screen
Display only
The unit used for trigonometric functions in the
calculator as configured in Calculator Configuration.
DEG
Degrees
RAD
Radians
GRAD
Gon
Σ
Display only
The result of the sum or difference of values in
the last field on the screen using Σ+ and Σ-.
Third to sixth
field on the
screen
Display only
Previously entered value
OR
Latest operation including result.
# indicates that the value is cut after the third
decimal.
Last field on
the screen
Editable field
The value for next operation or result from latest
operation.
Next step
Fn Quit returns to Main Menu.
Viva Series, Calculator
418
36.3.3
Description of Softkeys
Overview of softkeys
The softkeys shown and described are from Operating mode: RPN. Most of the softkeys are identical and their functionality is similar to the softkeys from Operating
mode: Standard.
Key
Description
F1 - F6
The function keys are allocated seven times.
OK
Description of softkeys
Using the up and down keys the various allocations can be accessed.
First level
Key
Description
+
To add X and Y.
-
To subtract X from Y.
*
To multiply X by Y.
/
To divide Y by X.
+/-
To change between positive and negative algebraic sign for X.
Clr X
To clear X.
Second level
Viva Series, Calculator
Key
Description
Σ+
To add X to ΣX and Y to ΣY.
Σ-
To subtract X from ΣX and Y from ΣY.
Mean
To calculate the mean ΣX.
419
Key
Description
SDev
To calculate the standard deviation for ΣX.
Clr ∑
To clear ΣX and T.
Third level
Key
Description
Sin
To calculate sine of X.
Cos
To calculate cosine of X.
Tan
To calculate tangent of X.
Asin
To calculate arcsine of X.
Acos
To calculate arccosine of X.
Atan
To calculate arctangent of X.
Fourth level
Key
Description
°DMS
To convert decimal degrees into dd.mm.ss.
°Dec
To convert dd.mm.ss into decimal degrees.
PI
To insert X: 3.1415926536. The number of decimals depends on the
selection for Display Dec in Calculator Configuration.
D->R
To convert degrees into radians.
R->D
To convert radians into degrees.
Fifth level
Key
Description
Polar
Conversion of rectangular coordinates into polar coordinates. The y
coordinate must be visible in Y and the x coordinate in X when
pressing this key. The angle is displayed in Y and the distance in X.
Rect
Conversion of polar coordinates into rectangular coordinates. The
angle must be visible in Y and the distance in X when pressing this
key. The y coordinate is displayed in Y, the x coordinate in X.
Sqrt
To calculate X.
X^2
To calculate X2.
1/X
To inverse X:.
Y^X
To calculate YX.
Sixth level
Viva Series, Calculator
420
Key
Description
Log
To calculate the log10X.
10^X
To calculate 10X.
LN
To calculate the logeX.
e^X
To calculate eX.
Y^X
To calculate YX.
Seventh level
Key
Description
Sto
To store X to the memory. Up to ten values can be stored.
Rcl
To recall a value for X from the memory. Up to ten values can be
recalled.
X<>Y
To swap the values for X and Y.
Last X
To recall the last X before recent calculation.
Clear
To delete everything.
Fn to access the second level of function keys
Viva Series, Calculator
Key
Description
Fn Config..
To configure the calculator.
Fn Done
To return to Main Menu.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
421
37
NTRIP via Internet
37.1
Configuring Access to the Internet



Select the internet
interface
It is recommended to configure an Ntrip connection via the RTK Rover Wizard. Select
Main Menu\Instrument\GPS settings\RTK rover wizard and follow the on-screen
instructions.
The remainder of this chapter describes each of the steps and screens when configuring without the use of the RTK Rover Wizard.
One Internet interface is available - the CS Internet.
Two Internet interfaces are available - the CS Internet and the GS Internet.
The CS Internet is used as an example. The explanations are also valid for the GS
Internet.
To access the Internet with a GPS or TPS instrument, General Packet Radio System
devices will normally be used. GPRS is a telecommunication standard for transmitting
data packages using the Internet Protocol (IP).
Select Main Menu: Instrument\Connections..\All other connections.
On the CS connections page highlight CS Internet.
Press Edit...
Configure the
Internet interface
Step
Description
1.
Select a port (Connect using).
2.
Select a device (Devce..).
3.
If necessary enter User ID and Password. Some providers ask for a User ID
and a Password to allow connecting to the Internet via GPRS. Contact your
provider if a user ID and password needs to be used.
4.
OK to return to Connection Settings.
5.
In Connection Settings press Cntrl... Continue with the next paragraph.
Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet
422
Configure the
GPRS/Internet
Connection
Step
Description
1.
On the GPRS details page, type in the APN (Access Point Name of a server
from the network provider). Contact your provider to get the correct APN.
2.
On the Sim codes page, type in the PIN code for the Sim card.
If the PIN is locked for any reason, for example the wrong PIN was entered,
input the Personal UnblocKing code for access to the PIN.
3.
OK twice to return to the Main Menu.
The instrument is now online to the Internet. The Internet online status icon
is displayed. But because GPRS is being used, no charges are yet made since
no data transfer from the Internet has yet taken place.
Check the status of
the Internet
connection
Step
Description
1.
Select Main Menu: Instrument\Instrument status info\Connection status.
2.
On the CS connections page highlight CS Internet.
3.
Press Intfce.
4.
Check the Internet online status.
5.
OK twice to return to the Main Menu.
Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet
423
37.2
Using the NTRIP Service with a Real-Time Rover
Select the internet
interface
Select Main Menu: Instrument\Connections..\All other connections.
On the GS connections page highlight RTK Rover.
Press Edit...
Settings for the RTK
rover
Step
Description
1.
On the General page, make sure that an Internet port is selected for
Connect using.
2.
On the RTK network page, enable Use RTK network.
3.
Press OK to return to Connection Settings, GS connections page.
4.
Press Cntrl.. to access Internet Port Connection. Continue with the next
paragraph.
Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet
424
Select the server to
be accessed in the
Internet
Step
Description
1.
The Server to use, must be Ntrip enabled. To create a new server click into
the selectable list.
2.
In New Server, General page, type in the address and the port of the server
through which the data is provided. Each server has several ports for various
services.
3.
In New Server, NTRIP page, activate the use of Ntrip.
4.
Type in the NTRIP user ID and the NTRIP password. A user ID and the password are required to receive data from the Ntrip Caster. Contact the Ntrip
administrator for information.
5.
Store followed by OK to return to Internet Port Connection.
Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet
425
Select the Ntrip
mountpoint
Step
Description
1.
If the selected server is Ntrip enabled, Ntrip mountpoint is available.
2.
Press Source to access NTRIP Source Table.
3.
All mountpoints are listed. Mountpoints are the Ntrip servers sending out
real-time data. This screen consists of two columns. The first column shows
the abbreviations for the Mountpoints, the second the city where the Mountpoint is located.
4.
Highlight a mountpoint.
5.
Press OK twice to return to Connection Settings, GS connections page.
6.
Fn Conect and Fn Disco are now available in all applications to connect to
and disconnect from the Ntrip server.
Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet
426
38
MapView Interactive Display Feature
38.1
Overview
Description
MapView is an interactive display feature embedded in the firmware. MapView
provides a graphical display of the survey elements which allows for a better overall
understanding of how the data being used and measured relates to each other.
Depending on the application and where in the application MapView is accessed from,
different functionality is available.
The displayed data in all modes of MapView can be shifted by using both the arrow
keys and the touchscreen.
A geo-referenced background image can be displayed behind the map.
Displayable data
The data displayed in MapView is defined by the application through which it was
accessed, filters set in Sorts & Filters, and the selections made in Map View Settings.


The datum view is always considered as local.
If negative coordinates are used in CAD files to suit projections with the origin in
North-East and the axes going South and West, use the setting Switch Easting for
CAD files and Switch Northing for CAD files in Regional Settings, Coords page to
mirror the CAD file in MapView.
38.2
Accessing MapView
Description
The MapView interactive display feature is provided as a page within all applications
and data management. It is accessed through the application itself. Depending on the
application and from where in the application MapView is accessed, different MapView
modes are available.
Access step-by-step
Example for data management
Step
Description
1.
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\View & edit data.
2.
Page until the Map page is active.
Example for an application
Step
Description
1.
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Intersection.
2.
COGO Intersection
Choose a method and enter appropriate data.
3.
Calc to access Intersection Result, Results page.
4.
Page until the Plot page is active.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature
427
38.3
Configuring MapView
Description
Allows options to be set which are used as default options within MapView. These
settings are stored within the working style and apply to all Map and Plot pages,
regardless of how MapView is accessed.

Any changes made in Map View Settings affect the appearance of MapView in all applications, not just the active application.
Access step-by-step
Press Fn Config.. on any Map or Plot page.
Map View Settings,
General page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Display mapview toolbar
Check box
Determines if the toolbar of icons is displayed.
Refer to "38.4.2 Keys, Softkeys and Toolbar".
Show my path Check box
Displays the path of the rover as a dashed line.
Centre
To centre the map on the target.
Target
to
For Measure mode: Standard and Measure
mode: Single (fast), the map will centre onto the
last measured point.
For Measure mode: Continuous and Measure
mode: Long range (>4km), the map will centre
onto the current reflector position.
TPS instrument
Rotate data in Check box
map by 180°
To centre the map on the instrument.
To rotate the map by 180°. The north arrow is not
rotated and still orientated towards the top of
the screen.
Next step
Page changes to the Points page.
Map View Settings,
Points page
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to return to the screen from where this
screen was accessed.
Symbol
To view all point symbols and their descriptions.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Display points Check box
Description
Determines if points are displayed in MapView.
Point ID
Check box
Available if Display points is checked. Determines
if the ID of a point is displayed.
Point code
Check box
Available if Display points is checked. Determines
if the code of a point is displayed.
Height of point Check box
Available if Display points is checked. Determines
if the height of a point is displayed.
Check box
Available if Display points is checked. Determines
if the coordinate quality of a point is displayed.
Quality of
point
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature
428
Field
Option
Show pt info Check box
for a maximum
of 200 pts
Description
If checked, point information is not shown when
more than 200 points are displayed.
If not checked, the point information as configured is shown regardless of the number of points
being displayed.
Displayable point information
a)
b)
c)
d)
Point ID
Point code
Height of point
Quality of point
Next step
Page changes to the Lines & areas page.
Map View Settings,
Lines & areas page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Display lines
Check box
Determines if lines are displayed in MapView.
Line ID
Check box
Available if Display lines is ticked. Determines if
the ID of a line is displayed.
Line code
Check box
Available if Display lines is ticked. Determines if
the code of a line is displayed.
Display areas Check box
Determines if areas are displayed in MapView.
Area ID
Check box
Available if Display areas is ticked. Determines if
the ID of an area is displayed.
Area code
Check box
Available if Display areas is ticked. Determines if
the code of an area is displayed.
Displayable line/area information
A line is shown as example.
a) Line ID
b) Line code
Next step
Page changes to the DTM page.
Map View Settings,
DTM page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Display DTM
in map
Check box
When this box is checked, DTM triangles are
shown within the Map page of the Stakeout,
Reference Line, Road or Rail application.

Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature
The setting of for this check box is linked
to the setting for the Show DTM on map
check box in Use heights from DTM
(Roads, Tools Menu).
429
Field
Option
Description
Colour
Selectable list
Defines the colour of the active DTM layer
boundary.
Next step
Page changes to the Alignments page.
Map View Settings,
Alignments page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Display align- Check box
ments
Line ID
Check box
Description
Determines if alignments are displayed in
MapView.
Available if Display alignments is ticked. Determines if the ID of an alignment is displayed.
Vertical exag- Editable field
geration of
profiles
The exaggeration factor of the map. The value can
be between 0.1 and 50.
This setting only has an effect in applications where cross-section views are
displayed.
Display all
Check box
layers in
cross-section
view
When this box is checked, all layers of an alignment are displayed in a cross section view.

Next step
Page changes to the CAD import page.
Map View Settings,
CAD import page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Point prefix,
Line prefix or
Area prefix
Editable field
The identifier with up to four characters is added
in front of the ID of the imported CAD points,
lines or areas.
Create points Check box
at the vertices
of lines
Height to
exclude
Editable field
Apply height Check box
to 2D CAD
data on import
Height to
apply
Editable field
Option if points will be created at vertices of the
imported line/arc/polyline elements.
Height values inside the DXF file are considered
invalid and will not be converted.
When this box is checked, a height can be defined
which is then applied to all imported 2D CAD
points.
Available when Apply height to 2D CAD data on
import is checked. The height to apply to 2D CAD
points.
Next step
Page changes to the Map images page.
Map View Settings,
Map images page
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to return to the screen from where this
screen was accessed.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature
430
Key
Description
Images
To select the background image to be used. Opens Map images.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Display map
image
Check box
When this box is checked, a geo-referenced background image is displayed behind the map.
At least one image file (*.jpg + *.jgw,
*.archive) must have been transferred to
the internal memory. Refer to .

Next step
OK confirms the selections and returns to the previous screen.
Map images
Access
Press Images in Map View Settings, Map images page.
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to return to the screen from where this
screen was accessed.
None or All
To deactivate or activate all background images.
Delete
To delete the highlighted background image.
Use
To activate and deactivate the highlighted background image.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Image
The name of the background image.
Hierarchy of listing = hierarchy in the map:
• Names alphabetically
• Numbers
The file that is on top of the list is shown on the top in the map.
Size (kB)
The size of the background image in kilobytes.
View in map
Use background image or not. Use changes between the options.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature
431
38.4
MapView Components
38.4.1
Screen Area
Standard screen
a
c
a) North arrow
b) Scale bar
c) Toolbar
b
SYS13_030
Scale bar
Symbol
Description
Scale of the current screen. The minimum is 0.1 m. There is no maximum
for the zoom but the scale cannot display values greater than 99000 m.
In this case the value displayed will be >99000 m.
North arrow
Symbol
Description
North arrow. North is always orientated towards the top of the screen.
Toolbar
Symbol
Description
Icon toolbar. Refer to "38.4.2 Keys, Softkeys and Toolbar" for more information about the functionality of the icons in the toolbar.
Point with focus
Symbol
Description
The point that has the focus.
Line/area with focus
Symbol
Description
The line/area that has the focus is bolder than other lines shown in blue
for the full and in orange for Lite version of SmartWorx Viva.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature
432
Rover
Symbol
Description
Available in survey mode. Position of the rover. The rover path is shown
as dotted line.
Prism
Symbol
Description
Measured position. The orientation of the instrument is shown as dotted
line.
Instrument station
Symbol
Description
Position of the instrument station.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature
433
38.4.2
Keys, Softkeys and Toolbar
Description
Standard functionality is provided by softkeys, keys and a toolbar within MapView.
The softkeys are available regardless of the mode in which MapView was accessed and
always perform the same functions.
Icons are available in a toolbar. The toolbar is always located on the right side of the
screen. Some of the functions performed by the icons can also be replicated using a
softkey or key in the same mode as when the icon appears. The softkey/key equivalent
of each icon, if one exists, are indicated in the following table.
Overview of keys,
softkeys and icons
The softkeys described in this table are standard on all MapView screens. For descriptions of mode-specific softkeys, see appropriate chapters.
Icon
Key or Softkey
Description
-
To scroll the MapView toolbar.
1 or Fn Refrsh in The fit icon fits all displayable data, according to
some applications filters and the map configuration, into the screen
area, using the largest possible scale.
2
3
To zoom into the map.
Pressing ESC stops the zooming process.

To zoom out of the map.
 Pressing ESC stops the zooming process.
-
The windowing icon zooms to a specified area
window. An area window can be drawn by dragging the stylus on the screen in a diagonal line to
make a rectangular area or by tapping twice on
the screen to define diagonally opposite corners
of a rectangular area. This action causes the
screen to zoom to the selected area.
5
To centre the selected point, the GPS rover, the
TPS target or TPS instrument.
-
To select multiple objects. Points within the
rectangular area are always selected. Depending
on the application also lines, for example dbx
lines, Road/Rail job lines or lines from background
maps, and areas are selected.
Drag the stylus on the screen in a diagonal line to
make a rectangular area.
• Drag from top left to bottom right to select
all lines inside the rectangular window.
• Drag from bottom right to top left to select
all lines crossing the rectangular window.
Fn Config..
To configure MapView. Refer to "38.3 Configuring
MapView".
Fn Layrs..
To turn layers of background maps (CAD files) on
and off. Refer to "5.2 Creating a New Job" for
information on CAD files.
-
To import CAD files for background only maps.
Refer to "5.2 Creating a New Job".
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature
434
Icon
Key or Softkey
Description
-
To switch the view. Available in some applications, for example Reference Plane, Road or Rail.
-
0
To make the MapView do a complete redraw.
-
Fn Filter..
To change the filter settings. Refer to "6.6 Point
Sorting and Filters".
38.4.3
Point Symbols
Description
When Display points is checked in Map View Settings, Points page, points are
displayed, in all modes, according to their class. A list of the point types available, and
their description, is available.
Access
Press Symbol in Map View Settings, Points page.
Symbols
Symbol
Description
3D control point is a point of class CTRL with full coordinate triplet.
2D control point is a position only point of class CTRL.
Adjusted point is a point of class ADJ.
Base point is a point of class REF.
Average point is a point of class AVGE.
Measured point is a point of class MEAS.
Single Point Position uploaded from LGO.
Navigated point is a point of class NAV.
Estimated point is a point of class EST.

Points of class None or points of class Ctrl/Meas with a height only component cannot
be displayed in MapView.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature
435
38.5
Selecting Points, Lines and Areas
Selecting a
point/line/area
using the touch
screen step-by-step
The instructions for selecting a point using the softkeys can be applied for lines and
areas.
Step
Description
1.
Go to Data:, Map page.

2.

3.
Display
If no point field is highlighted on the previous page
when the Map page is accessed, then any point that is
selected will be assigned to the first point field on the
previous page, the second point to the second point
field, etc.
If a point field is highlighted when the Map page is
accessed then the point selected will be assigned to
that field.
Tap on the point to be selected.
When there are multiple points within the same area
and the precise selection is unclear, tapping on the
point will access Select Point.
Have multiple points been selected?
• If yes, continue with step 4.
• If no, continue with step 5.
4.
Select Point
Point ID The ID of the points within range of the point
selection.
Point code The code of the points within range of the
point selection.

Select a
point/line/area
without touch
screen
Select the desired point.
More to display information about the point code, the
3D coordinate quality and class, the time the point was
stored and the date the point was stored.
5.
OK returns to Data:, Map page with the focus on the
selected point.
6.
A square is centred on the selected point and the point
parameter text is highlighted.
Without touch screen or when Use the touch screen is not checked in Screen & Audio
Settings, Screen page, points, lines and areas can only be selected using the
selectable lists.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature
436
38.6
Context Menu
Access
The context menu is available in Survey, COGO, Stakeout (points and DTM), Reference
Line, Roads and Data Management.
On a Map page hold down the supplied stylus on an object for 0.5 second.
Options in the
context menu
The options available in the context menu depend on the object and the application.
Option
Available in
Description
Import
•
•
•
•
•
•
Imports the selected CAD object into the
DBX. The object is imported to the job the
CAD is attached to.
The entities the object is imported with are
displayed.
Data Management
COGO
Reference Line
Stakeout
Survey
Roads
The import settings are configured in Map
View Settings, CAD import page. Refer to
"38.3 Configuring MapView".
Information..
•
•
•
•
•
•
Manage layers.. •
•
•
•
•
•
Data Management Displays the entities of the object.
COGO
Reference Line
Stakeout
Survey
Roads
Data Management Opens the CAD Layers screen and highlights the layer to which the object belongs.
COGO
Refer to "CAD Layers".
Reference Line
Stakeout
Survey
Roads
Stake point..
• Stakeout
Imports the selected point to the control job
and selects it for staking immediately.
Stake vertices..
• Stakeout
Available when Create points at the vertices
of lines is checked in Map View Settings,
CAD import page.
Imports the selected line/area, along with
the new points being created at the vertices.
The vertices are imported in a sequential
order following the direction of the line. The
first point created is the point automatically
selected to be staked. The next point to be
staked is the next vertex along the line.
Use as CL
• Import Alignment To select/deselect the highlighted line as
Data
external chainage centreline.
Use as Track CL • Import Alignment To select/deselect the highlighted line as
Data
track centreline.
Use as left
• Import Alignment To select/deselect the highlighted line as
Rail/Use as right
Data
left/right rail.
Rail
Clear selected
object
• Import Alignment To remove the highlight from the highlighted
Data
line.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature
437
Option
Available in
Description
Turn to point
•
To display the current direction as dashed
line. A point on the Map page can then be
tapped and the instrument turns to this
direction.
in survey
mode.
If Target aiming: Automatic the instrument
does an ATR search. If Target aiming: Lock
the instrument tries to lock on to a prism.
Turn to here
•
in survey
mode.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature
To display the current direction as dashed
line. A location on the Map page can then be
tapped and the instrument turns to this
direction.
438
38.7
Viewing Results
Description
MapView can be used to view the results of an application. Results are shown in black,
all other information, that is displayable, is shown in grey.
Example of results
displayed in
MapView
Application
Display
COGO Intersection, Double
bearing
Description
Intersecting lines
with known bearings from known
points
COGO line
calculation,
Segmentation
Points defining
the line and those
points created on
the line
COGO Shift,
Rotate & Scale
Original points in
grey, calculated
COGO points in
black
COGO Area
Division
Points from the
area and the area
division are black,
other points are
grey
Reference
Plane, Edit
Reference
Plane
A dashed
rectangle indicates the face
view of the plane.
Sets of Angles,
Calculating
Angles
Directions from
station to sets of
angle points
Setup
Directions to
resection points.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature
439
39
Tap Map
Description
Tap Map is an extended MapView regarding the context menus.
Tap Map can easily be accessed from the Main Menu.
The configuration and the toolbar of Tap Map are identical with those of MapView.
Access
In Main Menu, press Map.
Tap Map
Hold down the supplied stylus on an object for 0.5 second.
Refer to "38.4.1 Screen Area" for information on the screen area and the toolbar.
Options in the
context menu
Key
Description
OK
To return to the Main Menu.
Jobs
To define if data from the active working or control job, Road job or
DTM job is shown. And, for Road and DTM jobs to define the layer of
which data is displayed in the Tap Map screen.
Fn Config..
To configure Tap Map. Refer to "38.3 Configuring MapView".
Fn Layrs..
To turn layers of background maps (CAD files) on and off. Refer to
"5.2 Creating a New Job" for information on CAD files and CAD background maps.
The options available in the context menu depend on the object.
Multi selection is only possible when lines are closed.

Tap and hold on no object and no other object is currently selected
Viva Series, Tap Map
Option
Description
Create point here
To open the New Point screen. Refer to "New Point, Coords
page".
Turn to here
The instrument turns to the direction of the tapped
point or pixel. The CAD element that was tapped is NOT
imported.
If Target aiming: Automatic the instrument does an ATR
search. If Target aiming: Lock the instrument tries to lock on
to a prism.
440
Tap on a point
Option
Description
Turn to here
The instrument turns to the direction of the tapped
point or pixel. The CAD element that was tapped is NOT
imported.
If Target aiming: Automatic the instrument does an ATR
search. If Target aiming: Lock the instrument tries to lock on
to a prism.
Bearing & dist from
pt..
To open the Traverse Input of COGO. The tapped point is
displayed in the field From. Refer to "Traverse Input, Input
page".
Check point..
To open the Check Point screen. Refer to "Check
Point".
Stake point..
Available when a DBX or CAD point was tapped. To open the
Stakeout application. The tapped point is the point to be
staked. Refer to "Stakeout, Stake page".
Change to arc (mid pt) Not for CAD points. To create an arc in the line to which the
point belongs. The arc is created running through the
selected point and the point before and the point after. This
functionality is only possible if the point:
• belongs to a line or area.
• is not the first or last point in the line or area.
• is not currently the middle point of an arc in that line.
Remove arc
Not for CAD points. To remove the arc of which the tapped
point is the centre point. This functionality is only possible if
the selected point belongs to a DBX line or area and is
currently the middle point of an arc in that line.
Edit point..
To open the Edit Point: screen. Refer to"Edit Point:, Coords
page".
Import
For CAD points. Imports the selected point into the DBX. The
point is imported to the job the CAD is attached to. The entities the point is imported with are displayed. The import
settings are configured in Map View Settings, CAD import
page. Refer to "Map View Settings, CAD import page".
Information..
For CAD points. Displays the entities of the point.
Manage layers..
For CAD points. To open the CAD Layers screen. Refer to
"CAD Layers".
Delete point
To delete the tapped point.
Clear selected object
To remove the highlight from all highlighted objects.
Two points selected
Viva Series, Tap Map
Option
Description
Create line
To create a line from the selected points. The points are
added in the order in which they were tapped.
Compute inverse..
To open the Inverse Point to Point screen. Refer to "Inverse
Point to Point/Inverse Point to Current Pos, Inverse page".
Segment line..
To open the Define Line Segmentation screen. Refer to
"Create Line, Input page".
441
Option
Description
Import
For CAD points. Imports the selected point into the DBX. The
point is imported to the job the CAD is attached to. The entities the point is imported with are displayed. The import
settings are configured in Map View Settings, CAD import
page. Refer to "Map View Settings, CAD import page".
Delete point
To delete the tapped point.
Clear selected objects To remove the highlight from all highlighted objects.
Three points selected
Option
Description
Create line
For CAD points. To create a line from the selected points. The
points are added in the order in which they were tapped.
Create area
For CAD points. To create an area from the selected points.
The points are added in the order in which they were tapped.
Clear selected objects To remove the highlight from all highlighted objects.
One line/area selected
Option
Description
Use in Roads
To stake/check a (local) line/(local) manual slope.
Use in Reference Line To stake/measure a line (with slope), to stake a grid from the
line or to select a stake/measure task.
Open line/Open area
To open the selected line/area. If a CAD line/area was
selected, then the CAD line is first imported to the DBX.
Edit line../Edit area..
To edit the line/area properties. Refer to "Edit Line, General
page".
Stake vertices..
Available when Create points at the vertices of lines is
checked in Map View Settings, CAD import page.
Imports the selected line/area, along with the new points
being created at the vertices.
The vertices are imported in a sequential order following the
direction of the line. The first point created is the point automatically selected to be staked. The next point to be staked
is the next vertex along the line.
Measure to line/Stake For CAD lines/areas. To measure/stake a line, segment, slope
to line
line or slope segment or to stake a grid.
Import
For CAD lines/areas. Imports the selected line/area into the
DBX. The line/area is imported to the job the CAD is attached
to. The entities the line/area is imported with are displayed.
The import settings are configured in Map View Settings,
CAD import page. Refer to "Map View Settings, CAD import
page".
Information..
For CAD lines/areas. Displays the entities of the line/area.
Manage layers..
For CAD lines/areas. To open the CAD Layers screen. Refer
to "CAD Layers".
View line details..
For Road lines. To view and edit the design data. Refer to
"View & Edit Data".
Delete line/Delete area To delete the line/area.
Viva Series, Tap Map
442
Option
Description
Clear selected object
To remove the highlight from all highlighted objects.
Several lines selected
Overview of icons in
the drawing toolbar
Option
Description
Delete objects
To delete all highlighted objects.
Clear selected object
To remove the highlight from all highlighted objects.
If Display drawing toolbar is checked in Map View Settings, General page, icons are
available in the drawing toolbar. The drawing toolbar is always located on the left side
of the screen.
Icon
Description
To scroll the MapView toolbar.
To create a line. After storing the new line, all existing lines which are
open are closed. If a line is open, then measured points are assigned
to the line.
To create an area. After storing the new area, all existing areas which
are open are closed. If an area is open, then measured points are
assigned to the area.
Available if objects are closed. To open the highlighted object
(lines/areas).
Available if objects are open. To close the highlighted object
(lines/areas).
Available if a line/area is open. To create a straight line between the
last point of a line to the new point being tapped or surveyed.
Available if a line/area is open. To create an arc from the next two
points which are tapped or surveyed. This icon is unavailable if the
currently open line or area contains no points.
Available if a line/area is open. To create an arc from the next three
points which are tapped or surveyed.
Viva Series, Tap Map
443
40
Applications - General
Description
Applications are software packages supporting specific tasks. Available for both GPS
and TPS are:
• COGO
• Determine coord system
• TPS hidden point for TPS
• Ref plane & grid scan
• Roads (Alignment Editor, Roads - Stakeout, Roads - As built check, Rail - Stakeout,
Rail - As built check, Tunnel - Stakeout for TPS, Tunnel - As built check for TPS)
• Scanning for MS50 R2000
• Setup for TPS
• Sets of angles for TPS including monitoring
• Stakeout DTM
• Stakeout
• Stake points & DTM
• Measure to ref line / Stake to ref line
• Survey, including auto point and for GPS also hidden points
• Cross Section
• Traverse for TPS
• QuickVolume
• Volume calculations
• Customised applications
• Start base over known point for GPS
• Start base over last setup for GPS
• Start base over any point for GPS
For an explanation of the applications refer to the relevant chapters.
Loadable and nonloadable applications
Loadable applications:
Licence key
Some loadable applications are protected. They are activated through a specific
licence key, which can either be typed in Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Load
licence keys or the first time the application is started. Refer to "30.3 Load licence
keys" for information on how to type in or upload a licence key.
Customised applications
Customised applications can be developed locally using the GeoC++ development environment. Information on the GeoC++ development environment is available on
request from the Leica Geosystems representative.
Access to the Go to
Work! drop-down
menu

Non-loadable application:
•
•
•
•
Can be loaded onto the instrument.
Can be deleted from the instrument.
Are always available on the instrument.
Survey is a non-loadable application. To get an
update for the application, the system software
has to be reloaded.
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!.
OR
Press
.
The screens for each COGO.. calculation method can be accessed directly by pressing
a configured hot key or via the
key. The currently active configuration set and job
are used.
Viva Series, Applications - General
444
41
COGO
41.1
Overview
Description
COGO is an application to perform coordinate geometry calculations such as
• coordinates of points.
• bearings between points.
• distances between points.
The calculations can be made from
• existing point data in the job, known distances or known azimuths.
• manually measured points.
• entered coordinates.
In contrast to hidden point measurements within the Survey application, COGO is more
of a calculation program than a measuring program.

Changing coordinates of a point which has been previously used in COGO does not
result in the point being recomputed.
COGO calculation
methods
The COGO calculation methods are:
• Inverse
• Traverse
• Intersection
• Line and arc calculations
• Area division
• Shift, rotate & scale
• Angle
• Horizontal curve
• Triangle
Distances and
azimuths
Type of distances: The choices are
• Ground
• Grid
• Ellipsoidal
Type of azimuths: The azimuths are grid azimuths relative to the local grid.
Coding of COGO
points
• Thematical coding is available in the results screen after the COGO calculation.
Thematical coding of COGO points is identical to coding manually measured points.
Refer to "26 Coding" for information on coding.
• For the COGO calculation shift, rotate & scale, the codes from the original points
are taken over for the calculated COGO points.
Viva Series, COGO
445
41.2
Accessing COGO
Access
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO and select a COGO calculation method.
COGO calculation
methods
Description of the COGO calculation methods
COGO calculation
methods
Description
Inverse
To calculate the direction, the distance and the 3D coordinate differences between two known points (or one known
point and the current GPS position).
To calculate the direction, the distance and the 3D coordinate differences between a known point (or the current GPS
position) and a user-defined line.
To calculate the direction, the distance and the 3D coordinate differences between a known point (or the current GPS
position) and a user-defined arc.
For these calculations, only points with full coordinate
triplets or position only points can be used.
Traverse
To calculate the position of new points using
• the azimuth/bearing and the distance from a known
point. Offset optional.
• the angle and the distance from a known point. Offset
optional.
For these calculations, only points with full coordinate
triplets or position only points can be used.
Intersection
To calculate the position of an intersection point using
• bearings from two known points.
• a bearing and a distance from two known points.
• distances from two known points.
• four points.
• two TPS observation lines.
For these calculations, only points with full coordinate
triplets or position only points can be used.
Line & arc calculations To calculate;
• the centre point of an arc.
• an offset point from a distance along, and offset from,
an arc.
• an offset point from a distance along, and offset from, a
line.
• a base point on an arc of a known offset point.
• a base point on a line of a known offset point.
• new points along an arc by segmentation.
• new points along a line by segmentation.
Area division
To divide an area by a
• defined line.
• percentage.
• defined area size.
Viva Series, COGO
446
COGO calculation
methods
Description
Shift, rotate & scale
To calculate the coordinates of new points using shifts, rotation and scale.
The values for the shift, rotation and/or scale can either be
entered manually or computed using selected matching
points.
For these calculations, points with full coordinate triplets,
position only points or height only points can be used.
Viva Series, COGO
Angle
To calculate the angles that are defined by three points.
Horizontal curve
To calculate the missing parameters of a curve by the input
of the known parameters.
Triangle
To define a triangle by entering the three sides of the
triangle or by selecting three points.
447
41.3
Configuring COGO
Access
Press Fn Config.. in the Input screen of any COGO calculation method.
Configuration,
General page
This screen consists of the General page, Points & Quality page, TPS specific page,
Residuals page and the Report sheet page. The explanations given for the softkeys
given are valid for all pages.
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn About
To display information about the program name, the version number,
the date of the version, the copyright and the article number.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
The type of distances and offsets to be accepted
as input or displayed in the fields, and used in the
calculation.
Distance type
Grid
Distances are calculated as the trigonometric
distance between the position of two points. The
distance field is Horiz distance.
Ground
Distances are horizontal distances between two
points at the mean elevation parallel to the ellipsoid of the active coordinate system. The
distance field is Horiz dist (ground).
Ellipsoid
Distances are reduced to the ellipsoid. They are
calculated as the shortest distance between the
two points on the ellipsoid. A scale factor is
applied. The distance field is Horiz dist (ell).
In the attached coordinate system, a
projection, an ellipsoid and a transformation have to be defined to calculate grid,
ground and ellipsoid coordinates.

Use offsets
Viva Series, COGO
Yes or No
Activates the use of offsets in the COGO calculations. Editable fields for the offsets are available
in the Input screen of any COGO calculation
method.
448
Field
Option
Restart calcu- Check box
lation with last
used values
P1
Description
Available for Intersection and Line & arc calculations.
When this box is checked, after storing a result,
the Input page is displayed showing the previously used values.
d1
P2
d2
d3
a
SYS13_001
a Ellipsoid
Known
P1 First known point
P2 Second known point
Unknown
d1 Ground distance
d2 Ellipsoid distance
d3 Grid distance
Next step
Page changes to the Points & Quality page.
Configuration,
Points & Quality
page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Store
computed
COGO points
with class
Measured (Meas) Defines the point class of COGO calculated and
or Control (Ctrl) stored points as Measured (Meas) or Control
(Ctrl) triplets.
Position
quality for
computed
COGO point
Editable field
The estimated value for the position quality
assigned to all calculated COGO points which is
used for the averaging calculation.
Height quality Editable field
for computed
COGO point
The estimated value for the height quality
assigned to all calculated heights which is used
for the averaging calculation.
Next step
Page changes to the TPS specific page.
Configuration,
TPS specific page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Defines if the instrument measures the second
face automatically after storing the first.
Measure in
two faces
Yes
Viva Series, COGO
Description
After storing a measurement with Meas or Store
motorised instruments change face automatically, non-motorised instruments access Telescope Positioning. The measurements of face I
and face II are averaged on the base of face I. The
averaged value is stored.
449
Field
Option
Description
No
No automatic measurement in two faces.
Defines the height being used within TPS observations.
TPS observation Compute
height
Using average
Using an average of the two observations.
Use upper height Using the upper height.
Use lower height Using the lower height.
Next step
Page changes to the Residuals page.
Configuration,
Residuals page
This page applies to Shift, Rotate & Scale (Match Pts).
Description of fields
Field
Option
Easting
Editable field The limit above which Easting residuals will be flagged
as possible outliers.
Northing
Editable field The limit above which Northing residuals will be flagged
as possible outliers.
Elevation
Editable field The limit above which Height residuals will be flagged
as possible outliers.
Residual
Distbtn
The method by which the residuals of the control
points will be distributed throughout the transformation area.
None
Description
No distribution is made. Residuals remain with their
associated points.
1/distance, Distributes the residuals according to the distance
1/distance² between each control point and the newly transformed
point.
or
1/distance³/²
Multiquadratic
Distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic interpolation approach.
Next step
Page changes to the Report sheet page.
Configuration,
Report sheet page
Viva Series, COGO
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Create report
sheet
Check box
To generate a report sheet when the application is
exited.
A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected
format file.
450
Field
Option
Description
Report sheet
Selectable
list
Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name
of the file to which the data will be written. A report
sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active
memory device. The data is always appended to the
file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets
screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet
can be created and an existing report sheet can be
selected or deleted.
Format file to
use
Selectable
list
Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format
file defines which and how data is written to a report
sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file
must first be transferred from the data storage device
to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer
to "30.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how
to transfer a format file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files
screen where an existing format file can be selected or
deleted.
Next step
Page changes to the first page on this screen.

Viva Series, COGO
Azimuth is used throughout this chapter. This term should also always be considered
to mean Bearing.
451
41.4
COGO Calculation - Inverse Method
41.4.1
Selecting the Inverse Method
Access
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Inverse.
COGO Inverse
Key
Description
OK
To select a method and to continue with the subsequent screen.
Description of the Inverse methods
Inverse methods
Description
Point to point
The direction, the distance and the coordinate differences
between the two known points can be calculated depending
on the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets,
position only points and height only points can be used.
Elements that must be known are
• coordinates of two points.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be manually measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Point to current pos
The direction, distance and coordinate differences between
the current rover position and a known point can be calculated depending on the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points
can be used.
Elements that must be known are
• coordinates of one point.
The coordinates of the known point
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be manually measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Viva Series, COGO
452
Inverse methods
Description
Current pos to line
The direction, distance and coordinate differences between
the current position and a given line can be calculated
depending on the data available. Points with full coordinate
triplets, position only points and height only points can be
used.
Sufficient information must be known to define a line.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Point to line
The direction, distance and coordinate differences between
a known point and a given line can be calculated depending
on the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets,
position only points and height only points can be used.
Sufficient information to define a line and the coordinates
of one point must be known.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Point to arc
The direction, distance and coordinate differences between
the current position and a given arc can be calculated
depending on the data available. Points with full coordinate
triplets, position only points and height only points can be
used.
Sufficient information to define an arc and the coordinates
of one point must be known.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Current pos to arc
The direction, distance and coordinate differences between
a known point and a given arc can be calculated depending
on the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets,
position only points and height only points can be used.
Sufficient information must be known to define an arc.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Viva Series, COGO
453
41.4.2
Point to Point and Current Position to Point
Diagram
P1
Known
P0 First known point/current position
P1 Second known point
Unknown
α Direction from P0 to P1
d Horizontal distance between P0 and
P1
d
GS_001
Inverse Point to
Point/Inverse Point
to Current Pos,
Inverse page
P0
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to
select the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create
a new point.
----- is displayed for unavailable information, for example ∆ height cannot be calculated
if a position only point is used.
Key
Description
Store
To store the result.
Revers
To swap the From and To points around.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available
when From or To is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of fields
Viva Series, COGO
Field
Option
Description
From
Selectable list
The point ID of the first known point for the
COGO calculation.
Current position
Available for Inverse method: Point to current
pos.
454
Field
Option
Description
To
Selectable list
The point ID of the second known point for the
COGO calculation.
Current position
Available for Inverse method: Point to current
pos.
Display only
The direction from the first to the second known
point.
Horiz
Display only
distance,
Horiz dist
(ground) or
Horiz dist (ell)
The horizontal distance between the two known
points.
∆ height
Display only
The height difference between the two known
points.
Slope
distance
Display only
The slope distance between the two known
points.
Grade
Display only
The grade between the two known points.
∆ easting
Display only
The difference in Easting between the two known
points.
∆ northing
Display only
The difference in Northing between the two
known points.
Azimuth
Next step
Page changes to the Map page. The calculated distance between the two known
points is indicated.
Viva Series, COGO
455
41.4.3
Point to Line and Current Position to Line
Diagram
P1
P3
d1
d2
GS_003
Inverse Point to
Line/Inverse Current
Pos to Line,
Input page
Viva Series, COGO
P2
P0
Known
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Offset point
Unknown
P3 Base point
d1 Offset distance
d2 ∆Line distance
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to
select the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create
a new point.
----- is displayed for unavailable information, for example ∆ height cannot be calculated
if a position only point is used.
Key
Description
Calc
To calculate COGO point.
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two
existing points. Available if Azimuth or Horiz distance is highlighted.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available if
Azimuth or Horiz distance is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available if
Start point, End point or Offset point is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Modif..
To mathematically modify the values. Available if Azimuth or Horiz
distance is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
456
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Offset point
Selectable list
Available for Inverse to: Known Point. The offset
point.
Current position
Available for Inverse method: Current pos to line.
The method by which the line will be defined.
Create line
using
2 points
Uses two known points to define the line.
Pt, bearing & dist Defines the line using a known point, a distance
and an azimuth of the line.
Start point
Selectable list
The start point of the line.
End point
Selectable list
Available for Method: 2 points. The end point of
the line.
Azimuth
Editable field
Available for Method: Pt, bearing & dist. The
azimuth of the line.
Horiz
Editable field
distance,
Horiz dist
(ground) or
Horiz dist (ell)
Available for Method: Pt, bearing & dist. The horizontal distance from the start point to the end
point of the line.
Next step
Calc calculates and accesses Inverse Result.
Viva Series, COGO
457
Inverse Result,
Result page
Key
Description
Store
To store the result.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and
Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Offset point
Display only
Point ID of offset point or Current position.
Distance along
line
Display only
Horizontal distance from start point to base
point.
Offset
Display only
Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to
the right and negative to the left of the line.
Bearing to offset Display only
pt
Bearing from base point to offset point.
Line length
Display only
Length of line from start point to end point.
Line bearing
Display only
Bearing of line from start point to end point.
Easting and
Northing
Display only
The calculated coordinates.
Elevation
Display only
The height of the calculated point.
Next step
Page changes to the Plot page.
Viva Series, COGO
458
41.4.4
Point to Arc and Current Position to Arc
Diagram
P1
P3
d1
P2
d2
P0
GS_004
Inverse Point to
Arc/Inverse Current
Pos to Arc,
Input page
Viva Series, COGO
Known
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Offset point
Unknown
P3 Base point
d1 Offset-XX
d2 ∆ArcDist-XX
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to
select the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create
a new point.
----- is displayed for unavailable information, for example ∆ height cannot be calculated
if a position only point is used.
Key
Description
Calc
To calculate COGO point.
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two
existing points. Available if Radius, Arc length or Chord length is
highlighted.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available if
Radius, Arc length or Chord length is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available if
Start point, Second point, End point, Offset point or PI point is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Modif..
To mathematically modify the values. Available if Radius, Arc length
or Chord length is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
459
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Offset point
Selectable list
Available for Point to arc: Point to line. The offset
point.
Current position
Available for Inverse method: Current pos to arc.
The method by which the arc will be defined.
Create arc
using
3 points
Uses three known points to define the arc.
2 points & radius Defines the arc using two known points and a
radius of the arc.
2 tngnts & radius Defines the arc using two tangents and a radius
of the arc.
2 tngnts & arc
lngth
Defines the arc using two tangents and the length
of the arc.
2 tngnts & crd
lngth
Defines the arc using two tangents and the chord
of the arc.
Start point
Selectable list
The start point of the arc. Available for Method: 3
points and Method: 2 points & radius.
Second point
Selectable list
The second point of the arc. Available for
Method: 3 points.
End point
Selectable list
The end point of the arc. Available for Method: 3
points and Method: 2 points & radius.
Point 1
Selectable list
A point on the first tangent. Available for
Method: 2 tngnts & radius, Method: 2 tngnts &
arc lngth and Method: 2 tngnts & crd lngth.
PI point
Selectable list
The point of intersection of the two tangents.
Available for Method: 2 tngnts & radius, Method:
2 tngnts & arc lngth and Method: 2 tngnts & crd
lngth.
Point 2
Selectable list
A point on the second tangent. Available for
Method: 2 tngnts & radius, Method: 2 tngnts &
arc lngth and Method: 2 tngnts & crd lngth.
Radius
Editable field
The radius of the arc. Available for Method: 2
points & radius and Method: 2 tngnts & radius.
Arc length
Editable field
The length of the arc. Available for Method: 2
tngnts & arc lngth.
Chord length
Editable field
The length of the chord. Available for Method: 2
tngnts & crd lngth.
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses Inverse Result.
Viva Series, COGO
460
Inverse Result,
Result page
Key
Description
Store
To store the result.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and
Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Offset point
Display only
Point ID of offset point for Inverse to: Known
Point or current position.
Distance along
arc
Display only
Horizontal distance along the arc from start point
to base point.
Offset
Display only
Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to
the right and negative to the left of the line.
Bearing to offset Display only
pt
Bearing of offset point from base point to offset
point.
Arc radius
Display only
Computed radius of arc.
Arc length
Display only
Computed length of arc.
Easting and
Northing
Display only
The calculated coordinates.
Elevation
Display only
The height of the calculated point.
Next step
Page changes to the Plot page.
Viva Series, COGO
461
41.5
COGO Calculation - Traverse Method
Description
Elements that must be known are
• the coordinates of one point.
• the direction from the known point to the COGO point.
• the distance from the known point to the COGO point.
• offsets, if necessary and configured.
The coordinates of the known point
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be manually measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
The direction from the known point to the COGO point can be an azimuth or an angle.
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used. Position only
is calculated, height can be typed in.
A
•
•
•
Viva Series, COGO
COGO traverse calculation can be calculated for
a single point.
multiple points. Several single points are calculated in one sequence.
sideshots.
462
Diagram
COGO traverse calculation with offset for a single point
P3
d3
P1
Known
P0 Known point
α Direction from P0 to P1
d1 Distance between P0 and P1
d2 Positive offset to the right
d3 Negative offset to the left
Unknown
P1 COGO point without offset
P2 COGO point with positive offset
P3 COGO point with negative offset
d2
P2
d1
P0
GS_005
COGO traverse calculation without offset for multiple points
d4
P1
d1
d2
P4
P2
d3
P0
P3
GS_002
Traverse Input,
Input page
Viva Series, COGO
Known
P0 Known point
α1 Direction from P0 to P1
α2 Direction from P1 to P2
α3 Direction from P2 to P3
α4 Direction from P2 to P4
d1 Distance between P0 and P1
d2 Distance between P1 and P2
d3 Distance between P2 and P3
d4 Distance between P2 and P4
Unknown
P1 First COGO point
P2 Second COGO point
P3 Third COGO point - sideshot
P4 Fourth COGO point
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to
select the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create
a new point.
Key
Description
Calc
To calculate the result.
463
Key
Description
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two
existing points. Available when Azimuth, Horiz distance, Offset or
Angle right is highlighted.
SShot
To calculate the point as a sideshot.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available
when Azimuth, Horiz distance, Offset or Angle right is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available
when From or Backsight is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Modif..
To add, subtract, multiply and divide values. Available when Azimuth,
Horiz distance, Offset or Angle right is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Method
Azimuth
The direction from the known point to the COGO
point is an azimuth.
Angle right
The direction from the known point to the COGO
point is an angle.
From
Selectable list
The point ID of the known point for the COGO
calculation.
Backsight
Selectable list
The point ID of a point used as backsight. Available for Angle right.
Angle right
Editable field
The angle between Backsight and the new COGO
point to be calculated from the point selected as
From: A positive value is for clockwise angles. A
negative value is for anticlockwise angles. Available for Angle right.
Azimuth
Editable field
The direction from the known point to the COGO
point.
Horiz
Editable field
distance,
Horiz dist
(ground) or
Horiz dist (ell)
The horizontal distance between the known point
and the COGO point.
Editable field
The offset of the COGO point from the line of
direction. A positive offset is to the right, a negative offset is to the left. Available for Use offsets:
Yes in Configuration, General page.
Offset
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses Traverse Results.
Viva Series, COGO
464
Traverse Results,
Result page
Key
Description
Store
To store the result.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Stake..
To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated
COGO point.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and
Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates.
Fn IndivID
For an individual point ID independent of the ID template. Fn Run
changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template.
Fn Quit
To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Point ID
Editable field
The identifier for the COGO point depending on
the point ID template configured for the currently
active instrument type in ID Templates. The point
ID can be changed.
Easting and
Northing
Display only
The calculated coordinates.
Elevation
Editable field
The height of the known point used in the COGO
calculation is suggested. A height value to be
stored with the calculated point can be typed in.
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
On the Plot page, an arrow points from the known point to the calculated COGO point.
Store stores the result.
Viva Series, COGO
465
41.6
COGO Calculation - Intersection Method
41.6.1
Selecting the Intersection Method
Access
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Intersection.
COGO Intersection
Key
Description
OK
To select a method and to continue with the subsequent screen.
Description of the Intersection methods
Intersection methods Description
Double bearing
Calculates the intersection point of two lines. A line is
defined by a point and a direction.
Elements that must be known are
• the coordinates of two points.
• the direction from these known points to the COGO
point.
• offsets if necessary and configured.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be manually measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points
can be used. Position only is calculated, height can be typed
in.
Viva Series, COGO
466
Intersection methods Description
Double distance
Calculates the intersection point of two circles. The circles
are defined by the known point as the centre point and the
distance from the known point to the COGO point as the
radius.
Elements that must be known are
• the coordinates of two points.
• the distance from the known points to the COGO point.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be manually measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points
can be used.
Bearing & distance
Calculates the intersection point of a line and a circle. The
line is defined by a point and a direction. The circle is defined
by the centre point and the radius.
Elements that must be known are
• the coordinates of points.
• the direction from one known point to the COGO point.
• the distance from the second known point to the COGO
point.
• offsets if necessary and configured.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be manually measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points
can be used.
By points
Calculates the intersection point of two lines. A line is
defined by two points.
Elements that must be known are
• the coordinates of four points.
• offsets of the lines if necessary and configured.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be manually measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points
can be used.
Viva Series, COGO
467
Intersection methods Description
TPS observations
Calculates the intersection point of two lines. A line is
defined by a TPS station and a TPS measurement from this
station.
Elements that must be known are
• the coordinates of two points.
• azimuths of the lines.
The coordinates of the known points
• must be taken from the working job.
• must be TPS station points.
The azimuths of the lines
• must be TPS measurements from the known points.
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points
can be used.
Viva Series, COGO
468
41.6.2
Intersection with Double Bearing
Diagram
P2
Known
P0 First known point
P1 Second known point
α1 Direction from P0 to P2
α2 Direction from P1 to P2
Unknown
P2 COGO point
P0
P1
GS_006
Intersection Double
Bearing,
Input page
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to
select the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create
a new point.
Key
Description
Calc
To calculate the result.
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two
existing points. Available when Azimuth or Offset is highlighted.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available
when Azimuth or Offset is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available
when 1st point or 2nd point is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Modif..
To add, subtract, multiply and divide values. Available when Azimuth
or Offset is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of fields
Viva Series, COGO
Field
Option
Description
1st point
Selectable list
The point ID of the first known point for the
COGO calculation.
469
Field
Option
Description
2nd point
Selectable list
The point ID of the second known point for the
COGO calculation.
Azimuth
Editable field
The direction from the first known point to the
COGO point.
Offset
Editable field
The offset of the COGO point from the line of
direction. A positive offset is to the right, a negative offset is to the left. Available for Use offsets:
Yes in Configuration, General page.
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result.
Viva Series, COGO
470
Intersection Result,
Result page
Key
Description
Store
To store the result.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Stake..
To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated
COGO point.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and
Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates.
Fn IndivID
For an individual point ID independent of the ID template. Fn Run
changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template.
Fn Quit
To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Point ID
Editable field
The identifier for the COGO point depending on
the point ID template configured for Auxiliary
points in ID Templates. The point ID can be
changed.
Easting and
Northing
Display only
The calculated coordinates.
Elevation
Editable field
The height of the first point used in the COGO
calculation is suggested. A height value to be
stored with the calculated point can be typed in.
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
On the Plot page, arrows point from the known points to the calculated COGO point.
Store stores the result.
Viva Series, COGO
471
41.6.3
Intersection with Double Distance
Diagram
r1
Known
P0 First known point
P1 Second known point
r1 Radius, as defined by the distance
from P0 to P2
r2 Radius, as defined by the distance
from P1 to P2
Unknown
P2 First COGO point
P3 Second COGO point
P2
P0
r2
P3
P1
GS_008
Intersection Double
Distance,
Input page
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to
select the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create
a new point.
Key
Description
Calc
To calculate the result.
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two
existing points. Available when Horiz distance is highlighted.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available
when Horiz distance is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available
when 1st point or 2nd point is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Modif..
To add, subtract, multiply and divide values. Available when Horiz
distance is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of fields
Viva Series, COGO
Field
Option
Description
1st point
Selectable list
The point ID of the first known point for the
COGO calculation.
472
Field
Option
Description
2nd point
Selectable list
The point ID of the second known point for the
COGO calculation.
Horiz
Editable field
distance,
Horiz dist
(ground) or
Horiz dist (ell)
The horizontal distance between the known
points and the COGO point.
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result.
Viva Series, COGO
473
Intersection Result,
Result 1/Result 2
page
Key
Description
Store
To store the result.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Result1 or
Result2
To view the first and second result.
Stake..
To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated
COGO point.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and
Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates.
Fn IndivID
For an individual point ID independent of the ID template. Fn Run
changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template.
Fn Quit
To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Point ID
Editable field
The identifier for the COGO point depending on
the point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in
ID Templates. The point ID can be changed.
Easting and
Northing
Display only
The calculated coordinates.
Elevation
Editable field
The height of the first point used in the COGO
calculation is suggested. A height value to be
stored with the calculated point can be typed in.
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
On the Plot page, the calculated COGO points are shown.
Store stores the result.
Viva Series, COGO
474
41.6.4
Intersection with Bearing - Distance
Diagram
P2
r
P3
P1
P0
GS_007
Intersection Bearing
& Dist,
Input page
Viva Series, COGO
Known
P0 First known point
P1 Second known point
α Direction from P0 to P2
r
Radius, as defined by the distance
from P1 to P2
Unknown
P2 First COGO point
P3 Second COGO point
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to
select the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create
a new point.
Key
Description
Calc
To calculate the result.
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two
existing points. Available when Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset is
highlighted.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available
when Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available
when 1st point or 2nd point is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Modif..
To add, subtract, multiply and divide values. Available when Azimuth,
Horiz distance or Offset is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
475
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
1st point
Selectable list
The point ID of the first known point for the
COGO calculation.
2nd point
Selectable list
The point ID of the second known point for the
COGO calculation.
Azimuth
Editable field
The direction from the first known point to the
COGO point.
Offset
Editable field
The offset of the COGO point from the line of
direction. A positive offset is to the right, a negative offset is to the left. Available for Use offsets:
Yes in Configuration, General page.
Horiz
Editable field
distance,
Horiz dist
(ground) or
Horiz dist (ell)
The horizontal distance between the known point
and the COGO point.
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result.
Viva Series, COGO
476
Intersection Result,
Result 1 page
Key
Description
Store
To store the result.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Result1 or
Result2
To view the first and second result.
Stake..
To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated
COGO point.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and
Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates.
Fn IndivID
For an individual point ID independent of the ID template. Fn Run
changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template.
Fn Quit
To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Point ID
Editable field
The identifier for the COGO point depending on
the point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in
ID Templates. The point ID can be changed.
Easting and
Northing
Display only
The calculated coordinates.
Elevation
Editable field
The height of the first point used in the COGO
calculation is suggested. A height value to be
stored with the calculated point can be typed in.
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
On the Plot page, an arrow points from the first known points to the calculated COGO
point.
Store stores the result.
Viva Series, COGO
477
41.6.5
Intersection with By Points
Diagram
P1
a
P3
b
P4
P2
GS_009
Intersection By
Points,
Input page
P0
Known
P0 First known point
P1 Second known point
P2 Third known point
P3 Fourth known point
a Line from P0 to P1
b Line from P2 to P3
Unknown
P4 COGO point
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to
select the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create
a new point.
Key
Description
Calc
To calculate the result.
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two
existing points. Available when Offset is highlighted.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available
when Offset is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available
when 1st point, 2nd point, 3rd point or 4th point is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Modif..
To add, subtract, multiply and divide values. Available when Offset is
highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of fields
Viva Series, COGO
Field
Option
Description
1st point
Selectable list
The point ID of the known start point of the first
line for the COGO calculation.
478
Field
Option
Description
2nd point
Selectable list
The point ID of the known end point of the first
line for the COGO calculation.
3rd point
Selectable list
The point ID of the known start point of the
second line for the COGO calculation.
4th point
Selectable list
The point ID of the known end point of the
second line for the COGO calculation.
Offset
Editable field
The offset of the line in the direction 1st point to
2nd point or 3rd point to 4th point. A positive
offset is to the right, a negative offset is to the
left. Available for Use offsets: Yes in Configuration, General page.
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result.
Viva Series, COGO
479
Intersection Result,
Result page
Key
Description
Store
To store the result.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Stake..
To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated
COGO point.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and
Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates.
Fn IndivID
For an individual point ID independent of the ID template. Fn Run
changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template.
Fn Quit
To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Point ID
Editable field
The identifier for the COGO point depending on
the point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in
ID Templates. The point ID can be changed.
Easting and
Northing
Display only
The calculated coordinates.
Elevation
Editable field
The height of the first point used in the COGO
calculation is suggested. A height value to be
stored with the calculated point can be typed in.
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
On the Plot page, two solid lines are displayed.
Store stores the result.
Viva Series, COGO
480
41.6.6
Intersection with TPS Observation - TPS Observation
Diagram
1
P2
P0
Known
P0 First known point (TPS station)
P1 Second known point (TPS station)
α1 Direction from P0 to P2
α2 Direction from P1 to P2
Unknown
P2 COGO point
2
P1
TS_001
Intersection TPS
Obs,
Input page
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to
select the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create
a new point.
Key
Description
Calc
To calculate the result.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available
when 1st TPS station or 2nd TPS station is highlighted and the
selected station is the active TPS setup.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of fields
Viva Series, COGO
Field
Option
Description
1st TPS
station
Selectable list
The point ID of the first TPS station which is the
known start point of the first line for the COGO
calculation.
TPS intersection observations
Selectable list
The point ID of the TPS measurement which is
the known end point of the first line for the COGO
calculation.
Azimuth
Display only
The azimuth related to the known end point of
the first/second line for the COGO calculation.
481
Field
Option
Description
2nd TPS
station
Selectable list
The point ID of the second TPS station which is
the known start point of the second line for the
COGO calculation.
TPS intersection observations
Selectable list
The point ID of the TPS measurement which is
the known end point of the second line for the
COGO calculation.
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result.
Viva Series, COGO
482
41.7
COGO Calculation - Line/Arc Calculations Method
41.7.1
Selecting the Line/Arc Method
Access
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Line & arc calculations.
COGO Line/Arc
Calculations
Key
Description
OK
To select a method and to continue with the subsequent screen.
Description of the Line/Arc methods
Line/Arc Methods
Description
Calculate arc centre
Calculates the coordinates of the centre of the arc.
Elements that must be known are
• coordinates of three points
OR
• coordinates of two points
• radius to the two points
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Calculate arc offset pt
Calculates the coordinates of a new point after input of arc
and offset values in relation to an arc.
Elements that must be known are
• coordinates of three points.
• offsets.
OR
• coordinates of two points.
• radius to the two points.
• offsets.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Viva Series, COGO
483
Line/Arc Methods
Description
Calculate line offset pt Calculates the coordinates of a new point after input of
station and offset values in relation to a line.
Elements that must be known are
• coordinates of two points.
• offsets.
OR
• coordinates of one point.
• bearing and distance from one point.
• offsets.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Calculate arc base pt
Calculates the coordinates of the base point, station and
offset of a point in relation to an arc.
Elements that must be known are
• coordinates of three points
• coordinates of an offset point
OR
• coordinates of two points
• radius to the two points
• coordinates of an offset point
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Calculate line base pt
Calculates the base point, station and offset of a point in
relation to a line.
Elements that must be known are
• coordinates of two points and an offset point.
OR
• coordinates of one point and an offset point
• bearing and distance from one point
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Segment an arc
Viva Series, COGO
This method is similar to Segment a line. See the following
row.
484
Line/Arc Methods
Description
Segment a line
Calculates the coordinates of new points on a line.
Elements that must be known are
• coordinates of the start and the end point of the line
OR
• a bearing and distance from a known point that define
the line
AND EITHER
• the number of segments dividing the line
OR
• a segment length for the line.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Viva Series, COGO
485
41.7.2
Arc Calculation
Diagram for arc
centre
d2
P1
d1
P0
P2
GS_010
P0
P1
P2
d1
d2
Start point
End point
Arc centre
Arc radius
Arc length
P0
P1
P2
P3
d1
d2
Start point
End point
Offset point
Base point
Offset
Distance along arc
Diagram for arc
base point and
offset point
P1
P3
d1
P2
d2
P0
GS_004
Create Arc,
Input page
The softkeys are similar to line calculation. Refer to "41.7.3 Calculate Line Offset Point
and Calculate Line Base Point" for information on softkeys.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
The method by which the arc will be defined.
Create arc
using
3 points
Uses three known points to define the arc.
2 points & radius Defines the arc using two known points and a
radius
of the arc.
2 tngnts & radius Defines the arc using two tangents and a radius
of the arc.
Start point
Viva Series, COGO
2 tngnts & arc
lngth
Defines the arc using two tangents and the length
of the arc.
2 tngnts & crd
lngth
Defines the arc using two tangents and the chord
of the arc.
Selectable list
The start point of the arc. Available for Create arc
using: 3 points and Create arc using: 2 points &
radius.
486
Field
Option
Description
Second point
Selectable list
The second point of the arc. Available for Create
arc using: 3 points.
End point
Selectable list
The end point of the arc. Available for Create arc
using: 3 points and Create arc using: 2 points &
radius.
Point 1
Selectable list
A point on the first tangent. Available for Create
arc using: 2 tngnts & radius, Create arc using: 2
tngnts & arc lngth and Create arc using: 2 tngnts
& crd lngth.
PI point
Selectable list
The point of intersection of the two tangents.
Available for Create arc using: 2 tngnts & radius,
Create arc using: 2 tngnts & arc lngth and Create
arc using: 2 tngnts & crd lngth
Point 2
Selectable list
A point on the second tangent. Available for
Create arc using: 2 tngnts & radius, Create arc
using: 2 tngnts & arc lngth and Create arc using:
2 tngnts & crd lngth.
Radius
Editable field
The radius of the arc. Available for Create arc
using: 2 points & radius and Create arc using: 2
tngnts & radius.
Arc length
Editable field
The length of the arc. Available for Create arc
using: 2 tngnts & arc lngth.
Chord length
Editable field
The length of the chord. Available for Create arc
using: 2 tngnts & crd lngth.
Next step
IF
THEN
Calc accesses Centre of Arc Result.
Line/arc method:
Calculate arc centre
Line/arc method:
OK accesses Calculations Input.
Calculate arc offset
pt
Line/arc method:
Calculate arc base
pt
Calculations Input,
Input page
Viva Series, COGO
OK accesses Calculations Input.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Distance
along arc
Editable field
Horizontal distance along the arc from start point
to base point. Available for Line/arc method:
Calculate arc offset pt.
Offset, Offset
(ground) or
Offset (ell)
Editable field
Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to
the right and negative to the left of the arc. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate arc offset pt.
Offset point
Selectable list
Point ID of offset point. Available for Line/arc
method: Calculate arc base pt.
487
Next step
IF
THEN
Line/arc method:
Calc accesses Line/Arc Calculation Result.
Calculate arc offset
pt
Line/arc method:
Calculate arc base
pt
Centre of Arc
Result/Line/Arc
Calculation Result,
Result page
Calc accesses Line/Arc Calculation Result.
The result screens for base point and offset point are similar.
Refer to paragraph " Line/Arc Calculation Result, Result page" for information on softkeys.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Point ID
Editable field
The identifier for the COGO point depending on
the point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in
ID Templates.
Elevation or
Editable field
Local ellipsoid
ht
The height of the start point of the arc is
suggested. A height value to be stored with the
calculated point can be typed in.
Arc radius
Display only
Computed radius of arc.
Arc length
Display only
Computed length of arc.
Bearing to
offset pt
Display only
Bearing of offset point from base point to offset
point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate
arc offset pt.
Offset point
Display only
Point ID of offset point. Available for Line/arc
method: Calculate arc base pt.
Distance
Display only
along arc,
Distance
along arc
(grnd) or
Distance
along arc (ell)
Horizontal distance along the arc from start point
to base point. Available for Line/arc
method: Calculate arc offset pt.
Display only
Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to
the right and negative to the left of the line. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate arc offset pt.
Offset, Offset
(ground) or
Offset (ell)
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
On the Plot page, the arc and the new point is shown.
Store stores the result
Viva Series, COGO
488
41.7.3
Calculate Line Offset Point and Calculate Line Base Point
Diagram
P1
P3
d1
d2
GS_003

P2
P0
P0
P1
P2
P3
d1
d2
Start point
End point
Offset point
Base point
Offset-XX:
∆Line-XX:
Line management is not available for COGO line calculations.
Create Line,
Input page
Key
Description
OK
To change to the second layer of editable fields.
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two
existing points. Available if Azimuth or Horiz distance is highlighted.
Last..
To select the values for the distance and the offset from previous
COGO inverse calculations. Available if Azimuth or Horiz distance is
highlighted.
Survy..
To measure a point manually for the COGO calculation. Available if
Start point or End point is highlighted.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Modif..
To mathematically modify the values. Available if, Azimuth or Horiz
distance is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of fields
Field
Option
The method by which the line will be defined.
Create line
using
2 points
Viva Series, COGO
Description
Uses two known points to define the line.
489
Field
Option
Description
Pt, bearing & dist Defines the line using a known point, a distance
and an azimuth of the line.
Start point
Selectable list
The start point of the line.
End point
Selectable list
The end point of the line. Available for Create line
using: 2 points.
Azimuth
Editable field
The azimuth of the line. Available for Create line
using: Pt, bearing & dist.
Horiz
Editable field
distance,
Horiz dist
(ground) or
Horiz dist (ell)
The horizontal distance from the start point to
the end point of the line. Available for Create line
using: Pt, bearing & dist.
Next step
OK accesses Calculations Input.
Calculations Input,
Input page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Distance
Editable field
along line,
Distance
along line
(ground) or
Distance
along line (ell)
Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line
offset pt. Horizontal distance from start point to
base point.
Offset, Offset
(ground) or
Offset (ell)
Editable field
Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line
offset pt. Offset from base point to offset point.
Positive to the right and negative to the left of
the line.
Offset point
Selectable list
Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line
base pt. The offset point.
Next step
Calc accesses Line/Arc Calculation Result.
Viva Series, COGO
490
Line/Arc Calculation
Result,
Result page
The result screens for base point and offset point are similar. The explanations given
for the softkeys are valid for the Result page.
Key
Store
Coord
Stake..
Description
To store the result.
To view other coordinate types.
To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated
COGO point.
To change to another page on this screen.
To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height.
Page
Fn Ell Ht and
Fn Elev
Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the
Fn Run
defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID
template.
Description of fields
Field
Point ID
Option
Editable field
Elevation or
Editable field
Local ellipsoid
ht
Offset point
Display only
Description
The identifier for the COGO point depending on
the point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in
ID Templates.
The height of the start point of the line is
suggested. A height value to be stored with the
calculated point can be typed in.
Point ID of offset point. Available for Line/arc
method: Calculate line base pt.
Horizontal distance from start point to base
point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate
line base pt.
Distance
Display only
along line,
Distance
along line
(ground) or
Distance
along line (ell)
Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to
Offset, Offset Display only
(ground) or
the right and negative to the left of the line. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line base pt.
Offset (ell)
Line length
Display only
Length of line from start point to end point.
Line bearing Display only
Bearing of line from start point to end point.
Bearing to
Display only
Bearing of offset point from base point to offset
offset pt
point.
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
On the Plot page, the line and the new point is shown.
Store stores the result.
Viva Series, COGO
491
41.7.4
Segment an Arc
Exceptions to line
calculation segmentation
The arc segmentation and the functionality of all screens and fields are similar to those
for line segmentation. Refer to "41.7.5 Segment a Line"
New field and option in Define Arc Segmentation
Viva Series, COGO
Field
Option
Description
Method
Delta angle
To divide the arc by an angular value.
Delta angle
Editable field
The angular value by which new points will be
defined on the arc.
492
41.7.5
Segment a Line
Diagram
Line divided by Method: No. of segments
d
d
d
d
P0
P1
SYS13_002
d1
d1
d1
P0
P1
SYS13_003

Define Line Segmentation
d2
P0 Start point
P1 End point
d Equally spaced segments result from
dividing a line by a certain number of
points.
Line divided by Method Segment length
P0
P1
d1
d2
Start point
End point
Segment length
Remaining segment
For a description of the Create Line, Input page, refer to "41.7.3 Calculate Line Offset
Point and Calculate Line Base Point".
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Method
Selectable list
How the line is to be divided. Depending on the
selection, the following fields are editable or
display only fields.
Line length
Display only
Calculated line length between the selected Start
point and End point.
No. of
segments
Editable field or
display only
For Method: No. of segments type in the number
of segments for the line. For Method: Segment
length this field indicates the calculated number
of segments. This method can result in a
remaining segment.
Segment
length
Editable field or
display only
For Method: No. of segments this field is the
calculated length of each segment. For Method:
Segment length type in the required segment
length.
Last segment Display only
Available for Method: Segment length. The length
of the remaining segment.
Starting pt ID
Editable field
The point ID to be assigned to the first new point
on the line. The selected point ID templates from
ID Templates are not applied.
Pt ID increment
Editable field
Is incremented numerically for the second, third,
etc. point on the line.
Next step
Calc calculates the coordinates of the new points. The heights are computed along
the line assuming a linear slope between Start point and End point.
On the Plot page, the known points defining the line and those points created on the
line are shown.
Viva Series, COGO
493
41.8
COGO Calculation - Area Division
41.8.1
Selecting the Division Method
Description
The COGO calculation area division divides an area by a defined line, by percentage or
by the size of a subarea.
Elements that must be known for the calculation depend on the area division method.
At least three points are required to form an area.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Access
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Area division.
COGO Area Division
Key
Description
OK
To select a method and to continue with the subsequent screen.
Description of the Area Division methods
Area Division method Description
Parallel line (%)
The border will be parallel to a line defined by two points.
The division is calculated using a defined percentage split.
Parallel line (area)
The border will be parallel to a line defined by two points.
The division is calculated using a defined area size.
Parallel line (line)
The border will be parallel to a line defined by two points.
The division is calculated by defining the position of the
dividing line.
Perpendic line (%)
The border will be perpendicular to a line defined by two
points. The division is calculated using a defined percentage
split.
Perpendic line (area)
The border will be perpendicular to a line defined by two
points. The division is calculated using a defined area size.
Perpendic line (line)
The border will be perpendicular to a line defined by two
points. The division is calculated by defining the position of
the dividing line.
Swing line (%)
The border will be a line rotated around a rotation point by
an azimuth. The division is calculated using a defined
percentage split.
Swing line (area)
The border will be a line rotated around a rotation point by
an azimuth. The division is calculated using a defined area
size.
Viva Series, COGO
494
Elements required
Divide by
Using
Line
Parallel line
Elements required
Through a point • Two points defining the line
• One point on the dividing line
By a distance
• Two points defining the line
• Distance
Perpendicular line Through a point • Two points defining the line
• One point on the dividing line
Percentage
Area
Viva Series, COGO
By a distance
• Two points defining the line
• Distance
-
• Percentage size of new area
• Two points defining the line
Perpendicular line -
• Percentage size of new area
• Two points defining the line
Swing line
Rotation point
• Percentage size of new area
• Rotation point of the swing
line
Parallel line
-
• Size of new area
• Two points defining the line
Perpendicular line -
• Size of new area
• Two points defining the line
Swing line
• Size of new area
• Rotation point of the swing
line
Parallel line
Rotation point
495
Diagram
The diagrams show the area division methods. Some diagrams apply to several area
division methods.
Area division method Using
Divide
Shift
1.
Parallel Line
By Defined Line
By Distance
2.
Parallel Line
By Percentage
-
3.
Parallel Line
By Area
-
P3
P1
d
a
P0
P1
P2
P3
d
a
P2
P0
GS_011
Area division method Using
Point A of defined line
Point B of defined line
First new COGO point
Second new COGO point
Horiz distance
Area left of line
Divide
Shift
1.
Perpendic Line
By Defined Line
By Distance
2.
Perpendic Line
By Percentage
-
3.
Perpendic Line
By Area
-
P2
P1
P3
a
P0
d
GS_012
Area division method Using
1.
Viva Series, COGO
Parallel Line
P0
P1
P2
P3
d
a
Point A of defined line
Point B of defined line
First new COGO point
Second new COGO point
Horiz distance
Area left of line
Divide
Shift
By Defined Line
Through Point
496
P2
P1
d
P0 Point A of defined line
P1 Point B of defined line
P2 Through point; in this case it is a
known point of the existing border
P3 New COGO point
d Horiz distance
P3
P0
GS_013
Area division method Using
Perpendic Line
1.
Divide
Shift
By Defined Line
Through Point
P2
P1
P3
d
P0
GS_014
Area division method Using
P0 Point A of defined line
P1 Point B of defined line
P2 Through point; in this case it is a
known point of the existing border
P3 New COGO point
d Horiz distance
Divide
Shift
1.
Swing Line
By Percentage
-
2.
Swing Line
By Area
-
P1 P2
P0
SYS13_007
Viva Series, COGO
a
P0
P1
P2
α
a
First new COGO point
Second new COGO point
Rotation point
Azimuth
Area left of line
497
41.8.2
Choosing an Area to be Divided
Choose Area to be
Divided
Key
Description
OK
To accept the changes and access the subsequent screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
The setting determines the availability of the
subsequent fields and screen.
Area to use
Select existing
area
To use an area from the working job. The area can
be edited and a new area can be created from
points existing in the job.
Survey new area
To survey points that do not exist in the job yet.
The points will be added to a new area.
Create new with
pts
To create a new area by selecting points from the
job.
Selectable list
For Area to use: Select existing area. To select
the area to be divided.
Editable field
For Area to use: Survey new area and Area to
use: Create new with pts. To enter a name for the
new area.
No. of points
Display only
Number of points forming the area.
Area
Display only
The size of the selected area.
Perimeter
Display only
The perimeter of the area.
Area ID
Next step
IF
THEN
Area to use: Select OK accesses Define How to Divide Area. Refer to "41.8.3
existing area
Dividing an Area".
Area to use: Survey OK accesses Survey Job name. Refer to "57 Survey - General".
new area
Area to use: Create OK accesses Edit Area. Refer to "6.4.3 Editing a Line/Area".
new with pts
Viva Series, COGO
498
41.8.3
Dividing an Area
Define How to Divide
Area,
Input page
After each change of parameters on this screen, the values in the display only fields
are recalculated and updated.
Viva Series, COGO
Key
Description
Calc
To perform the area division and to continue with the subsequent
screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet stored.
Inv..
To calculate the value for the distance from two existing points. Available if Horiz distance is highlighted.
Size and %
To display the size and the percentage of the subarea.
Last..
To select the value for the distance from previous COGO inverse
calculations. Available if Horiz distance is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available if
Point A, Point B, Rotation point or Through point is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
499
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Area left of
line
Editable field
For dividing by percentage or area. The size of the
sub area must be typed either in % or in m2.
When dividing the area using a parallel or perpendicular line, a reference line is defined by Point A and
Point B. The direction of the new dividing line is
always the same as the direction of the reference
line. The direction of a perpendicular line is the same
as the reference line rotated 90° anticlockwise. The
sub area is always to the left of the new dividing
line.
When dividing an area using a swing line, the direction of the new dividing line is defined by the Rotation point and the Azimuth. The sub area is always
to the left of the new dividing line.
Display only
For dividing by a line. The size of the sub area is
calculated and displayed.
Point A
Selectable list
The first point of the line which is used as the reference for a new parallel or perpendicular border.
Point B
Selectable list
The second point of the line which is used as the
reference for a new parallel or perpendicular border.
Available for dividing by a line.
Shift
By distance
The new border will run in a certain distance from
the line defined by Point A and Point B.
Through point
The new border will run through a point defined in
Through point.
Through
point
Selectable list
Available for Shift: Through point. The point
through which the new border will run.
Rotation
point
Selectable list
Available for using a swing line. The point around
which the new border will rotate by Azimuth.
Azimuth
Display only
Available for using a swing line. The angle of the new
border from Rotation point to the new COGO point.
Horiz
Display only
distance,
Horiz dist
(ground) or
Horiz dist (ell)
The distance from the line defined by Point A and
Point B to the new border.
Next step
Calc performs the area division and accesses Area Division Result.
Viva Series, COGO
500
41.8.4
Results of the Area Division
Area Division Result,
Result page
Key
Description
OK
To accept the calculation and to continue with the subsequent
screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet stored.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Area ratio
Display only
The ratio of the size of the two sub areas in
percent.
Area left of
line
Display only
The size of the first sub area in m2.
Area right of
line
Display only
The size of the second sub area in m2.
Next step
On the Plot page, the points defining the area and the calculated COGO points are
shown in black.
OK accesses Area Divisions Results.
Viva Series, COGO
501
Area Divisions
Results,
Result page
The coordinates of the intersection points of the new border with the original area are
displayed.
Key
Description
Store
To store the two results and to return to Choose Area to be Divided
once both points are stored.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Result1 or
Result2
To view the first and second result.
Stake..
To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated
COGO point.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and
Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height.
Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the
Fn Run
defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates".
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
On the Plot page, The points defining the area and the points of the new border are
shown in black.
Store stores the results.
Viva Series, COGO
502
41.9
COGO Calculation - Shift, Rotate & Scale
41.9.1
Selecting the Shift, Rotate & Scale Method and the Points to be Moved
Access
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Shift, rotate & scale.
COGO Shift, Rotate &
Scale
Key
Description
OK
To select a method and to continue with the subsequent screen.
Description of the Shift, Rotate & Scale methods
Shift, Rotate & Scale Description
methods
Manually entered
Applies shifts and/or rotation and/or scale to one or several
known points. The values for shifts and/or rotation and/or
scale are typed in manually.
Elements that must be known are
• the coordinates of the points to be shifted, rotated
and/or scaled. They must be stored in the working job.
• the shift values. They can be defined as: the direction of
Easting, Northing and Height, or as an azimuth and a grid
distance, or as shift from one point to another.
• the rotation value. It can be defined by a point as rotation
centre plus a rotation or by an existing and new azimuth.
• the scale. It is only applied to the position, not to the
height.
Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and
height only points can be used.
Viva Series, COGO
503
Shift, Rotate & Scale Description
methods
Matching points
Applies shifts and/or rotation and/or scale to one or several
known points. The shifts and/or rotation and/or scale are
calculated from selected points using a 2D Helmert transformation.
Elements that must be known are
• the coordinates of at least two matching points for the
calculation of the shifts and/or rotation and/or scale.
• the coordinates of the points to be shifted, rotated
and/or scaled. They must be stored in the working job.
Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and
height only points can be used.
The number of pairs of points matched determines whether
the shift, rotation and scale values are computed. For only
one point, only shifts are calculated, rotation and scale are
not.
Next step
OK accesses Point Selection which is the same for Method: Manually entered and
Method: Matching points.
Viva Series, COGO
504
Point Selection
Listed are points which have been selected for shifting, rotating and/or scaling.
Key
Description
OK
To perform the shift, rotation and scale calculation and to continue
with the subsequent screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet
stored.
+ All..
To add all points from the working job to the list. Selected sort and
filter settings apply. OK adds all displayed points to the list in Point
Selection and returns to that screen.
+ One..
To add one point from the working job to the list. Selected sort and
filter settings apply. OK adds the currently highlighted point to the
list in Point Selection and returns to that screen.
Remov
To remove the highlighted point from the list. The point itself is not
deleted.
More
To display information about the codes if stored with any point, the
time and the date of when the point was stored and the 3D coordinate quality and the class.
Fn Rem A
To remove all points from the list. The points themselves are not
deleted.
Fn Range
To define a range of points from the working job to be added to the
list.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Next step
IF
AND
THEN
all points are to be added
-
+ All...
one point is to be added
-
+ One...
a range of points is to be
added
-
Fn Range accesses Select
points by range.
all points are added
Method:Manually
entered
OK accesses Computed
Parameters. Refer to "41.9.2
Manually Entered".
Method:Matching points OK accesses Match Common
Points (%d). Refer to "41.9.3
Matching Points".
Viva Series, COGO
505
Select points by
range
Key
Description
OK
To add the points within the selected range to the list in Point Selection. Returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed.
Next
To add the points within the selected range to the list in Point Selection without quitting this screen. Another range of point IDs can be
selected.
Description of fields
Field
Option
From pt ID and Editable field
To pt ID
Description
• Numeric point IDs in both fields:
Points with numeric point IDs falling within the
range are selected.
Example:
From pt ID: 1, To pt ID: 50
Selected are point IDs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
10…. 49, 50 as well as 001, 01, 0000045, ...
Not selected are point IDs 100,200,300, ...
• Alphanumeric point IDs in both fields:
The left most character of both entries is used
as the basis for the range. The standard ASCII
numerical range is used. Points with alphanumeric point IDs falling within the range are
selected.
Example:
From pt ID: a9, To pt ID: c200
Selected are point IDs a, b, c, aa, bb, cc, a1, b2,
c3, c4, c5, a610, ...
Not selected are point IDs d100, e, 200, 300,
tzz ...
Next step
Select a range of points.
OK returns to Point Selection.
Viva Series, COGO
506
Diagram
a
P1’
P2’
Shift
b a Height
b Easting
P1 Known point
P1’ Shifted point
P2 Known point
P2’ Shifted point
P1
P2
SYS13_004
a
Rotation
a Height
b b Easting
P0 Rotation point
P2’
P1 Known point
P1’ Rotated point
P2
P2 Known point
P2’ Rotated point
P1’
P0
P1
SYS13_005
a
P5’
P4
P5
P2
P2’
SYS13_006
Viva Series, COGO
P1
P3
P3’
Scale
a Height
b Easting
P1 Rotation point, can be held fixed, all
other points are then scaled from
here
P4’
P2 Known point
P2’ Scaled point
b
P3 Known point
P3’ Scaled point
P4 Known point
P4’ Scaled point
P5 Known point
P5’ Scaled point
507
41.9.2
Manually Entered
Computed Parameters,
Shift page
Key
Description
Calc
To perform the shift, rotation and scale calculation and to continue
with the subsequent screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet
stored.
Inv..
To calculate the amount of shift in Easting, Northing and height from
two existing points. Available if Azimuth, Horiz distance, ∆ easting,
∆ northing or ∆ height is highlighted.
Last..
To select the value for the shift from previous COGO inverse calculations. Available if Azimuth, Horiz distance, ∆ easting, ∆ northing or
∆ height is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available for
Method: Use 2 points if From or To is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application. Refer to "41.3 Configuring
COGO".
Fn Modif..
To mathematically modify the values. Available if Azimuth, Horiz
distance, ∆ easting, ∆ northing or ∆ height is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Viva Series, COGO
Description
The method by which the shift in ∆ Easting,
∆ Northing and ∆ Height will be determined.
Method
∆east, ∆north,
∆ht
Defines the shift using coordinate differences.
Bearing, dist,
height
Defines the shift using an azimuth, a distance and
a height difference.
Use 2 points
Computes the shift from the coordinate differences between two known points.
From
Selectable list
Available for Method: Use 2 points. The point ID
of the first known point for calculating the shift.
To
Selectable list
Available for Method: Use 2 points. The point ID
of the second known point for calculating the
shift.
Azimuth
Editable field
Available for Method: Bearing, dist, height. The
azimuth defines the direction of the shift.
508
Field
Option
Description
Editable field
Horiz
distance,
Horiz dist
(ground) or
Horiz dist (ell)
Available for Method: Bearing, dist, height. The
amount of shift from the original point to the
calculated COGO points.
∆ easting
Editable field or
display only
The amount of shift in East direction.
∆ northing
Editable field or
display only
The amount of shift in North direction.
∆ height
Editable field or
display only
The amount of shift in height.
Next step
Page accesses Computed Parameters, Rotate page.
Computed Parameters,
Rotate page
The softkeys are the same as on the Shift page.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
The method by which the rotation angle will be
determined.
Method
User entered
The rotation can be manually typed in.
Computed
The rotation will be calculated as New azimuth
minus Existing azimuth.
Rotation point Selectable list
The point around which all points will be rotated.
Existing
azimuth
Editable field
Available for Method: Computed. A known direction before rotating.
New azimuth
Editable field
Available for Method: Computed. A known direction after rotating.
Rotation
Editable field or
display only
The amount by which the points will be rotated.
Next step
Page accesses Computed Parameters, Scale page.
Computed Parameters,
Scale page
The softkeys are the same as on the Shift page.
Description of fields
Field
Option
The method by which the scale factor will be
determined.
Method
Viva Series, COGO
Description
User entered
The scale factor can be manually typed in.
Computed
The scale factor will be calculated as New
distance divided by Existing distance.
Existing
distance
Editable field
Available for Method: Computed. A known
distance before scaling. This value is used for
calculating the scale factor.
New distance
Editable field
Available for Method: Computed. A known
distance after scaling. This value is used for calculating the scale factor.
509
Field
Option
Description
Scale
Editable field or
display only
The scale factor used in the calculation.
Scale from
point
No
Scaling is performed by multiplying the original
coordinates of the points by Scale.
Yes
Scale is applied to the coordinate difference of all
points relative to Rotation point selected on the
Rotation page. The coordinates of Rotation point
will not change.
Next step
Calc performs the shift, rotation and scale calculation and accesses Shift, Rotate &
Scale Results.
Shift, Rotate & Scale
Results,
General page
Key
Description
Store
To store the results and continue with the next screen.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Points
selected
Display only
The number of selected points having been
shifted, rotated and/or scaled.
Store points to Selectable list
job
The calculated COGO points will be stored in this
job. The original points are not copied to this job.
Store Point ID Prefix
with
Adds the setting for Store Point ID with in front
of the original point IDs.
Prefix / suffix
Viva Series, COGO
Suffix
Adds the setting for Store Point ID with at the
end of the original point IDs.
Editable field
The identifier with up to four characters is added
in front of or at the end of the ID of the calculated
COGO points.
510
Next step
IF
THEN
the used parameters are to be
viewed
Page accesses Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Summary page.
the calculated COGO Page accesses Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Plot page. Original
points are to be
points are displayed in grey, calculated COGO points are
viewed graphically
displayed in black.
the calculated COGO Store accesses Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Result page.
points are to be
Refer to paragraph "Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Result page".
stored
Shift, Rotate & Scale
Results,
Result page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
No. of new points Display only
Number of new points created.
No. of skipped pts Display only
Number of points which were skipped either due
to not being able to convert coordinates, or
points with identical point IDs already in the Store
points to job.
Next step
OK returns to COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale.
Viva Series, COGO
511
41.9.3
Matching Points
Point Selection
Listed are points which have been selected for shifting, rotating and/or scaling.
Key
Description
OK
To perform the shift, rotation and scale calculation and to continue
with the subsequent screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet
stored.
+ All..
To add all points from the working job to the list. Selected sort and
filter settings apply. OK adds all displayed points to the list in Point
Selection and returns to that screen.
+ One..
To add one point from the working job to the list. Selected sort and
filter settings apply. OK adds the currently highlighted point to the
list in Point Selection and returns to that screen.
Remov
To remove the highlighted point from the list. The point itself is not
deleted.
More
To display information about the codes if stored with any point, the
time and the date of when the point was stored and the 3D coordinate quality and the class.
Fn Rem A
To remove all points from the list. The points themselves are not
deleted.
Fn Range
To define a range of points from the working job to be added to the
list.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Next step
IF
AND
THEN
all points are to be added
-
+ All...
one point is to be added
-
+ One...
a range of points is to be
added
-
Fn Range accesses Select
points by range.
all points are added
Method:Manually
entered
OK accesses Computed
Parameters. Refer to "41.9.2
Manually Entered".
Method:Matching points OK accesses Match Common
Points (%d). Refer to "41.9.3
Matching Points".
Viva Series, COGO
512
Match Points
This screen provides a list of points chosen from the working job. The points are used
for the determination of the 2D Helmert transformation. The number of points
matched is indicated in the title, for example (2). Unless there is no pair of matching
points in the list all softkeys are available.
Key
Calc
Description
To confirm the selections, compute the transformation and continue
with the subsequent screen.
New..
To match a new pair of points. This pair is added to the list. A new
point can be manually measured. Refer to paragraph"Choose
Matching Points or Edit Matching Points".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted pair of matched points.
Delete
To delete the highlighted pair of matched points from the list.
Match
To change the type of match for a highlighted pair of matched points.
Resid
To display a list of the matched points used in the transformation
calculation and their associated residuals. Refer to paragraph "Fix
Parameters".
Fn Param
To define the parameters to be fixed in the 2D transformation.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of columns
Column
Source point
Target point
Match
Description
The point ID of the points of origin for the calculation of the shifts
and/or rotation and/or scale.
The point ID of the target points for the calculation of the shifts
and/or rotation and/or scale.
The type of match to be made between the points. This information
is used in the transformation calculation. Position &Height, Position
only, Height only or None.
None removes matched common points from the transformation
calculation but does not delete them from the list. This option can be
used to help improve residuals.
Next step
IF
the transformation
is to be computed
THEN
Calc. The calculated shift, rotation and scale values are
displayed in Point Selection. They cannot be edited. The
remaining functionality of the calculation is similar to shift,
rotate & scale (manual). Refer to "41.9 COGO Calculation Shift, Rotate & Scale".
a pair of points is to New.. or Info. Refer to paragraph "Choose Matching Points or
Edit Matching Points".
be matched or
edited
parameters for the Fn Param. Refer to paragraph "Fix Parameters".
transformation are
to be fixed
Viva Series, COGO
513
Choose Matching
Points or Edit
Matching Points
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Source point
Selectable list A point of origin for the calculation of the shifts
and/or rotation and/or scale.
Target point
Selectable list A target point for the calculation of the shifts
and/or rotation and/or scale.
The type of match to be made between the
points selected.
Match type
Fix Parameters
Description
Pos & height
Position and height
Pos only
Position only
Height only
Height only
None
None
The settings on this screen define the parameters to be used in the transformation.
IF the value for a
field is
THEN the value for this parameter will be
-----
calculated.
any number
fixed to that value.
Description of fields
Viva Series, COGO
Field
Option
Description
∆ easting
Editable field
Shift in Easting direction.
∆ northing
Editable field
Shift in Northing direction.
∆ height
Editable field
Shift in Height direction.
Rotation
Editable field
Rotation around the vertical axis.
Scale
Editable field
Scale factor.
514
Next step
IF
AND
THEN
a field displays the parameter
highlight the field. Enter the value of the param----must be fixed to a eter. Fix.
value
Viva Series, COGO
a field displays the parameter
a value
must be calculated
highlight the field. Adjst.
all parameters are configured
OK to return to Match Points.
515
41.10
COGO Calculation - Angle Method
COGO Angle,
Input page
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to
select the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create
a new point.
Key
Description
Calc
To calculate the result.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Point ID
Selectable list
The backsight point.
At point
Selectable list
The point of intersection of the backsight and
foresight direction.
To point
Selectable list
The foresight point.
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses COGO Angle, Results.
COGO Angle,
Results page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the Input page.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations.
Description of fields
P2
P0
d2
d1
P1
TS_131
Viva Series, COGO
α
ß
γ
δ
ε
P0
P1
P2
d1
d2
Azimuth at-from
Azimuth at-to
Deflection angle
Angle right
Angle left
Point ID
At point
To point
Horiz distance at-from
Horiz distance at-to
516
41.11
COGO Calculation - Horizontal Curve Method
Horizontal Curve
Calculator,
Input page
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to
select the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create
a new point.
Key
Description
Calc
To calculate the result.
Inv..
To calculate the values for a distance and an angle from two existing
points. Available when a distance field or an angle field is highlighted.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available
when a distance field or an angle field is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of fields
Field
Method
Option
Selectable list
Parameter 1,
Parameter 2
Radius
Delta angle
DOC - Arc
DOC - Chord
Arc length
Tangent
External secant
Mid ordinate
Delta angle
Description
The horizontal curve can either be defined by
three points or by two parameters.
Select which parameters are known. Available for
Method: 2 parameters.
Radius of the curve.
Angle in the radius point.
The degree of curve defines the sharpness or flatness of the curve. Degree of curvature in arc definition. The central angle subtended by one
station of circular arc. Mainly used in highway
design.
SI units: 1 station = 20 m)
English system: 1 station = 100 ft
The degree of curve defines the sharpness or flatness of the curve. Degree of curvature in chord
definition. The central angle subtended by one
station length of chord. Mainly used in railway
design.
Total length of the circular curve from start point
to end point measured along its arc.
Length of the tangent from the tangent point to
the point of intersection.
The distance from the point of intersection to the
midpoint of the curve. The external distance
bisects the interior angle at the point of intersection.
The distance from the midpoint of the curve to
the midpoint of the long chord. The extension of
the middle ordinate bisects the central angle.
The angle where the two tangents intersect. The
angle between the tangents is also equal to the
angle at the centre of the curve
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses Horizontal Curve Calculator, Results.
Viva Series, COGO
517
Horizontal Curve
Calculator,
Results page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the Input page.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations.
Description of fields
P1
d3
d5
d2
d4
d1
r
P2
P0
TS_132
Horizontal Curve
Calculator,
Areas page
α
P0
P1
P2
r
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
Delta angle
Start point
End point
Second point
Radius
Chord length
Arc length
Tangent
Mid ordinate
External secant
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the Input page.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations.
Description of fields
TS_133
Sector
Viva Series, COGO
TS_134
Segment
TS_135
Fillet
518
41.12
COGO Calculation - Triangle Method
COGO Triangle,
Input page
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to
select the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create
a new point.
Key
Description
Calc
To calculate the result.
Inv..
To calculate the values for a distance and an angle from two existing
points. Available when a distance field or an angle field is highlighted.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available
when a distance field or an angle field is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of fields
Field
Method
Option
Selectable list
Parameters
Selectable list
Side a, Side b, Editable field
Side c
Angle A,
Editable field
Angle C
Point A, Point Selectable list
B, Point C
Description
The triangle can either be defined by three points
or by three parameters.
Select which combination of angle value and side
length are known. Available for Method: 3 parameters.
The side lengths of the triangle.
The angle values of the triangle.
The points forming the triangle.
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses COGO Triangle, Results.
COGO Triangle,
Results page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the Input page.
Result1 or
Result2
To view the first and second result.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations.
Description of fields
P3
b
P1
TS_130
Viva Series, COGO
a
c
P2
α
ß
γ
P1
P2
P3
a
b
c
Angle A
Angle B
Angle C
Point A
Point B
Point C
Side a
Side b
Side c
519
41.13
Selecting a Result from Previous COGO Inverse Calculations
Description
Azimuths, distances and offsets required within the COGO traverse and intersection
calculations can be selected from previously calculated inverse results.
Access
In Traverse or Intersection, highlight Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset and press
Last...
Last Inverse Calculations
All previous COGO inverse calculations stored in the working job are displayed, sorted
by time with the most recent at the top. This screen consists of three columns. The
information displayed can vary. ----- is displayed for unavailable information, for
example the Azimuth cannot be calculated if a height only point is used.
Key
Description
OK
To return to the previous screen.
View
To view all calculated values for the highlighted COGO inverse calculation. Includes the height difference, the slope distance, the grade
and the coordinate differences between the two known points.
Delete
To delete the highlighted COGO inverse calculation.
More
To display other information in the third column.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of columns
Column
Description
From
The point ID of the first known point for the COGO inverse calculation.
To
The point ID of the second known point for the COGO inverse calculation.
Azimuth
The direction from the first to the second known point.
HDist
The horizontal distance between the two known points.
Date and Time When the COGO inverse calculation was stored.
Next step
Highlight the COGO inverse calculation of which a result is to be taken over.
OK. The relevant result of the highlighted COGO inverse calculation is copied into the
field which was initially highlighted on the Input page.
Viva Series, COGO
520
41.14
Modifying Values for Azimuths, Distances and Offsets
Description
The values for the azimuth, the distance and the offset required within the COGO traverse and intersection calculation can be mathematically modified.
Access step-by-step
In Traverse or Intersection, highlight Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset and press Fn
Modif...
Modify Value
On this screen, numbers can be typed in for the multiplication, division, addition and
subtraction with the original azimuth, distance or offset value. The standard rules of
mathematical operations apply.
Key
Description
OK
To accept the modified value and to return to the screen from where
this screen was accessed. The modified value is copied into the field
which was initially highlighted on the Input page.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Azimuth, Horiz Display only
distance or
Offset
Multiply
Editable field
Description
The name of the field and the value which was
highlighted before accessing Modify Value.
The number to multiply by.
• Minimum: -3000
• Maximum: 3000
• ----- performs a multiplication by 1.
Divide
Editable field
The number to divide by.
• Minimum: -3000
• Maximum: 3000
• ----- performs a division by 1.
Add
Editable field
The number to be added.
• For azimuths
Minimum: 0
Maximum: Full circle
• For distances and offsets
Minimum: 0 m
Maximum: 30000000 m
Viva Series, COGO
521
Field
Option
Description
• ----- performs an addition of 0.000.
Subtract
Editable field
The number to be subtracted.
• For azimuths
Minimum: 0
Maximum: Full circle
• For distances and offsets
Minimum: 0 m
Maximum: 30000000 m
• ----- performs a subtraction of 0.000.
Azimuth, Horiz Display only
distance or
Offset
The modified value for the field in the first line.
This field is updated with every mathematical
operation. Angles greater than the full circle are
reduced accordingly.
Next step
OK accepts the modified value and returns to the screen from where this screen was
accessed.
Example: Calculations for an azimuth
Example: Calculations for a distance
Step

1.
Value as calculated
Value as displayed
Azimuth: 250.0000 g
Multiply: 2
500
Azimuth: 100.0000 g
2.
Divide: 3
166.667
Azimuth: 166.6670 g
3.
Add: 300
466.667
Azimuth: 66.6670 g
4.
Subtract: 100
366.667
Azimuth: 366.6670 g
The behaviour for an offset is identical.
Step

Viva Series, COGO
Editable field
Editable field
Value as calculated
Value as displayed
Horiz distance: 250.000
m
1.
Multiply: 2
500
Horiz distance: 500.000
m
2.
Divide: 3
166.667
Horiz distance: 166.667
m
3.
Add: 300
466.667
Horiz distance: 466.667
m
4.
Subtract: 100
366.667
Horiz distance: 366.667
m
522
42
Determine Coordinate System
42.1
Overview
Description
GPS measured points are always stored based on the global geocentric datum known
as WGS 1984. Most surveys require coordinates in a local grid system. For example,
based on a country’s official mapping datum or an arbitrary grid system used in a
particular area such as a construction site. To convert the WGS 1984 coordinates into
local coordinates a coordinate system must be created. Part of the coordinate system
is the transformation used to convert coordinates from the WGS 1984 datum to the
local datum.
The Determine Coordinate System application allows:
• the parameters of a new transformation to be determined.
• the parameters of an existing transformation to be recomputed.

With one common control point, it is still possible to calculate a Classic 3D transformation, as long as the rotations and the scale parameter are fixed. Such a transformation fits perfectly in the vicinity of the common control point, but is degraded by
the distance from that point. This degradation is because the orientation of the local
reference frame or any scale factor within the local datum cannot be taken into
account.
Requirements to
determine a transformation
To determine a transformation it is necessary to have common control points whose
positions are known in both WGS 1984 coordinates and local coordinates. The more
points that are common between datum, the more accurately the transformation
parameters can be calculated. Depending on the type of transformation used, details
about the map projection, the local ellipsoid and a local geoid model can also be
needed.
Requirements for
control points
• The control points used for the transformation should surround the area for which
the transformation is to be applied. It is not good practice to survey or convert
coordinates outside of the area covered by the control points as extrapolation
errors can be introduced.
• When a geoid field file, and/or a CSCS field file is used in the determination of a
coordinate system, the control points for the calculation must fall within the areas
of the field files.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
523
42.2
Selecting the Transformation Method
Description
Determine Coordinate System is the conventional method of determining a coordinate
system. Parameters such as the height mode must be set by the user.
One or more control points for both the WGS 1984 and the local datum are needed.
Depending on the number of control points and available information, a Onestep,
Twostep or Classic 3D transformation can be used.
Access
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Determine coord system.
Determine Coord
System
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
The type of transformation to be used when
determining a coordinate system.
Method
Onestep
Transforms coordinates directly from WGS 1984
to local grid and vice versa without knowledge
about the local ellipsoid or the map projection.
Procedure:
1 The WGS 1984 coordinates are projected onto
a temporary Transverse Mercator Projection.
The central meridian of this projection passes
through the centre of gravity of the common
control points.
2 The results of 1. are preliminary grid coordinates for the WGS 1984 points.
3 These preliminary grid coordinates are
matched with the local grid control points. The
Easting and Northing shifts, the rotation and
the scale factor between these two sets of
points are then computed. This process is
known as a classic 2D transformation.
4 The height transformation is a single dimension height approximation.
Refer to "Appendix J Glossary".
Twostep
Combines the advantages of the Onestep and the
Classic 3D transformation. It allows treating position and height separately, but is not restricted to
smaller areas. Procedure:
1 The WGS 1984 coordinates of the common
control points are shifted closely to the local
datum using a given Classic 3D pre-transformation. This Classic 3D transformation is typically a rough transformation valid for the
country of the local datum.
2 The coordinates are projected onto a preliminary grid, but this time using the true map
projection of the local points.
3 A 2D transformation is applied, exactly as with
the Onestep transformation.
Refer to "Appendix J Glossary".
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
524
Field
Option
Description
Classic 3D
Also known as Helmert transformation.
Transforms coordinates from WGS 1984 cartesian to local cartesian coordinates and vice versa.
A map projection can then be applied to obtain
grid coordinates. As a similarity transformation, it
is the most rigorous transformation type and
keeps the full geometrical information. Refer to
"Appendix J Glossary".
Modify existing
To modify an existing determine coordinate
system. Refer to "42.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate
System".
Next step
IF the selected method is
THEN
Onestep, Twostep or Classic OK to access Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs. Refer to
3D
the following paragraph: Choose WGS84 & Local
Jobs.
Modify existing
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
OK to access Coordinate Systems. Refer to "42.3.3
Modifying a Coordinate System".
525
Choose WGS84 &
Local Jobs
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
Config..
To configure the selected coordinate system determination method.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Name
Editable field
A unique name for the coordinate system. The
name can be up to 16 characters in length and
can include spaces. Input is mandatory.
Entering the name of a coordinate system
will allow that existing system to be
updated.

WGS84 points Selectable list
job
Local points
job
Selectable list
Use one point Check box
localisation
method
The job from which the points with WGS 1984
coordinates will be taken.
The job from which the points with local coordinates will be taken.
Number of control points needed: One control
point for both the WGS 1984 and the local datum.
Transformation to use:
• Onestep or Twostep when information about
the necessary rotations and scale factor is
known.
• Classic 3D when the rotations are to be set to
zero and the scale factor to one.
Next step
Press Config.. with Use one point localisation method NOT checked to access Configuration.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
526
42.3
The Normal Method
42.3.1
Configuring the Normal Method
Description
The configuration allows options to be set, which are used in the Determine Coordinate System application. These settings are stored within the active working style.
Access
Press Config.. in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs with Use one point localisation
method NOT checked.
Configuration,
Residuals page
The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for all pages, unless otherwise
stated.
Key
OK
Page
Fn Quit
Description
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
To change to another page on this screen.
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Easting
Option
Editable field
Northing
Editable field
Elevation
Editable field
Description
The limit above which Easting residuals will be
flagged as possible outliers.
The limit above which Northing residuals will be
flagged as possible outliers.
The limit above which Height residuals will be
flagged as possible outliers.
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
Configuration,
Advanced page
Description of fields
Field
Model
Option
Bursa-Wolf or
MolodenskyBadakus
Prompt me to Check box
enter fixed
transformation parameters
Description
The transformation model to be used. Refer to
standard surveying literature for details on the
models.
To configure Classic 3D transformation parameters during the process of calculation.
Next step
OK returns to Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
527
42.3.2
Determining a New Coordinate System
Access
Press OK in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs with Use one point localisation method
NOT checked.
Set Height Mode
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Transformation name
Editable field
A unique name for the transformation. The name
can be up to 16 characters in length and include
spaces. If a coordinate system is being updated
then its name is displayed.
Transfrm Type Display only
The type of transformation to be used when
determining a coordinate system.
Height mode
The height mode to be used in the determination
of a coordinate system.
Orthometric or
Ellipsoidal
Available when determining a new coordinate
system.
Display only
Available when updating a coordinate system.
The height mode shown is the same as the mode
used in the existing system.
Next step
OK continues to Choose System Components.

If a coordinate system was chosen to be edited in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs,
pressing OK accesses Matched Points (n). Pressing ESC does not reaccess Choose
WGS84 & Local Jobs but accesses Choose System Components and Set Height
Mode.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
528
Choose System
Components
This screen contains different fields, depending on what method was chosen in Determine Coord System.
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
For Onestep
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Geoid model
Selectable list
The geoid model to be used in the transformation.
Pre Transform Selectable list
For Twostep: The pre-transformation to use for
the preliminary 3D transformation.
Selectable list
For Twostep and Classic 3D: The ellipsoid to use
in the transformation.
Display only
For Twostep and Classic 3D: The ellipsoid being
used by a fixed projection when selected in
Projection.
Projection
Selectable list
For Twostep and Classic 3D: The projection to use
in the transformation.
CSCS model
Selectable list
For Classic 3D: The CSCS model to use in the
transformation.
Ellipsoid
Next step
OK continues to Matched Points (n).
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
529
Matched Points (n)
This screen provides a list of points chosen from WGS84 points job and Local pts. The
number of control points matched between both jobs is indicated in the title. Unless
there is no pair of matching points in the list all softkeys are available. Refer to "42.3.4
Matching Points: Selecting/ Editing a Pair of Matching Points" for information on how
to match points.
Key
Description
Calc
To confirm the selections, compute the transformation and continue
with the subsequent screen.
New..
To match a new pair of points. This pair is added to the list. A new
point can be manually occupied. Refer to " Choose Matching
Points/Edit Matching Points".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted pair of matched points. Refer to " Choose
Matching Points/Edit Matching Points".
If a coordinate system to be updated contains a point that
was deleted from the working job and a new point was
created in that job with the same point ID but different coordinates, the coordinates of the old point will still be used for
the calculation. Pressing Edit.. to edit a highlighted pair of
matched points containing the deleted point, will overwrite
the coordinates of the old point. The coordinates of the new
point will be used in the calculation.

Delete
To delete the highlighted pair of matched points from the list.
Match
To change the type of match for a highlighted pair of matched points.
Refer to "42.3.4 Matching Points: Selecting/ Editing a Pair of
Matching Points".
Auto
To scan both jobs for points that have the same point ID. Points with
matching point IDs are added to the list.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
WGS84 pts
Local pts
Match
Description
The point ID of the points chosen from WGS84 points job.
The point ID of the points chosen from Local points job.
The type of match to be made between the points. This information
is used in the transformation calculation. Position & Height, Position
only, Height only or None.
• For Onestep or Twostep possible options are P & H, P only, H only
or None.
• For Classic 3D, possible options are P & H or None.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
530
Column
Description
None removes matched common points from the transformation
calculation but does not delete them from the list. This option can be
used to help improve residuals.
Next step
Calc computes the transformation and continues to Check Residuals or to Classic
3D Parameters if Prompt me to enter fixed transformation parameters was checked
during the configuration.
Classic 3D Parameters
The settings on this page define the parameters to be used in a Classic 3D transformation. Refer to "Appendix J Glossary" for more information about how many transformation parameters are computed, based on the number of points common to both
datum.
IF the value for a
field is
----any number
THEN the value for this parameter will be
calculated.
fixed to that value.
Description of fields
Field
Model
Shift dX
Shift dY
Shift dZ
Rotation X
Rotation Y
Rotation Z
Scale
Option
Bursa-Wolf or
MolodenskyBadakus
Editable field
Editable field
Editable field
Editable field
Editable field
Editable field
Editable field
Description
The transformation model to be used. Refer to
standard surveying literature for details on the
models.
Shift in X direction.
Shift in Y direction.
Shift in Z direction.
Rotation around the X axis.
Rotation around the Y axis.
Rotation around the Z axis.
Scale factor.
Next step
IF
AND
a field displays the parameter
----must be fixed to a
value
a field displays the parameter
a value
must be calculated
all parameters are configured
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
THEN
highlight the field. Fix.
Enter the value of the parameter.
highlight the field. Adjust.
OK computes the transformation and continues
to Check Residuals.
531
Check Residuals
Displays a list of the matched points used in the transformation calculation and their
associated residuals.
Key
Description
OK
To accept the residuals and to continue with the subsequent screen.
Result
To view results of the transformation. Refer to "42.3.5 Transformation Results for Onestep and Twostep".
More
To display information about height residuals.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Description
WGS84 pts
The point ID of the points chosen from WGS84 points job.
East
The Easting residual. If positions are not used in the transformation
calculation then ----- will be displayed.
North
The Northing residual. If positions are not used in the transformation
calculation then ----- will be displayed.
Height
The Height residual. If heights are not used in the transformation
calculation then ----- will be displayed.
!
Indicates residuals that exceed the residual limit defined in Configuration, Residuals page.
!
Indicates the largest residual in East, North and Height.
Next step
IF the residuals
are
THEN
unacceptable
ESC returns to Matched Points (n). Matched points can be
edited, deleted or temporarily removed from the list and the
transformation recalculated.
acceptable
OK continues to Store Coordinate System.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
532
Store Coordinate
System,
Summary page
Key
Description
Store
To store the coordinate system to the DBX and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Name
Editable field
The name of the coordinate system can be
changed. The name can be up to 16 characters in
length and include spaces.
Transformation type
Display only
The type of transformation used.
No. of
matched pts
Display only
Number of matched points.
Easting
Display only
Largest Easting residual from the transformation
calculation.
Northing
Display only
Largest Northing residual from the transformation calculation.
Elevation
Display only
Largest Height residual from the transformation
calculation.
Next step
Page changes to the Coord system page.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
533
Store Coordinate
System,
Coord system page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Residuals
None, 1/distance, The method by which the residuals of the control
1/distance² or
points will be distributed throughout the trans1/distance³/²
formation area.
Geoid model
Display only
Name of geoid model used.
Pre Transform Display only
For Twostep: Name of the pre-transformation
used.
Transformation
Display only
For Classic 3D: Name of transformation used.
Ellipsoid
Display only
For Twostep and Classic 3D: Name of ellipsoid
used.
Projection
Display only
For Twostep and Classic 3D: Name of projection
used.
CSCS model
Display only
For Classic 3D: Name of CSCS model used.
Next step
Store stores the coordinate system to the DBX and attaches it to the WGS84 points
job selected in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs, replacing any coordinate system
attached to this job. WGS84 points job becomes the working job.
Determine Coord
System
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
The type of transformation to be used when
determining a coordinate system.
Method
Onestep
Transforms coordinates directly from WGS 1984
to local grid and vice versa without knowledge
about the local ellipsoid or the map projection.
Procedure:
1 The WGS 1984 coordinates are projected onto
a temporary Transverse Mercator Projection.
The central meridian of this projection passes
through the centre of gravity of the common
control points.
2 The results of 1. are preliminary grid coordinates for the WGS 1984 points.
3 These preliminary grid coordinates are
matched with the local grid control points. The
Easting and Northing shifts, the rotation and
the scale factor between these two sets of
points are then computed. This process is
known as a classic 2D transformation.
4 The height transformation is a single dimension height approximation.
Refer to "J.20 T".
Twostep
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
Combines the advantages of the Onestep and the
Classic 3D transformation. It allows treating position and height separately, but is not restricted to
smaller areas. Procedure:
534
Field
Option
Description
1 The WGS 1984 coordinates of the common
control points are shifted closely to the local
datum using a given Classic 3D pre-transformation. This Classic 3D transformation is typically a rough transformation valid for the
country of the local datum.
2 The coordinates are projected onto a preliminary grid, but this time using the true map
projection of the local points.
3 A 2D transformation is applied, exactly as with
the Onestep transformation.
Refer to "J.20 T".
Classic 3D
Also known as Helmert transformation.
Transforms coordinates from WGS 1984 cartesian to local cartesian coordinates and vice versa.
A map projection can then be applied to obtain
grid coordinates. As a similarity transformation, it
is the most rigorous transformation type and
keeps the full geometrical information. Refer to
"J.20 T".
Modify existing
To modify an existing determine coordinate
system. Refer to "42.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate
System".
Next step
IF the selected method is
THEN
Onestep, Twostep or Classic OK to access Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs. Refer to
3D
the following paragraph: Choose WGS84 & Local
Jobs.
Modify existing
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
OK to access Coordinate Systems. Refer to "42.3.3
Modifying a Coordinate System".
535
42.3.3
Modifying a Coordinate System
Access
OK in Determine Coord System when Method: Modify existing.
Coordinate Systems
Select an existing coordinate system and press OK.
All the following steps are identical with the determination of a new coordinate system
from the Matched Points (n) screen onwards. Refer to "42.3.2 Determining a New
Coordinate System"
42.3.4
Matching Points: Selecting/ Editing a Pair of Matching Points
Description
Before calculating a transformation, it must be defined which points in WGS84 points
job and Local points job are to be matched. Pairs of matched points are displayed in
one line in Matched Points (n). New pairs of matched points can be created, existing
pairs of matched points can be edited and pairs of matched points can be deleted.
Access
Press New.. or Edit.. in Matched Points (n).
Choose Matching
Points/Edit Matching
Points
Key
Description
OK
To return to Matched Points (n) and to adds a new line of matched
points to the matched points list.
Survy..
To manually occupy a point and store it in WGS84 points job. Available when WGS84 point is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
WGS84 point
Selectable list
A WGS 1984 control point.
Local point
Selectable list
A local control point.
The type of match to be made between the
points selected.
Match in
P & H, P only, H
only or None.
Available for Onestep and Twostep.
P & H or None
Available for Classic 3D.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
536
42.3.5
Transformation Results for Onestep and Twostep
Access
Press Result in Check Residuals.
Transformation
Results,
Position page
Results of the transformation between the WGS 1984 datum and the local datum are
shown for each of the transformation parameters. This screen consists of the Position
page and the Height page. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for
the pages as indicated.
Key
Description
OK
To return to Check Residuals.
Scale.. or Ppm Available on the Position page. To switch between displaying the
true scale and displaying the ppm.
Rms or
To switch between the root mean square values of the parameters
Param..
and the actual parameter values. The name of the screen changes to
Transformation Results rms when displaying rms values.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Shift dX
Shift dY
Rotation
Scale
Option
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Rotation orgn Display only
X
Rotation orgn Display only
Y
Description
Shift in X direction.
Shift in Y direction.
Rotation of transformation.
Scale factor used in transformation. Either true
scale or ppm.
Position in the X direction of the origin of rotation.
Position in the Y direction of the origin of rotation.
Next step
Page changes to the Height page.
Transformation
Results,
Height page
Description of fields
Field
Slope in X
Slope in Y
Height shift
Option
Display only
Display only
Display only
Description
Tilt of the transformation in the X direction.
Tilt of the transformation in the Y direction.
Shift in height between WGS 1984 datum and
local datum.
Next step
OK returns to Check Residuals.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
537
42.3.6
Transformation Results for Classic 3D
Access
Press Result in Check Residuals.
Transformation
Results,
Parameters page
Results of the transformation between the WGS 1984 datum and the local datum are
shown for each of the transformation parameters. This screen consists of the Parameters page and the Rotation origin page. The explanations for the softkeys given here
are valid for the pages as indicated.
Key
Description
OK
To return to Check Residuals.
Scale.. or Ppm Available on the Position page. To switch between displaying the
true scale and displaying the ppm.
Rms or
Param..
To switch between the root mean square values of the parameters
and the actual parameter values. The name of the screen changes to
Transformation Results rms when displaying rms values.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Shift dX
Display
only
Shift in X direction.
Shift dY
Display
only
Shift in Y direction.
Shift dZ
Display
only
Shift in Z direction.
Rotation X
Display
only
Rotation around the X axis.
Rotation Y
Display
only
Rotation around the Y axis.
Rotation Z
Display
only
Rotation around the Z axis.
Scale
Display
only
Scale factor used in transformation. Either true scale or
ppm.
Next step
Page changes to the Rotation origin page.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
538
Transformation
Results,
Rotation origin page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Model
Display only Classic 3D transformation model used for the transformation.
Rotation orgn Display only Available for Model: Molodensky-Badakus. Position in
X
the X direction of the origin of rotation.
Rotation orgn Display only Available for Model: Molodensky-Badakus. Position in
Y
the Y direction of the origin of rotation.
Rotation orgn Display only Available for Model: Molodensky-Badakus. Position in
Z
the Z direction of the origin of rotation.
Next step
OK returns to Check Residuals.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
539
42.4
The One Point Localisation Method
42.4.1
Determining a New Coordinate System
Access
Press OK in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs with Use one point localisation method
being checked.
Set Height Mode
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Transformation name
Editable field
A unique name for the transformation. The name
can be up to 16 characters in length and include
spaces. If a coordinate system is being updated
then its name is displayed.
Transfrm Type Display only
The type of transformation to be used when
determining a coordinate system.
Height mode
The height mode to be used in the determination
of a coordinate system.
Orthometric or
Ellipsoidal
Available when determining a new coordinate
system.
Display only
Available when updating a coordinate system.
The height mode shown is the same as the mode
used in the existing system.
Next step
OK continues to Choose System Components.

Azimuth is used throughout this chapter. This term must always be considered to
mean also Bearing.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
540
Choose System
Components
This screen contains different fields, depending on what method was chosen in Determine Coord System.
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
For Onestep
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Geoid model
Selectable list
The geoid model to be used in the transformation.
Pre Transform Selectable list
For Twostep: The pre-transformation to be used
for the preliminary 3D transformation.
Selectable list
For Twostep and Classic 3D: The ellipsoid to be
used in the transformation.
Display only
For Twostep: The ellipsoid being used by a fixed
projection when selected in Projection.
Projection
Selectable list
For Twostep and Classic 3D: The projection to be
used in the transformation.
CSCS model
Selectable list
For Classic 3D: The CSCS model to be used in the
transformation.
Ellipsoid
Next step
OK continues to Choose Common Point.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
541
Choose Common
Point
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
Survy..
Available for WGS84 point being highlighted. To occupy a point
manually and store it in WGS84 points job.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
For Onestep and Twostep: How the horizontal
and vertical shifts of the transformation will be
computed.
Match in
Position & height Position and height are taken from the same pair
of matching points.
Position only
Position is taken from one pair of matching
points. The height can be taken from another pair
of matching points.
WGS84 point
Selectable list
The point ID of the horizontal and/or vertical
control point chosen from WGS84 points job.
Local point
Selectable list
The point ID of the horizontal and/or vertical
control point chosen from Local points job.
Match height
Check box
For Onestep and Twostep: Available for Match
in: Position only. Activates the determination of
the vertical shift from a separate pair of matching
points.
Local height
Use WGS84 point For Classic 3D: The source of the height informaht or Use Local
tion to use in the transformation.
point ht
Next step
For Onestep and Twostep: OK continues to Determine Rotation.
For Classic 3D: OK continues to Store Coordinate System.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
542
Determine Rotation
For Onestep and Twostep only.
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
Inv
Available for Method: Two WGS84 points and Method: User entered.
To compute an azimuth between two local points. Refer to "42.4.2
Computing Required Azimuth".
Survy..
To manually occupy a point and store it in WGS84 points job. Available when Point 1 or Point 2 are highlighted for Method: Two WGS84
points or when WGS84 point is highlighted for
Method: Convergence angle.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Method
Method by which the rotation angle for the transUse WGS84
formation is determined.
north, User
entered, Convergence angle or
Two WGS84
points
Rotation
Display only
• For Method: Use WGS84 north: Transformation will be rotated to North as defined by the
WGS 1984 datum. North is 0.00000 °.
• For Method: Convergence angle: The rotation
of the transformation calculated as 0.00000 °
minus the computed convergence angle. The
field is updated as Coord system and WGS84
point are changed.
• For Method: Two WGS84 points: The rotation
of the transformation calculated as required
azimuth minus azimuth. The field is updated as
Point 1, Point 2 and Required azimuth are
changed.
Editable field
Coord system Selectable list
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
• For Method: User entered: Allows the orientation of the transformation to be manually
typed in or calculated in Compute Required
Azimuth.
Coordinate system to provide the direction of grid
North in the area where the control point used for
determining the local coordinate system, is
located. Available for Method: Convergence
angle.
543
Field
Option
Description
WGS84 point
Selectable list
WGS 1984 point of which the convergence angle
will be calculated. Available for
Method: Convergence angle.
Point 1
Selectable list
First point to use for computation of Azimuth.
Available for Method: Two WGS84 points.
Point 2
Selectable list
Second point to use for computation of Azimuth.
Available for Method: Two WGS84 points.
Azimuth
Display only
Computed azimuth between Point 1 and Point 2.
Available for Method: Two WGS84 points.
Required
azimuth
Editable field
The required grid azimuth, computed between
two local points. Refer to "42.4.2 Computing
Required Azimuth". Available for Method: Two
WGS84 points.
Diagram for Onestep, Method: Convergence angle
c
d
e
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
α
b
f
a
SYS13_008
WGS 1984 coordinate system
Local coordinate system
Geodetic North
Grid North
Point on WGS 1984 datum
Meridian
Convergence angle
Diagram for Onestep, Method: Two WGS84 points
a
b
c
d
a
b
SYS13_009
a)
b)
c)
d)
α
β
WGS 1984 coordinate system
Local coordinate system
Line between two WGS 1984 points
Line between two local points
Azimuth of two WGS 1984 points
Known azimuth or azimuth of two local
points
Next step
OK continues to Determine Scale.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
544
Determine Scale
For Onestep and Twostep only.
The scale is calculated using the formula (r + h)/r where
r
is the distance from the centre of the ellipsoid to the WGS 1984 point selected in
Choose Common Point, and
h is the height of this point above the WGS 1984 ellipsoid.
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
Grid..
Available Twostep and for Method: Combined SF. To compute the
grid scale factor. Refer to "42.4.3 Computing the Grid Scale Factor".
Hgt..
Available Twostep and for Method: Combined SF. To compute the
height scale factor. Refer to "42.4.4 Computing the Height Scale
Factor".
Scale or Ppm
To switch between displaying the true scale and displaying the ppm.
Survy..
To manually occupy a point and store it in WGS84 points job.
Method: Convergence angle when WGS84 point is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Method
Known WGS84
Available for Onestep: Method of determining the
pt, Known
scale factor of the transformation.
WGS84 ht or User
entered
Scale
(Reducing
points to the
ground)
WGS84 point
Description
User entered or
Combined SF
Available for Twostep. The default method for
determining the Combined Scale Factor to be
used in the transformation process.
Editable field
Available for Onestep. Allows the scale factor to
be typed in manually. Available for Method: User
entered.
Display only
Available for Onestep. The calculated scale factor.
Available for Method: Known WGS84 pt and
Method: Known WGS84 ht.
Selectable list
Available for Onestep. WGS 1984 point from
which the scale factor will be calculated. The scale
factor is calculated using the height of the known
WGS 1984 point.
Available for Method: Known WGS84 pt.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
545
Field
Option
Known height Editable field
Description
Available for Onestep. The WGS 1984 height of a
point can be typed in. The scale factor is calculated using this height. Available for
Method: Known WGS84 ht.
Grid SF
Display only
Available for Twostep and Method: Combined SF.
The grid scale factor as computed in Compute
Grid Scale Factor. Refer to "42.4.3 Computing
the Grid Scale Factor".
Height SF
Display only
Available for Twostep and Method: Combined SF.
The height scale factor as computed in Compute
Height Scale Factor. Refer to "42.4.4 Computing
the Height Scale Factor".
Available for Twostep.
The combined scale factor of the transformation.
Combined SF
Editable field
Available for Method: User entered. The scale
factor can be typed in.
Display only
Available for Method: Combined SF. The product
of the grid scale factor and the height scale
factor.
Next step
OK continues to Store Coordinate System.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
546
Store Coordinate
System
Key
Description
Store
To store the coordinate system to the DBX, attach the system to
WGS84 points job that was selected in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs
and return to Main Menu.
Scale or Ppm
For Onestep and Twostep. To switch between displaying the true
scale and displaying the ppm.
Coord
For Classic 3D: To view other coordinate types.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
For Onestep
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Name
Editable field
A unique name for the coordinate system. The
name can be up to 16 characters in length and
include spaces.
Shift dX
Display only
For Onestep and Twostep: Shift in X direction.
Shift dY
Display only
For Onestep and Twostep: Shift in Y direction.
Shift dZ
Display only
For Classic 3D: Shift in Z direction.
Rotation
Display only
For Onestep and Twostep: Rotation of transformation.
Scale
Display only
For Onestep and Twostep: Scale factor of transformation.
Rotation orgn Display only
X
For Onestep and Twostep: Position in the X direction of the origin of rotation.
Rotation orgn Display only
Y
For Onestep and Twostep: Position in the Y direction of the origin of rotation.
Next step
Store stores the coordinate system and returns to Main Menu.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
547
42.4.2
Computing Required Azimuth
Description
Available for:
• One Point Localisation method with Onestep or Twostep transformation.
• Method: Two WGS84 points and Method: User entered in Determine Rotation.
Allows two local points to be chosen from local job between which the required
azimuth will be computed. This azimuth is then used with an azimuth computed
between two WGS 1984 points chosen from the WGS84 job to calculate the rotation
of the transformation.
The computed required azimuth appears in the Required azimuth field for Method:
Two WGS84 points and the Rotation field for Method: User entered in Determine
Rotation.
Access
Press Inv in Determine Rotation.
Compute Required
Azimuth
Key
Description
OK
To calculate the required azimuth and return to the screen from
where this screen was accessed.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
From
Selectable list
The point ID of the first known point for the
azimuth calculation.
To
Selectable list
The point ID of the second known point for the
azimuth calculation.
Azimuth
Display only
The calculated azimuth.
Next step
OK returns to Determine Rotation.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
548
42.4.3
Computing the Grid Scale Factor
Description
For One Step Localisation method with Twostep transformation. Calculates the grid
scale factor. The grid scale factor is the scale factor of the point chosen, relative to
the projection being used.
Access
Press Grid.. in Determine Scale.
Compute Grid Scale
Factor
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and return to the screen from where this
screen was accessed.
Scale or Ppm
To switch between displaying the true scale and displaying the ppm.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Method by which the grid scale factor is to be
calculated.
Method
Local point
Description
User entered
Grid scale factor can be manually typed in.
Known local pt
Grid scale factor is computed using the position
of a known local point.
Selectable list
Available for Method: Known local pt. The point
ID of the point chosen from the local job from
which the grid scale factor is computed using the
projection selected.
The grid scale factor.
Grid SF
Editable field
Available for Method: User entered. To type in
the grid scale factor.
Display only
Available for Method: Known local pt. The
computed grid scale factor.
Next step
OK returns to Determine Scale.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
549
42.4.4
Computing the Height Scale Factor
Description
For One Point Localisation method with Twostep transformation. Calculates the height
scale factor of the point chosen.
Access
Press Hgt.. in Determine Scale.
Compute Height
Scale Factor
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and return to the screen from where this
screen was accessed.
Scale or Ppm
To switch between displaying the true scale and displaying the ppm.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Method by which the height scale factor is to be
calculated.
Method
Known Point
Description
User entered
Height scale factor can be manually typed in.
Known local pt
Height scale factor is computed using the position
of a known local point.
Known local ht
Height scale factor is computed using an entered
height value.
Selectable list
Available for Method: Known local pt. The point
ID of the point chosen from the local job from
which the height scale factor is computed.
Known height Editable field
Available for Method: Known local ht. A known
local height.
Height SF
The height scale factor.
Editable field
Available for Method: User entered. To type in the
height scale factor.
Display only
Available for Method: Known local pt and
Method: Known local ht. The computed height
scale factor.
Next step
OK returns to Determine Scale.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System
550
43
QuickGrid
43.1
Selecting the Transformation Method

For an overview of determine coordinate systems, refer to "42.1 Overview"
Description
QuickGrid is designed to allow for quick coordinate system determination on site.
Particularly for those users who must combine GPS and TPS data. All points must be
measured by GPS, and therefore this method is not available in TPS mode. There are
five different methods to choose from, Single point, Multi point, Single point from
base, Orientate to line & Quickshift.
Access
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\QuickGrid.
Choose QuickGrid
Method
Description of fields
Field
Method
Option
Single point
Description
This method is fast and targeted at the basic
customer who wants to set up a local coordinate
system based on a single point.
The orientation is fixed to WGS 1984 north.
A height scale is applied to bring GPS distances to
“ground” using measured point WGS 1984
height.
Multiple points
This method is fast and targeted at the more
rigorous customer who wants to set up a local
coordinate system based on multiple points.
Rotation and scale are as calculated.
Single point base This method is fast and targeted at the basic
customer who wants to set up a local coordinate
system based on the base station position.
The orientation is fixed to WGS 1984 north.
A height scale is applied to bring GPS distances to
“ground” using measured point WGS 1984
height.
Orientate to line This method is fast and targeted at the more
advanced customer who wants to set up a local
coordinate system based on a single point, but
set the orientation of the resulting grid by measuring a second point.
The rotation is as calculated.
A height scale is applied to bring GPS distances to
“ground” using measured point WGS 1984
height.
QuickShift
This method is fast and targeted at the more
advanced customer who wants to shift their
existing coordinate system based on a single
point.
A 3D transformation is calculated.
Next step
IF the selected method is
THEN
Single point, Multiple points, OK to access Define Local Quickgrid Point. Refer to
Single point base or Orien- paragraph Define Local Quickgrid Point.
tate to line
QuickShift
Viva Series, QuickGrid
OK to access Select Coordinate System. Refer to
paragraph Select Coordinate System.
551
Select Coordinate
System
This screen is only available for Method: QuickShift.
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Coord system Selectable list
Description
Select the coordinate system to be shifted.
Transformation
Display only
The type of transformation.
Ellipsoid
Display only
The coordinates are based on this ellipsoid.
Projection
Display only
The map projection.
Geoid model
Display only
The geoid model.
CSCS model
Display only
The Country Specific Coordinate System model.
Next step
OK accesses Define Local Quickgrid Point.
Viva Series, QuickGrid
552
Define Local Quickgrid Point
Key
OK
Fn Quit
Description
To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Local point
Option
Description
User entered
The local QuickGrid point is entered by the user.
From working job The local QuickGrid point is selected from the
working job.
From control job The local QuickGrid point is selected from the
control job.
Point ID
The point ID of the local QuickGrid point.
Editable field
For Local point: User entered.
Selectable list
For Local point: From working job and Local
point: From control job.
Easting
The Easting coordinate of the local QuickGrid
point.
Editable field
For Local point: User entered.
Display only
For Local point: From working job and Local
point: From control job.
Northing
The Northing coordinate of the local QuickGrid
point.
Editable field
For Local point: User entered.
Display only
For Local point: From working job and Local
point: From control job.
Elevation
The orthometric height of the local QuickGrid
point.
Editable field
For Local point: User entered.
Display only
For Local point: From working job and Local
point: From control job.
Check box
When this box is checked, no height adjustment is
Ignore local
calculated.
height & use
WGS84 height
When this box is not checked, a height adjustment is calculated.
Use geoid
Check box
Check this box to select a geoid model for the
calculation.
Geoid model Selectable list
Available when Use geoid is checked. To select a
geoid model.
Next step
OK accesses Measure QuickGrid Point.
Viva Series, QuickGrid
553
43.2
Determining a New Coordinate System
Access
Press OK in Define Local Quickgrid Point.
Measure QuickGrid
Point
This screen is similar to the standard Survey screen. Refer to "57.1.2 Real-Time Rover
Operations".
Next step
• For Method: Multiple points: After measuring and storing a point, Matched Pts &
Residuals is accessed.
• For Method: Orientate to line: Measure the points of the line. Then Store Coordinate System is accessed.
• For all other QuickGrid methods: After measuring and storing a point, Store Coordinate System is accessed.
Matched Pts & Residuals
This screen shows what points have been matched so far. More points can be added,
matched points can be deleted.
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections, compute the transformation and continue
with the subsequent screen.
New..
To survey another point and return to the Survey screen.
Match
To change the type of match for the highlighted point.
Delete
To delete the highlighted point from the list.
More
To display information about height residuals.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of columns
Column
Description
WGS84 pts
The point ID of the points chosen from WGS84 points job.
Match
The type of match to be made between the QuickGrid point and the
surveyed point. This information is used in the transformation calculation. Position & Height, Position only, Height only or None.
East, North
and Height
The residuals of the matched points.
Next step
Press New.. to return to Measure QuickGrid Point and to survey another point for the
calculation.
Press OK to continue with Store Coordinate System.
Viva Series, QuickGrid
554
Store Coordinate
System,
Summary page
The available fields, keys and pages depend on the selected QuickGrid method.
Key
Description
Store
To store the coordinate system and to exit the Determine Coordinate
System application.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Name
Editable field
The name of the new coordinate system.
No. of
matched pts
Display only
Available for Multiple points.
The number of matched points.
Largest resid- Display only
uals
East, North
and Height
Available for Multiple points.
The largest residuals of the transformation.
Rotation from Display only
north
Available for Orientate to line.
The rotation is shown in the configured angle
units.
Shift dX
Display only
Available for QuickShift.
Shift in X direction.
Shift dY
Display only
Available for QuickShift.
Shift in Y direction.
Shift dZ
Display only
Available for QuickShift.
Shift in Z direction.
Next step
Page changes to the Coord system page.
Viva Series, QuickGrid
555
Store Coordinate
System,
Coord system page
The available fields, keys and pages depend on the selected QuickGrid method.
Key
Description
Store
To store the coordinate system and to exit the Determine Coordinate
System application.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
For Multiple points.
The method by which the residuals of the control
points will be distributed throughout the transformation area.
Residuals
None
No distribution is made. Residuals remain with
their associated points.
1/distance,
1/distance² or
1/distance³/²
Distributes the residuals according to the
distance between each control point and the
newly transformed point.
Multiquadratic
Distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic
interpolation approach.
Transformation
Display only
Available for QuickShift.
The type of transformation.
Ellipsoid
Display only
Available for QuickShift.
The coordinates are based on this ellipsoid.
Projection
Display only
Available for QuickShift.
The map projection.
Geoid model
Display only
Available for Multiple points and QuickShift.
The geoid model used.
CSCS model
Display only
Available for QuickShift.
The Country Specific Coordinate System model.
Next step
Store saves the new coordinate system.
Viva Series, QuickGrid
556
44
Reference Line
44.1
Overview
Description
The Reference Line application can be used to set out or measure points relative to a
line.
Reference line
tasks
The Reference Line application can be used for the following tasks:
• Measuring to a reference line where the coordinates of a design point can be calculated from its position relative to the defined reference line.
• Staking to a reference line where the position of a design point is known and
instructions to locate the point are given relative to the reference line.
• Gridstaking a reference line where a grid can be staked relative to a reference line.
• Viewing the position relative to a slope defined from the reference line.
Other functionality available includes:
• Shifting the reference line with parallel offsets.
• Referencing to a specific segment of a line.
• Reversing the direction of a reference line.
Activating the application
If the message panel appears which requires that the application must be activated via
a license key then refer to "30.3 Load licence keys".

Measuring and staking out of points is possible for GPS and TPS.
Point types
Reference lines/arcs can be created from points stored as:
• WGS 1984 geodetic
• Local grid
A local grid must always be available when using the application.
Terms
Reference point:
Used in this chapter to refer to the point from which the perpendicular offset, from the reference line to the design point, is
measured.
Design point:
The design point.
• For measuring to a reference line, this term refers to the point
with the coordinates of the current position and the designed
or calculated height.
• For staking or grid staking to a reference line, this term refers
to the point to be staked, defined by the user
Measured point:
Line:
The current position.
A line can be a straight line between two
points, an arc or a multi-point line made up
of multiple individual line sections. It may be
003976_001
constructed by joining many “point to
points”, by creating the sections segmentby-segment, or by creating an alignment.
A line segment is an individual component of
a multi-line such as a polyline or an alignment. The segment can be a straight or an
arc.
Line segment:
003977_001
Viva Series, Reference Line
557
Preparing the data
Line data can be created by one of the following methods:
Method
Description
Create lines onboard

The Reference Line application supports DBX polylines. Lines created with
SmartWorx Viva 4.50 or higher are DBX polylines. DBX areas can be also used
as closed polylines.
Data management
Refer to "6 Jobs & Data - Data".
Create Control Data
Lines can be created using the Create line function.
Refer to "Create new line/arc".
Tap Map
From Tap Map, lines can be created, imported or
selected to be used in Reference Line. Refer to "39
Tap Map".
Survey linework
Lines can be created by measuring points in the field.
Lines can be made using the linework commands in
the Survey page. Also, taking measurements with
line objects open as well using Jobs & Data or line
codes can create lines.
Road data in Alignment Editor Using the Alignment Editor application, a simple
centreline alignment can be created and be
imported.
Only straight and curve elements are
supported. The alignment created with the
Alignment Editor application has to be
converted to a RoadRunner Job.

Import lines
Import an individual line from
DXF background map
Using a DXF file attached as a background map, lines
can be selected and imported within the map screens
of Tap Map, Survey or Reference Line applications.
Import all objects including
lines from DXF
Copy the DXF files to the \Data directory on the data
storage device of the Viva Series instrument. Once
the card is back in the instrument the DXF import
program can be used to bring the lines into the job.
Import from XML
Copy the DXF files to the \Data directory on the data
storage device of the Viva Series instrument. Once
the card is back in the instrument the XML import
program can be used to bring the lines into the job.
Import Road alignments
The Import alignment data application in Jobs &
Data supports various different formats like dxf,
LandXml, MxGenio, Terramodel, Carlson.
Create lines externally
Leica Geo Office
Refer to LGO Online Help.
Design to Field
Using the Design to Field tool of Leica Geo Office, the
user is able to bring in lines from multitudes of
formats. For example, XML, DXF, Microstation XML
and many more. Refer to LGO Online Help for information on Design to Field.
Some 3rd party software
export to Leica database
-
Viva Series, Reference Line
558

Refer to "Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device" for the placements of
the data files on the data storage device.
Defining chainage
The chainage of the start point of a reference line can be defined.
Coordinate systems
Lines and points defining the lines can be read from the control job using the active
coordinate system. For this reason, the coordinate system in the control job must
match the active one in the working job.
If using TPS, select the <None> or a local grid coordinate system.
If using GPS, a local grid coordinate system must be used. Working in WGS84 coordinates is not supported. Measured WGS84 coordinates are converted to grid using the
active coordinate system.
It is possible to use a valid coordinate system, but have the line or part of it lying
outside the projection or CSCS model being used.
In these cases, the field values relating to the difference in coordinates between the
design point and current position are shown as -----.

Direction of values
Azimuth is used throughout this chapter. This term must always be considered to
mean also Bearing.
The following diagram shows the direction of positive and negative values for distance
and height differences between the design point and the reference point for reference lines.
P1
+
-
+
P2
P2
P3
-
P0
GS_017
P0
P1
P2
P3
Start point
End point
Design point
Reference point
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
Instrument station
Start point
End point
Design point
Reference point
P2
P3
P0
TS_023
Viva Series, Reference Line
P1
+
P3
+
-
P4
559
Shifts
A reference line can be shifted. A shift is permanently applied to the reference line for
the duration of the Reference Line task.
P1a
P1
P1b
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P0a Start point with Up/down shift
P1a End point with Up/down shift
P0b Start point with Left/right shift
P1b End point with Left/right shift
d1 Up/down shift
d2 Left/right
P0a
d1
d2
P0b
P0
000237_002
P2a
P2
P0
d1
Viva Series, Reference Line
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
P1a Start point with Up/down shift
P2a End point with Up/down shift
P1b Start point with Left/right shift
P2b End point with Left/right shift
d1 Up/down
d2 Left/right
P1a
d2
000407_002
P2
P1b
P1
560
44.2
Accessing Reference Line
Access
• For measuring tasks:
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Measure to ref line.
• For staking tasks:
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Stakeout+\Stake to ref line.
• From Tap Map:
Tap & hold on a line from the displayed job or attached CAD. Select Use in Reference Line from the context menu. Select how to enter the application: Stake task
selection, Measure task selection, Stake line, Measure line with slope, Measure
line, Stake line with slope
Job Selection
Key
OK
Fn Quit
Description
To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Choose
control job
Option
Selectable list
Description
The reference lines are stored in this job.

Use a DTM job Check box
DTM job
Selectable list
DTM layer
Selectable list
The measurements are stored to the
working job. The coordinate systems in
the control job and in the working job
must match, otherwise a warning
message appears to prevent any further
step.
When this box is checked, a DTM job can be
selected. A DTM job holds DTM (Digital Terrain
Model) or TIN (Triangular Irregular Network) data.
The files are stored in the \DBX folder or a
subfolder of \DBX.
Holds DTM (Digital Terrain Model) data or TIN
(Triangular Irregular Network) data. The DTM job
to be used must be stored in the \DBX directory
on the active memory device.
The DTM job is a read-only source of information
and cannot be selected as a working or control
job.
To choose the DTM layer.
Next step
OK accesses Reference Line Task.
Viva Series, Reference Line
561
Reference Line Task
Key
OK
Fn Config..
Fn Quit
Description
To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
To configure the Reference Line application.
To exit the screen.
Description of the Reference Line tasks
For measuring to a reference line
Task
Line
Line with slope
Segment
Segment with slope
Quick Line
Description
Measure relative to a line by viewing the distance, offset &
height values.
Measure relative to a line by viewing the distance, offset &
height values. Additionally view position relative to a defined
slope from the line.
Measure relative to a line segment by viewing the distance,
offset & height values. A segment may be an individual straight
or arc, or a segment within a line.
Measure relative to a line segment by viewing the distance,
offset & height values. Additionally view position relative to a
defined slope from the line.
Create a temporary line from 2 points & measure relative to it by
viewing the distance, offset & height values.
For staking to a reference line
Task
Line
Line with slope
Grid
Segment
Segment with slope
Quick Line
Description
Stakeout relative to a line by defining the distance, offset &
height.
Stakeout relative to a line by defining the distance, offset &
height. Additionally view position relative to a defined slope from
the line.
Define & stakeout a grid of points relative to a line.
Stakeout relative to a line segment, by defining the distance,
offset & height. A segment may be an individual straight or arc,
or a segment within a line.
Stakeout relative to a line segment, by defining the distance,
offset & height. Additionally view position relative to a defined
slope from the line.
Create a temporary line from 2 points & stakeout relative to it by
defining the distance, offset & height.
Next step
OK accesses Define Line.
Viva Series, Reference Line
562
44.3
Configuring Reference Line
Access
Press Fn Config.. in the input screens of the Reference Line application.
Configuration,
General page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn About
To display information about the application name, the version
number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Use chainages Check box
Allow stake
Check box
definition in
stake page
Always enable Check box
editing of
design height
View results
Check box
page after
staking a point
Only update
Check box
stakeout
values when
distance is
measured
Turn to point Check box
automatically
Turn to
Viva Series, Reference Line
Description
Activates the use of chainages within the reference line application. If this is deactivated, Dist
along line will be used for data input purposes.
When this box is checked, stake values can be
defined on the Stake page.
When this box is checked, the design height can
be changed manually for Heights to use: From
line or Heights to use: Start point. Available when
Allow stake definition in stake page is checked.
When this box is checked, the stake results are
displayed after staking a point.
When this box is checked, angles and
stakeout values are updated after a distance was
measured. Then all values are frozen until the
next distance is taken.
When this box is checked, the instrument
positions automatically to the point to be staked.
Selectable list
Available when Turn to point automatically
is checked.
Position only
Instrument positions horizontally to the
point to be staked.
563
Field
Use two face
measurements
Option
Description
Position & height
Instrument positions horizontally and vertically to the point to be staked.
Check box
To take a measurement in Face I and Face
II. The point stored is an average of the two
measurements. When using instruments fitted
with auto aiming, the point is automatically measured in both faces. The resulting point is stored
and the instrument is returned to the first face.
Next step
Page changes to the Quality control page.
Configuration,
Quality control page
Description
Especially when checking points it is useful to enable the Quality control criteria available. For every point stored the chosen parameters are checked. When Quality control
criteria is fulfilled, green ticks are shown in the stake page, and the measured point
can be directly stored. If the check limits are exceeded a warning is shown. This function guarantees a higher productivity as it is no longer necessary to check the values
for every shot taken.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Check deltas Check box
to point before
storing (set
Limit to 0 if
you wish to
always be
shown differences before
storing)
Delta values
Ch, offset &
height
Ch & offset
Position & height
Position
Height
Chainage limit From 0.001 to
100
Offset limit
From 0.001 to
100
Position limit From 0.001 to
100
Height limit
From 0.001 to
100
Description
When this box is checked, a position check is done
when storing a staked point. When the defined
tolerance is exceeded, the stake out can be
repeated, skipped or stored.
When this box is not checked, no quality check is
done during stake out of points.

Depending on this selection the following
lines are enabled/disabled.
Check for chainage, horizontal offset and height.
Check for chainage and horizontal offset.
Check for 2D position and height.
Check for 2D position.
Check for height.
Maximum difference in chainage.
Maximum horizontal offset from defined position.
Maximum radial horizontal distance.
Maximum height difference.
Next step
Page changes to the Design page.
Viva Series, Reference Line
564
Configuration,
Design page
On this page, additional design points to be staked are set. Refer to "44.6 Staking to
a Reference Line" for a graphic.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Horizontal
(PC, PT, AP)
Check box
Horizontal type points occur at the junction
between two segments in a line.
Mid curve
(MCP)
Check box
Occurs in arc segments.
Curve radius
(RP)
Check box
Occurs in arc segments.
Offset
Check box
bisected point
(BP)
Occurs when the junction between two segments
in a line is not tangent AND when offsets are
active.
Offset in
Check box
average direction (Avg)
Occurs when the junction between two segments
in a line is not tangent AND when offsets are
active.
Check box
Vertical type points occur at the junction between
two segments in the vertical alignment of the line,
or when a high or low element is found. Example:
In a curve between two grades
Vertical (VPI,
Low, High,
VPC, VPT)
Viva Series, Reference Line
565
Configuration,
Graphics page
This page is only available for staking operations.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Navigate direction
Description
The reference direction to be used to stakeout
points. The stakeout elements and the graphical
display shown in the Reference Line application
are based on this selection.
From instrument
The direction of the orientation is from
the instrument to the point to be staked.
To instrument
The direction of the orientation is from
the point to be staked to the instrument.
To north
The North direction shown in the graphical
display based on the active coordinate system.
To sun
The position of the sun calculated from
the current position, the time and the date.
To last point Time-wise, the last recorded point.
To point (cntrl A point from the control job selected in Job
job)
Selection.
To point
A point from the working job.
To reference The direction of the orientation is parallel to the
line
reference line.
Following
The direction of the orientation is from the
arrow
current position to the point to be staked. The
graphical display shows an arrow pointing in the
direction of the point to be staked.
Point
Selectable list Available for Navigate direction: To point (cntrl
job) and Navigate direction: To point. To select
the point to be used for orientation.
Navigate using
The method of staking out.
Direction &
The direction from the orientation reference, the
distance
horizontal distance and the cut/fill is displayed.
In/out,
The distance forwards/backwards to the point,
left/right
the distance right/left to the point and the
cut/fill is displayed.
Switch to bulls eye Check box
When this box is checked, a bulls eye bubble is
when 0.5m from
shown in the stakeout graphic when less than
target
half a metre from the point being staked.
Beep faster when Check box
The instrument beeps when the horizontal radial
getting close to
distance from the current position to the point
point
to be staked, is equal to or less than defined in
Start within.
Distance to use
Height
The distance in height is used as indicator.
Horizontal
The distance from Easting and Northing is used
distance
as indicator.
Position &
The distance from Easting, Northing and Height
height
is used as indicator.
Start within
Editable field The horizontal radial distance from the current
position to the point to be staked when a beep
will be heard.
Next step
Page changes to the Info page.
Viva Series, Reference Line
566
Configuration,
Info page
Two things can be configured on this page:
1) The required information for the stake or measure method to be displayed on the
Info page.
2) If and which additional user-defined survey screen page is displayed.
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the changes and continue.
Clear
To clear all parameters from all lines.
Default
To set the default value for all lines.
Fn About
To display information about the application name, the version
number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Show additional
page from My
Survey Screen
Check box
Shows a selectable list for the survey screen
pages.
Page to show
Selectable list
The user-defined survey screen page to be
shown. All survey screens defined in My Survey
Screen Settings can be selected.
Method
Display only
The method is based on the selected Reference
Line task. The settings in the following lines can
only be changed for the current task.
The method defines the parameters available to
view on the Info page of the application.
Different combinations of the parameters to
view can be stored.
1st line to 16th
line
Selectable list
To modify the selection on any particular line,
place the cursor on the line to modify using the
arrow keys and press the ENTER key. Use the
arrow keys to select the required parameter and
press the ENTER key to confirm the choice.
Define which parameters are viewed on each
line. Up to 16 lines of parameters can be
defined.

Some of the options are explained in
graphics in the following chapters.
Always available
Point ID
Viva Series, Reference Line
To enter the point ID.
Antenna height
To enter the antenna height.
Target height
To enter the target height.
Code
Editable field for codes.
Code desc
(free)
Displays the description of free codes.
Attrib 01 and
Attrib 02
Editable field for attributes for codes.
567
Field
Option
Description
Chainage
Displays the current chainage.
Dist along line
Displays the horizontal distance from the start
point to the reference point along the reference
line.
Line offset
Displays the horizontal offset perpendicular
from the line to the current position.
Line height diff Displays the height difference from the defined
line to the current position.
Line name
Displays the name of the reference line.
Line type
Displays the line type as straight, arc or polyline.
Easting
Displays the Easting coordinate of the current
position.
Northing
Displays the Northing coordinate of the current
position.
Height
Displays the height of the current position.
Quality 3D
Display only field for the current 3D coordinate quality of computed position.
Cut/fill
Displays the height difference between the
design height and the measured height.
Line space full
Insert full line space.
Line space half Insert half line space.
For measure with/without slope also available
Dist to start
point
Displays the horizontal distance from the measured point to the start point of the line.
Dist to end
point
Displays the horizontal distance from the measured point to the end point of the line.
Line dist to end Displays the horizontal distance from the end
point of the line to the base point of the measured point, along the line.
Perp distance
Displays the slope distance between the reference point and the measured point, perpendicular to the reference line. Not displayed when
shifts are applied.
Perp ht to line
Displays the height difference perpendicular
from the reference line to the horizontal base
point. Not displayed when shifts are applied.
Spatial dist
Displays the slope distance between the start
point and the reference point. Not displayed
when shifts are applied.
For stake with/without slope also available
∆ dist along line Displays the horizontal distance along the reference line from the current position to the
defined design point.
Viva Series, Reference Line
∆ chainage
Displays the difference between the defined
chainage and the current chainage.
∆ height
Displays the vertical offset between the defined
position and the current position.
568
Field
Option
Description
Defined
chainage
Displays the defined chainage of the point to be
staked out.
Defined line
dist
Displays the defined horizontal distance along
the reference line from the start point to the
design point.
Defined offset
Displays the defined horizontal offset perpendicular from the reference line to design point.
Direction to
point
Displays the direction from the current position
to the design point.
Distance to
point
Displays the distance from the current position
to the design point.
Design easting Displays the Easting of the design point.
Design
northing
Displays the Northing of the design point.
Design height
Displays the height of the design point,
depending on the defined heights to use.
For slope only also available
Slope ratio
meas
Displays the ratio of the slope from the current
position to the hinge.
Slope ratio
defined
Displays the ratio of the slope from the design
point to the hinge, as defined by the user.
Slope dist
hinge
Displays the slope distance offset from the
hinge to measured point.
Slope dist line
Displays the slope distance offset from line to
measured point.
Slope height
diff
Displays the height difference between the
current position and the height of the slope at
that position. A cut is above the slope. A fill is
below the slope.
Hinge offset
Displays the horizontal offset from the hinge
point of the slope to the current position.
Hinge height
diff
Displays the height difference from the hinge
point of the slope to the current position.
Next step
Page changes to the Report sheet page.
Viva Series, Reference Line
569
Configuration,
Report sheet page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Create report
sheet
Check box
To generate a report sheet when the application is
exited.
A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected
format file.
Report sheet
Selectable
list
Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name
of the file to which the data will be written. A report
sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active
memory device. The data is always appended to the
file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets
screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet
can be created and an existing report sheet can be
selected or deleted.
Format file to
use
Selectable
list
Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format
file defines which and how data is written to a report
sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file
must first be transferred from the data storage device
to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer
to "30.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how
to transfer a format file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files
screen where an existing format file can be selected or
deleted.
Next step
Page changes to the first page on this screen.
Viva Series, Reference Line
570
44.4
Defining the Reference Line
44.4.1
Overview
Description
The definition of the reference line to be used can require up to three steps,
depending on the selected task:
Task
Define Line
Define Segment
Define Slope
Line
Quick Line

-
-
Segment
Grid


-
Line with slope

-



Segment with slope 
44.4.2
Defining the Line
Access
1) Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Measure to ref line or Stake to ref line.
2) In the job selection screen, select the required job and press OK.
3) In Reference Line Task, select the required task and press OK.
Define Line,
Line page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and continue with the subsequent screen.
Create..
To create a line. Refer to "9 Jobs & Data - Create control data".
Shifts..
To apply horizontal and vertical shifts to the selected line. Refer to
"Shift Settings". Available for lines only. If using line segments, shifts
are applied in the Define Segment screen.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Reference Line application.
Fn Report
To view an alignment report. Refer to "Line Report, Points page".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Line to use
Selectable list
To select a line. Open the selectable list to access
the Line Selection screen showing all selectable
lines from the control job.
Type
Display only
The selected line type as straight, arc or polyline.
Viva Series, Reference Line
571
Field
Option
Description
Length
Display only
The horizontal grid distance between the two
points of the line.
Start chainage Display only
The beginning chainage of the line.
Heights to use Selectable list
Depending on the task chosen this parameter
determines the design height.
• When measuring to a line, it affects the height
difference value.
• When staking, it affects the delta height value.
From line
Heights are computed along the reference line.
Manually enter
Heights are typed in manually into the Design
height field.
Start point
Heights are computed relative to the height of
the starting point of the line.
DTM
The height computed from the DTM at the position of the reference point.
Next step
OK accesses Define Slope, Define Segment, Measure to Line or Define Stake.
Viva Series, Reference Line
572
Define Line,
Map page
Key
Description
Revrs
To reverse the direction of the lines, so that the distance along
line/chainage increment is in the opposite direction to the original:
Original:
Define Quick Line
Reverse:
When Quick Line is the selected task, the line is defined by two points from the
control job, instead of an existing line.
When the task is finished or a new quick line is defined, the previously defined
quick line is automatically deleted from the database.

Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and continue with the subsequent screen.
Shifts..
To apply horizontal and vertical shifts to the defined line. Refer to
"Shift Settings".
Survy..
To measure a point. Available when Start point or End point is highlighted.
Fn Config..
To configure the Reference Line application.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Start point
Selectable list
The first point forming the line.
End point
Selectable list
The last point forming the line.
Length
Display only
The horizontal grid distance between the two
points of the line.
Heights to use Selectable list
Depending on the task chosen this parameter
determines the design height.
• When measuring to a line, it affects the height
difference value.
• When staking, it affects the delta height value.
Viva Series, Reference Line
From line
Heights are computed along the reference line.
Manually enter
Heights are typed in manually into the Design
height field.
Start point
Heights are computed relative to the height of
the starting point of the line.
DTM
The height computed from the DTM at the position of the reference point.
573
Line selection and
importing lines
Selecting lines
In Define Line, open the selectable list for Line to use.
The list contains all selectable lines from the control job. The line ID and the start
chainages of lines can be edited.
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted reference line and to return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Edit..
To edit line ID and the start chainage.
Import
To import a line from a Road/Rail job or from an external survey job.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Importing lines
Press Import to import a single alignment from a Road or Rail job, or a line/area from
another survey job, to a line to be used in the application. The Import Line screen
opens.
Only alignment geometry that contains lines and simple curves are supported.
Clothoids are not supported and can not be imported.
If the source survey job for the importation is the same as the control job, for
example when you want to import areas, the imported element is converted to
a line with the suffix _001.


Key
Description
OK
To import the selected alignment data to active raw alignment.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
The file type of the data source.
Data source
Road job
To import lines from an existing Road job.
Rail job
To import lines from an existing Rail job.
Survey job
To import lines/areas from an existing survey job.
Road+ (GSI
format)
To import lines from an existing Road job defined
in GSI format.
From job
Selectable list
All jobs are available for selection.
Line
Selectable list
Line from the selected Road job. The line must be
stored in the \dbx folder of the memory device to
be selectable.
Viva Series, Reference Line
574
Line Report,
Points page
The report displays information on the points that have been measured with the
current selected control job, and current select line.
Key
Description
OK
To return to the screen from which this screen was accessed.
Edit..
To edit details of the highlighted point.
Save..
To save the alignment report.
More
To change the values displayed between Offset, Cut/fill, Measured
height, Design height, Point ID and Pt code.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Next step
Page changes to the Map page. Use Prev and Next to the previous or next measured
point.
Shift Settings

The Map page is not updated with shifts.
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit Reference Line application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Shift line
Check box
Check to apply a shift.
Left/right
Editable field
Distance to shift the reference line horizontally to
the left or right.
Up/down
Editable field
The vertical shift of the reference line.
Rotate line
Editable field
Available for Measure: Quick Line.
To rotate the line by the defined angle value clockwise if not defined otherwise in Regional
settings.
If values are entered for both Rotate line
and Left/right, the horizontal shift is
applied to the rotated line.

Viva Series, Reference Line
575
44.4.3
Defining a Segment of a Line
Description
Define Segment, Segment page appears when the selected method is Segment,
Segment with slope or Grid. A segment can be a straight or an arc.
Define Segment,
Segment page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and continue with the subsequent screen.
Shifts..
To apply horizontal and vertical shifts to the selected segment. Refer
to "Shift Settings".
Seg- or Seg+
To select the previous/next segment in the line.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Reference Line application.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Line to use
Display only
The current line.
Segment no
Editable field
The line segment number to work with. A polyline
is split into segments, naming from 1 upwards.
Segment type Display only
Segment
length
Display only
Start chainage Display only
The selected line type as straight or arc.
The horizontal grid distance between the two
points of the line segment.
The beginning chainage of the line segment.
Next step
Page changes to the Map page. Refer to "Define Line, Map page".
Viva Series, Reference Line
576
44.4.4
Defining Reference Line Slopes
Description
It is possible to define slopes for reference line. When measuring or staking to the
reference line, additional information about the position relative to the slope is
displayed.
Stakeout values still refer to the reference line. For the Info page, additional information relative to the slope can be configured in Configuration, Info page.
Define Slope
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Reference Line application.
Fn Quit
To exit Reference Line application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Line to use
Selectable list
To select a line. Or select a line on the Map page.
The method how the slope is created.
Slope direction
Left down
Creates a downward plane extending to the left
of the defined reference line.
Right down
Creates a downward plane extending to the right
of the defined reference line.
Left up
Creates an upward plane extending to the left of
the defined reference line.
Right up
Creates an upward plane extending to the right of
the defined reference line.
Slope grade
Editable field
Inclination of the slope.
Hinge hz
offset
Editable field
Horizontal offset from the line that sets where
the slope starts.
Hinge vt offset Editable field
Viva Series, Reference Line
Vertical offset from the line that sets where the
slope starts.
577
44.5
Measuring to a Reference Line
Description
The horizontal and vertical position and the distance along line/chainage of a manually
measured point can be calculated relative to the defined reference line.
Information can be measured and displayed in the Info page, and then exported. Refer
to "Configuration, Info page".
Measure to line straight segment horizontal measurements
P1
d3
d5
P3
d1
d2
P2
d4
P0
GS_020
P0
P1
P2
P3
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
Start point
End point
Measured point
Reference point
Line offset
Dist along line
Line dist to end
Dist to start point
Dist to end point
P0
P1
P2
P3
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
Start point
End point
Measured point
Reference point
Line offset
Dist along line
Line dist to end
Dist to start point
Dist to end point
P1
d3
d5
P3
d2
000411_002
Viva Series, Reference Line
P0
d1
d4
P2
578
Measure to line straight segment vertical measurements
Z
Z
P1
X
P1
X
P4
Y
P3
P3
P4
d2
d3
d5
d1
P0
d5
P2 d1
P5
P5
d4
P0
000240_002
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
Start point
End point
Measured point
Reference point
Perpendicular point
Horizontal base point
Line height diff
Perp distance
Spatial dist
∆ ht start of line
Perp ht to line
Z
Z
P1
X
P1
X
P4
Y
P3
P3
P4
P0
d3
d2
d5
P0
P5
P2 d1
d1
d5
P5
d4
P6
000412_002
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
Start point
End point
Measured point
Reference point
Perpendicular point
Horizontal base point
Instrument station
Line height diff
Perp distance
Spatial dist
∆ ht start of line
Perp ht to line
Viva Series, Reference Line
579
Measure to line - arc
segment - horizontal measurements
Design point inside arc
d3
P3
d2
P1
d5
d1
d4
P2
P0
GS_022
d3
P4
d2
P2
d1
d4
P1
P0
TS_028
Viva Series, Reference Line
P3
d5
P0
P1
P2
P3
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
Start point
End point
Measured point
Reference point
Line offset
Dist along line
Line dist to end
Dist to start point
Dist to end point
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
Instrument station
Start point
End point
Measured point
Reference point
Line offset
Dist along line
Line dist to end
Dist to start point
Dist to end point
580
Measure to line - arc
segment - vertical
measurements
P1
P3
P2
d2
d1
P0
GS_024
P0
P1
P2
P3
d1
d2
Start point
End point
Measured point
Reference point
∆ ht start of line
Line height diff
P2
P4
P3
d2
P0
TS_030

P1
P0
P1
P2
d1
P3
P4
d1
d2
Instrument station
Start point
End point
Measured point
Reference point
∆ ht start of line
Line height diff
Design point outside the range of the selected element:
When measuring outside of the defined lines, lines and arcs are extended in a straight
projection tangent to the start/end of the line. For Heights to use: From line, the
start/end grade of the line is also extended. A warning appears when this is the case.
When working with segments, the same extension rules are applicable to the selected
segment beyond its limits. For lines imported from a road alignment, heights are not
extended outside the segment.
Viva Series, Reference Line
581
Measure to Line,
Measure page
An additional page is available when a user-defined survey screen page is used.
Key
Description
Meas
To start measuring the point being staked. The key changes to
Stop. The difference between the current position and the point
being staked is still displayed.
To measure a distance and store distance and angles.
Stop
To end measuring the point being staked. When Automatically stop
point measurement is checked in Quality Control, General page
recording of positions ends automatically as defined by the stop
criteria. The position mode icon changes to the moving icon. The key
changes to Store.
Store
To store the measured point. When Automatically store point
is checked in Quality Control, General page, the measured point is
stored automatically. The key changes to Meas.
To store angles and distance. Distance must be measured
before.
Dist
To measure a distance.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Reference Line application. Available when Meas is
displayed. Refer to "44.3 Configuring Reference Line".
Fn Conect and To connect/disconnect from the GPS reference data.
Fn
Disco
Fn Init
To select an initialisation method and to force a new initialisation.
Available when Meas or Store is displayed and for working styles
allowing phase fixed solutions. Refer to "57.4 Initialisation for RealTime Rover Operations".
Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the
Fn Run
defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Point ID
Selectable list
The point ID of the point to be measured.
Viva Series, Reference Line
582
Field
Option
Description
Antenna
height
Editable field
The default antenna height. Changing the
antenna height here does not update the default
antenna height as defined in the active working
style. The changed antenna height is used until
the application is exited.
Target height
Editable field
The last used target height is suggested.
An individual target height can be typed in.
Chainage
Display only
Chainage of the current position along the line.
This value is the chainage of the start of the
reference line plus Dist along line.
Defined line
dist
Display only
Horizontal distance from the start point to the
reference point along the reference line.
Line offset
Display only
Perpendicular offset from the reference line
measured from the reference point to the measured point.
Height diff
Display only
Difference between measured height and design
height.
Next step
Page changes to the user definable Info page. Refer to "44.3 Configuring Reference
Line" for information on all available items.
Page changes to the Map page. Displayed is
• the horizontal distance or chainage along the reference line from the start point to
the reference point.
• the perpendicular offset from the reference line measured from the reference
point to the measured point.
• the cut/fill value.
Viva Series, Reference Line
583
44.6
Staking to a Reference Line
Description
Allows for the position of a point to be defined relative to a reference line and then
staked.
Stake to line - horizontal measurements
P1
d1
P3
d2
d4 P2
d3
d6
d5
P0
004099_002
P2
d1
d2
d3
P0
004098_002
Viva Series, Reference Line
P1
P4
d4 P3
d5
d6
P0
P1
P2
P3
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
d6
Start point
End point
Design point
Reference point
Line offset
Dist along line
Defined line dist
Defined offset
∆ offset
∆ dist along line
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
d6
Instrument station
Start point
End point
Design point
Reference point
Line offset
Dist along line
Defined line dist
Defined offset
∆ offset
∆ dist along line
584
Stake to line vertical measurements
P1
P2
P3
P0
P1
d2
P2
d1 P3
d1
Start point
End point
Design point
Reference point
Height offset, for Heights to
use: Start point
d2 Height offset, for Heights to
use: From line
P0
P2
P4
P0
P1
000417_002
Viva Series, Reference Line
P3
P0
P1
P2
d2
P3
d1 P4
d1
Instrument station
Start point
End point
Design point
Reference point
Height offset, for Heights to
use: Start point
d2 Height offset, for Heights to
use: From line
585
Define Stake
This screen is for typing in the stakeout values for a point relative to the reference line.
The fields available depend on the options chosen in the Configuration screen.
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
Stk-/Ch-
To decrease the distance along line/the chainage by Increment.
Stk+/Ch+
To increase the distance along line/the chainage by Increment.
Fn Config..
To configure the Reference Line application. Refer to "44.3 Configuring Reference Line".
Fn Report
To view an alignment report. Refer to " Line Report, Points page".
Fn Start and
Fn End
To change between the start point and the end point of the line.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Line
Display only
The name of the selected reference line.
Start chainage Display only
The chainage of the start point of a reference
line.
Editable field
Chainage along the line. Define this value as
chainage of the start of the reference line plus a
distance along the line.
Dist along line Editable field
Horizontal distance from the start point along the
line to the design point.
Offset
Editable field
The offset from the reference line to the design
point
Height offset
Display only
The height offset of the design point.
Chainage
• For Heights to use: Start point
The height of the design point is calculated as
the height of the start point plus Height
offset.
• For Heights to use: From line
The height of the design point is calculated as
the height of the reference point plus Height
offset.
Viva Series, Reference Line
586
Field
Option
Design height Editable field
Use stake
increments/Use
chainage
increments
Check box
Description
• For Heights to use: Manually enter
The height of the design point is entered
manually.
Activates the use of stake/chainage increments.
Sets behaviour of the stake/chainage after a
point is stored.
After storing
Do nothing
Does not change the stake/chainage after a point
is stored.
Move forwards
Proceeds to the next point up stake/chainage
after each stored staked point.
Move backwards Proceeds to the next point down stake/chainage
after each stored staked point.
Use different
increment on
curves
Check box
Option to use a different chainage increment
along a curve.
Increment
Editable field
Available when Use different increment on
curves is checked. Chainage increment to be used
along the small radius curve.
Radius under
Editable field
Available when Use different increment on
curves is checked. Defines the threshold value of
a small radius curve. For example, a curve with a
radius smaller than this value, uses the chainage
increment defined in the following field.
Next step
OK to accept changes and continue to Stakeout. Refer to "54.4 Staking Out".
Viva Series, Reference Line
587
Stakeout,
Stake page
Once in the Stakeout screens, the user is guided to reach design positions.
The functionality of this screen is similar to the Stakeout screen. Differences between
the two screens are outlined here. Refer to paragraph "54.4 Staking Out" for all other
key and field explanations.
In the title bar is a description of where the stake point is on the alignment. This
description can come from the position of the defined stake point someway along the
line or a point of interestion. For points of interest refer to "Points of interest".
The availability of the fields depends on the configuration in Configuration, General
page.
Key
Description
Stk-/Ch-
To decrease the distance along line/the chainage by Increment.
Stk+/Ch+
To increase the distance along line/the chainage by Increment.
Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the
Fn Run
defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "25.1.1 Accessing ID Template Configuration".
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Point ID/ Pt
Editable field The point ID of the point to be staked.
Target height
Editable field
The last used target height as defined is
suggested. An individual target height can be
typed in.
Antenna ht
Editable field
The default antenna height as defined in
the active working style is suggested.
Ch
Editable field The current chainage to be staked.
Off
Editable field Current offset being staked.
Current height
Display only
Design height
Editable field Design elevation. The orthometric height of the
point to be staked is displayed.
Measured elevation. The orthometric height of
the current position is displayed.
Next step
Page changes to the Results page, if configured.
Viva Series, Reference Line
588
Points of interest
Points of interest are staked out if they appear within the defined Ch-/Ch+/Stk-/Stk+
range and if checked in Configuration, Design page. Refer to "Configuration, Design
page".
P4’
P5’
P4
P2’
P5
P2
P1’
P6c’
P1
P6
P7
000262_002
On
P1
P2
P3
the original line:
BOP - Beginning of project
PC - Beginning of curve
RP - Radius point of the centre of the
curve
P4 MCP - Mid point curve
P5 PT - End of curve section - Start of
straight segment
P6 AP - Angle point
P7 EOP - End of project
P6b’
P6a’
P3
P6’
P7’
On the offseted line:
P1’ Offset BOP - Beginning of project
P2’ Offset PC - Beginning of curve
P4’ Offset MCP - Mid point curve
P5’ Offset PT - End of curve section Start of straight segment
P6’ AP-F - Offset angle point projected to
the next segment
P6a’AP-B - Offset angle point projected to
the previous segment
P6b’AVG - Offset in average direction
P6c’BP - Offset bisected point
P7’ EOP - End of project
General terms:
• Curve - Along a curve section
• Extension - Along an extended part of the line
• Curve mid point - Mid curve point
• Straight - Along a straight section
• VPI - Vertical interesection point
• Offset PI avg - Offset intersection point average element
Viva Series, Reference Line
589
Results,
General page
If View results page after staking a point is checked in Configuration, General page,
this screen opens automatically once a point is measured and stored.
Key
Description
OK
To return to the stake screen.
Edit..
To add a vertical offset to the design height and to display the new
height.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Point ID
Editable field The point ID of the point staked.
Chainage
Display only
The chainage measured at the stored point.
Offset
Display only
The offset from the alignment measured at the
stored point.
Design height
Display only
The entered design elevation.
Measured height
Display only
The height measured at the stored point.
Cut/Fill
Display only
The height difference between the Design height
and the Measured height.
Annot 1
Display only
Fixed value recorded for certain software packages.
Annot 2 to Annot 4 Editable field Available for additional notes.
Next step
Page changes to the Coords page. This page displays the design coordinates as well
as the differences between design and measured coordinates.
Page changes to the Code where codes can be selected or typed in.
Page changes to the Map page. This page provides an interactive display of the data.
Viva Series, Reference Line
590
44.7
Gridstaking to a Reference Line
Description
A grid can be defined relative to a reference line and points staked out in that defined
grid.
Stake grid from line
In same direction
P1
d1
P0
d3
d2
GS_026
P0
P1
d1
d2
d3
Start point
End point
Distance along line to first grid point
Grid spacing along line
Grid spacing across line
P0
P1
P2
d1
d2
d3
Instrument station
Start point
End point
Distance along line to first grid point
Grid spacing along line
Grid spacing across line
P0
P1
d1
d2
d3
Start point
End point
Distance along line to first grid point
Grid spacing along line
Grid spacing across line
P2
d1
d3
P1
d2
P0
TS_034
In reverse direction
P1
d1
P0
d3
GS_027
Viva Series, Reference Line
d2
591
P2
d1
P1
d3
TS_035
Viva Series, Reference Line
d2
P0
P0
P1
P2
d1
d2
d3
Instrument station
Start point
End point
Distance along line to first grid point
Grid spacing along line
Grid spacing across line
592
Define Grid
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Chainage
Editable field
Chainage of the first design point to be staked
along the line.
Across line
Editable field
Spacing between grid lines.
Along line
Editable field
Spacing between points on the grid line.
Method by which the grid will be staked out.
Stake next
grid line
In same direction Each new grid line is started at the same end as
where the previous grid line started.
In reverse direction
Each new grid line is started at the same end as
where the previous grid line finished.
Determines the format of the point ID for grid
points.
Store point
using
Grid reference
Point ID is shown as the position of the grid being
staked, where +yyy.yy is the chainage position
along the grid line, and +xxx.xx is the grid line
offset.
Pt ID template
The point ID template as defined in the active
working style is used. The point ID template can
be defined in Main Menu: User\Work settings.
Next step
OK to accept changes and continue to the stakeout screen.
Viva Series, Reference Line
593
Stake +yyy.yy
+xxx.xx
The title of this screen indicates the position of the grid being staked, where +yyy.yy
is the chainage position along the grid line, and +xxx.xx is the grid line offset.
The functionality of this screen is similar to the Stakeout screen. Differences between
the two screens are outlined here. Refer to paragraph "54.4 Staking Out" for all other
key and field explanations.
Key
Description
Skip
To skip the currently displayed chainage and increment to the next
chainage. Available when Meas is displayed.
Line+
To start staking the next grid line. Moves grid stake point to the next
line (right) in the grid. There is no automatic Line+ when the end of
the line is reached.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
First field on
the screen
Editable field
The point ID of the grid point to be staked. The
point ID is based on the selection for Store point
using in Define Grid. If a different point ID is
typed in, the next point ID will still be shown as
the next automatically computed point ID.
Target height
Editable field
The last used target height as defined is
suggested. An individual target height can be
typed in.
Antenna ht
Editable field
The default antenna height as defined in
the active working style is suggested.
Current height Display only
Measured elevation. The orthometric height of
the current position is displayed.
Design height Editable field
Design elevation. The orthometric height of the
point to be staked is displayed.
Next step
Page changes to the Map page. Displayed is
• the horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked.
• the height difference from the height of the current position to the height of the
point to be staked.
Viva Series, Reference Line
594
45
Reference Plane & Grid Scan
45.1
Overview
Description
The Reference Plane & Grid Scan application can be used to measure points relative
to a reference plane.
Any surface can also be grid scanned. It is possible to measure either a regular
grid on a predefined reference plane or any surface with an angle based resolution.
Reference Plane &
Grid Scan tasks
The Reference Plane & Grid Scan application can be used for the following tasks:
• Measuring points to calculate and store the perpendicular distance to the plane.
• Viewing and storing the instrument and/or local coordinates of the measured
points.
• Viewing and storing the height difference from the measured points to the plane.
•


Grid Scan a defined area on a predefined reference plane with a regular grid
or on any surface with an angle based resolution.
Planes can only be computed with grid coordinates.
Face scan is available for instruments with reflectorless EDM.
Activating the application
The Reference Plane & Grid Scan application must be activated via a licence key. Refer
to "30.3 Load licence keys" for information on how to activate the application.
Defining a reference plane
Reference planes are created using a right hand system. For two points defining a
plane, a vertical plane is used. A reference plane is defined with the X axis and the Z
axis of the plane. The Y axis of the plane defines the positive direction of the plane. A
reference plane can be defined in the following ways:
• vertical
• tilted
• horizontal
P3
P1
P4
P2
P5
P3
P2
P5
P0
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
Point
Point
Point
Point
Point
defining
defining
defining
defining
defining
reference
reference
reference
reference
reference
plane
plane
plane
plane
plane
P4
P1
TS_039
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
Instrument station
Point defining reference plane
Point defining reference plane
Point defining reference plane
Measured point
Measured point
595

•
Tilted plane
Any number of points define the plane. The axes of the tilted reference plane are:
Measure to plane is applicable for tilted and horizontal plane definitions.
•
Measure to plane and Grid scan on plane is applicable for tilted and horizontal plane definitions.
X axis:
Z axis:
Y axis:
Horizontal and parallel to the plane
Defined by steepest direction of the plane
Perpendicular to the plane; increases in the direction as defined
Offsets are applied in the direction of the Y axis.

For
:
Z
a
Z
a
Y
X
P1
P1
X
Y
b
GS_059
For
b
GS_060
:
a
a
Z
Z
Y
X
P1
X
P1
Y
b
TS_041
a
b
N
P1
X
Y
Z
TS_041a
b
Height
Easting
Northing
Origin of plane
X axis of plane
Y axis of plane
Z axis of plane
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
596
Horizontal plane
The axes of the horizontal reference plane are:
X axis:
Z axis:
Y axis:
Horizontal and parallel to the plane
Perpendicular to the plane; increases in the direction as defined
Parallel to the plane
Offsets are applied in the direction of the Z axis.

For
:
Z
Z
a
a
Y
X
X
P1
P1
Y
b
GS_114
a
b
N
P1
X
Y
Z
b
GS_115
Height
Easting
Northing
Origin of plane
X axis of plane
Y axis of plane
Z axis of plane
For
:
a
a
Z
Z
Y
P1
X
X
P1
P2
TS_066
b
Y
TS_066a
P2
b
a Height
b Easting
N Northing
P1 Origin of plane
P2 Point of plane
X X axis of plane
Y Y axis of plane
Z Z axis of plane
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
597
Vertical plane
The axes of the vertical reference plane are:
X axis:
Horizontal and parallel to the plane; X axis starts in point defined as
origin point
Parallel to the instrument zenith and parallel to the plane
Perpendicular to the plane; increases in the direction as defined
Offsets are applied in the direction of the Y axis.
Z axis:
Y axis:

a
a
Z
Y
P1
TS_040
Z
P2
P2
X
X
b
P1
Y
TS_040a
b
a Height
b Easting
N Northing
P1 Origin of plane
P2 Point of plane
X X axis of plane
Y Y axis of plane
Z Z axis of plane

With four or more points, a least squares adjustment is calculated resulting in a best
fit plane.
Origin
The origin of the reference plane can be defined to be in the plane coordinates or in
relation to the national coordinate system.
Grid orientation
The orientation of the grid is part of a reference plane. The orientation is defined
during the reference plane definition and can be changed when editing a reference
plane.
Positive direction of
plane
The positive direction of the plane is defined by the direction of the Y axis. The direction of the Y axis can be redefined by selecting a point on the desired side of the plane.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
598
Offset of the plane
Z
Z
P2
d1
P2'
Y
d1
P1
X
Y
d2
X
P1
TS_039
TS_038
P1
X
Y
Z
d1
d2
Origin of plane
X axis of plane
Y axis of plane
Z axis of plane
Positive offset
Negative offset
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
P1
P2
P2’
d1
X
Y
Z
Origin of plane
Point defining offset of plane
P2 projected on original plane
Offset defined by P2
X axis of plane
Y axis of plane
Z axis of plane
599
45.2
Accessing Reference Plane & Grid Scan
Access
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\ Survey+\ Ref plane & grid scan.
Ref Plane & Grid
Scan
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the reference plane. Refer to "45.5 Configuring Reference Plane & Grid Scan".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of the Reference Plane & Grid Scan tasks
Task
Description
Measure to plane
The coordinates of measured points are calculated relative
to the reference plane.
Grid scan on plane
Measures a regular grid on a defined reference plane
within a defined area.
Grid scan on surface
Measures any surface within a defined area.
Next step
IF
THEN
Task: Measure to
plane or Grid scan
on plane
OK.
• To create a new plane by measuring points, enter a name
for the reference plane. New points can be measured by
starting the Survey application.
• To create a new plane from previously stored points,
enter a name for the reference plane. Refer to "45.3
Creating a Reference Plane From Previously Stored
Points".
• For selecting an existing reference plane from a job, refer
to "45.4 Selecting a Reference Plane from a Job". Only
available when a reference plane has already been stored
in the actual working job.
Task: Grid scan on OK accesses Define Grid Scan Area. Refer to "45.9 Grid Scan
surface
on Surface".
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
600
45.3
Creating a Reference Plane From Previously Stored Points
Access
In Ref Plane & Grid Scan, select Create a new plane from previously stored points.
Press OK.
New Reference
Plane,
General page
Key
Description
OK
To continue to the next screen.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Ref plane
name
Display only
The name of the new reference plane.
No. of points
Display only
Number of points used for plane definition.
Std deviation
Display only
Standard deviation of used points for plane definition. ----- is displayed unless more than four
points are used to define the plane.
Max ∆d
Display only
Maximum distance between measured point and
defined plane. ----- is displayed unless more than
four points are used to define the plane.
Next step
Page changes to the Points page.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
601
New Reference
Plane,
Points page
• * is shown to the right of the point for a point which will be used as origin of the
plane.
• ! is shown to the left of the point if the point is outside maximum distance between
a point and the calculated plane as defined on the General page.
• The column ∆d displays the perpendicular distance of the point from the definition
of the plane.
Key
Description
OK
To continue to the next screen.
+Point
To add points from the working job to define the reference plane.
Available when creating a new plane from previously stored points.
Use
To change between Yes and No in the Use for the highlighted point.
Delete
To remove the highlighted point from the list.
Survy..
To measure a point to be used for the plane. Available when creating
a new plane by measuring new points.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Origin
To use the highlighted point as the origin of the plane.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Next step
Page changes to the Plot page.
New Reference
Plane,
Plot page
Points displayed depend on the settings in Configuration, Parameters page. Points
defining the plane are displayed in black, the other points are displayed in grey.
Select the
icon to change between the face view and the plan view of the plane.
Next step
OK changes to the Ref Plane Coordinate System.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
602
Ref Plane Coordinate
System
This screen is displayed if Use local plane coordinate system is checked in Configuration, Parameters page.
Key
Description
OK
To compute and store the reference plane.
Survy..
Available when Point is highlighted. To measure a point to define the
plane direction.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Ref Plane Grid Orientation
Field
Option
Description
Currently
selected
origin point
Display only
Point which has been selected as origin point. To
change the origin point, press ESC and Fn Origin.
X coordinate
Editable field
Enter local X coordinate of origin. The origin is
defined as the projection of the measured point
onto the calculated plane.
Z coordinate
Editable field
Enter local Z coordinate of origin. The origin is
defined as the projection of the measured point
onto the calculated plane.
Point
Selectable list
Defines the direction of the Y axis.
Choose how you want to define the grid orientation on the reference plane.
Key
Description
OK
To continue to the next screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Currently
selected
origin point
Display only
Point which has been selected as origin point. To
change the origin point, return to the previous
screen and press ESC and Fn Origin.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
603
Field
Option
Description
Use the fall
line of the
reference
plane
Check box
The fall line is the line of greatest slope. The fall
line is a curve following the steepest slope. It is
always orthogonal to the contour lines. Mathematically it is determined by the gradient of the
height.
Select a point Check box
of the reference plane
besides the
origin point
The orientation is defined by the origin point and
another point on the reference plane.
Orientation
Point
Selectable list
The point which defines the orientation together
with the origin point.
Next step
OK changes to the Offset of Reference Plane.
Offset of Reference
Plane
Key
Description
OK
To compute and store the reference plane.
Survy..
Available when Offset pt ID is highlighted. To measure a point to
define the offset point.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Offset plane
Selectable list
An offset can be defined by a point or a distance.
The defined plane is shifted along the Y axis by
the offset.
Offset pt ID
Selectable list
Available for Offset plane: Offset to a point. Point
ID of offset point.
Offset
Display only or
editable field
Distance by which to offset the plane along the Y
axis.
For Offset plane: Offset by distance, the distance
can be entered.
For Offset plane: Offset to a point, the calculated
distance to the adjusted plane is displayed. ----- if
no values are available.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
604
45.4
Selecting a Reference Plane from a Job
Access
In Ref Plane & Grid Scan, select Create a new surface from previously stored points.
Press OK. Highlight Ref plane name. Press ENTER.
Available if a reference plane has already been stored in the actual working job.
Manage Reference
Planes
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted reference plane.
Delete
To delete the highlighted reference plane.
More
To display information about date and time of when the reference
plane was created and the number of points defining the plane.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
605
45.5
Configuring Reference Plane & Grid Scan
Description
Allows options to be set which are used within the Reference Plane & Grid Scan application. These settings are stored within the working style.
Access
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\ Survey+\ Ref plane & grid scan. Press Fn Config...
Configuration,
Parameters page
Key
Description
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Config..
To edit the survey screen page currently being displayed. Available
when a list item in Page to show is highlighted. Refer to "25.3 My
Survey Screen".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn About
To display information about the application name, the version
number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Page to show Selectable list
The names of the available survey screen pages.
Max +/- ∆d for Editable field
defining plane
The maximum perpendicular deviation of a point
from the calculated plane.
Max +/- ∆d for Editable field
grid scan on
ref plane
This parameter defines the points displayed in the
Plot and Map pages of the Reference Plane & Grid
Scan application in the plan view.
Display
Slice width
The maximum perpendicular deviation of a
measured point in grid scan on plane from
defined plane. Measured points outside the
defined limit are not stored.
All points
Displays all points in the plan view.
Points within
slice
Displays points within the defined Slice width in
the plan view.
Editable field
Available for Display: Points within slice.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
606
Field
Option
Description
This parameter defines the distance from the
plane in which points are displayed. This distance
is applied to both sides of the plane. If lines and
areas are displayed in a Map page, then the parts
of lines and areas that fall within the defined slice
are also displayed.
Use local
plane coordinate system
Check box
When this box is checked, then point results are
additionally stored with X, Y, Z coordinates based
on the local plane coordinate system. The screen
Ref Plane Coordinate System is displayed in the
reference plane definition workflow. Local coordinates and the positive direction of the reference
plane can be defined.
When this box is not checked, then points on the
plane are transformed into the global coordinate
system.
Next step
Page changes to the Report sheet page.
Configuration,
Report sheet page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Create report
sheet
Check box
To generate a report sheet when the application is
exited.
A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected
format file.
Report sheet
Selectable
list
Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name
of the file to which the data will be written. A report
sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active
memory device. The data is always appended to the
file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets
screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet
can be created and an existing report sheet can be
selected or deleted.
Format file to
use
Selectable
list
Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format
file defines which and how data is written to a report
sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file
must first be transferred from the data storage device
to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer
to "30.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how
to transfer a format file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files
screen where an existing format file can be selected or
deleted.
Next step
Page changes to the first page on this screen.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
607
45.6
Editing a Reference Plane
Access
After creating or selecting a reference plane, select Edit Reference Plane in Measure
to Plane or Grid Scan on Reference Plane.
Edit Reference Plane,
General page
Key
Description
OK
To compute and store the reference plane.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Ref plane
name
Editable field
The name of the reference plane.
No. of points
Display only
Number of points used for plane definition.
Std deviation
Display only
Standard deviation of used points for plane definition. ----- is displayed unless more than four
points are used to define the plane.
Max ∆d
Display only
Maximum distance between measured point and
defined plane. ----- is displayed unless more than
four points are used to define the plane.
Next step
Page changes to the Points page.
Edit Reference Plane,
Points page
• * is shown to the right of the point for a point which will be used as origin of the
plane.
• ! is shown to the left of the point if the point is outside maximum distance between
a point and the calculated plane as defined on the General page.
• The column ∆d displays the perpendicular distance of the point from the definition
of the plane.
Key
Description
OK
To compute and store the reference plane.
+Point
To add points from the working job to define the reference plane.
Use
To change between Yes and No in the Use for the highlighted point.
Delete
To remove the highlighted point from the list.
Survy..
To measure a point to be used for the plane.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Origin
To use the highlighted point as the origin of the plane.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Next step
Page changes to the Origin page.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
608
Edit Reference Plane,
Origin page
Key
Description
OK
To compute and store the reference plane.
Survy..
Available when Point is highlighted. To measure a point to define the
plane direction.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Use local
plane coordinate system
Check box
When this box is checked, then point results are
additionally stored with X, Y, Z coordinates based
on the local plane coordinate system.
When this box is not checked, then points on the
plane are transformed into the global coordinate
system.
Currently
selected
origin point
Display only
The point which has been selected as origin point.
To change the origin point, change to the Points
page and Fn Origin. Set the highlighted point as
the origin point.
X coordinate
Editable field
Enter local X coordinate of origin. The origin is
defined as the projection of the measured point
onto the calculated plane.
Z coordinate
Editable field
Enter local Z coordinate of origin. The origin is
defined as the projection of the measured point
onto the calculated plane.
Point
Selectable list
Defines the direction of the Y axis.
Next step
Page changes to the Offset page.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
609
Edit Reference Plane,
Offset page
Key
Description
OK
To compute and store the reference plane.
Survy..
Available when Offset pt ID is highlighted. To measure a point to
define the offset point.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Use offset for Check box
reference
plane
Description
When this box is checked, an offset can be
defined for the reference plane.
Offset plane
Selectable list
An offset can be defined by a point or a distance.
The defined plane is shifted along the Y axis by
the offset.
Offset pt ID
Selectable list
Available for Offset plane: Offset to a point. Point
ID of offset point.
Offset
Display only or
editable field
Distance by which to offset the plane along the Y
axis.
For Offset plane: Offset by distance, the distance
can be entered.
For Offset plane: Offset to a point, the calculated
distance to the adjusted plane is displayed. ----- if
no values are available.
Next step
Page changes to the Plot page.
Edit Reference Plane,
Plot page
Points displayed depend on the settings in Configuration, Parameters page. Points
defining the plane are displayed in black, the other points are displayed in grey.
Select the
icon to change between the face view and the plan view of the plane.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
610
45.7
Measuring Points to a Reference Plane
Access
After creating or selecting a reference plane, select Measure to plane in Measure to
Plane.
Measure Points to
Plane,
Reference page
Key
Meas
Stop
Meas
Dist
Store
Cmpare
Plane
Page
Fn IndivID and
Fn Run
Fn Quit
Description
To start measuring the point. The key changes to Stop. The difference between the current position and the adjusted plane is
displayed.
To end measuring the point. The key changes to Store. After ending
the measurement, the differences between the measured point and
the adjusted plane are displayed.
To measure a distance and store distance and angles.
To measure a distance.
To store the point information.
To calculate offsets to previously measured points.
To edit the selected reference plane.
To change to another page on this screen.
To change between entering an individual point ID different to the
defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates".
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Point ID
Editable field
The number of the measured point.
Target height
Editable field
The target height.
Antenna
height
Editable field
The height of the antenna.
Offset perp
dist
Display only
The perpendicular distance between the measured point and the adjusted plane.
Offset ht
Display only
The vertical distance between the measured point
and the adjusted plane.
X coordinate,
Y coordinate,
Z coordinate
Display only
For Use as origin: Plane coordinates.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
611
Field
Option
Description
Easting,
Northing,
Elevation
Display only
For Use as origin: Instrument coords.
Next step
Page changes to the Map page.
Select the
icon to change between the face view and the plan view of the plane.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
612
45.8
Grid Scan on Plane
Description
Grid scan on plane automates the process of measuring a sequence of points along
the defined vertical, tilted or horizontal reference plane. The window of interest can
be either rectangular or polygonal. The boundaries of the window of interest and the
increment values can be defined. Grid scan on plane can be run on instruments with
the option "reflectorless EDM" only.
Access step-by-step
Step
Description
1.
After creating or selecting a reference plane, select Grid scan reference
plane in Grid Scan on Reference Plane.
2.
Press OK.
3.
Choose between:
• Rectangular area: Two opposite corner points define the rectangular
grid scan area. The area must be defined from the first to the second
point. Grid scan areas bigger than 180° are not allowed.
• Polygonal area: Three or more clockwise measured points define the
polygonal grid scan area. The polygonal grid scan area is calculated
based on the sequence of the points. Grid scan areas bigger than 180°
are not allowed.
4.
Press OK.
Diagram
P0
TS_120
Measure corner
Known
P0 Station
Unknown
Grid point coordinates
For a rectangular grid scan area, measure two points at opposite corners.
For a polygonal grid scan area, measure all corner points in consecutive order.
Key
Description
OK
To either measure another corner point of the grid scan area or to
start grid scanning the area.
Dist
Available on the Camera page. To measure distances for displaying
the fine-style crosshairs.
Done
For polygonal areas, this key appears for the first time after the third
measured point.
Cpture
Available on the Camera page. To take an image with the current
pixel resolution. The image is then displayed but not stored on the
memory device yet.
Fn Config..
To configure what is displayed on the Camera page. Refer to
"Camera View Settings, General page".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
613
Grid Scan Settings,
Define grid spacing
on the reference
plane.
Key
Description
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
ESC
To delete the last measured point of the rectangular or polygonal grid
scan area. This allows the remeasurement of scan area points.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Left / right
Editable field
For tilted and vertical planes. Horizontal grid
distance.
Up / down
Editable field
Up slope grid distance.
Grid scan area Display only
Estimated
points
Display only
Size of the grid scan area.
Estimated number of points to be grid scanned.
>20'000 is shown for all resolution bigger than
20'000 points.
It is not checked if all points from the scan
resolution fall within the defined grid scan
area. For more than 20’000 points, grid
scanning the defined grid scan area with
the selected resolution may take very
long.

Also measure Check box
the boundary
of the defined
scan area
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
When this box is checked, the boundary of the
grid scan area is also measured.
614
Grid Scan Settings,
Define start point ID
& increment.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Start point
Editable field
The point ID to start with.
Increment
Editable field
The incrementation used for Start point. No point
ID template used
• For Start point: RMS and Increment: 10 the
points are RMS, RMS10, RMS20, ..., RMS100,
...
• For Start point: 100 and Increment: 10 the
points are 100, 110, ..., 200, 210, ...
• For Start point: abcdefghijklmn89 and Increment: 10 the points are abcdefghijklmn99,
point ID incrementing fails.
Grid Scan Settings,
Choose the grid scan
mode to be used.
This screen is only displayed for motorised instruments. For all other instrument types,
the standard measurement mode is set.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Standard accuracy &
range optimised
Check box
This measurement mode is accuracy and range
optimized. It uses the reflectorless single distance
measurement mode.
Fast - speed & Check box
performance
optimised
Available for TS15. This measurement mode is
speed and performance optimized. It uses the
reflectorless continuous distance measurement
mode.
Grid Scan Status,
Progress page
Key
Description
Stop
To stop the grid scanning of points.
Pause
To pause the grid scanning of points.
Scan
To continue grid scanning.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
615
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Points measured
Display only
Number of points being measured.
Points
remaining
Display only
Number of points remaining to be grid scanned.
Points
rejected
Display only
Number of skipped points.
% completed
Display only
Percentage of points measured.
Time left
Display only
Estimated time remaining until grid scan is
finished.
Point ID
Display only
Point ID of last stored point.
Next step
If the instrument has a camera and the camera functionality is activated, Page
changes to the Camera page. Refer to "34 Camera & Imaging" for information on
camera and imaging.
Page changes to the Plot page. Points currently scanned are displayed in black, previously measured points, lines and areas are displayed in grey.
Select the
icon to change between the face view and the plan view of the plane.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
616
45.9
Grid Scan on Surface
Description
Grid Scan on Surface allows the measurement of a grid on any surface based on an
angular resolution (constant delta horizontal and delta vertical values). No reference
plane is required. The grid scan area can be either rectangular or polygonal. Optionally,
the boundary of the grid scan area can be measured.
Grid Scan on Surface can be run on instruments with the option "reflectorless EDM"
only.
Diagram
P0
TS_121
Access step-by-step

Known
P0 Station
Unknown
Grid point coordinates
Step
Description
1.
In Ref Plane & Grid Scan, select Grid scan on surface.
2.
Press OK.
3.
Choose between:
• Rectangular area: Two opposite corner points define the grid scan
area. The area must be defined by pointing the instrument to opposite
corners of the area. Grid scan areas bigger than 180° are allowed.
• Polygonal area: Three or more clockwise measured points define the
grid scan area. The polygonal grid scan area is calcualated based on the
sequence of the points. Grid scan areas bigger than 180° are allowed.
4.
Press OK.
Most steps are identical with the steps for Grid scan on plane. Refer to "45.8 Grid
Scan on Plane" for a description of the screens.
Surface Scan
Settings,
Define grid scan
spacing.
Key
Description
OK
To continue with the next screen.
Dist
Available when Define spacing by: Distances is selected.
To take a reflectorless distance measurement. The measured value is
displayed in the Horiz distance field.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
617
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Define
spacing by
Angles
The scan resolution is defined by horizontal and
vertical angle values.
Distances
The scan resolution is defined by horizontal and
vertical spacings at a certain range.
Editable field
Available for Define spacing by: Angles. The
horizontal and vertical angle values defining the
scan resolution.
Horiz distance Editable field
Available for Define spacing by: Distances. The
range for which the horizontal and vertical
spacing are valid.
Editable field
Available for Define spacing by: Distances. The
horizontal and vertical spacing defining the scan
resolution at the defined range.
Hz and V
Horizontal
spacing and
Vertical
spacing
Also measure Check box
the boundary
of the defined
scan area
Estimated
points
Display only
When this box is checked, then the boundary of
the grid scan area is also measured.
The number of points to be scanned according to
the defined scan resolution.
>20’000 is displayed for all scan resolution
exceeding 20’000 points.

Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan
It is not checked if all points from the scan
resolution fall within the defined grid scan
area. For more than 20’000 points, grid
scanning the defined grid scan area with
the selected resolution may take very
long.
618
46
Roads - General
46.1
Overview

Please be aware that the terminology or workflow used on different construction sites
can vary from the one used in this manual. However, basic principles remain the same.
Description
Roads is an umbrella term for four subapplications.
Name of subapplication
Description
Alignment Editor
• Alignment Editor is an "add-on" component to the
Roads application. It is only intended for quick and easy
modification of existing alignments, or creation of new
ones. Alignment Editor is not an onboard road planning
and design application.
• This application supports the following alignment types:
• Horizontal alignments
• Vertical alignments
• Cross section templates
• Cross section assignments
• Chainage equations
• This application is a free application provided by Leica
Geosystems AG. If the application does not appear on
your menu or you are otherwise unable to access it,
please contact your Leica Geosystems AG representative.
Roads
• This subapplication allows the measuring and staking of
roads and other alignments.
• It can be used with GPS and with total stations.
• It consists of two main functions:
• Roads - As built check for checking or measuring
existing lines, surface grade, slopes or surfaces and
comparing the measurements against design data.
• Roads - Stakeout for setting or staking out and
adjusting road elements during construction using
design data.
• The data can be typed in manually by using the Alignment Editor or data created in a design package can be
converted. The Import alignment data application and
the Design to Field component of Leica Geo Office offer
converters from several road design and CAD packages.
Rail
• This subapplication allows the measuring and staking of
railways and other alignments.
• It can be used with GPS and with total stations.
• It consists of two main functions:
• Rail - As built check for checking or measuring an
existing track and comparing the measurements
against design data.
• Rail - Stakeout for setting or staking out and
adjusting track features during construction using
design data.
Viva Series, Roads - General
619
Name of subapplication
Description
• Single track or multiple track designs can be imported
for use with this application.
• For horizontal and vertical alignments, the data can
be typed in manually by using the Alignment Editor
application or data created in a design package can
be converted.
• For multiple track designs, it is possible to define
one centreline which is common to all tracks.
• A superelevation table can be created for each track
using the Rail Editor computer application. This application is part of the Design to Field component in Leica
Geo Office.
Tunnel
• This subapplication allows the measuring and staking of
tunnels.
• It is for use with total stations only.
• It consists of two main functions:
• Tunnel - As built check for checking a built or excavated tunnel with a tunnel design.
• Tunnel - Stakeout for setting out tunnel features
during construction.
• The centreline of the tunnel can be imported for use
onboard the instrument using the industry standard
LandXML data format. Alternatively the centreline can
be imported in formats exported from many other
tunnel design packages using the Design to Field
component of the Leica Geo Office.
• Tunnel design profiles can be created using the Tunnel
Profile Editor computer application. This application is
integrated into the Design to Field component in Leica
Geo Office.

Roads, Rail and Tunnel subapplications are licence protected. They can be activated
through a licence key which is specific to the instrument. This licence key can be
entered either through Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Load licence keys or
alternatively, the first time the program is started.
Viva Series, Roads - General
620
46.2
Jobs & Design Data
46.2.1
Accessing Roads Applications
Access
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads.
Then select the subapplication required to access the job selection screen.
For the Alignment Editor, refer to "47.2.1 Accessing Alignment Editor".

Job selection
When the application is resumed, the last active selections are remembered and can
be accessed again. This ability means the settings do not need to be reselected every
time after turning off the instrument.
Key
Description
OK
To continue with the next screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
The methods available in the Define the Work to be Done screen depend on
the selected job types (road or control job). Refer to Define the Work to be
Done.

Field
Working job
Option
Selectable list
Use alignment Check box
from road job
Road alignment
Viva Series, Roads - General
Selectable list
Description
Available for Road. The working job is the one
data is stored to. If a CAD file is attached to this
job and no Control job is used, then the CAD file
is displayed in the background of Map pages.
Available for Road. When this box is checked, a
road alignment file can be selected. Contains all
the information about the road design. For
example, the geometry of the line, the formation
layer of the road or the information related to the
construction of cuttings and embankments.
Available for Road. The files are stored in the \DBX
folder or a subfolder of \DBX.
The data is either typed in manually in the Alignment Editor application or converted from a road
design package.
For tunnel projects, all road design information
for road data outside of the tunnel must be
stored in the road job.
The road job is a read-only source of information
and cannot be selected as a working or control
job.
621
Field
Rail job
Option
Selectable list
Tunnel job
Selectable list
Use line &/or
points from
control job
Control job
Selectable list
Use a DTM
Check box
DTM
Selectable list
Description
Available for Rail. Contains all the information
about the rail design including the geometry of
the centreline and the rail definition (superelevation). The files are stored in the \DBX folder or a
subfolder of \DBX.
The rail job is a read-only source of information
and cannot be selected as a working or control
job.
Available for Tunnel. Contains all the information
about the tunnel design including the geometry
of the centreline and the tunnel profile. The files
are stored in the \DBX folder or a subfolder of
\DBX.
The tunnel job is a read-only source of information.
When this box is checked, a control job can be
selected. Individual lines and/or points of a
control job can be staked out and set in relation
to the alignment.
The control job is the one control points are
stored in. The control job holds all control point
information needed in the field, for example,
control points, points with known coordinates
used for a TPS setup. Lines of the control job can
be used for Roads - Stakeout or Roads - As built
check.
A CAD file attached to a control job can be used
to view and import the CAD lines for working with.
The CAD lines are viewable in any Map page of the
Stake/Check screen.
Available for Roads and Rail. When this box is
checked, a DTM job can be selected. A DTM job
holds DTM (Digital Terrain Model) or TIN (Triangular Irregular Network) data. The files are stored
in the \DBX folder or a subfolder of \DBX.
Available for Roads and Rail. Holds DTM (Digital
Terrain Model) data or TIN (Triangular Irregular
Network) data. The DTM job to be used must be
stored in the \DBX directory on the active memory
device.
The DTM job is a read-only source of information
and cannot be selected as a working or control
job.
If only a DTM job is selected, then only
check measurements relative to the
selected DTM layer can be done.

Next step
IF you want to
continue with
configuration
Roads
Rail
Tunnel
Viva Series, Roads - General
THEN refer to
"46.3 Configuring Roads Applications".
"48 Roads - Road".
"49 Roads - Rail".
"50 Roads - Tunnel".
622
46.2.2
Working with a DTM Job
Access
Start the Roads or Rail subapplication.
In the job selection screen check Use a DTM.
Open the selectable list for DTM.
DTM
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted DTM job and continue.
Layrs..
To view the DTM layers and the number of triangles of the highlighted DTM job.
A DTM job can consist of multiple DTM layers or surfaces. These DTM
layers can cover different locations, be on top of each other or intersect each other.
Delete
To delete the highlighted DTM job.
CF card, SD
card, USB or
Intrnl
To change between viewing jobs stored on another data storage
device or internal memory.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - General
623
46.2.3
Design Data
Design data for
Road
2D and 3D lines
Depending on the method to be used, the design in all road jobs must consist of either
2D or 3D lines.
2D lines are required at least when working with lines, local lines, manual slope, local
manual slope or layer. If the design consists of 2D lines, heights can be considered
manually.
3D lines are required when working with slope, surface grade or crown. 3D lines can
also be used when working with lines, local lines, manual slope, local manual slope or
layer.
Description
Depending on the complexity of the road job, the design data can vary from a single
horizontal alignment to a design containing profiles with dozens of defined vertices.
Design elements can be grouped logically for faster access.
Lines
When manually typing in a road job, alignments and cross sections are used. Alignments are defined by geometric elements, for example straights and arcs, and the
cross sections by vertices. Furthermore, at which chainage a certain cross section is
used is also defined. By defining these elements the vertices are connected to create
a series of lines representing the three-dimensional design of the road.
Road_029
Line representation of a road
design.
In Roads, such lines defining the design are called lines. Lines are the base elements
used for stakeout and check activities. Lines have a project unique name by which they
are identified and selected. Whenever a new road design is typed in or imported from
a design package these lines are generated automatically in the background.

Road_030


Viva Series, Roads - General
A cross section can be derived from the line model by slicing the group of lines
with a vertical plane orthogonal to the centreline.
Vertical cut of a line
group defines a cross
section.
Lines are referenced by layers and can be used in more than one layer.
Every layer is relative to a centreline. This centreline does not have to be a part
of the layer. In the previous example, layer one - general fill - uses the centreline for calculation even though the centreline is not part of the layer surface.
Whereas the centreline is part of layer three - final surface.
624
Design data for Rail
Horizontal and vertical alignments
All rail jobs must consist of at least one horizontal alignment. Each horizontal alignment can either be typed in manually using the Alignment Editor application, or
converted from a rail design package using Import alignment data application or the
Design To Field component within the Leica Geo Office program.
Horizontal alignments can consist of straights, circular curves, clothoids, parabolic
curves and bloss curves.
Vertical alignments can consist of straights, circular curves and parabolic curves.
If a design comprises multiple tracks, one horizontal alignment can be defined as the
chainage centreline. From the chainage centreline all chainages will be calculated and
additional horizontal and vertical alignments can be used to define each track.
Rail definition
Rails can be defined by:
• entering the design data manually in the field
• by using the Alignment Editor
• by using Import alignment data application
• by converting data from a rail design package using the Design To Field component and if required the Rail Editor (for defining the superelevation) component
within the Leica Geo Office program
Rails are stored as lines (continuous 2D or 3D lines) within the rail job.
Tracks
Tracks are used to group related lines (centreline and rails) together.
In the case of a single track, the track centreline and the two rails are grouped
together in one track.
In the case of multiple tracks where one chainage centreline is used for all tracks, each
track consists of four lines: the track centreline, the chainage centreline and the left
and right rails.
In the case of multiple tracks where chainage is calculated relative to the track centreline, each track is stored as a single track as described previously.
Viva Series, Roads - General
625
Design data for
Tunnel
Horizontal and vertical alignments
All tunnel jobs must consist of at least a horizontal and a vertical alignment. This data
can be converted from a road design package using the Design To Field component
within the Leica Geo Office application.
Profiles
Depending on the complexity of the tunnel job, the design data can vary from a single
horizontal and vertical alignment to a design containing many different design profiles
with dozens of defined vertices.
Design profiles can be defined and edited using the Design To Field component within
the Leica Geo Office application.
Layers
Tunnels generally consist of layers made of different materials, for example a shotcrete surface or a lining. At different times throughout a project, it may be required to
work with different layers of the tunnel.
The Tunnel Profile Editor allows the possibility of creating such layers by grouping
together design profiles that will be used at the same chainage.
ab
B4
A4
B3
B5
A3
B2
B1
Tunnel_023
A5
A2
A6
A1
A7
B6
B7
a) The vertices A1-A7 could be grouped
together in a layer (a) and represent
the final lining of the tunnel.
b) The vertices B1-B7 could be grouped
together in a layer (b) and represent
the inner shotcrete layer of the tunnel.
Design Profile Layers can be assigned to chainages along the centreline using the
Tunnel Profile Editor within the Design To Field component.
The layer of the tunnel to set out or check can be defined when creating a task.
Viva Series, Roads - General
626
46.2.4
Viewing and Editing the Design Data
Access
Start the Roads subapplication required.
In the job selection screen highlight Road Jobs, Rail job or Tunnel job. Open the
selectable list
In Road Jobs/Rail jobs/Tunnel jobs highlight a job and press Data.
View & Edit Data
The design data stored within the road/rail/tunnel job contains all information about
the road/rail/tunnel design. This information includes the lines and layers, for example,
the geometry of the centreline or the layers of the different materials/surfaces which
form the road/tunnel. The design data can be viewed and partially edited on this
screen.
Key
Description
OK
To return to the job selection.
Edit..
To edit the general job details and the start chainage of the centreline of the selected layer.
For Road additionally to select another centreline and
include/exclude lines from the selected layer.
View
To view geometry details of the lines and to view cross-section plots.
For Road and Rail additionally to view the list of all lines in the layer.
Fn Config..
To access the configuration settings. Refer to "46.3 Configuring
Roads Applications".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Job name
Display only
The name of the active road/rail/tunnel job, as
selected in the job selection screen.
Layer
Display only
To select a layer from the active road/rail/tunnel
job. All layers within the active road/rail/tunnel job
can be selected.
No. of lines
Display only
Available for Road and Rail. The number of lines
from the selected layer.
Number of
profiles
Display only
Available for Tunnel. The number of profiles from
the selected layer.
Centreline
Display only
The name of the layer centreline.
Every layer must have a centreline.
Viva Series, Roads - General

627
Field
Option
Description
Chainage
Editable field
To enter chainage to use when viewing the data.
The default value is the start chainage of the layer
centreline.
Ch increment
Editable field
To enter a chainage increment to use when stepping through the data.
Next step
IF you want to
THEN press
edit data
Edit.. to access the screen Edit:. Refer to "Edit:, Layer page".
view data
View to access the screen View at. Refer to "View at, Line Info
page".
Viva Series, Roads - General
628
Edit:,
Layer page
Only available for Road.
Key
Description
Store
To store data and return to the previous screen.
Centre
To set the highlighted line as centreline.
Use
To set Yes or No in the Use column for excluding/including the highlighted line of selected layer.
Page
To change to the next page.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Line name
Displays the name of all the lines in the layer.
CL
Shows CL for the line selected as centreline.
Use
For Yes: The selected line is used for stake/check.
For No: The selected line is not used for stake/check.
Next step
Page changes to the Centreline page.
Viva Series, Roads - General
629
Edit:,
Centreline/Chainage
line page
Key
Description
Store
To store changes and return to the previous screen.
Reset
To clear all changes made and to reset to the original start chainage.
The original start chainage is always remembered.
Page
To change to the next page.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
CentreDisplay only
line/Chainage
line
Set start
chainage
Editable field
End chainage Display only
Description
The name of the centreline.
To enter a start chainage for the layer centreline.
The end chainage of the layer centreline. By using
the centreline length, the end chainage is automatically calculated.
Next step
Store to store the changes.
View to access the screen View at.
Viva Series, Roads - General
630
View at,
Line Info page
If a value is unavailable in the design data, the field is shown as -----.
Key
Description
OK
To return to the previous screen.
Ch-
To decrease the chainage by the chainage increment, as defined in
the View & Edit Data screen.
Ch+
To increase the chainage by the chainage increment, as defined in
the View & Edit Data screen.
Segmnt
To access Segment Info - Start Point.
Hz or Vt
To change between the vertical alignment data and the horizontal
alignment data.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Line name
Selectable list
All lines available at the defined chainage are
displayed and can be selected.
Easting,
Northing and
Height
Display only
The East/North coordinate and height of the line
at defined chainage.
Hz tangent
Display only
The tangent direction of the line at defined
chainage.
Grade
Display only
The grade of the line at defined chainage.
Hz radius
Display only
The horizontal radius of the line segment at
defined chainage.
Vertical radius Display only
The vertical radius of the line segment at defined
chainage.
Hz type
Display only
The horizontal segment type at defined chainage.
Vertical type
Display only
The vertical segment type at defined chainage.
Hz offset
Display only
The horizontal offset to the layer centreline at
defined chainage.
Vertical offset Display only
The vertical offset to the layer centreline at
defined chainage.
Next step
Page to change to the Lines page.
Viva Series, Roads - General
631
View at,
Lines page
Unavailable for Tunnel.
Key
Description
OK
To return to the previous screen.
Ch-
To decrease the chainage by the chainage increment, as defined in
the View & Edit Data screen.
Ch+
To increase the chainage by the chainage increment, as defined in
the View & Edit Data screen.
Segmnt
To access Segment Info - Start Point.
More
To change between the height differences or absolute heights at the
selected chainage.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of columns
Column
Description
Line name
The name of the lines available at defined chainage in the
selected layer.
CL offset
The horizontal offset of the line from the layer centreline.
Ht diff
The height difference of the line to the layer centreline.
Height
The absolute height of the line.
Next step
Page to change to the Map page.
The Map page shows a cross section, profile and planar view of the design data at the
selected chainage.
Segmnt to access Segment Info - Start Point/Segment Info - End Point.
Viva Series, Roads - General
632
Segment Info - Start
Point/Segment Info End Point,
Hz alignment page
If a value is unavailable in the design data, the field is shown as -----.
Key
OK
SegSeg+
End Pt or Start
Pt
Page
Fn Quit
Description
To return to the previous screen.
To move to the previous segment.
To move to the next segment.
To change between the start point and the end point of the segment.
To change to another page on this screen.
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Line name
Chainage
Easting Northi
ng and Height
Hz tangent
Option
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Hz radius
Hz type
Display only
Display only
Description
The name of the selected line.
The chainage of start/end point of the segment.
The East/North coordinate and height of the
start/end point of the segment.
The tangent direction at the start/end point of
the segment.
The radius at the start/end point of the segment.
The current segment type.
Next step
Page to change to the Vertical alignment page.
Segment Info - Start
Point/Segment Info End Point,
Vertical alignment
page
Refer to "Segment Info - Start Point/Segment Info - End Point, Hz alignment page" for
a description of keys.
If a value has not been defined, the field is shown as -----.
Description of fields
Field
Line name
Chainage
Easting,
Northing and
Height
Grade
Vertical radius
Vertical type
Option
Display only
Display only
Display only
Description
The name of the selected line.
The chainage of start/end point of the segment.
The East/North coordinate and height of the
start/end point of the segment.
Display only
Display only
Display only
The grade at the start/end point of the segment.
The radius at the start/end point of the segment.
The current segment type.
Next step
OK returns to the previous screen.
Viva Series, Roads - General
633
46.3
Configuring Roads Applications
46.3.1
Configuration Settings
Access
In the job selection screen press OK and then, depending on the subapplication
Config.. or Fn Config...
Configuration,
Graphics page
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the changes and move to the previous screen.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn About
To display information about the application name, the version
number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
The reference direction used to stakeout points.
The stakeout elements and the graphics displayed
are based on this selection.
Navigation
direction
Viva Series, Roads - General
Description
To alignment
The stake out is relative to the alignment.
To north
The North direction shown in the graphical display
based on the active coordinate system.
To sun
The position of the sun calculated from the
current position, the time and the date.
To last point
Time-wise, the last recorded point. If no points
are yet staked, Navigation direction: To north is
used for the first point to be staked.
To point (cntrl
job)
A point from the control job is selected.
Following arrow
The direction of the orientation is from the
current position to the point to be staked. The
graphical display shows an arrow pointing in the
direction of the point to be staked.
From station
The reference direction is from the station
to the current position.
To station
The reference direction is from the current
position to the station.
634
Field
Option
Description
Point ID
Selectable list
Available for Navigation direction: To point (cntrl
job). To select the point or line to be used for
orientation.
The method of staking out.
Navigate
using
Direction &
distance
The direction from the orientation reference, the
horizontal distance and the cut/fill is displayed.
In/out, left/right
The distance forwards to/backwards from the
point, the distance right/left to the point and the
cut/fill is displayed.
Switch to bulls Check box
eye when 0.5m
from target
When this box is checked, a bulls eye bubble is
shown in the stakeout graphic when less than
half a metre from the point being staked.
Beep faster
Check box
when getting
close to point
The instrument beeps when the distance from
the current position to the point to be staked is
equal to or less than defined in Start within.
The closer the instrument is to the point to be
staked the faster the beeps will be.
Distance to
use
Available when Beep faster when getting close to
Height, Horizontal distance or point is checked. The type of distance to use for
Position & height the stake beep.
Start within
Editable field
Available when Beep faster when getting close to
point is checked. The horizontal radial distance,
from the current position to the point to be
staked, when a beep is to be heard.
Next step
Page changes to the Design page.
Viva Series, Roads - General
635
Configuration,
Design page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Working
corridor
Editable field
Valid offset range defined by the working corridor
left and right of the centreline. If a measured
point is further away from the working corridor
distance, an error message is displayed.
Refer to "46.6 Understanding Terms and Expressions" for more information on the working
corridor.
Show tangent Check box
points
When this box is checked, a message box is
shown when a tangent point (PI or PVI) has been
detected within the chainage increment range.
This tangent point can be selected for stakeout.
Refer to "48.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for
further details.
When this box is not checked, no tangent points
are indicated.
Type
Available when Show tangent points is checked.
Horizontal
Indicates tangent points of the horizontal alignment only.
Vertical
Indicates tangent points of the vertical alignment
only.
Horizontal &
vertical
Indicates all tangent points.
Available for Road only. Selects sign definition
method for slopes and surface grades.
Slope signs
Mathematical
All slope signs defined from left to right, independent of whether left or right of the centreline.
+
+
+
Road_054c
Relative to CL
Slope signs defined relative to the centreline.
+
Road_054a
+
+
+
Relative from CL Slope signs defined relative from the centreline.
+
+
+
Road_054b
When using slopes generated by a design
package, the quality of the change from cut to fill
or where slopes start and end, depends on the
terrain model used for the project. Occasionally,
one of the lines defining the slope ends before
intersecting with the natural surface. A message
appears asking to extended the slope, as soon as
a measurement is taken outside of the defined
design slope.
Extend slopes
Yes (with
warning)
Viva Series, Roads - General
The slope is expanded beyond and above or
below the hinge point. A warning is shown as
soon as leaving the defined slope.
636
Field
Extend lines
Option
Description
Yes
The slope is expanded beyond and above or
below the hinge point. No warning is when
leaving the defined slope.
No
The slope is not expanded beyond and above or
below the hinge point.
Check box
Extend each line or curve at its beginning and end
with a tangent. The extension is used for
projecting a point to the line and for intersecting
the line.
Checked

Intersection points on extended
lines/curves are not shown in crosssections and cannot be staked out.
a
b
c
Road_094
a) Any type of line or curve
b) Extended line
c) Projected point on extended line
Not checked

This option is recommended when
working with closed alignments (for
example roundabout, slip road, motorway
exit).
a
Road_095 b
a) Any type of line or curve
b) Projected point on line
Project scale
for length
values
Check box
When this box is not cheked, no scale factor is
applied to length values. Length values are
displayed in the grid format.
When this box is checked, a defined scale factor
is applied to length values. All distance values
(chainages, chainage increments, offsets, ∆
chainage, ∆ offset, ∆ height, …) are displayed in
ground using the Scale factor.

Viva Series, Roads - General
The Road job data is still in grid format.
637
Field
Scale factor
Option
Editable field
Description

All data is saved to the DBX in ground
format. Only ground data is written to the
log file.
To apply an appropriate geodetic map projection
to scale over the ground. The scale factor is only
applied to Road, not to Rail or Tunnel.
Next step
IF you work with
THEN Page changes to the
Road
Quality control page.
Rail
Rail design page.
Tunnel
Tunnel design page.
Viva Series, Roads - General
638
Configuration,
Rail design page
Available for Rail only.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Nominal
gauge
Editable field
Nominal distance between the active (internal)
faces of the left and right rails.
a
b
Rail_014
a) Superelevation base
b) Nominal gauge
Superelevatn
base
Editable field
Distance over which the superelevation is to be
applied. This distance normally corresponds to
the distance between the rail axes.
Superelevation
Design
To use the superelevation values from the design.
If these values don’t exist in the design, then all
superelevation values are ignored.
Manual
To ignore all superelevation values from the
design and to enter them manually.
None
All superelevation values are ignored.
Plumbline
The target height is applied in plumbline to the
measured position.
Apply target
height
c
a
b
Rail12_17
a) Superelevation base
b) Nominal gauge
c) Measured point (Easting, Northing, Height)
Perpendicular
Use this setting when working with a rail bar
(solar gauge) with a fix mounted prism.
Easting, Northing and Elevation of the measured
point is calculated using the design cant or, if
enabled, the manually defined cant.
c
a
b
d
Rail12_18
a)
b)
c)
d)
Viva Series, Roads - General
Superelevation base
Nominal gauge
Measured point (Easting, Northing, Height)
Superelevation
639
Field
Option
Description
CL height
CL geometry
The centreline height is taken from the alignment
centreline.
Rail interpolated
The centreline height is interpolated between the
left rail height and right rail height.
Lower rail
The height of the lower rail is used as centreline
height.
Check box
Chainage calculation method when checking
points of multiple tracks with respect to a
chainage centreline.
The direct measurement method is when the
chainage is calculated by projecting the measured
point directly onto the chainage centreline.
The indirect measurement method is when the
chainage is calculated by first projecting the
measured point onto the track centreline, and
then projecting the point onto the chainage
centreline.
Checked
Project measured point directly onto the chainage
centreline.
Calculate
chainage
directly onto
chainage
centreline
a
f
c
b
d
Rail_010
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Viva Series, Roads - General
e
Chainage centreline
Track centreline
Left rail
Right rail
Measured point
Direct chainage
640
Field
Option
Description
Not checked
Project measured point onto track centreline and
then make a second projection onto the chainage
centreline.
a
f
c
g
b
d
Rail_011
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Disable
chainage
centreline
Check box
e
Chainage centreline
Track centreline
Left rail
Right rail
Measured point
Indirect chainage
Measured point projected onto track centreline
Only affecting multiple track designs. The defined
chainage centreline is disabled and the track
centreline is used for chainage calculations.
Next step
Page changes to the Quality control page.
Viva Series, Roads - General
641
Configuration,
Tunnel design page
Available for Tunnel only.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Defines the direction in which the design profile
is considered. The setting has an influence on the
profile offset sign.
Theoretical
profile direction
Profile definition
Description
Clockwise
The design profile is defined in a clockwise direction. In underbreak areas the profile offset values
are negative where as in overbreak areas they are
positive.
Counter-clockwise
The design profile is defined in a counter-clockwise direction. In underbreak areas the profile
offset values are positive where as in overbreak
areas they are negative.
Vertical
Profiles are always defined as vertical.
Tilted
Profiles are always defined perpendicular to the
vertical alignment of the tunnel axis.
Available for Method to use: Scan profile.
When measuring tunnel profiles, it is possible to
scan various profiles from one instrument position.
Scan area
defnd by
Chainage
Allows a scan area to be defined by entering a
back and forward chainage.
Distance
Allow a scan area to be defined by measuring/entering a back distance and forward
distance from the station chainage.
Plan view
c
e
b
f
d
a
Tunnel_030
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Drilling rig
orientation
Viva Series, Roads - General
Parallel to alignment
Alignment
Station chainage
Start chainage or Start distance
End chainage or End distance
Before stn every
After stn every
Guides a jumbo to drill in the direction parallel to
the alignment.
642
Field
Option
Description
a b
Tunnel_031
a)
b)
Drill Pattern
Alignment
Drill direction
Guides a jumbo to drill in the user defined direction. This must not be parallel to the alignment.
a b
Tunnel_032
a)
b)
Alignment
Drill direction
Next step
Page changes to the Quality control page.
Viva Series, Roads - General
643
Configuration,
Quality control page
Description
Especially when checking points in an as-built control or when staking out it is useful
to enable the Quality control criteria available. For every point stored the chosen
parameters are checked and if the check limits are exceeded a warning is shown. This
function guarantees a higher productivity as it is no longer necessary to check the
values for every shot taken. When checking layers of a road, a too thick layer results
in higher costs as more material is used. Alternatively, a too thin layer can lead to
problems and could cause serious damage. Therefore different check limits for above
and below the design can be defined.
Graphic
a
d
b
c
e
Road_087
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Layer is too thick
Design surface
Layer is too thin
Upper ht limit
Lower ht limit
Height limits below the design surface are entered as negative values (for example,
the Lower ht limit with -10 mm in the previous diagram). By using the signs of the
height limits, it is also possible to cover situations like the one shown in the following
diagram, with a valid range between -10 to -50 mm below the design surface.
a
b
c
Road_088
Viva Series, Roads - General
a) Design surface
b) Upper ht limit
c) Lower ht limit
644
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Check deltas to
point before
storing
Check box
When this box is checked, a position check is
done when storing a staked or checked point.
When the defined tolerance is exceeded, the
stake out/check can be repeated, skipped or
stored.
When this box is not checked, no quality check
is done during stake out/check of points.

Delta values
Depending on this selection the
following lines are enabled/disabled.
Ch, offset &
height
Check for chainage, horizontal offset and
height.
Ch & offset
Check for chainage and horizontal offset.
Position &
height
Check for 2D position and height.
Position
Check for 2D position.
Height
Check for height.
Profile
Available for Tunnel. Check for distance from
design profile.
Chainage limit
From 0.001 to
100
Maximum difference in chainage.
Offset limit
From 0.001 to
100
Maximum horizontal offset from defined position.
Position limit
From 0.001 to
100
Maximum radial horizontal distance.
Upper ht limit
From -100 to
+100
Maximum height difference.
Lower ht limit
From -100 to
+100
Maximum height difference.
Profile tolerance
From 0.001 to
100
Available for Tunnel. Permitted distance from
design profile.
Next step
Page changes to the Info page.
Viva Series, Roads - General
645
Configuration,
Info page
Two things can be configured on this page:
1) The required information for each stakeout and check method to be displayed on
the Info page. Depending on the working method used on the construction site,
different information is written on the stakes. The information to be written on the
stake is displayed on the Info page.
2) If and which additional user-defined survey screen page is displayed.
Key
Description
OK
To confirm the changes and continue.
Clear
To clear all parameters from all lines.
Default
To set the default value for all lines.
Fn About
To display information about the application name, the version
number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Show additional
page from My
Survey Screen
Check box
The user-defined survey screen page to be
shown in the stake or check screen.
Page to show
Selectable list
The names of the available survey screen pages.
Method
Display only
The method is based on the selected subapplication and, if available, the setting for Method
to use. The settings in the following lines can
only be changed for the current method.
The method defines the parameters available to
view on the Info page of the application.
Different combinations of the parameters to
view can be stored
1st line to 16th
line
Selectable list
To modify the selection on any particular line,
place the cursor on the line to modify using the
arrow keys and press the ENTER key.Use the
arrow keys to select the required parameter and
press the ENTER key to confirm the choice.
Define which parameters are viewed on each
line. Up to 16 lines of parameters can be
defined.
The available parameters depending on the
Method selected are explained separately:
Viva Series, Roads - General
646
Field
Option
Description
• For Road Line, refer to "46.3.2 Road Line Info Page".
• For Road Local line, refer to "46.3.3 Road
Local Line - Info Page".
• For Road Surface grade, refer to "46.3.4
Road Surface Grade - Info Page".
• For Road Manual slope, Local manual slope
and Slope, refer to "46.3.5 Road Manual
Slope, Local Manual Slope and Slope - Info
Page".
• For Road Crown, refer to "46.3.6 Road Crown
- Info Page".
• For Road Layer, refer to "46.3.7 Road Layer
- Info Page".
• For Road DTM, refer to "46.3.8 Road DTM Info Page".
• For Rail refer to "46.3.9 Rail - Info Page".
• For Tunnel refer to "46.3.10 Tunnel - Info
Page".
Next step
Page changes to the TPS page.
Page changes to the Report sheet page.
Configuration,
TPS page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Only update
stakeout values
when distance is
measured
Check box
When this box is checked, angles and stakeout
values are updated after a distance measurement. All values are then frozen until the next
distance is taken. When Target aiming: Lock is
selected and the instrument is locked onto a
target the angular values do not change.
When this box is not checked, angles are
updated with telescope movement after a
distance was measured.
Turn to point
Check box
Available for Road and Rail and when Turn to
point is checked.
Turn to
Position only
Viva Series, Roads - General
Available for Road and Rail.
To make stake out of points even more efficient, a motorised instrument offers you the
possibility to aim automatically at the stakeout
position.
The instrument positions horizontally in the
direction of the point to stake out.
647
Field
Option
Description
Position &
height
The instrument positions horizontally and vertically to the point to stake out.
The instrument only points to the correct position on the ground if the point to stake out has
the same height as the natural surface. If the
natural surface is higher than the point to stake
out, the measured point would be closer than
the stakeout point. If the natural surface is
lower than the point, the measured point would
be further away.
With Position & measure, the possibility of iterative positioning using the auto position, this
problem can be avoided.
b
a
c
Road_071
a) Point to stake out, defined with 3D coordinates
b) Position if natural surface is higher than
point to stake out
c) Position if natural surface is lower than point
to stake out
Position &
measure
Allows the instrument to aim at a 2D position.
As the natural surface height is unknown the
correct position is calculated via iterations.

Depending on the settings chosen for
Red laser pointer the instrument will
turn on the red laser as soon as the position is found.
The first position (b) the instrument points to is
defined by the 2D coordinates (a) of the point
to stake out ( = horizontal direction) and the
current vertical angle. Therefore, aim the instrument at the approximate position of the point
to stake out.The measured 2D position is
compared with the stakeout position to determine a new position (c) to aim at. As no information about the natural surface is available, a
point at the same height as the measured position is calculated. The new position (d) is measured and compared again with the point to
stake out (a).This iteration process runs until
the tolerances defined for the stakeout are
reached.
Viva Series, Roads - General
648
Field
Option
Description
a
f
d
e
b
c
a
d
e
b
c
Road_064
a) 2D position to stake out
b) First position measured defined by 2D coordinates and current vertical angle
c) New position calculated based on height of b
d) Second position measured
e) New position calculated based on height of
d. The measured position for this point is
within the defined tolerance, the correct
position is found.
Prompt before
turn
The method how the instrument turns is not
fixed but is selected when pressing Positn.
Additionally to the three methods listed above,
an option allowing the instrument to find the
height on the peg is available:
a
c
b
Road_072
a) Peg placed at the correct position
b) First height, manually chosen direction
c) Required height on the peg
For more information refer to "46.3.11 Workflow for Height (aim to stake ht)".
Position limit
From 0.001 to
10
Maximum permitted radial horizontal distance.
Available for Tunnel and for Road/Rail with Turn
to: Position & measure or Turn to: Prompt
before turn.
Height limit
From 0.001 to
10
Maximum height difference. Available for Road
and Rail.
Chainage limit
From 0.001 to
10
Chainage tolerance of the position to stake out.
Available for Tunnel and for Road/Rail with Turn
to: Position & measure or Turn to: Prompt
before turn.
Offset limit
From 0.001 to
10
Maximum horizontal offset from defined position. Available for Road and Rail.
Viva Series, Roads - General
649
Field
Option
Description
Defines when the visible red laser beam is
turned on during the automatic search of the
position.
Available for Tunnel and for Road/Rail with Turn
to: Position & measure or Turn to: Prompt
before turn.
Red laser pointer
Always off
Visible red laser is turned off.
On at point only Visible red laser is turned on as soon as the
point is found.
Always on
Visible red laser is turned on during the whole
search.
The laser can also be permanently
turned on by using the instrument
settings. Refer to "12.6 Lights / Lights &
accessories" for more information.

Max iterations
From 2 to 10
Maximum number of iterations for the distance
measurement before stopping.
Available for Tunnel and for Road/Rail with Turn
to: Position & measure or Turn to: Prompt
before turn.
Next step
Page changes to the Report sheet page.
Configuration,
Report sheet page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Create report
sheet
Check box
To generate a report sheet when the application is
exited.
A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected
format file.
Report sheet
Selectable
list
Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name
of the file to which the data will be written. A report
sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active
memory device. The data is always appended to the
file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets
screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet
can be created and an existing report sheet can be
selected or deleted.
Format file to
use
Selectable
list
Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format
file defines which and how data is written to a report
sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file
must first be transferred from the data storage device
to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer
to "30.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how
to transfer a format file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files
screen where an existing format file can be selected or
deleted.
Next step
Page changes to the first page on this screen.
Viva Series, Roads - General
650
46.3.2
Road Line - Info Page
Description
This info page is used for staking and checking Road lines.
Available fields
e
b
f
d
c
a
Road_043
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Line to stake out
Centreline
Line offset
Line ht diff
CL offset
CL ht diff
The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
Field
Description
Line task
Name defined for the line task.
∆ offset
Horizontal offset between the defined position and the
current position.
∆ height
Vertical offset between the defined position and the
current position.
∆ chainage
Difference between the defined chainage Stake
chainage on the General page and the current chainage
Chainage shown on the Stake page.

If no defined chainage exists, for example if
staking out random chainages or checking, this
field reads ∆ chainage: -----.
Chainage
The current chainage. This field is independent of the
chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate
using in Configuration, Graphics page.
Stake chainage
Chainage to stake out.
Line offset
Horizontal offset from the line.
Line ht diff
Height difference from the defined line.
Line name
Name of the line to stake out or the stake out is relative
to.
Additional line
The name of an additional line.
Additnl line chnge
Current local chainage of additional line.
Additnl line offset
Current perpendicular offset to the additional line
including the defined stake/check offset of additional
line of the Offsets page.
Additnl line ht diff
Current height difference to the additional line including
the defined stake/check height difference of the additional line of Offsets page.
CL ht diff
Height difference from the centreline.
CL height
Height of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL radius
Radius of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL type
Element type of the centreline.
CL offset
Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This
field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration,
Graphics page.
Viva Series, Roads - General
651
Field
Description
CL tangent
Tangent direction of the centreline at the current
chainage.
Offset angle
The current angle to selected line.
Nearest hz tngnt pt
Refer to "48.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on
this field.
Nearst vt tngnt pt
Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the
design.
Vertical sqr offset
Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the
selected line.
This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines,
cables and in the construction segment.
Vertical chainage
Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line.
e
a
d
c
b
Road_089
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Vertical chainage
Chainage
Centreline
Centreline height difference
Vertical square offset
CL grade
Grade of the centreline at the current position.
Direction to point
Direction from the current position to the point to stake
out.
Distance to point
Distance from the current position to the point to stake
out.
Defined easting
Easting of the point to stake out.
Defined northing
Northing of the point to stake out.
Defined height
Height of the point to stake out.
Current dsgn east
Easting of the design for the current position (relevant
point at the selected line).
Current dsgn north
Northing of the design for the current position (relevant
point at the selected line).
Current dsgn ht
Height of the design for the current position (relevant
point at the selected line).
Actual easting
Easting of the current position.
Actual northing
Northing of the current position.
Actual height
Height of the current position.
Quality 3D
Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Line space half and Line
space full
Empty line.
Viva Series, Roads - General
652
46.3.3
Road Local Line - Info Page
Available fields
c
b
d
f
e
g
a
Road_085
Stake out of roundabout
a) Position to stake out
b) Line to stake out
c) Centreline
d) Chainage
e) ∆ chainage
f) ∆ offset
g) ∆ height
The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
Field
Description
Line task
Name defined for the local line task.
Additional line
The name of an additional line.
Additnl line chnge
Current local chainage of additional line.
Additnl line offset
Current perpendicular offset to the additional line
including the defined stake/check offset of additional
line of the Offsets page.
Additnl line ht diff
Current height difference to the additional line including
the defined stake/check height difference of the additional line of Offsets page.
∆ offset
Horizontal offset between the defined position and the
current position.
∆ height
Vertical offset between the defined position and the
current position.
∆ chainage
Difference between the defined chainage Stake
chainage on the General page and the current chainage
Chainage shown on the Stake page.

If no defined chainage exists, for example if
staking out random chainages or checking, this
field reads ∆ chainage: -----.
Chainage
The current chainage. This field is independent of the
chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate
using in Configuration, Graphics page.
Stake chainage
Chainage to stake out.
Line offset
Horizontal offset from the line.
Line ht diff
Height difference from the defined line.
Line name
Name of the line to stake out or the stake out is relative
to.
CL ht diff
Height difference from the centreline.
CL height
Height of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL radius
Radius of the centreline at the current chainage.
Viva Series, Roads - General
653
Field
Description
CL type
Element type of the centreline.
CL offset
Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This
field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration,
Graphics page.
CL tangent
Tangent direction of the centreline at the current
chainage.
Offset angle
The current angle to selected line.
Nearest hz tngnt pt
Distance to the nearest horizontal tangent point of the
design. Refer to "48.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for
details on this field.
Nearst vt tngnt pt
Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the
design.
Vertical sqr offset
Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the
selected line.
This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines,
cables and in the construction segment.
Vertical chainage
Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line.
e
a
d
c
b
Road_089
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Vertical chainage
Chainage
Centreline
Centreline height difference
Vertical square offset
CL grade
Grade of the centreline at the current position.
Direction to point
Direction from the current position to the point to stake
out.
Distance to point
Distance from the current position to the point to stake
out.
Defined easting
Easting of the point to stake out.
Defined northing
Northing of the point to stake out.
Defined height
Height of the point to stake out.
Actual easting
Easting of the current position.
Actual northing
Northing of the current position.
Actual height
Height of the current position.
Current dsgn east
Easting of the design for the current position (relevant
point at the line).
Current dsgn north
Northing of the design for the current position (relevant
point at the line).
Current dsgn ht
Height of the design for the current position (relevant
point at the line).
Viva Series, Roads - General
654
Working with pipelines
Field
Description
Ht end vert align
Height at the endpoint of the vertical alignment of the
line.
∆ ht end of v align
Height difference to the endpoint of the vertical alignment of the line.
Quality 3D
Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Line space half and Line
space full
Empty line.
Description
When staking/checking pipes, a common task is to use height differences at the
start/end of the pipe. The two Info page items for local lines enable the height difference to be added to the end of the vertical alignments ∆ ht end of v align and Ht end
vert align.
Viva Series, Roads - General
655
46.3.4
Road Surface Grade - Info Page
Available fields
e
d
c
i
f
j
g
a
m
q
b
o
k
l
p
h
n
Road_044
a) Surface grade to stake
out
b) Right line of the surface
grade Right name
c) Left line of the surface
grade Left name
d) Centreline
e) CL offset
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
CL ht diff
Surf. grade offset
Surf. grade ht diff
Left offset
Left ht diff
Right offset
l) Right ht diff
m) Surface grade ratio
n) Width
o) Square offset
p) Camber (in this case
negative)
q) Square slope dist
The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
Field
Description
Surface grade task
Name defined for the surface grade task.
Additional line
The name of an additional line.
Additnl line chnge
Current local chainage of additional line.
Additnl line offset
Current perpendicular offset to the additional line
including the defined stake/check offset of additional
line of the Offsets page.
Additnl line ht diff
Current height difference to the additional line including
the defined stake/check height difference of the additional line of Offsets page.
∆ offset
Horizontal offset between the defined position and the
current position.
∆ height
Vertical offset between the defined position and the
current position.
∆ chainage
Difference between the defined chainage Stake
chainage on the General page and the current chainage
Chainage shown on the Stake page.

If no defined chainage exists, for example if
staking out random chainages or checking, this
field reads ∆ chainage: -----.
Chainage
The current chainage. This field is independent of the
chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate
using in Configuration, Graphics page.
Stake chainage
Chainage to stake out.
Surf. grade offset
Horizontal offset from the surface grade.
Surf. grade ht diff
Height difference to the surface grade. If no stake height
difference is used Surf. grade ht diff = ∆ height.
Viva Series, Roads - General
656
Field
Description
Camber
The superelevation of the active surface grade.
The calculation is always in relation to the defined reference line of the surface grade:
Camber = line – reference line
Left name
Name of the left line defining the surface grade.
Left offset
Horizontal offset from the left point of the surface
grade.
Left ht diff
Height difference from the left point of the surface
grade.
Right name
Name of the right line defining the surface grade.
Right offset
Horizontal offset from the right point of the surface
grade.
Right ht diff
Height difference from the right point of the surface
grade.
Ref line
Indicates which side of the surface grade the stake out
is relative to.
Ref offset
Horizontal offset from the line of the surface grade used
as reference. Depends on Ref line and is identical to
Right offset or Left offset.
Ref ht diff
Height difference from the line of the surface grade used
as reference. Depends on Ref line and is identical to
Right ht diff or Left ht diff.
Surface grade ratio
Slope ratio of the surface grade.
Square offset
Offset from the surface grade, perpendicular to the
surface grade.
Square slope dist
Slope distance from the slope reference line to the
current position perpendicular to the slope. The slope
distance is always at the same grade as the defined or
current slope. If the current position is above or below
the slope, the slope distance is projected square to the
slope, and then the slope distance is calculated to the
defined reference point.
The Square slope dist is measured from the current
position to the reference line.
CL ht diff
Height difference from the centreline.
CL height
Height of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL radius
Radius of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL type
Element type of the centreline.
CL offset
Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This
field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration,
Graphics page.
CL tangent
Tangent direction of the centreline at the current
chainage.
Width
Horizontal width of the surface grade.
Nearest hz tngnt pt
Distance to the nearest horizontal tangent point of the
design. Refer to "48.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for
details on this field.
Viva Series, Roads - General
657
Field
Description
Nearst vt tngnt pt
Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the
design.
CL grade
Grade of the centreline at the current position.
Vertical sqr offset
Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the
selected line.
This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines,
cables and in the construction segment.
Vertical chainage
Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line.
e
a
d
c
b
Road_089
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Vertical chainage
Chainage
Centreline
Centreline height difference
Vertical square offset
Direction to point
Direction from the current position to the point to stake
out.
Distance to point
Distance from the current position to the point to stake
out.
Defined easting
Easting of the point to stake out.
Defined northing
Northing of the point to stake out.
Defined height
Height of the point to stake out.
Actual easting
Easting of the current position.
Actual northing
Northing of the current position.
Actual height
Height of the current position.
Current dsgn east
Easting of the design for the current position (relevant
point on the surface grade = Actual easting).
Current dsgn north
Northing of the design for the current position relevant
point on the surface grade = Actual northing).
Current dsgn ht
Height of the design for the current position (relevant
point on the surface grade).
Quality 3D
Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Line space half and Line
space full
Empty line.
Viva Series, Roads - General
658
46.3.5
Road Manual Slope, Local Manual Slope and Slope - Info Page
Available fields
g
e
m
b
k
h
p
a
n
l
i
s
f
d
r
q
c
j
o
Road_045
a) Slope to stake
out/check
b) Hinge point Hinge
name, reference line
c) Second line of slope
Additnl line name
d) Real catch point
e) Centreline
f) Natural surface
g) CL offset
h) CL ht diff
i) Slope offset
j) Slope height diff
k) Hinge offset
l) Hinge ht diff
m) Slope dist hinge
n) Slope ratio
o)
p)
q)
r)
s)
Square offset
Current ratio
Additnl line offset
Additnl line ht diff
Square slope dist
The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
Field
Description
Slope task
Name defined for the slope task.
∆ offset
Horizontal offset between the defined position and the
current position.
∆ height
Vertical offset between the defined position and the
current position.
∆ chainage
Difference between the defined Stake chainage on the
General page and the current chainage Chainage shown
on the Stake page.

If no defined chainage exists, for example if
staking out random chainages or checking, this
field reads ∆ chainage: -----.
Chainage
The current chainage. This field is independent of the
chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate
using in Configuration, Graphics page.
Stake chainage
Chainage to stake out.
Slope offset
Horizontal offset from the slope.
Slope height diff
Height difference from the slope. If no stake height
difference is used Slope height diff = ∆ height.
Ht diff rail
Height difference from the batter rail to mark the slope
(for Type: Batter rail vertical in Slope Stakeout
Settings).
Hinge name
Name of the line defining the hinge of the slope.
Hinge offset
Horizontal offset from the hinge point of the slope.
Viva Series, Roads - General
659
Field
Description
Hinge ht diff
Height difference from the hinge point of the slope.
Additnl line name
Name of the second line defining the slope.
Additnl line offset
Horizontal offset from the second line of the slope.
Additnl line ht diff
Height difference from the second line of the slope.
Slope ratio
Ratio of the slope.
Slope dist hinge

The display format is defined as system setting in
Regional Settings, Slope page.
Slope distance to the hinge point.

All defined settings for a batter rail or reference
point are already taken into account. This value is
the information to write on the stake.
Slope ratio gon
Slope ratio in gon.
Slope ratio degree
Slope ratio in decimal degrees.
Slope ratio %
Slope ratio in percent.
Current ratio
Ratio of the slope from the current position to the hinge.

For the catch point the Current ratio is identical
to the Slope ratio.
Square offset
Offset from the slope, perpendicular to the slope.
Square slope dist
Slope distance from the slope reference line to the
current position perpendicular to the slope. The slope
distance is always at the same grade as the defined or
current slope. If the current position is above or below
the slope, the slope distance is projected square to the
slope, and then the slope distance is calculated to the
defined reference point.
For slope, the Square slope dist is measured from the
current position to the reference line.
For manual slope and local manual slope, Square slope
dist is measured from the current position to the hinge
line.
CL ht diff
Height difference from the centreline.
CL height
Height of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL radius
Radius of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL type
Element type of the centreline.
CL offset
Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This
field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration,
Graphics page.
CL tangent
Tangent direction of the centreline at the current
chainage.
Offset angle
Available for manual slope. The defined value for the
angle to alignment.
Traveller height
Height of the traveller in use.
Refer to "48.2.3 Advanced Slope Settings" for information on the different methods of slope staking.
Nearest hz tngnt pt
Distance to the nearest horizontal tangent point of the
design. Refer to "48.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for
details on this field.
Viva Series, Roads - General
660
Field
Description
Nearst vt tngnt pt
Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the
design.
Vertical sqr offset
Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the
selected line.
This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines,
cables and in the construction segment.
Vertical chainage
Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line.
e
a
d
c
b
Road_089
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Vertical chainage
Chainage
Centreline
Centreline height difference
Vertical square offset
CL grade
Grade of the centreline at the current position.
Direction to point
Direction from the current position to the point to stake
out.
Distance to point
Distance from the current position to the point to stake
out.
Defined easting
Easting of the point to stake out.
Defined northing
Northing of the point to stake out.
Defined height
Height of the point to stake out.
Actual easting
Easting of the current position.
Actual northing
Northing of the current position.
Actual height
Height of the current position.
Current dsgn east
Easting of the design for the current position (relevant
point on the slope = Act Easting).
Current dsgn north
Northing of the design for the current position relevant
point on the slope = Act Northing).
Current dsgn ht
Height of the design for the current position (relevant
point on the slope).
Quality 3D
Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Line space half and Line
space full
Empty line.
Viva Series, Roads - General
661
46.3.6
Road Crown - Info Page
Available fields
v
c
d
m
j
g
e
n
k
o
r
i
l
q
f
u
b
p
h
a
t
s
Road_056
a) Left surface grade of road
crown
b) Right surface grade of
road crown
c) Centreline
d) CL offset
e) CL ht diff
f) Left most line of the
crown Left name
g) Middle line of the crown
Mid name
h) Right most line of the
crown Right name
i) L surf. grade ∆ ht
j) R surf. grade ∆ ht
k) Left offset
l) Left ht diff
m) Mid offset
n) Mid ht diff
o)
p)
q)
r)
s)
t)
Right offset
Right ht diff
L surf. grade ratio
R surf. grade ratio
Left width
Right width
The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
Field
Description
Crown task
Name defined for the road crown task.
Additional line
The name of an additional line.
Additnl line chnge
Current local chainage of additional line.
Additnl line offset
Current perpendicular offset to the additional line
including the defined stake/check offset of additional
line of the Offsets page.
Additnl line ht diff
Current height difference to the additional line including
the defined stake/check height difference of the additional line of Offsets page.
∆ offset
Horizontal offset to the line of the crown defined as the
reference line.
If working in the toggle offset left/right mode, the
correct line is automatically selected as the reference
depending on whether the measured point is to the left
or right of the middle line. Refer to "48.3.8 Measuring
Road Crowns" for more information on the toggle offset
left/right mode.
∆ ht left
Vertical offset to the left/right surface grade defining the
road crown.
∆ ht right
Vertical offset to the left/right surface grade defining the
road crown.
Viva Series, Roads - General
662
Field
Description
∆ chainage
Difference between the defined Stake chainage on the
General page and the current chainage Chainage shown
on the Stake page.

If no defined chainage exists, for example if
staking out random chainages or checking, this
field reads ∆ chainage: -----.
Chainage
The current chainage. This field is independent of the
chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate
using in Configuration, Graphics page.
Stake chainage
Chainage to stake out.
L surf. grade ∆ ht
Height difference from the road crowns left surface
grade.
R surf. grade ∆ ht
Height difference from the road crowns right surface
grade.
Ht diff crown
Height difference from Active surf. grade of the crown.
Active surf. grade
Indicates if you are on the left or right surface grade of
the road crown.
Actv surf. grade ratio
Slope ratio of Active surf. grade. This value is equal to L
surf. grade ratio or R surf. grade ratio depending on the
value of Active surf. grade.
Left name
Name of the left most line defining the road crown.
Left offset
Horizontal offset from the left line of the road crown.
Left ht diff
Height difference from the left line of the road crown.
Right name
Name of the left most line defining the road crown.
Right offset
Horizontal offset from the right line of the road crown.
Right ht diff
Height difference from the right line of the road crown.
Mid name
Name of the mid line defining the road crown.
Mid offset
Horizontal offset from the mid line of the road crown.
Mid ht diff
Height difference from the mid line of the road crown.
L surf. grade ratio
Slope ratio of the road crowns left surface grade.
R surf. grade ratio
Slope ratio of the road crowns right surface grade.
Left width
Horizontal width of the road crowns left surface grade.
Right width
Horizontal width of the road crowns right surface grade.
CL ht diff
Height difference from the centreline.
CL height
Height of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL radius
Radius of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL type
Curve type of the centreline.
CL offset
Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This
field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration,
Graphics page.
CL tangent
Tangent direction of the centreline at the current
chainage.
Nearest hz tngnt pt
Distance to the nearest horizontal tangent point of the
design. Refer to "48.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for
details on this field.
Viva Series, Roads - General
663
Field
Description
Nearst vt tngnt pt
Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the
design.
CL grade
Grade of the centreline at the current position.
Direction to point
Direction from the current position to the point to stake
out.
Distance to point
Distance from the current position to the point to stake
out.
Defined easting
Easting of the point to stake out.
Defined northing
Northing of the point to stake out.
Defined height
Height of the point to stake out.
Actual easting
Easting of the current position.
Actual northing
Northing of the current position.
Actual height
Height of the current position.
Current dsgn east
Easting of the design for the current position (relevant
point on the crown = Actual easting).
Current dsgn north
Northing of the design for the current position relevant
point on the crown = Actual northing).
Current dsgn ht
Height of the design for the current position (relevant
point on the crown).
Quality 3D
Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Line space half and Line
space full
Empty line.
Viva Series, Roads - General
664
46.3.7
Road Layer - Info Page
Available fields
b
c
n
e
k
i
h
f
l
g
o
d
a
m
j
Road_047
a) Relevant part of the
layer
b) Centreline
c) CL offset
d) CL ht diff
e) Slope offset
f) Layer ht diff
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
Right name
Right offset
Right ht diff
Left name
Left offset
Left ht diff
m) Width
n) Slope ratio or Surface
grade ratio
o) Square offset
The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
Field
Description
Layer task
Name defined for the layer task.
Layer name
Name of the layer to check.
Chainage
Chainage of the current measured position.
∆ chainage
Difference between the defined Stake chainage on the
General page and the current chainage Chainage shown
on the Stake page.

If no defined chainage exists, for example if
staking out random chainages or checking, this
field reads ∆ chainage: -----.
Stake chainage
Chainage to stake out.
Layer offset
Horizontal offset from the layer. Surface between Left
line and Right line.
Layer ht diff
Height difference of the measured position to the layer
∆ height
Height difference to the layer, including the stake or
check height difference.
Left name
Name of the line next to the current position on the left
side.
Left offset
Horizontal offset from the left line Left name.
Layer ht diff
Height difference to the left line Left name.
Right name
Name of the line next to the current position on the right
side.
Right offset
Horizontal offset from the right line Right name.
Right ht diff
Height difference to the right line Right name.
Slope ratio
Ratio of the slope between the left line Left name and
the right line Right name.
Viva Series, Roads - General
665
Field
Surface grade ratio
Description

The display format is defined as system setting in
Regional Settings, Slope page.
Ratio of the surface grade between the left line Left
name and the right line Right name.

The display format of the Surface grade ratio
depends on the type chosen for Surface grade
on Regional Settings, Slope page.
Square offset
Offset from the slope, perpendicular to the slope.
CL ht diff
Height difference from the centreline.
CL height
Height of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL radius
Radius of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL type
Curve type of the centreline.
CL offset
Horizontal offset from the centreline at the current
chainage.
CL tangent
Tangent direction of the centreline at the current
chainage.
Traveller height
The height of the traveller.
Nearest hz tngnt pt
Distance to the nearest horizontal tangent point of the
design. Refer to "48.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for
details on this field.
Nearst vt tngnt pt
Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the
design.
Vertical sqr offset
Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the
selected line.
This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines,
cables and in the construction segment.
Vertical chainage
Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line.
e
a
d
c
b
Road_089
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Vertical chainage
Chainage
Centreline
Centreline height difference
Vertical square offset
CL grade
Grade of the centreline at the current position.
Direction to point
Direction from the current position to the point to stake
out.
Distance to point
Distance from the current position to the point to stake
out.
Defined easting
Easting of the point to stake out.
Defined northing
Northing of the point to stake out.
Defined height
Height of the point to stake out.
Viva Series, Roads - General
666
Field
Description
Actual easting
Easting of the current position.
Actual northing
Northing of the current position.
Actual height
Height of the current position.
Current dsgn east
Easting of the design for the current position (relevant
point on the crown = Actual easting).
Current dsgn north
Northing of the design for the current position relevant
point on the crown = Actual northing).
Current dsgn ht
Height of the design for the current position (relevant
point on the crown).
Quality 3D
Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Line space half and Line
space full
Empty line.
Viva Series, Roads - General
667
46.3.8
Road DTM - Info Page

An Info page for Road DTM is only available for Roads - As built check.
Available fields
e
a
b
g
d
f
c
Road_046
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Relevant triangle of the DTM
Projected point on DTM
Easting
Northing
DTM height diff
Flow direction
Flow ratio
The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
Field
Description
DTM task
Name defined for the DTM task.
DTM height diff
Vertical height difference to the DTM.
∆ height
Height difference to the layer including the stake or
check height difference.
DTM height
Height of the DTM at the current measured position.
Flow direction
Direction of maximum slope ratio on the current DTM
triangle. This direction is the direction water would flow
toward from the projected point.
Flow ratio
Slope ratio of the DTM. This ratio is the maximum slope
ratio of the triangle.
DTM name
Name of the DTM surface.
Actual easting
Easting of the current position.
Actual northing
Northing of the current position.
Actual height
Height of the current position.
Current dsgn east
Easting of the DTM for the current position (= Actual
easting).
Current dsgn north
Northing of the DTM for the current position (= Actual
northing).
Current dsgn ht
Height of the DTM for the current position.
Quality 3D
Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Line space half and Line
space full
Empty line.
Viva Series, Roads - General
668
46.3.9
Rail - Info Page
Available fields
The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
Field
Description
∆ offset
Distance from the measured point to the point to set out
in a direction perpendicular to the horizontal alignment.
∆ height
Vertical offset between the defined position and the
current position.
∆ chainage
Difference between the defined Stake chainage on the
General page and the current chainage Chainage shown
on the Stake page.

If no defined chainage exists, for example if
staking out random chainages or checking, this
field reads ∆ chainage: -----.
Chainage
The current chainage. This field is independent of the
chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate
using in Configuration, Graphics page.
CL ht diff
Height difference from the centreline.
CL height
Height of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL radius
Radius of the horizontal alignment at the chainage of the
measured point.
CL type
Element type of the centreline.
CL offset
Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This
field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration,
Graphics page.
CL tangent
Tangent direction of the centreline at the current
chainage.
Nearest hz tngnt pt
Refer to "48.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on
this field.
Nearst vt tngnt pt
Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the
design.
CL grade
Grade of the centreline at the current position.
Direction to point
Direction from the current position to the point to stake
out.
Distance to point
Distance from the current position to the point to stake
out.
Defined easting
Easting of the point to stake out.
Defined northing
Northing of the point to stake out.
Defined height
Height of the point to stake out.
Actual easting
Easting of the current position.
Actual northing
Northing of the current position.
Current dsgn east
Easting of the design for the current position (relevant
point at the selected line).
Current dsgn north
Northing of the design for the current position (relevant
point at the selected line).
Current dsgn ht
Height of the design for the current position (relevant
point at the selected line).
Quality 3D
Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Viva Series, Roads - General
669
Field
Description
Ht diff lower rail
Height difference between the measured point and the
lower rail.
Ht lower rail
Height of the lower rail at current chainage.
Current design cant
Design cant at the current position.
Ref offset
Horizontal distance between the measured point and the
rail or centreline being used as a reference.
Ref ht diff
Height difference between the measured point and the
rail or centreline being used as a reference.
Offset (using cant)
Offset calculated regarding the cant.
Ht diff (using cant)
Height difference calculated regarding the cant.
Rail task
Name of the current task.
Rail name
Name of the centreline or rail being used as a reference.
Defined desgn cant
Design cant at the defined chainage.
Pendular length
The pendulum length as distance value: The difference in
elevation of the pendulum centre on the original track
and above the axis point.
Def pendulum displacement
The defined horizontal displacement for the track.
Def pendulum angle
The pendulum angle is defined by the pendulum
displacement and the superelevation (cant).
Actl pendulum displacement
The current horizontal displacement for the track.
Line space half and Line
space full
Empty line.
Current cant
Available for Check. Superelevation of the current position. This value is calculated by using the ’Second Point
of Cant’ option, which is located in the Tools menu.
Measured cant
Displays the value entered on Check Track, General
page. The value is usually measured with a camber measurement instrument.

Cant difference
Using Second Point of Cant of the Tools menu,
Measured cant on the Info page is set to ----- and
is not stored in the DBX. This means, that the
cant value of Second Point of Cant (current cant)
is used and not the manually entered measured
cant value.
The calculation depends on the setting for Superelevation in Configuration, Rail design page:
• For Superelevation: Design:
Cant difference = Measured cant - Current design
cant
• For Superelevation: Manual:
Cant difference = Measured cant - Manually
defined cant of Check Track, General page
• For Superelevation: None:
Cant difference = -----
Viva Series, Roads - General
670
46.3.10
Tunnel
- Info Page
Available fields
The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
Field
Description
Line task
Name of the current task.
∆ offset
Horizontal offset between the defined position and the
current position.
∆ height
Vertical offset between the defined position and the
current position.
∆ chainage
Difference between the defined chainage Stake
chainage on the General page and the current chainage
Chainage shown on the Stake page.

If no defined chainage exists, for example if
staking out random chainages or checking, this
field reads ∆ chainage: -----.
Chainage
The current chainage. This field is independent of the
chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate
using in Configuration, Graphics page.
Line offset
Horizontal offset from the line.
Line ht diff
Height difference from the defined line.
Line name
Name of the line to stake out or the stake out is relative
to.
CL ht diff
Height difference from the centreline.
Vertical sqr offset
Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the
selected line.
This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines,
cables and in the construction segment.
CL height
Height of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL radius
Radius of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL type
Element type of the centreline.
CL offset
Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This
field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration,
Graphics page.
CL tangent
Tangent direction of the centreline at the current
chainage.
Nearest hz tngnt pt
Distance to the nearest horizontal tangent point of the
design. Refer to "The Stake/Check Screen" for details on
this field.
Nearst vt tngnt pt
Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the
design.
CL grade
Grade of the centreline at the current position.
Direction to point
Direction from the current position to the point to stake
out.
Distance to point
Distance from the current position to the point to stake
out.
Defined easting
Easting of the point to stake out.
Defined northing
Northing of the point to stake out.
Defined height
Height of the point to stake out.
Viva Series, Roads - General
671
Field
Description
Actual easting
Easting of the design for the current position (relevant
point at the selected line).
Actual northing
Northing of the design for the current position (relevant
point at the selected line).
Actual height
Height of the design for the current position (relevant
point at the selected line).
Quality 3D
Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Line space half and Line
space full
Empty line.
∆Prof
Distance from the design profile to the measured point.
Profile element no.
Element number of the closest design profile element to
the measured point.
Profile element(%)
Distance in percentage terms of the measured point
along the design profile element.
Dist along profile
Distance of the measured point along the design profile
starting at the origin of the profile.
Top distance
Distance of the measured point along the design profile
starting at the top of the profile.
CL Off Rotated
Perpendicular horizontal offset from the current position
to the centreline, along the X-axis of the rotated tunnel
profile
CL Ht Diff Rotated
Height difference from the current position to the
centreline along the Y-axis of the rotated tunnel profile.
Viva Series, Roads - General
672
46.3.11
Workflow for Height (aim to stake ht)
Step-by-step
In this example, the height of the surface grade is marked on a peg by using the auto
position function.
a
c
b
Road_072
a) Peg placed at the correct position
b) First height, manually chosen direction
c) Required height on the peg
Step
Description
1.
In the Configuration, TPS page, select Turn to: Prompt before turn.

2.
Make sure that the instrument uses the reflectorless EDM mode.
After staking out the peg at the correct position with Stake Surface Grade,
aim the instrument at the peg.
3.
Press Fn Positn to open the Configuration screen.
4.
Configuration
Highlight Height (aim to stake ht).
5.



Viva Series, Roads - General
Press OK.
The instrument searches for the point on the peg at the required height
without changing the horizontal direction.
As soon as the defined Upper ht limit/Lower ht limit from
Configuration, Quality control is reached, the instrument stops.
Depending on the settings chosen, the instrument turns on the red laser to
mark the height.
673
46.4
Working with Shifts
Description
When working on site, often design data does not match the measured data. For
example, an existing road surface that should intersect with the design surface may
be 15 cm higher than the plans indicate. To guarantee a smooth intersection, this
difference has to be distributed over the remaining 100m of paving. To handle these
situations, shifts can be added to the existing design data. A shift is applied when
selecting the element to stake out/check.
Horizontal and vertical shifts can be applied to the selected element. By using these
shifts the design can be lifted/lowered and moved horizontally.
A shift is always an overlay of the existing design and is stored with the task. For a
horizontal alignment, the shift is applied perpendicular to the centreline. For the
vertical part of the alignment, shifts are applied following the plumb line.

Shifts are applied temporarily to the design data. The original design data is not modified when a shift is applied.
Access
Press Shifts.. in the Define screen.
Shift Settings,
Horizontal
shift/Vertical
shift/Scale
profile/Apply an
expand or shrink
value to scale the
tunnel profile page
The parameters required for applying the shift are identical for all entities.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Apply horizontal
shift/Apply
vertical shift
Check box
When this box is checked, shifts can be defined.
Horizontal shifts are always rectangular to the
centreline of the element being worked with.
Whereas vertical shifts are defined along the
plumb
line.
a
b
Road_013
a) Horizontal alignment with constant shift
b) Vertical alignment with constant shift
Shift type
a
b
c
Road_014
a) Constant shift
b) Linear shift
c) Parabolic shift and reverse curve
Linear
Viva Series, Roads - General
The difference between the shift at the begin
chainage and the shift defined at the end
chainage is distributed in a linear fashion.
674
Field
Option
Description
Constant
A constant shift is applied from the begin
chainage of the shift to the end chainage of the
shift. The shift stays the same from its start
chainage or station to the end chainage or
station.
Parabolic
Available for Road and Rail. The difference
between the shift at the begin chainage and the
shift defined at the end chainage is distributed
using a cubic parabola. Parabolic shifts allow a
smooth transition between the existing curve and
the shifted part.
Reverse curve
Available for Road and Rail. Two arcs with the
same radius are used to distribute the shift. As
for parabolic shifts, reverse curves guarantee a
smooth transition between the existing curve and
the shifted part.
b
g
c
g
d
i
h
e
Road_077
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
f
a
Chainage
Shift
Start shift at chainage (e)
End shift at chainage (f)
Start chainage of the shift
End chainage of the shift
Radius of the two arcs used as transition curve
Random chainage between (e) and (f)
Shift applied at chainage (h)
Begin
chainage
Editable field
Chainage from which the shift is applied.
Begin shift
Editable field
Magnitude of the shift to apply at the begin
chainage.
Shift value
Editable field
Available for Shift type: Constant. The magnitude
of shift.
End chainage Editable field
End shift
Before / after
Editable field
Chainage at which the shift ends.
Magnitude of the shift to apply at the end
chainage.
Available for Road and Rail. Defines the object
outside of the defined shift range.
a
b
c
Road_057
a) None
b) Step
c) Parallel
Viva Series, Roads - General
675
Field
Option
Description
None
The object only exists within the defined shift
range.
Parallel
The begin shift and the end shift are continued
parallel. The start shift is used from the start of
the alignment until the start chainage. The end
shift is used from the end chainage until the end
of the alignment.
Step
Before/after the defined shift range, no shift is
added. Outside of the defined shift area the original design is used. This option means a "step" will
appear at the start and/or end of the shifted
area.
Plot page with
shifts
The application offers for all stakeout and check methods a page showing a graphical
representation of the measured position in relation to the design. If shifts are applied
to the design the plot shows the original unshifted cross section view of the design as
well as the shifted element. The current element is shown in blue.
Sign convention for
shifts
The sign convention for design shifts is identical to the convention used for stake
offset and height difference.
a
b
e
d
c
Road_053

++ g
f
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Centreline
Line on left side
Negative horizontal shift
Negative vertical shift
Line on right side
Positive horizontal shift
Positive vertical shift
Horizontal stake offsets are always defined perpendicular to the centreline of the
layer the line/s belongs to.
c
a
d
a)
b)
c)
d)
b
Road_010
Shifts for lines,
slopes, layers and
DTMs
Line the horizontal shift is applied to
User defined horizontal shift for the line
Centreline
Shifted line
The shifts applied to lines, slopes, road crowns layers and DTMs are identical with one
exception: Given that DTMs are not defined relative to a centreline and hold no orientation information, no horizontal shift is possible for a DTM.
b
a
c
d
e
Road_016
Viva Series, Roads - General
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Slope to shift
Centreline
Value for horizontal shift
Value for vertical shift
Shifted slope
676
Shift for surface
grade and road
crowns
Description
To allow widening and narrowing of surface grade and road crowns, only one of the
two lines defining the surface grade or crown, is shifted when adding a horizontal
shift. This behaviour is useful for small changes to the original design, for example to
bus stops or emergency bays.
a
b
c
a) Centreline
b) Original line of the design
c) Line with horizontal parabolic shift
Road_017
Horizontal shift
For surface grades and crowns, the horizontal shift is added to the line that is defined
as the reference line. To maintain the original surface grade/crown ratio the line is
shifted along the surface grade/crown.
c
a
b
d
+
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
e
Road_018
Surface grade to shift
Reference line of the surface grade
Second line of the surface grade
Positive horizontal shift
Position of the shifted reference line
Vertical shift
The vertical component of the shift for a surface grade or crown is applied to all lines.
c
a
d
b
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
e
Road_019
Horizontal alignment with constant
horizontal shift
Surface grade to shift
Right line of the surface grade
Left line of the surface grade
Negative vertical shift
Shifted surface grade
Horizontal shifts are always perpendicular to the centreline.
b
c
d
Rail_013
Viva Series, Roads - General
a
Plan view
a) Reference line
b) Point to stake
c) Stake height difference
d) Stake offset
677
46.5
Tasks
Description
When staking out or checking a road/rail/tunnel, often it is not possible to finish a
particular task in one go. The element to be staked out or checked can be stored
together with all defined settings as a work task.
Stored in a task are:
• Selected layer
• Working chainage
• Selected line(s) or element
• Shifts
Tasks are stored within the selected Road/Rail/Tunnel job. They can be created at any
time when working in the field or during preparation in the office.
Deleting a task does not delete the referenced jobs.
Deleting a Road/Rail/Tunnel job deletes all referencing tasks.
Tasks are method-specific.
Creating a task
Loading a task
Step
Description
1.
Start the Roads/Rail/Tunnel application.
2.
In the job selection screen, select the required jobs and press OK.
3.
Select a method, if required, and press OK.
4.
In the Define screen press Save...
5.
Type in a name for the task and press OK.
Access
Press Load.. in the Define screen.
Load a Defined Task
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted task and continue.
Delete
To delete the selected task.
More
To display information about Date, Time, Creator and Description.
Fn Name or
Time
To sort task list by name or time.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - General
678
46.6
Understanding Terms and Expressions
46.6.1
Road - Basic Terms
Terms and expressions
a
b
j
k
i
e
f
c
g
Road_001
e
h
g
c
d
i
h
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
Cut situation
Fill situation
Centreline
Natural surface
Hinge point
Catch point
Carriage way
Shoulder
Slope
Top
Toe
Term / expression
Description
Carriage way
The part of the road on which users drive once the road is
finished.
Shoulder or Verge
Often located next to the carriage way, usually with a
slightly higher slope ratio than the carriage way.
Slope
Located next to the verge and can be thought of as linking
the road level with the natural surface. The ratio of the
slope is greater than the ratio of the verge. A slope starts
at the hinge point.
Natural surface or orig- The undisturbed surface before project construction.
inal ground
Finished road level
Describes the final road surface.
Catch point or daylight Indicates the point of intersection between the slope and
point
the natural surface. Both the hinge point and the catch
point lie on the slope. For a cut slope, the catch point
forms part of the top of a bank. For a fill slope, the catch
point forms part of the bottom of a bank.
Chainage or station
Viva Series, Roads - General
The cumulative distance along the centreline, frequently
but not always starting at zero.
679
46.6.2
Road - Horizontal and Vertical Geometry Elements
Horizontal alignment
The application supports the following elements in the horizontal component of alignments:
• Straights
• Arcs
• Clothoids, entry and exit as well as partial
• Cubic parabolas, entry and exit as well as partial
• Bloss curves, entry and exit as well as partial; only available for Rail
• Multipoints, all elements that cannot be described by one of the previous types
are represented by discrete points along the curve. For example, a line parallel
to a clothoid.
Vertical alignment
The application supports the following elements in the vertical component of alignments:
• Straights
• Arcs
• Quadratic parabolas
• Asymmetric quadratic parabola
• Multipoints, all elements that cannot be described by one of the previous types
are represented by discrete points along the curve.
Viva Series, Roads - General
680
46.6.3
Road - Basic Elements for Stake and Check Measurements
Description
In general, there are four different basic stakeout and check elements:
• Surface grades, for example, the final carriage way
• Lines, for example, a centreline
• Slopes, for example, the end-slopes of a cross section
• Surfaces, for example, a DTM surface
a a
b
a
a
b
c
b
b
a) Lines
b) Surface grades
c) Slopes
c
Road_002
Every stakeout or check is based on one or more of these four base elements. For
example, a road crown consists of two surface grades with one common line.
Lines
The stake out of a line is used in different situations:
• Centre line of a road
• Edges of a road or any other change in slope
• Gutters
• Pipelines, cables and any other line-related design feature
a
c
a) Line to stake out or check, in this case the centreline
b) Line offset
c) Line height difference
b
Road_003
Surface grades
Surface grades are defined by two lines. The two lines define the right and left edge
of the surface grade. One of the two lines is used as the reference line.
c
a
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
b
d
e
Road_004
Slopes
Surface grade to stake out or check
Reference line
Horizontal offset to reference line
Height difference to reference line
Height difference to expanded surface grade
Slopes, like surface grades, are defined by two lines. Different to surface grades, only
one edge of the slope, the hinge point, is known. The second edge, catch point or
daylight point, is defined by the intersection of the slope and the natural surface. As
the natural surface is unknown this edge can only be staked out in the field. Finding
and staking out the catch point is the most important task when working with slopes.
a
c
b
f
g
d
Road_005
Viva Series, Roads - General
e
h
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Centreline
Slope
Hinge Point
Second line defining the slope
Catch point
Natural surface
∆ Offset from the slope
Height difference from the slope
681
Surfaces
There are two types of surfaces supported that represent a three-dimensional design:
• DTM / TIN (Digital Terrain Model; Triangular Irregular Network)
• Layer
A DTM consists of several 3D triangles. DTMs do not include information relating the
DTM to a centreline. Positions are defined by easting, nothing and height values.
c
a
b
Road_006
a) Height difference from the triangle of the
DTM found in the same vertical line as the
measured point
b) Easting of coordinate system
c) Northing of the coordinate system
A layer is a combination of lines that form a 3D surface relative to a centreline. Thus
it is possible to define points by chainage or station, offset and height. Refer to
"46.2.3 Design Data" for more information.
a
b
c
Road_007
Viva Series, Roads - General
a) Chainage or station
b) Layer Offset
c) Layer height difference
682
46.6.4
Road - Stake Offset and Stake Height Difference
Description
When conducting a stake out, the aim is usually to mark the position of geometric
elements defined by the design. For example, in the graphic below, the catch point of
a slope. A point can be staked either directly or indirectly. For a directly staked point,
the peg ends up at exactly the position of the point to be staked. Staking the same
point indirectly, the peg will be placed with a certain offset to the point.
a
c
d
Road_009

b
One reason to stake out a point indirectly is that the peg would not last
long at the position of the actual
point. In this example, the peg
staked directly would be removed as
soon as the excavation work starts.
Horizontal stake offsets are, like shifts, defined perpendicular to the centreline of the
layer the line(s) belongs to, if no offset angle on Offsets page has been defined. For
surface grades and road crowns, the stake offset is applied following the same rules
as stated for horizontal shifts. Refer to "46.4 Working with Shifts" for more information.
Stake offset
For each stakeout method, a horizontal and/or vertical offset can be defined. The
stake offset and stake height difference are defined on the Offsets page of the stake
screen.
Sign convention for
stake offset and
height difference
The sign convention for stake offsets and height differences is identical to the convention used for design shifts.
a
b
d
c
Road_011
Plot page with stake
offset and stake
height difference
a)
b)
c)
e + + g d)
e)
f
f)
g)
Centreline
Line on left side
Negative stake offset
Negative stake height difference
Line on right side
Positive stake offset
Positive stake height difference
The application offers for all stake out methods a page showing a graphical representation of the measured position in relation to the design. If stake offset and/or stake
height difference are used, the plot shows the original cross section view of the design
as well as the position to stake out. The position to stake out is marked by a
yellow/black peg.
Viva Series, Roads - General
683
46.6.5
Road - Chainage or Station Equations
Description
Chainage or station equations are used to adjust the alignment chainage or station.
The most common reason for doing so is the insertion or removal of curves during the
design process. Inserting or removing a curve would require recalculating the chainage
or station of an entire alignment. Using chainage or station equations eliminates this
need. Chainage or station equations can create either a gap or an overlap as shown in
the following diagrams.
12
11
13
14 15
10
10
9
9
8
7
a
8
b
6
7
Gap chainage or station
equation. Chainage or
station back 10 =
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
chainage or station
ahead 15.
a) Old
15 1
b) New
5
4
6
5
3
2
1
Road_062
10
9
11
8
12 13
7
6
5
6
4
a
5
4
2
Overlap chainage or
station equation.
Chainage or station
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1
back 13 = chainage or
station ahead 7.
a) New
b) Old
b
3
3
7
2
Road_063
Multiple chainage or
station
In the case of the overlap shown in the example, the chainages or stations between
seven and thirteen appear twice. When a duplicate chainage or station is entered, a
message asks which one is to be used.
Example
As more than one chainage or station equation is possible, a chainage or station can
appear more than twice on a design. In this example, the chainages or stations 11 to
13 appear three times.
0.. ..5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Road_069
11 12 13 14 15 16.. ..24
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Overlap chainage or
station equation.
Chainage back 13 =
chainage ahead 7 and
chainage back 15 =
chainage ahead 11.
In this example, when chainage or station 12 is entered in Road - Multiple Chainage,
the following screen shows how the option to select the right chainage or station is
displayed:
Viva Series, Roads - General
684
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted chainage or station equation and return to
the stake out screen.
More
To switch the value displayed in the last column to show the end
chainage or station of the chainage or station equation.
Description of columns
Column
Description
End
Shows the end chainage or station for the chainage or station equation. In this example, the field shows 13.000 for Nr. 1, 15.000 for Nr.
2 and 24.000 for Nr. 3. End shows to which chainage or station, the
current chainage or station equation is valid. As for the first part of
the alignment, no chainage or station equation exists, Ahead stays
empty for the first row.
Viva Series, Roads - General
685
46.6.6
Road - Working Corridor
Description
A working corridor defines the valid offset range left and right of the centreline. When
working with irregular alignments such as traffic islands and parking lots, working
corridors are useful to avoid displaying results from the wrong centreline element.
The following example shows the result if working without a defined working corridor.
For the measured position (b), the application finds the centreline point (c) with the
minimum perpendicular offset (f).
With a defined working corridor (e), the application would display a message advising
that the measured position is outside of the defined centreline.
d
d
c
e
a
f
e
Road_081
b
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Centreline
Measured position
Projected point on the centreline
Defined offset range for the working corridor
Working corridor
Offset from the centreline, if no working
corridor is used
The working corridor is defined in Configuration, Design page. Refer to "46.3 Configuring Roads Applications" for more information.
Viva Series, Roads - General
686
46.6.7
Road - Extension of the Centreline
Description
Whenever centrelines must be extended, for example, at the start and end area of an
alignment or slope. The projection of the measured position to the centreline is made
using the tangent of the start/end point of the centreline.
In this case a warning appears informing that the original design is exceeded. The
application will advise as soon as a measured position is within the design area once
again.
Concept
When expanding the centreline the geometry will be continued using the tangent of
the start/end point of the centreline.
a
b
a) Centreline
b) Extended centreline
Road_090
Method
Description
When staking out in the region of the start/end area of the design centreline, situations occur where an expansion of the centreline is useful. As soon as measurements
are outside the defined centreline, the application will prompt if, and with which
method, the centreline should be expanded.

The extension of a centreline is made following its start/end tangent. Outside of the
original design area correct results cannot be guaranteed.
46.6.8
Road/Rail - Working with Heights
Description
Normally, heights stored with the design data are used. The Rail application offers the
possibility to switch to either:
• a height which is entered manually by the user,
This option enables the manual definition of a height, which can be applied for
staking out or checking. This height is entered in the General page.
• a height which is retrieved from an existing Height Layer, as defined in the DTM job
associated with the project. The layer from the DTM is applied and used as a height
reference for the staking out or checking of alignments. 2D and 3D are possible.
This option is configured in the Tools menu.
Understanding
priorities of various
heights
Type of height
Overrules
Stake Height Diff
Manually entered
All other heights
Considered
Of individual point
All other heights
Considered
From height layer of DTM
Design height
Considered
From design
No other heights
Considered
Viva Series, Roads - General
687
46.6.9
Rail - Working with a Single Track
Terms and expressions
Term / expression
Description
Track
A track comprises two separate rails.
Single track
A single track is defined as one track with one centreline
and two rails. All chainages are calculated from the
centreline.
Track centreline
Geometric alignment in two or three dimensions to which
all design elements of the project are referenced. It could
be that the vertical component of the alignment does not
coincide with the plan component. In this case the vertical
part of the alignment will generally coincide with the
lowest rail.
Chainage or station
The cumulative distance along the centreline, frequently
but not always starting at zero.
Left/right rail
Planimetric position of the left/right rail of a track.
The sense of the left/right rail is given by the direction of
increasing chainage.
When a section of the track is viewed in the direction of
increasing chainage, the left rail is to the left of the centre
of the track.
Nominal gauge
The nominal distance between the active (internal) faces
of the left and right rails.
Superelevation base
The distance over which the superelevation is applied.
This distance is normally the distance between the centre
of the left and right rail.
Left/right superelevation
Left/right cant
The superelevation or height difference of each rail with
respect to the track centreline. Usually expressed in millimetres.
If one of the rails is used to rotate the track section, or
the height of the vertical alignment coincides with the
lowest rail, the superelevation of the rotation point or
lowest rail will be zero.
Superelevation is also known by the term cant. These two
words can be interchanged.
Diagram - Plan
b
d
Rail_001
Viva Series, Roads - General
a
a)
b)
c)
d)
Track centreline
Left rail
Right rail
Nominal gauge
688
Diagram - Section
Two generic methods can be used to define the section of the track.
Method 1 - A definition using rotation around a known point
This method involves rotating the section around a known point, normally the lowest
rail.
e
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
d
c
b
Rail_002
a
Left rail
Right rail
Rotation point
Nominal gauge
Superelevation base
Superelevation (cant)
Method 2 - A definition using relative height distances
This method uses height differences relative to the vertical alignment to define the
height of the left and right rail.
e
a
f
g
d
c
Rail_003
Viva Series, Roads - General
b
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Track centreline
Left rail
Right rail
Nominal gauge
Superelevation base
Left superelevation (left
cant)
g) Right superelevation (right
cant)
689
46.6.10
Rail - Working with Multiple Tracks
Description
Multiple tracks are used when more than one track share a common centreline, from
which all chainages are calculated.
When there are multiple tracks with independent centrelines for each track, each track
is then considered as a single track. Refer to "46.6.9 Rail - Working with a Single Track"
for details on single tracks.
Diagram - Plan
c
b
d
a
f
e
Rail_004
a)
g b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Chainage centreline
Left track centre ine
Left track left rail
Left track right rail
Right track centreline
Right track left rail
Right track right rail
Diagram - Section
b
g
f
j
e
d
i
a
Rail_005
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Calculations
k
c
Chainage centreline
Left track centreline
Left track left rail
Left track right rail
Left track left rail superelevation
Left track right rail superelevation
h
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
track
track
track
track
track
centreline
left rail
right rail
left rail superelevation
right rail superelevation
For multiple tracks, the chainage centreline is used only to calculate the chainage. The
superelevation of each track is calculated with respect to the corresponding (left /
right) vertical alignment. The chainage centreline can consist of a plan and a vertical
component. Although the vertical component of the chainage centreline is not used
for any calculation.
Viva Series, Roads - General
690
46.6.11
Rail - Check Elements and Stakeout Elements
Description
Points can be staked with respect to three basic elements of the track:
• Track centreline
• Left rail
• Right rail
Centreline stakeout
Description
The line to stake out can be a track centreline or, in the case of multiple tracks, the
left or right track centreline. In both cases, a horizontal offset with respect to the
centreline can be applied. Additionally, if a vertical alignment is available for a track
centreline, a vertical offset can be applied.
Diagram - Single track elements
d
f
a
e
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Track centreline
Left rail
Right rail
Point to stake
Horizontal offset from
track centreline
f) Vertical offset from track
centreline
a
c
Rail_006
Left/right rail
stakeout
b
Description
The left or right rail of a track can be staked out:
• directly,
• horizontal and/or vertical offsets can be used to stake any point relative to
either rail.
Diagram - Staking out a point relative to the right rail
d
f
a
e
c
Rail_007

Viva Series, Roads - General
b
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Track centreline
Left rail
Right rail
Point to stake
Horizontal offset from
right rail
f) Vertical offset from right
rail
The position from which the horizontal and rail offsets will be applied depends
on how the left and right rails were defined in the imported design data. Using
standard practice, the horizontal offset would be defined from the active face
of the rail, and the height offset would be defined from the highest part of the
rail, as shown in the diagram.
691
46.6.12
Rail - Working with Offsets
Sign convention for
offsets
The sign convention for offsets is:
+
d
a
+
e
c
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
b
-
Rail_008
Centreline
Positive horizontal offset
Positive vertical offset
Negative horizontal offset
Negative vertical offset
46.6.13
Tunnel - Basic Terms
Terms and expressions
Term / expression
Description
Centreline
Geometric alignment in two or three dimensions to which
all design elements of the project are referenced.
Chainage or station
The cumulative distance along the centreline, frequently
but not always starting at zero.
Design Profile
Geometric description of the designed shape of the crosssection of the tunnel. The design profile can contain
straight or curve elements.
Excavated Profile
Shape of the cross-section of the tunnel that has been
excavated.
Underbreak
When the excavated profile is inside the design profile, the
underbreak is the perpendicular distance between the
design profile and the excavated profile.
Overbreak
When the excavated profile is outside of the design profile,
the overbreak is the perpendicular distance between the
design profile and the excavated profile.
Tunnel Portal
The open end of a tunnel.
Tunnel Face
The point where the excavated tunnel meets existing
terrain.
Superelevation (Rota- Angle of rotation of a design profile. Used to take into
tion)
account the velocity of a moving vehicle through a curve.
Rotation Point
The point about which the design profile is rotated. This
point may or may not coincide with the centreline.
General terms
e
f
g
h
a
d
b
c
Tunnel_001
Viva Series, Roads - General
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Centreline
Centreline offset
Point on design profile
Centreline height offset
Design profile
Excavated profile
Underbreak
Overbreak
692
3D View
Tunnel_002
a
b
a) Centreline or axis
b) Tunnel portal
c) Tunnel face
c
Superelevation
a
c
d
b
Tunnel_003
Viva Series, Roads - General
e
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Centreline or axis
Rotation point
Centreline offset
Centreline height offset
Superelevation (Rotation)
693
46.6.14
Tunnel - Elements for Stake Out and Check Measurements
Tunnel face
Staking tunnel faces
It is usually required to stake out the tunnel face to indicate the position to excavate
when certain tunnelling methods are used. For example, Drill and Blast or excavation
using a roadheader.
The points to stake on the tunnel face can be defined in various ways:
Horizontal and vertical offsets
By horizontal and vertical offsets with respect to the centreline:
a
d
b
c
Tunnel_004
a)
b)
c)
d)
Centreline
Point on tunnel face to stake
Centreline offset
Centreline height offset
Distance along profile
By the distance from the start of the design profile and an offset from the design
profile.
e b
d
a
c
Tunnel_005
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Centreline
Point on tunnel face to stake
Point defining start of design profile
Distance from start of design profile
Offset perpendicular to design profile
Distance along a particular element
By the distance along a particular element of the design profile and an offset from the
element.
b
d e
c
Tunnel_006
Tunnel profiles
a
a)
b)
c)
d)
Centreline
Point on tunnel face to stake
Element of design profile to stake
Distance from start of design profile
element
e) Offset perpendicular to design profile
Staking tunnel profiles
Tunnel profiles are normally staked after excavation to indicate the position of tunnel
design elements or services such as lighting or ventilation.
Viva Series, Roads - General
694
Basic terms
Usually a tunnel under construction is designed and built in various stages such that a
given chainage can have various design profiles. For example shotcrete or final lining.
Each design profile is called a layer.
b
c
a
a) Centreline or axis
b) Final lining
c) Shotcrete
Tunnel_007
Measuring tunnel profiles
Tunnel profiles are normally measured after excavation to compare the excavated
profile with the design profile. This check can occur during the excavation phase of the
project or for quality control checks of the built tunnel.
When measuring tunnel profiles, it is possible to scan various profiles from one instrument position. The profiles to scan are defined with respect to a defined chainage.
Profiles can be scanned at a given forward and back interval within a given forward
and back distance from the defined profile.
Measuring tunnel profiles - Plan view
d
h
i
e
a
b
c
f
Tunnel_009
g
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
Centreline
Instrument position
Tunnel face
Defined profile to scan
Instrument profile
Back distance
Forward distance
Back interval
Forward interval
Profile view
Tunnel profiles can be measured vertically, horizontally or perpendicular to the tunnel
centreline.
c
d
a
Tunnel_010
Viva Series, Roads - General
e
b a)
b)
c)
d)
Centreline
Tunnel face
Horizontal profile
Profile perpendicular to
centreline
e) Vertical profile
695
46.6.15
Tunnel - Shifts
Description
When working on site, often design data does not match the measured data. For
example, an existing road surface that should intersect with the design surface may
be 15 cm higher than the plans indicate. To guarantee a smooth intersection, this
difference has to be distributed over the remaining 100 m of paving. To handle these
situations, the application allows the possibility of adding shifts to the existing design
data. A shift is applied when selecting the element to stake out/check.

Centreline shifts
Shifts do not change the stored design. They are applied temporarily for stake out
purposes.
Horizontal and vertical shifts
Horizontal shifts are always perpendicular to the centreline whereas vertical shifts are
applied along the plumb line.
a
b
a) Horizontal alignment with
constant shift (plan view)
b) Vertical alignment with
constant shift (profile
view)
Road_013
Constant and linear shifts are supported
For both horizontal and vertical shifts, two different types can be applied:
Constant:
The shift remains the same from its start chainage or station to the
end chainage or station.
The shift is linearly interpolated along the chainage or station.
Linear:
a
b
a) Constant shift
b) Linear shift
Tunnel_025
Sign convention
The sign convention for design shifts is identical to the conventions used for centreline
offset and height shifts difference.
d (-)
e (-)
Tunnel_011
Viva Series, Roads - General
a
b (+)
c (+)
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Centreline
Positive horizontal shift
Positive vertical shift
Negative horizontal shift
Negative vertical shift
696
Design profile shift
A shift can be applied to the design profile. The shift is applied perpendicularly to the
design profile at any point along the design profile.
A positive shift will increase the size of the profile, a negative shift will decrease the
size of the profile.
a (-) b c (+)
d (-)
e (+)
Tunnel_012
Viva Series, Roads - General
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Design profile with negative shift
Original design profile
Design profile with positive shift
Negative shift
Positive shift
697
47
Roads - Alignment Editor
47.1
Basic Terms
Description
A
•
•
•
road surface can be thought of three different types of design elements:
the horizontal alignment
the vertical alignment
the cross section
Basic concepts
a bc
B’
B’’
B’’’
A’
A’’
A’’’
TS_051
a
- Natural surface.
b
- The vertical alignment.
c
- The horizontal alignment.
A’’/B’’ - Points on horizontal alignment
A’/B’ - Points on real surface
A’’’/B’’’- Points on vertical alignment
Any point A in a project has ENH coordinates in a determined coordinate system. Each
point has three different positions:
• A’ - Point on real surface
• A’’ - Point on horizontal alignment
• A’’’- Point on vertical alignment
By adding a second point B to the project an alignment is defined. The alignment can
be thought in three ways:
• Horizontal alignment (A’’-B’’)
• Projection of the horizontal alignment onto the real surface (A’-B’)
• Vertical alignment (A’’’-B’’’)
The angle between the horizontal and the vertical alignment is the grade ().
Geometric elements

A road design is fitted to a base plan or map using the three basic geometric elements:
• Straight
• Curve
• Spiral
Refer to "Appendix J Glossary" for a definition of the terms.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
698
47.2
Starting Alignment Editor
47.2.1
Accessing Alignment Editor
Access
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads\Alignment Editor.
Alignment Editor
Startup
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent
screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Alignment editor application. Refer to "47.3 Configuring Alignment Editor".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Next step
Select an option and press OK.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
699
47.2.2
Creating a New Alignment
Access
Select Create new alignment in Alignment Editor Startup and press OK.
New Alignment
Key
Description
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
Fn Config..
To configure the Alignment editor application. Refer to "47.3 Configuring Alignment Editor".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Name
Editable field
The name of the new Alignment editor raw alignment.
Description
Editable field
Optional description of the new raw alignment.
Creator
Editable field
Optional description of the creator of this alignment.
Alignment
type
Selectable list
Defines if the alignment is for Roadrunner Road
or Rail applications.
Device
Selectable list
The device on which the new Alignment editor raw
alignment will be stored. Depending on the
inserted memory devices, this field may be a
display only field.
Next step
Press OK to access the Alignment Editor Menu. Refer to "47.2.5 Alignment Editor
Menu".
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
700
47.2.3
Modifying an Existing Alignment
Access
Select Edit existing alignment in Alignment Editor Startup and press OK.
Select Alignment
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Alignment
name
Selectable list
All existing Alignment editor raw alignments
currently stored in the \Data\XML folder with the
file extension *.xml.
Alignment
type
Selectable list
Defines if the alignment is for Roadrunner Road
or Rail applications.
Next step
Highlight the Alignment name field and press ENTER.
Alignments
Key
Description
OK
To select the highlighted raw alignment and continue.
New..
To create a new raw alignment. Refer to "47.2.2 Creating a New
Alignment".
Edit..
To edit the name and description of an existing raw alignment.
Delete
To delete an existing raw alignment.
More
To switch the last column between Date, Time and Size.
CF card, SD
card or Intrnl
To change between viewing jobs stored on another data storage
device or internal memory.
Fn Backup
To restore a raw alignment file with the extension *.xmb currently
stored in the \Data\XML folder.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Next step
Press OK to select the highlighted raw alignment and return to the Select Alignment
screen.
Press OK to access the Alignment Editor Menu. Refer to "47.2.5 Alignment Editor
Menu".
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
701
47.2.4
Importing Alignment Data
Access
1) Select Import alignment from file in Alignment Editor Startup and press OK.
2) Create a new alignment in the New Alignment screen. Refer to "47.2.2 Creating a
New Alignment".
3) Press OK.
Import Line
Key
OK
Fn Config..
Fn Quit
Description
To import the selected alignment data to active raw alignment.
To configure the Alignment editor application. Refer to "47.3 Configuring Alignment Editor".
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Data source
From job
Option
Survey job
Road job
Road+ (GSI
format)
Rail job
Selectable list
Coord system Display only
Line
Selectable list
Alignment
Selectable list
Alignment
(.aln) file
Selectable list
Vertical (.prf)
file
Selectable list
Description
The file type of the data source.
To import lines or areas from the selected job.
To import lines from an existing Road job.
To import GSI alignment data.
To import lines from an existing Rail job.
All jobs are available for selection. Available for
Survey job, Road job and Rail job.
The coordinate system currently attached to the
selected Survey job, Road job or Rail job.
Line or area element from the selected job. Available for Survey job.
Line from the selected Road job. The line must be
stored in the \dbx folder of the memory device to
be selectable. Available for Road job and Rail job.
Horizontal alignment file in GSI format. The GSI
alignment file must be stored in the \GSI folder of
the memory device to be selectable. Available for
Road+ (GSI format).
Vertical alignment file in GSI format. The GSI alignment file must be stored in the \GSI folder of the
memory device to be selectable. Available for
Road+ (GSI format).
Next step
OK imports the selected alignment data and accesses the Alignment Editor Menu.
Refer to "47.2.5 Alignment Editor Menu".
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
702
47.2.5
Alignment Editor Menu
Access
This screen is always accessed after successfully creating, editing or importing an
alignment file from the Alignment Editor Startup screen.
Alignment Editor
Menu
Description of options
Option
Description
Edit horizontal alignment
Depending on the setting for Use PI instead of element
for horizontal alignment definition in Configuration,
Advanced page:
• To create, edit and delete elements of a horizontal alignment. Refer to "47.4 Edit Horizontal
Alignments Using Elements".
• To create, edit and delete PIs of a horizontal
alignment. Refer to "47.5 Edit Horizontal Alignments Using PIs".
Edit vertical alignment
Depending on the setting for Use PVI instead of
element for vertical alignment definition in Configuration, Advanced page:
• To create, edit and delete elements of a vertical
alignment. Refer to "47.6 Edit Vertical Alignments Using Elements".
• To create, edit and delete PVIs of a vertical alignment. Refer to "47.7 Edit Vertical Alignments
Using PIs".
Edit cross section
templates
To create, edit and delete cross section templates.
Refer to "47.8 Edit Cross Section Templates". Only
available for road jobs.
Edit cross section assignments
To create, edit and delete cross section assignments.
Refer to "47.9 Edit Cross Section Assignments". Only
available for road jobs.
Edit chainage equation
To create, edit and delete chainage equations. Refer to
"47.10 Edit Chainage Equation".
Convert to job
To convert existing LandXML alignments to a RoadRunner job. Refer to "47.11 Convert to job".
To be able to convert alignments to a Roadrunner job, at least a horizontal alignment
must exist.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
703
47.3
Configuring Alignment Editor
Access
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads\Alignment Editor. Press Fn Config...
Configuration,
Quality control page
Key
Description
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn About
To display information about the program name, the version number,
the date of the version, the copyright and the article number.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Check horizontal deflection
Check box
Possibility to do a deflection check for the horizontal alignment.
Horiz limit
Editable field
The deflection tolerance for horizontal alignments. The tolerance value used for determining
deflection errors. A deflection error occurs when
the beginning curve tangent of an element does
not match the ending tangent of the previous
element. If the actual error in deflection is greater
than this value, the error will be reported.
Check vertical Check box
deflection
Vert limit
Editable field
Check box
Confirm end
coordinates of
segment
before storing
Possibility to do a deflection check for the vertical
alignment.
The deflection tolerance for vertical alignments.
If this box is checked, then each time a new alignment element has been entered, a confirmation
message displays the end coordinates for confirmation.
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
704
Configuration,
Advanced page
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Parameter defining the parabola.
Vertical
parabola definition
Parameter p
K factor
Use PI instead Check box
of element for
horizontal
alignment
definition
K factor = Parameter p/100.
When this box is not checked, elements such as
straights, curves and parabolas define the horizontal alignment.
When this box is checked, the horizontal alignment is defined by Points of Intersection
(tangent/geometrical points).
• Horizontal alignments are defined by the
coordinates of the PI and the curve radius
(for circular curves).
• Horizontal transitions are defined by coordinate of PI, the circular curve radius plus
tangent length in and tangent length out.
Use PVI
Check box
instead of
element for
vertical alignment definition
When this box is not checked, elements such as
straights, curves and parabolas define the vertical
alignment.
When this box is checked, the vertical alignment
is defined by Points of Vertical Intersection
(tangent/geometrical points).
• Vertical alignments with symmetrical curves
are defined by the PVI chainage, the elevation of PVI and the total length of curve,
where the tangent length is half the total
length of the VC.
• Vertical Alignments with non-symmetrical
curves are defined by the PVI chainage, the
elevation of the PVI and both tangent
lengths.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
705
47.4
Edit Horizontal Alignments Using Elements
47.4.1
Overview
Description
Allows creating, editing and deleting of the following elements:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Start Point
Straight (Tangent)
Curve
Clothoid
Cubic Parabola
Partial Bloss
as well as checking the horizontal alignment.
Access
In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit horizontal alignment. Press OK.
Use PI instead of element for horizontal alignment definition must be
unchecked in Configuration, Advanced page.

Horizontal Alignment,
Elements page
Key
Description
OK
To accept the screen entries and return to the Alignment Editor
Menu.
Add
To add a new horizontal element after the highlighted element.
Edit..
To edit the highlighted element of the horizontal alignment.
Delete
To delete the highlighted element of the horizontal alignment. Either
all following elements or only the next element can be adjusted.
Check
To check the horizontal alignment.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
706
47.4.2
Editing the Start Point
Access
In Horizontal Alignment, highlight the start point and press Edit...
Horizontal Start Point
Key
Description
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
Get Pt
To apply coordinates or heights from an existing point in the working
job.
Survy..
To go to Survey and measure a point.
Fn Config..
To configure the Alignment editor application. Refer to "47.3 Configuring Alignment Editor".
Fn Reset
To reset all screen entries.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Easting
Editable field
Easting of the start point of the horizontal alignment.
Northing
Editable field
Northing of the start point of the horizontal alignment.
Start chainage Editable field
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
Start chainage of the horizontal alignment.
707
47.4.3
Inserting/Editing an Element in a Horizontal Alignment
Access
In Horizontal Alignment, Elements page, highlight the start point, or an element if one
exists, and press Add or Edit...
Elements can be added after the start point and either before or after other
elements.


Add Horizontal
Element
Creating and editing an alignment element are similar processes. For simplicity, only
the creation of an alignment element is explained and differences are clearly outlined.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Element type
Straight
To insert/edit a straight to/in a horizontal alignment.
Curve
To insert/edit a curve to/in a horizontal alignment.
Spiral
To insert/edit a clothoid to/in a horizontal alignment.
Cubic parabola
To insert/edit a cubic parabola to/in a horizontal
alignment.
Bloss
To insert/edit a bloss curve to/in a horizontal
alignment.
The options available for the field Method depend on the Element type selected.
For Element type: Straight
Field
Option
Description
Method
Azimuth & length Using the azimuth and the length of the straight.
Azi & end
chainage
Using the azimuth and the end chainage of the
straight.
End coords
Using the end coordinates of the straight.
For Element type: Curve
Field
Option
Description
Method
Radius & length
Using the radius of the curve and its length.
Radius & delta
Using the radius and the delta angle of the curve.
Radius & end
chain
Using the radius of the curve and the end
chainage.
Radius & end
coords
Using the radius and the end coordinates of the
curve.
Center & end
coords
Using the coordinates of the centre point and the
end point of the curve.
3 points
Using three points.
For Element type: Spiral
Field
Option
Description
Method
Radius & length
Using the radius of the clothoid and its length.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
708
Field
Option
Description
Radius & end
chain
Using the radius of the clothoid and the end
chainage.
Param & length
Using the parameter A and the length of the
connecting curve.
Param & end
chain
Using the parameter A and the end chainage of
the spiral.
Radius & param- Using the parameter A and the radius.
eter
For Element type: Cubic parabola
Field
Option
Description
Method
Radius & length
Using the radius of the cubic parabola and its
length.
Radius & end
chain
Using the radius of the cubic parabola and the
end chainage.
For Element type: Bloss
Field
Option
Description
Method
Radius & length
Using the radius of the connecting curve and its
length.
Radius & end
chain
Using the radius of the connecting curve and its
end chainage.
Rad,lngth,end
coord
Using the radius, length and end coordinates of
the bloss curve.
Next step
OK to access the next screen.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
709
Horizontal
Straight/Horizontal
Curve/Horizontal
Clothoid/Horizontal
Cubic Parabola/Horizontal Bloss,
Input page
Key
Description
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
Inv..
To calculate the distance and angle between two points from the
working job.
Last..
To select values from the last inverse calculations.
Get Pt
To apply coordinates or heights from an existing point in the working
job. Available when coordinates must be typed in.
Survy..
To go to Survey and measure a point. Available when coordinates
must be typed in.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To access the Alignment Editor configuration.
Fn Reset
To reset all screen entries.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Start chainage Display only
Description
The end chainage of the start point / previous
element is automatically used and cannot be
edited.
The other fields and options available depend on the Method and Element type
selected in Add Horizontal Element.
For Element type: Straight
Field
Option
Description
Azimuth
Editable field
The azimuth displayed is from the previous
element. Another value can be entered manually.
Available for Method: Azimuth & length or
Method: Azi & end chainage.
End chainage Editable field
Chainage at the end of the element. Available for
Method: Azi & end chainage.
End easting
Editable field
Easting for the end chainage. Available for
Method: End coords.
End northing
Editable field
Northing for the end chainage. Available for
Method: End coords.
Length
Editable field
Length of the straight element. Available for
Method: Azimuth & length.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
710
For Element type: Curve
Field
Option
Description
Start azimuth
Editable field
The azimuth of the tangent in the start point. This
azimuth is used from the previous element. The
value can be edited. Available for Method: Radius
& length, Method: Radius & delta or
Method: Radius & end chain.
CP easting
Editable field
Easting of the centre point of the curve. Available
for Method: Center & end coords.
CP northing
Editable field
Northing of the centre point of the curve. Available for Method: Center & end coords.
Curve direction
Right or Left
The direction of the curve when looking in the
direction of increasing chainage. Available for
Method: Radius & length, Method: Radius &
delta, Method: Radius & end chain or
Method: Radius & end coords.
Radius
Editable field
Radius of the curve. The signs are set by the
system depending on the curve direction defined
in Curve direction. Available for Method: Radius
& length, Method: Radius & delta,
Method: Radius & end chain or Method: Radius
& end coords.
Delta
Editable field
The deflection angle. Available for
Method: Radius & delta.
Length
Editable field
Length from the start to the end point of the
curve. Available for Method: Radius & length.
End chainage Editable field
The end chainage of the curve element can be
typed in. Available for Method: Radius & end
chain.
Int easting
Editable field
Easting of the intermediate point of the 3-pt-arc.
Available for Method: 3 points.
Int northing
Editable field
Northing of the intermediate point of the 3-ptarc. Available for Method: 3 points.
End easting
Editable field
Easting for the end chainage. Available for
Method: Radius & end coords, Method: Center &
end coords and Method: 3 points.
End northing
Editable field
Northing for the end chainage. Available for
Method: Radius & end coords, Method: Center &
end coords and Method: 3 points.
For Element type: Spiral
Field
Option
Description
Start azimuth
Editable field
The azimuth of the tangent in the start point. This
azimuth is used from the previous element. The
value can be edited.
Spiral direction
Right or Left
The direction of the clothoid looking in the direction of increasing chainage.
Spiral in/out
Spiral in
For transition from tangent to curve.
Spiral out
For transition from curve to tangent.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
711
Field
Option
Description
Radius
Editable field
Radius of the clothoid. Available for
Method: Radius & length, Method: Radius & end
chain and Method: Radius & parameter.
Parameter A
Editable field
The parameter A defining the clothoids. Available
for Method: Param & end chain, Method: Param
& length and Method: Radius & parameter.
Length
Editable field
Length of the clothoid element. Available for
Method: Param & length and Method: Radius &
length.
Start radius
Editable field
The entry radius of the spiral. The signs are set by
the system depending on the spiral direction
defined in Spiral direction. Available for
Method: Radius & length and Method: Radius &
end chain when Use partial spiral is checked.
End radius
Editable field
The exit radius of the spiral. The signs are set by
the system depending on the spiral direction
defined in Spiral direction. Available for
Method: Radius & length and Method: Radius &
end chain when Use partial spiral is checked.
End chainage Editable field
The end chainage of the clothoid can be typed in.
Available for Method: Radius & end chain and
Method: Param & end chain.
Use partial
spiral
Check box
To create partial clothoids. Available for
Method: Radius & length and Method: Radius &
end chain.
For Element type: Cubic parabola
Field
Option
Description
Start azimuth
Editable field
The azimuth of the tangent in the start point. This
azimuth is used from the previous element. The
value can be edited.
Spiral direction
Right or Left
The direction of the cubic parabola looking in the
direction of increasing chainage.
Spiral in/out
Spiral in
For a transition from tangent to curve.
Spiral out
For a transition from curve to tangent.
Radius
Editable field
Radius of the cubic parabola.
Start radius
Editable field
The entry radius of the spiral. The signs are set by
the system depending on the spiral direction
defined in Spiral direction. Available when Use
partial spiral is checked.
End radius
Editable field
The exit radius of the spiral. The signs are set by
the system depending on the spiral direction
defined in Spiral direction. Available when Use
partial spiral is checked.
Length
Editable field
Length of the cubic parabola element. Available
for Method: Radius & length.
End chainage Editable field
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
The end chainage of the cubic parabola element
can be typed in. Available for Method: Radius &
end chain.
712
Field
Option
Description
Use partial
spiral
Check box
To create partial cubic parabolas.
For Element type: Bloss
Field
Option
Description
Start azimuth
Editable field
The azimuth of the tangent in the start point. This
azimuth is used from the previous element. The
value can be edited.
Spiral direction
Right or Left
The direction of the bloss looking in the direction
of increasing chainage.
Spiral in/out
Spiral in
For a transition from tangent to curve.
Spiral out
For a transition from curve to tangent.
Radius
Editable field
Radius of the bloss.
Start radius
Editable field
The entry radius of the spiral. The signs are set by
the system depending on the spiral direction
defined in Spiral direction. Available for
Method: Rad,lngth,end coord.
End radius
Editable field
The exit radius of the spiral. The signs are set by
the system depending on the spiral direction
defined in Spiral direction.
Available for Method: Rad,lngth,end coord.
Length
Editable field
Length of the bloss curve element. Available for
Method: Radius & length and
Method: Rad,lngth,end coord.
End chainage Editable field
The end chainage of the bloss curve element can
be typed in. Available for Method: Radius & end
chain.
End easting
Editable field
Easting for the end chainage. Available for
Method: Rad,lngth,end coord.
End northing
Editable field
Northing for the end chainage. Available for
Method: Rad,lngth,end coord.
Next step
Page changes to the Details page, where all entered and calculated elements are
displayed.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
713
47.5
Edit Horizontal Alignments Using PIs
47.5.1
Overview
Description
Allows creating, editing and deleting PIs by chainage, easting and northing.
Access
In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit horizontal alignment. Press OK.
Use PI instead of element for horizontal alignment definition must be checked
in Configuration, Advanced page.

Horizontal Alignment,
PI page
Key
Description
OK
To accept the screen entries and return to the Alignment Editor
Menu.
Add
To add a new horizontal PI after the highlighted PI.
The chainage values must be added in the correct order.
Edit..

To edit the highlighted PI of the horizontal alignment.
Delete
To delete the highlighted PI of the horizontal alignment. Either all
following elements or only the next element can be adjusted.
More
To display information about the length in/out and the parameter
in/out in the fourth column.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
714
47.5.2
Inserting/Editing a PI in a Horizontal Alignment
Access
In Horizontal Alignment, PI page, highlight a PI and press Add or Edit...
A PI can also be selected on the Map page.
Elements are added after the highlighted PI.



Creating and editing an alignment PI are similar processes. For simplicity, only the creation of an alignment PI is explained and differences are clearly outlined.
Add PI
Key
Description
OK
To accept the screen entries and return to the Alignment Editor
Menu.
Get Pt
To apply coordinates from an existing point in the working job. Available when Easting or Northing is highlighted.
Survy..
To go to Survey and measure a point. Available when Easting or
Northing is highlighted.
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two
existing points. Available when Radius, Length in, Length out, Param
in or Param out is highlighted.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available
when Radius, Length in, Length out, Param in or Param out is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Alignment editor application. Refer to "47.3 Configuring Alignment Editor".
Fn Reset
To reset all screen entries.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Easting and
Northing
Editable field
The coordinates of the PI.
Element type
at PI
None
No element is defined at the PI.
Curve
A curve is defined at the PI.
Spiral
A spiral is defined at the PI.
Spiral-Curve
Spiral - curve is defined at the PI.
Curve-Spiral
Curve - spiral is defined at the PI.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
715
Field
Option
Description
Spiral-Spiral
Two spirals are defined at the PI.
Spiral-CurveSpiral
Spiral - curve - spiral is defined at the PI.
The other fields on the screen depend on the Element type at PI selected.
For Element type at PI: Curve
Field
Option
Description
Radius
Editable field
Using the radius of the curve.
For Element type at PI: Spiral
Field
Option
Description
Spiral type
Clothoid, Cubic Bloss is available for Rail jobs only.
parabola or Bloss
Spiral in/out
Selectable list
The type of spiral.
Available for Spiral type: Clothoid.
Method
Radius & lengths Using the radius of the clothoid and its length.
Radius & parame- Using the radius of the clothoid and its parameters
ters.
Radius
Editable field
The radius of the clothoid, parabola or bloss.
Available unless Use partial spiral is checked.
Radius in and Editable field
Radius out
The radius of the partial spiral for a clothoid or
parabola. Available when Use partial spiral is
checked.
Length in and Editable field
Length out
The lengths of the clothoid, parabola or bloss.
Param in and
Param out
Editable field
Depending on the configuration, the parameters
P or factors K of the clothoid. Available for Spiral
type: Clothoid with Method: Radius & parameters.
Use partial
spiral
Check box
To create a partial clothoid. Available for Spiral
type: Clothoid and Spiral type: Cubic parabola.
For Element type at PI: Spiral-Curve and Element type at PI: Curve-Spiral
Field
Option
Description
Available for Spiral type: Clothoid.
Method
Radius & lengths Using the radius of the clothoid and its length.
Radius & parame- Using the radius of the clothoid and its parameters
ters.
Radius
Editable field
The radius of the curve.
Length in
Editable field
The lengths of the connecting curve.
Param in
Editable field
Depending on the configuration, the parameters
P or factors K of the clothoid. Available for Spiral
type: Clothoid with Method: Radius & parameters.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
716
For Element type at PI: Spiral-Spiral and Element type at PI: Spiral-Curve-Spiral
Field
Option
Description
Available for Spiral type: Clothoid.
Method
Radius & lengths Using the radius of the clothoid and its length.
Radius & parame- Using the radius of the clothoid and its parameters
ters.
Radius
Editable field
The radius of the curve.
Length in and Editable field
Length out
The lengths of the connecting curve.
Param in and
Param out
Depending on the configuration, the parameters
P or factors K of the clothoid. Available for Spiral
type: Clothoid with Method: Radius & parameters.
Editable field
Next step
OK to access the next screen.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
717
47.6
Edit Vertical Alignments Using Elements
47.6.1
Overview
Description
Allows creating, editing and deleting of the following elements:
•
•
•
•
•
Start Point
Straight (Tangent)
Parabola
Asymmetric parabola
Curve
as well as checking the vertical alignment.
Throughout the whole component height and elevation is used for local orthometric
height. If no local orthometric height is available, the local ellipsoidal height is used
instead.
Access
Vertical Alignment,
Elements page
In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit vertical alignment. Press OK.
Use PVI instead of element for vertical alignment definition must be
unchecked in Configuration, Advanced page.

The available keys are identical to the keys in Horizontal Alignment. Refer to the paragraph "Horizontal Alignment, Elements page".
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
718
47.6.2
Editing the Start Point
Access
In Vertical Alignment, highlight the start point and press Edit...
Vertical Start Point
Key
Description
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
Get Pt
To apply heights from an existing point in the working job.
Survy..
To go to Survey and measure a point.
Fn Reset
To reset all screen entries.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Elevation
Editable field
Elevation at the start chainage of the vertical
alignment.
Start chainage Editable field
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
Start chainage of the vertical alignment.
719
47.6.3
Inserting/Editing an Element in a Vertical Alignment
Access
In Vertical Alignment, Elements page, highlight the start point and press Add or Edit...

Creating and editing an alignment element are similar processes. For simplicity, only
the creation of an alignment element is explained and differences are clearly outlined.

For grade units, the system settings are applied. Refer to "29.1 Regional settings" to
change the system setting.
Add Vertical Element
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Element type
Straight
To insert/edit a straight to/in a vertical alignment.
Parabola
To insert/edit a quadratic parabola to/in a vertical
alignment.
Curve
To insert/edit a curve to/in a vertical alignment.
The options available for the field Method depend on the Element type selected.
For Element type: Straight
Field
Option
Method
Length & end elev Using the length and the end elevation of the
straight.
Description
End chain & elev Using the end chainage and the elevation of the
straight.
Length & grade
Using the length and the grade of the straight.
End chain &
grade
Using the end chainage and the grade of the
straight.
For Element type: Parabola
Field
Method
Option
Length & grades
End chain &
grades
Param & end elev
3 elevations
Description
Using the length and the grades of the parabola.
Using the end chainage and the grades of the
parabola.
Using the parameter and the end elevation of the
parabola.
Using three elevations at defined chainages of
the parabola.
For Element type: Curve
Field
Method
Option
Radius & length
Radius & end
chain
Radius & grades
Length & grades
End chain &
grades
Description
Using the radius of the curve and its length.
Using the radius and the end chainage of the
curve.
Using the radius and the grades of the curve.
Using the length and the grades of the curve.
Using start, intermediate and end elevation and
chainage of the curve.
Next step
OK to access the next screen.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
720
Vertical
Straight/Vertical
Parabola/Vertical
Curve,
Input page
Key
Description
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
Inv..
To calculate the distance and angle between two points from the
working job.
Last..
To select values from the last inverse calculations.
Get Pt
To apply coordinates or heights from an existing point in the working
job. Available when coordinates must be typed in.
Survy..
To go to Survey and measure a point. Available when elevation must
be typed in.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To access the Alignment Editor configuration.
Fn Reset
To reset all screen entries.
Fn %/V:H/H:V To switch between h:v, v:h and %(v/h x 100) for the grade unit.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Description of fields
Field
Option
Description
Start chainage Display only
The end chainage of the previous element is
automatically used and cannot be edited.
Start elevation Display only
The end height of the previous element is automatically used and cannot be edited.
The other fields and options available depend on the Method and Element type
selected in Add Vertical Element.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
721
For Element type: Straight
Field
Option
Description
Length
Editable field
Length of the straight element as slope distance.
Available for Method: Length & end elev and
Method: Length & grade.
End chainage Editable field
Chainage at the end of the element. Available for
Method: End chain & elev and Method: End
chain & grade.
End elevation Editable field
Height at the end of the element. Type in manually or, alternatively, press Get Pt when the focus
is on this line to select the height from an existing
point in the working job. Available for
Method: Length & end elev and Method: End
chain & elev.
Editable field
The grade of the straight element. Positive
inclines have positive values, negative inclines
have negative values. Available for
Method: Length & grade and Method: End chain
& grade.
Grade
For Element type: Parabola
Field
Option
Description
Curve type
Crest
The curve type is convex. Available for
Method: Param & end elev.
Sag
The curve type is concave. Available for
Method: Param & end elev.
Parameter p or Editable field
K factor
Parameter of the parabola. Available for
Method: Param & end elev.
The field name depends on the value chosen for
the Vertical parabola definition in the Configuration, Advanced page.
Length
Editable field
Length of the parabola as horizontal distance.
Available for Method: Length & grades and
Method: Param & end elev.
Int chainage
Editable field
Chainage of the second elevation. Available for
Method: 3 elevations.
Int elevation
Editable field
Second elevation. Type in manually or press Get
Pt when the focus is on this line to select the
height from an existing point in the working job.
Available for Method: 3 elevations.
End chainage Editable field
Chainage at the end of the element. Available for
Method: End chain & grades and Method: 3
elevations.
End elevation Editable field
Height at the end of the element. Type in manually or, alternatively, press Get Pt when the focus
is on this line to select the height from an existing
point in the working job. Available for
Method: Param & end elev and Method: 3 elevations.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor
722
Field
Option
Description
Grade in
Editable field
The grade at the beginning of the parabola. Positive inclines have positive values, negative inclines
have negative values. Available for parabolas with
Method: Length & grades and Method: End
chain & grades.
Grade out
Editable field
The grade at the end of the parabola. Positive
inclines have positive values, negative inclines
have negative values. Available for
Method: Length & grades and Method: End
chain & grades.
For Element type: Curve
Field
Option
Description
Curve type
Crest
The curve type is convex.
Sag
The curve type is concave.
Radius
Editable field
Radius of the curve. Available for Method: Radius
& length, Method: Radius & end chain and
Method: Radius & grades.
Length
Editable field
Length of the curve along the segment. Available
for Method: Radius & length and
Method: Length & grades.
End chainage Editable field
Chainage at the end of the element. Available for
Method: End chain & grades and
Method: Radius & end chain.
End elevation Editable field
Height at the end of the element. Type in manually or, alternatively, press Get Pt when the focus
is on this line to select the height from an existing
point in the working job. Available for